WP Contentuploads201902m60man PDF

g
GE Power Management
M60 Motor Relay

UR Series Instruction Manual
M60 Revision: 2.9X
Manual P/N: 1601-0108-B3 (GEK-106279B)

Copyright © 2001 GE Power Management
GE Power Management
215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario
Canada L6E 1B3
EG
R
IS T E R E
Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 294-8512
Internet: http://www.GEindustrial.com/pm
Manufactured under an
ISO9000 Registered system.
g
GE Power Management
ADDENDUM
This Addendum contains information that relates to the M60 relay, version 2.9X. This addendum lists a number of infor-
mation items that appear in the instruction manual GEK-106279B (1601-0108-B3) but are not included in the current M60
operations.
The following functions/items are not yet available with the current version of the M60 relay:
• Signal Sources SRC 5 and SRC 6
NOTE:
• The UCA2 specifications are not yet finalized. There will be changes to the object models described in Appendix
C: UCA/MMS.
GE Power Management
215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario
Canada L6E 1B3
Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 294-8512
Internet: http://www.GEindustrial.com/pm
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS ........................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR RELAY .............................................................. 1-2
1.2.2 UR HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE ................................................................... 1-3
1.2.3 UR SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ................................................................... 1-4
1.2.4 IMPORTANT UR CONCEPTS ........................................................................... 1-4
1.3 URPC SOFTWARE
1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 1-5
1.3.2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ............................................................................ 1-5
1.3.3 CONNECTING URPC® WITH THE M60 ........................................................... 1-6
1.4 UR HARDWARE
1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING................................................................................. 1-8
1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS.......................................................................................... 1-8
1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY ...................................................................................... 1-8
1.5 USING THE RELAY
1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD....................................................................................... 1-9
1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION ......................................................................................... 1-9
1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY .......................................................................................... 1-9
1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION ....................................................................................... 1-10
1.5.5 BATTERY TAB................................................................................................. 1-10
1.5.6 RELAY PASSWORDS ..................................................................................... 1-10
1.5.7 FLEXLOGIC™ CUSTOMIZATION................................................................... 1-10
1.5.8 COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................... 1-10
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION

2.1.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 ORDERING........................................................................................................ 2-3
2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
2.2.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................................................... 2-5
2.2.2 USER PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS ............................................................. 2-6
2.2.3 MONITORING .................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.4 METERING ........................................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.5 INPUTS .............................................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.6 POWER SUPPLY .............................................................................................. 2-8
2.2.7 OUTPUTS .......................................................................................................... 2-8
2.2.8 COMMUNICATIONS.......................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.9 ENVIRONMENTAL ............................................................................................ 2-9
2.2.10 TYPE TESTS ..................................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.11 PRODUCTION TESTS ...................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.12 APPROVALS ..................................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.13 MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................. 2-9
3. HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION

3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT ............................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION.............................................................. 3-2
3.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT............................................................................... 3-3
3.1.4 REAR TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS ................................................................... 3-3
3.2 WIRING
3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM ............................................................................ 3-4
3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH RATINGS AND TESTING ....................................... 3-5
3.2.3 CONTROL POWER ........................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.4 CT/VT INPUTS................................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.5 CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ......................................................................... 3-8
3.2.6 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS ................................................................ 3-14
3.2.7 RS232 FACEPLATE PROGRAM PORT.......................................................... 3-15
3.2.8 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS .................................................................... 3-15
GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay i

TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.2.9 IRIG-B ...............................................................................................................3-17
4. HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 URPC® SOFTWARE INTERFACE

4.1.1 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE.......................................................................4-1
4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST ....................................................................................4-1
4.1.3 URPC® SOFTWARE OVERVIEW......................................................................4-1
4.1.4 URPC® SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW ...............................................................4-3
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.2.1 FACEPLATE .......................................................................................................4-4
4.2.2 LED INDICATORS..............................................................................................4-5
4.2.3 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDs ..........................................................................4-7
4.2.4 CUSTOMIZING THE DISPLAY MODULE ..........................................................4-7
4.2.5 DISPLAY.............................................................................................................4-8
4.2.6 KEYPAD .............................................................................................................4-8
4.2.7 MENUS ...............................................................................................................4-9
4.2.8 CHANGING SETTINGS ...................................................................................4-10
5. SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW

5.1.1 SETTINGS MAIN MENU ....................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS ......................................................................5-3
5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES..................................................................5-4
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2.1 PASSWORD SECURITY....................................................................................5-7
5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES ....................................................................................5-8
5.2.3 COMMUNICATIONS ..........................................................................................5-8
5.2.4 MODBUS® USER MAP ....................................................................................5-15
5.2.5 REAL TIME CLOCK .........................................................................................5-15
5.2.6 OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................5-16
5.2.7 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS .....................................................................5-18
5.2.8 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS ..........................................................................5-19
5.2.9 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS ........................................................................5-19
5.2.10 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................5-21
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5.3.1 AC INPUTS.......................................................................................................5-22
5.3.2 POWER SYSTEM ............................................................................................5-23
5.3.3 SIGNAL SOURCES ..........................................................................................5-24
5.3.4 MOTOR ............................................................................................................5-26
5.3.5 FLEXCURVES™ ..............................................................................................5-28
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
5.4.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC™................................................................5-29
5.4.2 FLEXLOGIC™ RULES .....................................................................................5-35
5.4.3 FLEXLOGIC™ EVALUATION ..........................................................................5-36
5.4.4 FLEXLOGIC™ PROCEDURE EXAMPLE ........................................................5-36
5.4.5 FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR................................................................5-41
5.4.6 FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS ...................................................................................5-41
5.4.7 FLEXELEMENTS™ ..........................................................................................5-42
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.5.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................5-46
5.5.2 SETTING GROUP ............................................................................................5-46
5.5.3 MOTOR ELEMENTS ........................................................................................5-46
5.5.4 THERMAL MODEL ...........................................................................................5-47
5.5.5 AMP UNBALANCE ...........................................................................................5-56
5.5.6 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL.................................................................................5-58
5.5.7 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER ...............................................................5-62
5.5.8 CURRENT ELEMENTS ....................................................................................5-65
5.5.9 INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT CURVE CHARACTERISTICS ...................5-66
5.5.10 PHASE CURRENT ...........................................................................................5-71
5.5.11 NEUTRAL CURRENT ......................................................................................5-72
5.5.12 GROUND CURRENT .......................................................................................5-73
ii M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.5.13 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS .................................................................................... 5-75

5.5.14 PHASE VOLTAGE ........................................................................................... 5-76
5.5.15 NEUTRAL VOLTAGE ...................................................................................... 5-78
5.5.16 NEGATIVE-SEQUENCE VOLTAGE................................................................ 5-79
5.5.17 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE .................................................................................... 5-80
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.6.1 OVERVIEW ...................................................................................................... 5-82
5.6.2 SETTING GROUPS ......................................................................................... 5-82
5.6.3 DIGITAL ELEMENTS ....................................................................................... 5-83
5.6.4 DIGITAL COUNTERS ...................................................................................... 5-86
5.7 INPUTS / OUTPUTS
5.7.1 CONTACT INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-88
5.7.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS ............................................................................................ 5-90
5.7.3 UCA SBO TIMER ............................................................................................. 5-91
5.7.4 CONTACT OUTPUTS...................................................................................... 5-91
5.7.5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS........................................................................................ 5-92
5.7.6 REMOTE DEVICES ......................................................................................... 5-92
5.7.7 REMOTE INPUTS............................................................................................ 5-93
5.7.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS: DNA BIT PAIRS............................................................ 5-94
5.7.9 REMOTE OUTPUTS: UserSt BIT PAIRS ........................................................ 5-95
5.7.10 RESETTING..................................................................................................... 5-95
5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O
5.8.1 DCMA INPUTS ................................................................................................ 5-96
5.8.2 RTD INPUTS.................................................................................................... 5-97
5.9 TESTING
5.9.1 TEST MODE .................................................................................................... 5-98
5.9.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS ............................................................................ 5-98
5.9.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ........................................................................ 5-98
5.9.4 RESET THERMAL MODEL ............................................................................. 5-98
6. ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW

6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU ........................................................................ 6-1
6.2 STATUS
6.2.1 NOTE ................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.2 MOTOR .............................................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.3 CONTACT INPUTS............................................................................................ 6-3
6.2.4 VIRTUAL INPUTS .............................................................................................. 6-4
6.2.5 REMOTE INPUTS.............................................................................................. 6-4
6.2.6 CONTACT OUTPUTS........................................................................................ 6-4
6.2.7 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS.......................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.8 REMOTE DEVICES STATUS ............................................................................ 6-5
6.2.9 REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS ..................................................................... 6-5
6.2.10 DIGITAL COUNTERS ........................................................................................ 6-6
6.2.11 FLEX STATES ................................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.12 ETHERNET........................................................................................................ 6-6
6.3 METERING
6.3.1 METERING CONVENTIONS ............................................................................. 6-7
6.3.2 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL ................................................................................ 6-10
6.3.3 MOTOR ............................................................................................................ 6-10
6.3.4 SOURCES ....................................................................................................... 6-11
6.3.5 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER............................................................... 6-13
6.3.6 TRACKING FREQUENCY ............................................................................... 6-14
6.3.7 FLEXELEMENTS™ ......................................................................................... 6-14
6.3.8 TRANSDUCER I/O .......................................................................................... 6-15
6.4 RECORDS
6.4.1 EVENT RECORDS .......................................................................................... 6-16
6.4.2 OSCILLOGRAPHY .......................................................................................... 6-16
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION .................................................................................. 6-17
6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS ................................................................................. 6-17
GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
7. COMMANDS AND 7.1 COMMANDS

TARGETS 7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU ...........................................................................................7-1
7.1.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS ..............................................................................................7-1
7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS .............................................................................................7-1
7.1.4 SET DATE AND TIME ........................................................................................7-2
7.1.5 RELAY MAINTENANCE .....................................................................................7-2
7.2 TARGETS
7.2.1 TARGETS MENU ...............................................................................................7-3
7.2.2 TARGET MESSAGES ........................................................................................7-3
7.2.3 RELAY SELF-TESTS .........................................................................................7-3
8. COMMISSIONING 8.1 PRODUCT SETUP

8.1.1 PRODUCT SETUP .............................................................................................8-1
8.2 SYSTEM SETUP
8.2.1 SYSTEM SETUP ................................................................................................8-8
8.2.2 FLEXCURVE™ A .............................................................................................8-10
8.2.3 FLEXCURVE™ B .............................................................................................8-11
8.3 FLEXLOGIC™
8.3.1 FLEXLOGIC™ ..................................................................................................8-12
8.4.1 GROUPED ELEMENTS ...................................................................................8-21
8.5 CONTROL ELEMENTS
8.5.1 CONTROL ELEMENTS ....................................................................................8-24
8.6 INPUTS / OUTPUTS
8.6.1 CONTACT INPUTS ..........................................................................................8-27
8.6.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS ............................................................................................8-28
8.6.3 SBO TIMER ......................................................................................................8-28
8.6.4 CONTACT OUTPUTS ......................................................................................8-29
8.6.5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ........................................................................................8-30
8.6.6 REMOTE DEVICES..........................................................................................8-31
8.6.7 REMOTE INPUTS ............................................................................................8-32
8.6.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS ........................................................................................8-33
8.6.9 RESETTING .....................................................................................................8-33
8.7 TRANSDUCER I/O
8.7.1 DCMA INPUTS .................................................................................................8-34
8.7.2 RTD INPUTS ....................................................................................................8-35
8.8 TESTING
8.8.1 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS...........................................................8-36
A. FLEXANALOG A.1 FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS

PARAMETERS A.1.1 PARAMETER LIST ............................................................................................ A-1
B. MODBUS® RTU PROTOCOL B.1 OVERVIEW

B.1.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... B-1
B.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER ............................................................................................ B-1
B.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER ........................................................................................... B-1
B.1.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM ....................................................................................... B-3
B.2 FUNCTION CODES
B.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES ................................................................... B-4
B.2.2 FUNCTION CODE 03H/04H - READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS......... B-4
B.2.3 FUNCTION CODE 05H - EXECUTE OPERATION ........................................... B-5
B.2.4 FUNCTION CODE 06H - STORE SINGLE SETTING ....................................... B-5
B.2.5 FUNCTION CODE 10H - STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS ................................ B-6
B.2.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES............................................................................... B-6
iv M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

TABLE OF CONTENTS
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS

B.3.1 OBTAINING UR FILES USING MODBUS® PROTOCOL..................................B-7
B.3.2 MODBUS® PASSWORD OPERATION .............................................................B-8
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
B.4.1 MODBUS® MEMORY MAP ...............................................................................B-9
B.4.2 MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS ...................................................................B-37
C. UCA/MMS C.1 UCA/MMS OVERVIEW

C.1.1 UCA....................................................................................................................C-1
C.1.2 MMS...................................................................................................................C-1
C.1.3 UCA REPORTING .............................................................................................C-6
D. IEC 60870-5-104 D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

D.1.1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT ...................................................................D-1
D.1.2 POINT LIST......................................................................................................D-10
E. DNP E.1 DNP DEVICE PROFILE

E.1.1 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE ..........................................................................E-1
E.2 DNP IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
E.2.1 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE ...............................................................................E-4
E.3 DNP POINT LISTS
E.3.1 BINARY INPUT POINTS....................................................................................E-8
E.3.2 BINARY OUTPUT AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT ....................................E-13
E.3.3 COUNTERS .....................................................................................................E-14
E.3.4 ANALOG INPUTS ............................................................................................E-15
F. REVISIONS F.1 CHANGE NOTES

F.1.1 REVISION HISTORY ......................................................................................... F-1
F.1.2 CHANGES TO M60 MANUAL ........................................................................... F-1
F.2 FIGURES AND TABLES
F.2.1 LIST OF FIGURES............................................................................................. F-2
F.2.2 LIST OF TABLES ............................................................................................... F-3
F.3 ABBREVIATIONS
F.3.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................... F-5
F.4 WARRANTY
F.4.1 GE POWER MANAGEMENT WARRANTY ....................................................... F-7
INDEX
GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay v

TABLE OF CONTENTS
vi M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

1 GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
1 GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES 1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
Please read this chapter to help guide you through the initial setup of your new relay.
1
Before attempting to install or use the relay, it is imperative that all WARNINGS and CAU-
TIONS in this manual are reviewed to help prevent personal injury, equipment damage, and/
or downtime.
WARNING CAUTION
1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST
• Open the relay packaging and inspect the unit for physical damage.
• Check that the battery tab is intact on the power supply module (for more details, see the section BATTERY TAB in this
chapter).
• View the rear name-plate and verify that the correct model has been ordered.
Figure 1–1: REAR NAME-PLATE (EXAMPLE)

• Ensure that the following items are included:
• Instruction Manual
• Products CD (includes URPC software and manuals in PDF format)
• mounting screws
• registration card (attached as the last page of the manual)
• Fill out the registration form and mail it back to GE Power Management (include the serial number located on the rear
nameplate).
• For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GE Power Man-
agement Home Page.
If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the contents listed are missing, please contact GE
Power Management immediately.
NOTE
GE POWER MANAGEMENT CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT:
GE Power Management
215 Anderson Avenue
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6E 1B3
TELEPHONE: (905) 294-6222, 1-800-547-8629 (North America only)
FAX: (905) 201-2098
E-MAIL: info.pm@indsys.ge.com
HOME PAGE: http://www.GEindustrial.com/pm
GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay 1-1

1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1 GETTING STARTED
1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR RELAY
1 Historically, substation protection, control, and metering functions were performed with electromechanical equipment. This
first generation of equipment was gradually replaced by analog electronic equipment, most of which emulated the single-
function approach of their electromechanical precursors. Both of these technologies required expensive cabling and auxil-
iary equipment to produce functioning systems.
Recently, digital electronic equipment has begun to provide protection, control, and metering functions. Initially, this equip-
ment was either single function or had very limited multi-function capability, and did not significantly reduce the cabling and
auxiliary equipment required. However, recent digital relays have become quite multi-functional, reducing cabling and aux-
iliaries significantly. These devices also transfer data to central control facilities and Human Machine Interfaces using elec-
tronic communications. The functions performed by these products have become so broad that many users now prefer the
term IED (Intelligent Electronic Device).
It is obvious to station designers that the amount of cabling and auxiliary equipment installed in stations can be even further
reduced, to 20% to 70% of the levels common in 1990, to achieve large cost reductions. This requires placing even more
functions within the IEDs.
Users of power equipment are also interested in reducing cost by improving power quality and personnel productivity, and
as always, in increasing system reliability and efficiency. These objectives are realized through software which is used to
perform functions at both the station and supervisory levels. The use of these systems is growing rapidly.
High speed communications are required to meet the data transfer rates required by modern automatic control and moni-
toring systems. In the near future, very high speed communications will be required to perform protection signaling with a
performance target response time for a command signal between two IEDs, from transmission to reception, of less than 5
milliseconds. This has been established by the Electric Power Research Institute, a collective body of many American and
Canadian power utilities, in their Utilities Communications Architecture 2 (MMS/UCA2) project. In late 1998, some Euro-
pean utilities began to show an interest in this ongoing initiative.
IEDs with the capabilities outlined above will also provide significantly more power system data than is presently available,
enhance operations and maintenance, and permit the use of adaptive system configuration for protection and control sys-
tems. This new generation of equipment must also be easily incorporated into automation systems, at both the station and
enterprise levels. The GE Power Management Universal Relay (UR) has been developed to meet these goals.
1-2 M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

1 GETTING STARTED 1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.2.2 UR HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE
1
Input Elements CPU Module Output Elements
Contact Inputs Pro t ectiv e Ele m e n ts Contact Outputs
Pickup
Virtual Inputs Virtual Outputs
Dropout
Input Output
Analog Inputs Operate Analog Outputs
CT Inputs Status Status Remote Outputs
Lo gic G a t es -DNA
VT Inputs Table Table -USER
Remote Inputs
LAN
Programming Operator
Device Interface
827822A1.CDR
Figure 1–2: UR CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM

a) UR BASIC DESIGN
The UR is a digital-based device containing a central processing unit (CPU) that handles multiple types of input and output
signals. The UR can communicate over a local area network (LAN) with an operator interface, a programming device, or
another UR device.
The CPU module contains firmware that provides protection elements in the form of logic algorithms, as well as program-
mable logic gates, timers, and latches for control features.
Input elements accept a variety of analog or digital signals from the field. The UR isolates and converts these signals into
logic signals used by the relay.
Output elements convert and isolate the logic signals generated by the relay into digital or analog signals that can be used
to control field devices.
b) UR SIGNAL TYPES
The contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Both ‘wet’ and
‘dry’ contacts are supported.
The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR internal logic signals. Virtual inputs include signals
generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic™ equations used to customize the UR
device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic™ equations.
The analog inputs and outputs are signals that are associated with transducers, such as Resistance Temperature Detec-
tors (RTDs).
The CT and VT inputs refer to analog current transformer and voltage transformer signals used to monitor AC power lines.
The UR supports 1 A and 5 A CTs.
The remote inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point state information between remote UR devices.
The remote outputs interface to the remote inputs of other UR devices. Remote outputs are FlexLogic™ operands inserted
into UCA2 GOOSE messages and are of two assignment types: DNA standard functions and USER defined functions.

1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1 GETTING STARTED
c) UR SCAN OPERATION
1
Read Inputs
Protection elements
serviced by sub-scan
Pro t ectiv e Ele m e n ts

PKP
S olv e Lo gic DPO
OP
Set Outputs
827823A1.CDR
Figure 1–3: UR SCAN OPERATION

The UR device operates in a cyclic scan fashion. The UR reads the inputs into an input status table, solves the logic pro-
gram (FlexLogic™ equation), and then sets each output to the appropriate state in an output status table. Any resulting task
execution is priority interrupt-driven.
1.2.3 UR SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE
The firmware (software embedded in the relay) is designed in functional modules which can be installed in any relay as
required. This is achieved with Object-Oriented Design and Programming (OOD/OOP) techniques.
Object-Oriented techniques involve the use of ‘objects’ and ‘classes’. An ‘object’ is defined as “a logical entity that contains
both data and code that manipulates that data”. A ‘class’ is the generalized form of similar objects. By using this concept,
one can create a Protection Class with the Protection Elements as objects of the class such as Time Overcurrent, Instanta-
neous Overcurrent, Current Differential, Undervoltage, Overvoltage, Underfrequency, and Distance. These objects repre-
sent completely self-contained software modules. The same object-class concept can be used for Metering, I/O Control,
HMI, Communications, or any functional entity in the system.
Employing OOD/OOP in the software architecture of the Universal Relay achieves the same features as the hardware
architecture: modularity, scalability, and flexibility. The application software for any Universal Relay (e.g. Feeder Protection,
Transformer Protection, Distance Protection) is constructed by combining objects from the various functionality classes.
This results in a ’common look and feel’ across the entire family of UR platform-based applications.
1.2.4 IMPORTANT UR CONCEPTS
As described above, the architecture of the UR relay is different from previous devices. In order to achieve a general under-
standing of this device, some sections of Chapter 5 are quite helpful. The most important functions of the relay are con-
tained in "Elements". A description of UR elements can be found in the INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS section. An
example of a simple element, and some of the organization of this manual, can be found in the DIGITAL ELEMENTS
MENU section. An explanation of the use of inputs from CTs and VTs is in the INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES section.
A description of how digital signals are used and routed within the relay is contained in the INTRODUCTION TO FLEX-
LOGIC™ section.

1 GETTING STARTED 1.3 URPC SOFTWARE
1.3 URPC SOFTWARE 1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS
The Faceplate keypad and display or the URPC software interface can be used to communicate with the relay.
1
The URPC software interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the PC monitor can
display more information in a simple comprehensible format.
The following minimum requirements must be met for the URPC software to properly operate on a PC.
Processor: Intel® Pentium 300 or higher
RAM Memory: 64 MB minimum (128 MB recommended)
Hard Disk: 50 MB free space required before installation of URPC software
O/S: Windows® NT 4.x or Windows® 9x/2000
Device: CD-ROM drive
Port: COM1(2) / Ethernet
1.3.2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
Refer to the following procedure to install the URPC software:

1. Start the Windows® operating system.
2. Insert the URPC software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
3. If the installation program does not start automatically, choose Run from the Windows® Start menu and type
D:\SETUP.EXE. Press Enter to start the installation.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the URPC software. When the Welcome window appears, click on Next to
continue with the installation procedure.
5. When the Choose Destination Location window appears and if the software is not to be located in the default direc-
tory, click Browse and type in the complete path name including the new directory name.
6. Click Next to continue with the installation procedure.
7. The default program group where the application will be added to is shown in the Select Program Folder window. If it
is desired that the application be added to an already existing program group, choose the group name from the list
shown.
8. Click Next to begin the installation process.
9. To launch the URPC application, click Finish in the Setup Complete window.
10. Subsequently, double click on the URPC software icon to activate the application.
Refer to the HUMAN INTERFACES chapter in this manual and the URPC Software Help program for more
information about the URPC software interface.
NOTE

1.3 URPC SOFTWARE 1 GETTING STARTED
1.3.3 CONNECTING URPC® WITH THE M60
1 This section is intended as a quick start guide to using the URPC software. Please refer to the URPC Help File and the
HUMAN INTERFACES chapter for more information.
a) CONFIGURING AN ETHERNET CONNECTION
Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay.
1. Start the URPC software. Enter the password "URPC" at the login password box.
2. Select the Help > Connection Wizard menu item to open the Connection Wizard. Click "Next" to continue.
3. Click the "New Interface" button to open the Edit New Interface window.
• Enter the desired interface name in the Enter Interface Name field.
• Select the "Ethernet" interface from the drop down list and press "Next" to continue.
4. Click the "New Device" button to open the Edit New Device Window.
• Enter the desired name in the Enter Interface Name field.
• Enter the Modbus address of the relay (from SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS
PROTOCOL MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS) in the Enter Modbus Address field.
• Enter the IP address (from SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IP ADDRESS) in
the Enter TCPIP Address field.
5. Click the "4.1 Read Device Information" button then "OK" when the relay information has been received. Click "Next" to
continue.
6. Click the "New Site" button to open the Edit Site Name window.
• Enter the desired site name in the Enter Site Name field.
7. Click the "OK" button then click "Finish". The new Site List tree will be added to the Site List window (or Online window)
located in the top left corner of the main URPC window.
The Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to Section c) CONNECTING TO THE
RELAY below to begin communications.
b) CONFIGURING AN RS232 CONNECTION

Before starting, verify that the RS232 serial cable is properly connected to the RS232 port on the front panel of the relay.
1. Start the URPC software. Enter the password "URPC" at the login password box.
2. Select the Help > Connection Wizard menu item to open the Connection Wizard. Click "Next" to continue.
3. Click the "New Interface" button to open the Edit New Interface window.
• Enter the desired interface name in the Enter Interface Name field.
• Select the "RS232" interface from the drop down list and press "Next" to continue.
4. Click the "New Device" button to open the Edit New Device Window.
• Enter the desired name in the Enter Interface Name field.
• Enter the PC COM port number in the COM Port field.
5. Click "OK" then click "Next" to continue.
6. Click the "New Site" button to open the Edit Site Name window.
• Enter the desired site name in the Enter Site Name field.
7. Click the "OK" button then click "Finish". The new Site List tree will be added to the Site List window (or Online window)
located in the top left corner of the main URPC window.
The Site Device has now been configured for RS232 communications. Proceed to Section c) CONNECTING TO THE
RELAY below to begin communications.

1 GETTING STARTED 1.3 URPC SOFTWARE
c) CONNECTING TO THE RELAY

1. Select the Display Properties window through the Site List tree as shown below: 1
2. The Display Properties window will open with a flashing status indicator.
• If the indicator is red, click the Connect button (lightning bolt) in the menu bar of the Displayed Properties window.
3. In a few moments, the flashing light should turn green, indicating that URPC is communicating with the relay.
Refer to the HUMAN INTERFACES chapter in this manual and the URPC Software Help program for more
information about the URPC software interface.
NOTE

1.4 UR HARDWARE 1 GETTING STARTED
1.4 UR HARDWARE 1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING
1 Please refer to the HARDWARE chapter for detailed relay mounting and wiring instructions. Review all WARNINGS AND
CAUTIONS.
1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS
The URPC software communicates to the relay via the faceplate RS232 port or the rear panel RS485 / Ethernet ports. To
communicate via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard “straight-through” serial cable is used. The DB-9 male end is con-
nected to the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end is connected to the PC COM1 or COM2 port as described in the
HARDWARE chapter.
Figure 1–4: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS

To communicate through the M60 rear RS485 port from a PC RS232 port, the GE Power Management RS232/RS485 con-
verter box is required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a "straight-through" serial cable.
A shielded twisted-pair (20, 22, or 24 AWG) connects the F485 converter to the M60 rear communications port. The con-
verter terminals (+, –, GND) are connected to the M60 communication module (+, –, COM) terminals. Refer to the CPU
COMMUNICATION PORTS section in the HARDWARE chapter for option details. The line should be terminated with an R-
C network (i.e. 120 Ω, 1 nF) as described in the HARDWARE chapter.
1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 2 × 20 character vacuum fluorescent display to make them visible under poor lighting con-
ditions. Messages are displayed in English and do not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the
keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to defined messages. Any high priority event driven
message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display.

1 GETTING STARTED 1.5 USING THE RELAY
1.5 USING THE RELAY 1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD
Display messages are organized into ‘pages’ under the following headings: Actual Values, Settings, Commands, and Tar-
1
gets. The key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement
numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit
mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad.
The key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The key may be
pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The key stores altered setting values.
1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION
Press the key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily fol-
lowed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the key advances through the main heading pages as
illustrated below.
ACTUAL VALUES SETTINGS COMMANDS TARGETS
ACTUAL VALUES SETTINGS COMMANDS No Active

STATUS PRODUCT SETUP VIRTUAL INPUTS Targets
USER DISPLAYS
(when in use)
User Display 1
1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double
scroll bar characters ( ), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters ( ). The header display
pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE
and keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the
MESSAGE key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually
pressing the MESSAGE key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
SETTINGS PASSWORD ACCESS LEVEL:

PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY Restricted
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP

1.5 USING THE RELAY 1 GETTING STARTED
1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION
1 The relay is defaulted to the "Not Programmed" state when it leaves the factory. This safeguards against the installation of
a relay whose settings have not been entered. When powered up successfully, the TROUBLE indicator will be on and the
IN SERVICE indicator off. The relay in the "Not Programmed" state will block signaling of any output relay. These condi-
tions will remain until the relay is explicitly put in the "Programmed" state.
Select the menu message SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
To put the relay in the "Programmed" state, press either of the VALUE keys once and then press . The face-
plate TROUBLE indicator will turn off and the IN SERVICE indicator will turn on. The settings for the relay can be pro-
grammed manually (refer to the SETTINGS chapter) via the faceplate keypad or remotely (refer to the URPC Help file) via
the URPC software interface.
1.5.5 BATTERY TAB
The battery tab is installed in the power supply module before the M60 shipped from the factory. The battery tab prolongs
battery life in the event the relay is powered down for long periods of time before installation. The battery is responsible for
backing up event records, oscillography, data logger, and real-time clock information when the relay is powered off. The
battery failure self-test error generated by the relay is a minor and should not affect the relay functionality. When the relay is
installed and ready for commissioning, the tab should be removed. The battery tab should be re-inserted if the relay is pow-
ered off for an extended period of time. If required, contact the factory for a replacement battery or battery tab.
1.5.6 RELAY PASSWORDS
It is recommended that passwords be set up for each security level and assigned to specific personnel. There are two user
password SECURITY access levels:
1. COMMAND
The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the fol-
lowing operations:
• change state of virtual inputs
• clear event records
• clear oscillography records
2. SETTING
The SETTING access level allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values.
Refer to the CHANGING SETTINGS section (in the HUMAN INTERFACES chapter) for complete instructions
on setting up security level passwords.
NOTE
1.5.7 FLEXLOGIC™ CUSTOMIZATION
FlexLogic™ equation editing is required for setting up user-defined logic for customizing the relay operations. See section
FLEXLOGIC™ in the SETTINGS chapter.
1.5.8 COMMISSIONING
Templated tables for charting all the required settings before entering them via the keypad are available in the COMMIS-
SIONING chapter.

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION 2.1.1 OVERVIEW
The M60 Motor Relay is a microprocessor based relay designed for the protection and management of medium and large
horsepower motors.
Overcurrent and undervoltage protection, directional current supervision, fault diagnostics, and RTU functions are pro-
vided. The M60 provides phase, neutral, ground and negative sequence, instantaneous and time overcurrent protection.
The time overcurrent function provides multiple curve shapes or FlexCurve™ for optimum co-ordination.
Voltage and current metering is built into the relay as a standard feature. Current parameters are available as total wave-
2
form RMS magnitude, or as fundamental frequency only RMS magnitude and angle (phasor).
Diagnostic features include a sequence of records capable of storing 1024 time-tagged events. The internal clock used for
time-tagging can be synchronized with an IRIG-B signal. This precise time stamping allows the sequence of events to be
determined throughout the system. Events can also be programmed (via FlexLogic™ equations) to trigger oscillography
data capture which may be set to record the measured parameters before and after the event for viewing on a personal
computer (PC). These tools significantly reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation in the event of a sys-
tem fault.
A faceplate RS232 port may be used to connect to a PC for the programming of settings and the monitoring of actual val-
ues. A variety of communications modules are available. Two rear RS485 ports allow independent access by operating and
engineering staff. All serial ports use the Modbus® RTU protocol. The RS485 ports may be connected to system computers
with baud rates up to 115.2 kbps. The RS232 port has a fixed baud rate of 19.2 kbps. Optional communications modules
include a 10BaseF Ethernet interface which can be used to provide fast, reliable communications in noisy environments.
Another option provides two 10BaseF fiber optic ports for redundancy. The Ethernet port supports MMS/UCA2, Modbus®/
TCP, and TFTP protocols, and allows access to the relay via any standard web browser (UR web pages). The DNP 3.0 or
IEC 60870-5-104 protocol is supported on a user-specified port, including serial and Ethernet ports.
The relay uses flash memory technology which allows field upgrading as new features are added. The following SINGLE
LINE DIAGRAM illustrates the relay functionality using ANSI (American National Standards Institute) device numbers.
52
TRIP CLOSE 59P,X 27P,X 59_2
50G 51G
46 49 50N
M
Metering
87S
M60 Motor Management Relay R

833708A 4.C DR
Figure 2–1: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

2.1 INTRODUCTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Table 2–1: DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS

DEVICE FUNCTION
NUMBER
27P Phase Undervoltage
27X Auxiliary Undervoltage
32 Sensitive Directional Power
2 46 Current Unbalance
47 Phase Sequence Voltage
49 Thermal Overload
50G Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent
50P Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent
51G Ground Time Overcurrent
51P Phase Time Overcurrent
59N Neutral Overvoltage
59P Phase Overvoltage
59X Auxiliary Overvoltage
59_2 Negative Sequence Overvoltage
87S Stator Differential
Table 2–2: OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS

FUNCTION FUNCTION
Contact Inputs (up to 96) Modbus Communications
Contact Outputs (up to 96) Modbus User Map
Current Unbalance DNP 3.0 Communications
Digital Counters (8) Oscillography
Digital Elements (16) Setting Groups (8)
Event Recorder Transducer I/O
FlexElements™ User-programmable LEDs
FlexLogic™ Equations User-definable Displays
Metering: Current, Voltage, Power, Frequency Virtual Inputs (32)
MMS/UCA Communications Virtual Outputs (64)

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.1.2 ORDERING
The relay is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit and consists of five UR module functions: Power Supply,
CPU, CT/VT DSP, Digital Input/Output, and Transducer Input/Output. Each of these modules can be supplied in a number
of configurations at the time of ordering. The information required to completely specify the relay is provided in the following
table (full details of available relay modules are contained in the HARDWARE chapter).
Table 2–3: ORDER CODES 2

M60 - 00 - H C -F -H -M P U W
BASE UNIT M60 | | | | | | | | | | | Base Unit
CPU A | | | | | | | | | | RS485 + RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP)
C | | | | | | | | | | RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus TCP/IP, DNP)
D | | | | | | | | | | RS485 + Redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus TCP/IP, DNP)
SOFTWARE
00 | | | | | | | | | No Software Options
OPTIONS
MOUNTING H | | | | | | | | Horizontal (19" rack)
FACEPLATE C | | | | | | | Faceplate with Keypad & Display
POWER SUPPLY H | | | | | | 125 / 250 V AC
L | | | | | | 24 to 48 V (DC only)
CT/VT DSP 8A | 8A | | | Standard 4CT/4VT
8B | 8B | | | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
8C | 8C | | | Standard 8CT
8D | 8D | | | Sensitive Ground 8CT
DIGITAL I/O | XX XX XX XX No module
2 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) & 2 Form-C Outputs,
6A 6A 6A 6A 6A 8 Digital Inputs
2 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) & 4 Form-C Outputs,
6B 6B 6B 6B 6B 4 Digital Inputs
6C 6C 6C 6C 6C 8 Form-C Outputs
6D 6D 6D 6D 6D 16 Digital Inputs
6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 4 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6F 6F 6F 6F 6F 8 Fast Form-C Outputs
6G 6G 6G 6G 6G 4 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6H 6H 6H 6H 6H 6 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
6K 6K 6K 6K 6K 4 Form-C & 4 Fast Form-C Outputs
2 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) & 2 Form-C Outputs,
6L 6L 6L 6L 6L 8 Digital Inputs
2 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) & 4 Form-C Outputs,
6M 6M 6M 6M 6M 4 Digital Inputs
6N 6N 6N 6N 6N 4 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
6R 6R 6R 6R 6R 2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
6T 6T 6T 6T 6T 4 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6U 6U 6U 6U 6U 6 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
TRANSDUCER 5C 5C 5C 5C 5C 8 RTD Inputs
I/O (SELECT A 5E 5E 5E 5E 5E 4 RTD, 4 dcmA Inputs
MAXIMUM OF 4)
5F 5F 5F 5F 5F 8 dcmA Inputs
The order codes for replacement modules to be ordered separately are shown in the following table. When ordering a
replacement CPU module or Faceplate, please provide the serial number of your existing unit.

2.1 INTRODUCTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Table 2–4: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES

UR - -
POWER SUPPLY | 1H | 125 / 250 V AC/DC
| 1L | 24 - 48 V (DC only)
CPU | 9A | RS485 + RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP 3.0)
| 9C | RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
| 9D | RS485 + Redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
FACEPLATE | 3C | Horizontal Faceplate with Display & Keypad
2 DIGITAL I/O |
|
6A
6B
|
|
2 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
2 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
| 6C | 8 Form-C Outputs
| 6D | 16 Digital Inputs
| 6E | 4 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6F | 8 Fast Form-C Outputs
| 6G | 4 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6H | 6 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
| 6K | 4 Form-C & 4 Fast Form-C Outputs
| 6L | 2 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6M | 2 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
| 6N | 4 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6P | 6 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
| 6R | 2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6S | 2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
| 6T | 4 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
| 6U | 6 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
CT/VT DSP | 8A | Standard 4CT/4VT
| 8B | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
| 8C | Standard 8CT
| 8D | Sensitive Ground 8CT
| 8Z | HI-Z 4CT
L60 INTER-RELAY | 7U | 110/125 V, 20 mA Input/Output Channel Interface
COMMUNICATIONS | 7V | 48/60 V, 20 mA Input/Output Channel Interface
| 7Y | 125 V Input, 5V Output, 20 mA Channel Interface
| 7Z | 5 V Input, 5V Output, 20 mA Channel Interface
L90 INTER-RELAY | 7A | 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
COMMUNICATIONS | 7B | 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
| 7C | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
| 7D | 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
| 7E | Channel 1: G.703; Channel 2: 820 nm, multi-mode LED
| 7F | Channel 1: G.703; Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode LED
| 7G | Channel 1: G.703; Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
| 7Q | Channel 1: G.703; Channel 2: 820 nm, single-mode LASER
| 7H | 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7I | 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7J | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
| 7K | 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
| 7L | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
| 7M | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
| 7N | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
| 7P | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
| 7R | G.703, 1 Channel
| 7S | G.703, 2 Channels
| 7T | RS422, 1 Channel
| 7W | RS422, 2 Channels
| 72 | 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
| 73 | 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel
| 74 | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
| 75 | Channel 1 - G.703, Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single -mode, LASER
TRANSDUCER I/O | 5C | 8 RTD Inputs
| 5E | 4 dcmA Inputs, 4 RTD Inputs
| 5F | 8 dcmA Inputs

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
2.2.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS
The operating times below include the activation time of a trip rated Form-A output contact unless otherwise indi-
cated. FlexLogic™ operands of a given element are 4 ms faster. This should be taken into account when using
NOTE
FlexLogic™ to interconnect with other protection or control elements of the relay, building FlexLogic™ equations, or 2
interfacing with other IEDs or power system devices via communications or different output contacts.
STATOR DIFFERENTIAL PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOC
Pickup: 0.050 to 1.00 pu in steps of 0.01 Current: Phasor only
Slope 1/2: 1 to 100% in steps of 1 Pickup Level: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Break 1: 1.00 to 1.50 pu in steps of 0.01 Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup
Break 2: 1.50 to 30.00 pu in steps of 0.01 Level Accuracy:
0.1 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±0.5% of reading or ±1% of rated
SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER (whichever is greater)
Measured Power: 3-phase, true RMS > 2.0 × CT rating ±1.5% of reading
Number of Stages: 2 Overreach: <2%
Characteristic Angle: 0 to 359° in steps of 1 Pickup Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Calibration Angle: 0.00 to 0.95° in steps of 0.05 Reset Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Minimum Power: –1.200 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001 Operate Time: <20 ms at 3 × Pickup at 60 Hz
Pickup Level Accuracy: ±1% or ±0.001 pu, whichever is greater Timing Accuracy: Operate at 1.5 × Pickup
Hysteresis: 2% or 0.001 pu, whichever is greater ±3% or ±4 ms (whichever is greater)
Pickup Delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
AMP UNBALANCE 1/2
Time Accuracy: ±3% or ±4 ms, whichever is greater Average & Full Load Amps (FLA): RMS
Operate Time: 50 ms I_1 and I_2 Amps: Phasor
THERMAL MODEL Pickup Level: 0.0 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1
Thermal Overload Curves: 15 Standard or Flexcurve Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of pickup
Thermal Curve Biasing: Stator, RTD, Unbalance, Hot/Cold Safe Level Accuracy: ±0.1
Stall Ratio Running/Cooling Time Con- Pickup Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
stants
Reset Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Thermal Curve Cutoff: Motor Service Factor
Operate Time: <20 ms at 1.10 x pickup at 60 Hz
Current Accuracy: Per phase current inputs
Timing Accuracy: ±3% or ±20 ms, whichever is greater
Timing Accuracy: ±100 ms or ±2%, whichever is greater
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND TOC Voltage: Phasor only
Current: Phasor or RMS
Pickup Level: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout Level: 102 to 103% of Pickup
Dropout Level: 97% to 98% of Pickup
Level Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Level Accuracy:
Curve Shapes: GE IAV Inverse;
for 0.1 to 2.0 × CT: ±0.5% of reading or ±1% of rated
Definite Time (0.1s base curve)
(whichever is greater)
for > 2.0 × CT: ±1.5% of reading > 2.0 × CT rating Curve Multiplier: Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of
0.01
Curve Shapes: IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely
Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short Timing Accuracy: Operate at < 0.90 × Pickup
Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/ ±3.5% of operate time or ±4 ms (which-
Extremely Inverse; I2t; FlexCurve™ (pro- ever is greater)
grammable); Definite Time (0.01 s base PHASE OVERVOLTAGE
curve) Voltage: Phasor only
Curve Multiplier: Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of Pickup Level: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
0.01
Reset Type: Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE)
Timing Accuracy: Operate at > 1.03 × Actual Pickup
Pickup Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s
±3.5% of operate time or ±½ cycle
(whichever is greater) Operate Time: < 30 ms at 1.10 × Pickup at 60 Hz
Timing Accuracy: ±3% or ±4 ms (whichever is greater)

2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE

Pickup Level: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001 Pickup Level: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup Dropout Level: 102 to 103% of Pickup
Level Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V Level Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Pickup Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 Curve Shapes: GE IAV Inverse
Reset Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 Definite Time
Timing Accuracy: ±3% or ±4 ms (whichever is greater) Curve Multiplier: Time Dial = 0 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
2 Operate Time: < 30 ms at 1.10 × Pickup at 60 Hz Timing Accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±4 ms
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE
Pickup Level: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001 AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE
Reset Delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Reset Delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Time Accuracy: ±3% or ±20 ms, whichever is greater
Timing Accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±4 ms
Operate Time: < 30 ms at 1.10 × Pickup at 60 Hz
Operate Time: < 30 ms at 1.10 × pickup at 60 Hz
2.2.2 USER PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS
FLEXLOGIC™ FLEXELEMENTS™
Programming language: Reverse Polish Notation with graphical Number of elements: 16
visualization (keypad programmable) Operating signal: any analog actual value, or two values in
Lines of code: 512 differential mode
Number of Internal Variables: 64 Operating signal mode: Signed or Absolute Value
Supported operations: NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2 Operating mode: Level, Delta
to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to 16 inputs), Compensation direction: Over, Under
NAND (2 to 16 inputs), LATCH (Reset Pickup Level: –30.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
dominant), EDGE DETECTORS, TIM-
Hysteresis: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
ERS
Delta dt: 20 ms to 60 days
Inputs: any logical variable, contact, or virtual
input Pickup and dropout delay: 0.000 to 65.535 in steps of 0.001
Number of timers: 32 FLEX STATES
Pickup delay: 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1 Number: up to 256 logical variables grouped
Dropout delay: 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1 under 16 Modbus addresses
Programmability: any logical variable, contact, or virtual
FLEXCURVES™ input
Number: 2 (A and B)
Number of reset points: 40 (0 through 1 of pickup) USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
Number: 48 plus Trip and Alarm
Number of operate points: 80 (1 through 20 of pickup)
Programmability: from any logical variable, contact, or vir-
Time delay: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
tual input
Reset mode: Self-reset or Latched
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
Number of displays: 8
Lines of display: 2 × 20 alphanumeric characters
Parameters up to 5, any Modbus register addresses

2.2.3 MONITORING
OSCILLOGRAPHY EVENT RECORDER

Max. No. of Records: 64 Capacity: 1024 events
Sampling Rate: 64 samples per power cycle Time-tag: to 1 microsecond
Triggers: Any element pickup, dropout or operate Triggers: Any element pickup, dropout or operate
Digital input change of state Digital input change of state
Digital output change of state
FlexLogic™ equation
Digital output change of state
Self-test events
2
Data: AC input channels Data Storage: In non-volatile memory
Element state
Digital input state
Digital output state
Data Storage: In non-volatile memory
2.2.4 METERING
RMS CURRENT: PHASE, NEUTRAL, AND GROUND WATT-HOURS (POSITIVE & NEGATIVE)
Accuracy at Accuracy: ±2.0% of reading
0.1 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±0.25% of reading or ±0.1% of rated Range: ±0 to 2 × 109 MWh
Parameters: 3-phase only
> 2.0 × CT rating: ±1.0% of reading
Update Rate: 50 ms
RMS VOLTAGE
Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
VAR-HOURS (POSITIVE & NEGATIVE)
Accuracy: ±2.0% of reading
APPARENT POWER VA Range: ±0 to 2 × 109 Mvarh
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading
Parameters: 3-phase only
REAL POWER WATT Update Rate: 50 ms
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading at
–0.8 < PF ≤ –1.0 and 0.8 < PF ≤ 1.0
FREQUENCY
Accuracy at
REACTIVE POWER VAR V = 0.8 to 1.2 pu: ±0.01 Hz (when voltage signal is used
Accuracy: ±1.0% of reading –0.2 ≤ PF ≤ 0.2 for frequency measurement)
I = 0.1 to 0.25 pu: ±0.05 Hz
I > 0.25 pu ±0.02 Hz (when current signal is used for
frequency measurement)
2.2.5 INPUTS
AC CURRENT AC VOLTAGE
CT Rated Primary: 1 to 50000 A VT Rated Secondary: 50.0 to 240.0 V
CT Rated Secondary: 1 A or 5 A by connection VT Ratio: 0.1 to 24000.0
Nominal Frequency: 20 to 65 Hz Nominal Frequency: 20 to 65 Hz
Relay Burden: < 0.2 VA at rated secondary Relay Burden: < 0.25 VA at 120 V
Conversion Range: Conversion Range: 1 to 275 V
Standard CT Module: 0.02 to 46 × CT rating RMS symmetrical Voltage Withstand: cont. at 260 V to neutral
Sensitive Ground Module: 1 min./hr at 420 V to neutral
0.002 to 4.6 × CT rating RMS symmetrical
Current Withstand: 20 ms at 250 times rated
CONTACT INPUTS
Dry Contacts: 1000 Ω maximum
1 sec. at 100 times rated
Cont. at 3 times rated Wet Contacts: 300 V DC maximum
Selectable Thresholds: 16 V, 30 V, 80 V, 140 V
Recognition Time: < 1 ms
Debounce Timer: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
IRIG-B INPUT
Amplitude Modulation: 1 to 10 V pk-pk
DC Shift: TTL
Input Impedance: 22 kΩ

DCMA INPUTS RTD INPUTS

Current Input (mA DC): 0 to –1, 0 to +1, –1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10, Types (3-wire): 100 Ω Platinum, 100 & 120 Ω Nickel, 10
0 to 20, 4 to 20 (programmable) Ω Copper
Input Impedance: 379 Ω ±10% Sensing Current: 5 mA
Conversion Range: –1 to + 20 mA DC Range: –50 to +250°C
Accuracy: ±0.2% of full scale Accuracy: ±2°C
Type: Passive Isolation: 36 V pk-pk
2
2.2.6 POWER SUPPLY
LOW RANGE ALL RANGES

Nominal DC Voltage: 24 to 48 V at 3 A Volt Withstand: 2 × Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms
Min./Max. DC Voltage: 20 / 60 V Voltage Loss Hold-Up: 50 ms duration at nominal
NOTE: Low range is DC only. Power Consumption: Typical = 35 VA; Max. = 75 VA
HIGH RANGE INTERNAL FUSE
Nominal DC Voltage: 125 to 250 V at 0.7 A RATINGS
Min./Max. DC Voltage: 88 / 300 V Low Range Power Supply: 7.5 A / 600 V
Nominal AC Voltage: 100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz, 0.7 A High Range Power Supply: 5 A / 600 V
Min./Max. AC Voltage: 88 / 265 V at 48 to 62 Hz INTERRUPTING CAPACITY
AC: 100 000 A RMS symmetrical
DC: 10 000 A
2.2.7 OUTPUTS
FORM-A RELAY FAST FORM-C RELAY

Make and Carry: 0.1 A max. (resistive load)
Make and Carry for 0.2 sec.: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Minimum Load Impedance:
Carry Continuous: 6A
Break at L/R of 40 ms: 0.25 A DC max. INPUT IMPEDANCE
VOLTAGE
Operate Time: < 4 ms 2 W RESISTOR 1 W RESISTOR
Contact Material: Silver alloy 250 V DC 20 KΩ 50 KΩ
120 V DC 5 KΩ 2 KΩ
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR
Applicable Voltage: approx. 15 to 250 V DC 48 V DC 2 KΩ 2 KΩ
Trickle Current: approx. 1 to 2.5 mA 24 V DC 2 KΩ 2 KΩ

Note: values for 24 V and 48 V are the same due to a
FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR required 95% voltage drop across the load impedance.
Threshold Current: approx. 80 to 100 mA
Operate Time: < 0.6 ms
FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY INTERNAL LIMITING RESISTOR:
Make and Carry for 0.2 sec: 10 A Power: 2 watts
Carry Continuous: 6A Resistance: 100 ohms
Break at L/R of 40 ms: 0.1 A DC max.
CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT
Operate Time: < 8 ms
(FOR DRY CONTACT INPUT)
Contact Material: Silver alloy
Capacity: 100 mA DC at 48 V DC
Isolation: ±300 Vpk

RS232 ETHERNET PORT

Front Port: 19.2 kbps, Modbus® RTU 10BaseF: 820 nm, multi-mode, supports half-
duplex/full-duplex fiber optic with ST
RS485 connector
1 or 2 Rear Ports: Up to 115 kbps, Modbus® RTU, isolated
together at 36 Vpk Redundant 10BaseF: 820 nm, multi-mode, half-duplex/full-
duplex fiber optic with ST connector
Typical Distance: 1200 m
Power Budget: 10 db 2
Max Optical Ip Power: –7.6 dBm
Typical Distance: 1.65 km
2.2.9 ENVIRONMENTAL
Operating Temperatures: Humidity (noncondensing): IEC 60068-2-30, 95%, Variant 1, 6

Cold: IEC 60028-2-1, 16 h at –40°C days
Dry Heat: IEC 60028-2-2, 16 h at 85°C Altitude: Up to 2000 m
Installation Category: II
2.2.10 TYPE TESTS
Electrical Fast Transient: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Conducted RFI: IEC 61000-4-6

IEC 61000-4-4 Voltage Dips/Interruptions/Variations:
IEC 60255-22-4 IEC 61000-4-11
Oscillatory Transient: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 IEC 60255-11
IEC 61000-4-12 Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity:
Insulation Resistance: IEC 60255-5 IEC 61000-4-8
Dielectric Strength: IEC 60255-6 Vibration Test (sinusoidal): IEC 60255-21-1
ANSI/IEEE C37.90 Shock and Bump: IEC 60255-21-2
Electrostatic Discharge: EN 61000-4-2
Type test report available upon request.
Surge Immunity: EN 61000-4-5
RFI Susceptibility: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 NOTE
IEC 61000-4-3
IEC 60255-22-3
Ontario Hydro C-5047-77
2.2.11 PRODUCTION TESTS
THERMAL
Products go through a 12 h burn-in process at 60°C
2.2.12 APPROVALS
APPROVALS CE:
UL approval pending LVD 73/23/EEC: IEC 1010-1
CSA approval pending EMC 81/336/EEC: EN 50081-2
EN 50082-2
Manufactured under an ISO9000 Registered system.
2.2.13 MAINTENANCE
Cleaning: Normally, cleaning is not required; but for situations where dust has accumulated on the faceplate display, a dry cloth can be
used.


3 HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION 3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT
The relay is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit with a removable faceplate. The modular design allows the
relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the
removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth. There is also a removable
dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting to access the keypad or RS232 communi-
cations port.
The horizontal case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the
location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from
adjacent equipment.
The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator
access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws
supplied with the relay.
3
REMOTE MOUNTING
HORIZONTAL (19" 4RU) BEZEL OUTLINE
8x0.156 %%c
TOP VIEW
0.375
(9.5)
1.875
(47.6)
8.97" 10.90"
(176.8)
6.960
(227.8) (276.8)
0.375
(9.5)
(121.5)
4.785
9.80"
(248.9)
0.375
(9.5)
5.000 0.375
(127.0) (9.5)
9.520
Brackets repositioned (241.8)
17.52" for switchgear mtg.
14.520
(445.0) (368.8)
17.720
(450.1)
INCHES
(mm) PANEL MOUNTING 4x0.28" Dia.
(7.1)
18.37"
FRONT VIEW (466.6)
7.13" CUTOUT 4.00"

(181.1) (101.6)
7.00"
(177.8)
17.75" 1.57"
19.00"
(450.8) (39.8)
(482.6)
827704B3.DWG
Figure 3–1: M60 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS

3.1 DESCRIPTION 3 HARDWARE
3.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION
Module withdrawal and insertion may only be performed when control power has been removed from the
unit. Inserting an incorrect module type into a slot may result in personal injury, damage to the unit or con-
WARNING
nected equipment, or undesired operation!
Proper electrostatic discharge protection (i.e. a static strap) must be used when coming in contact with
modules while the relay is energized!
WARNING
The relay, being modular in design, allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules. Modules must only be replaced with
like modules in their original factory configured slots.
The faceplate can be opened to the left, once the sliding latch on the right side has been pushed up, as shown in the figure
below. This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal.
3
Figure 3–2: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION

WITHDRAWAL: The ejector/inserter clips, located at the top and bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously to
release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. Record
the original location of the module to ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.
INSERTION: Ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips
located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted
into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips
have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
Type 9C and 9D CPU modules are equipped with 10BaseT and 10BaseF Ethernet connectors for communications.
These connectors must be individually disconnected from the module before the it can be removed from the chas-
NOTE
sis.

3 HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION
3.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT
Figure 3–3: REAR TERMINAL VIEW

Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized!
WARNING
3.1.4 REAR TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS
The relay follows a convention with respect to terminal number assignments which are three characters long assigned in
order by module slot position, row number, and column letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slot designation from the
first slot position (nearest to CPU module) which is indicated by an arrow marker on the terminal block. See the following
figure for an example of rear terminal assignments.
Figure 3–4: EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F & H SLOTS

3.2 WIRING 3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING 3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
TYPICAL CONFIGURATION
THE AC SIGNAL PATH IS CONFIGURABLE
POSITIVE WATTS
CIRCUIT BREAKER
B 52
3
F 1b
F 2b
F 3b
F 4b
F 5a
F 6a
F 7a
F 1a
F 2a
F 3a
F 4a
F 5c
F 6c
F 7c
F 1c
F 2c
F 3c
F 4c
M 1b
M 2b
M 3b
M 4b
M 1a
M 2a
M 3a
M 4a
M 1c
M 2c
M 3c
M 4c
VB
VC
VA
VB
VC
IG5
IG1
IG5
IG1
VA
IA5
IA1
IG
IA5
IA1
IG
IB
IB5
IB1
IC5
IC1
IC
IA
IB
IB5
IB1
IC5
IC1
IC
IA
CURRENT SUPV.
VOLT &
VOLTAGE INPUTS CURRENT INPUTS CURRENT INPUTS
8A / 8B 8E / 8F
P 5a CONTACT IN P 5a DIGITAL I/ O 6G I P1a TC1
P 5c CONTACT IN P 5c P1 P1b
V
P 6a CONTACT IN P 6a P1c
P 6c CONTACT IN P 6c I P2a
P 5b COMMON P5b P2 P2b
V
P2c
VOLTAGE SUPV.
P 7a CONTACT IN P 7a I P 3a TC2
P 7c CONTACT IN P 7c
P3 P3b
P 8a CONTACT IN P 8a V
P3c
P 8c CONTACT IN P 8c I P4a
P 7b COMMON P7b
P4 P4b
V
P 8b SURGE P4c
H 1a Hot
RTD H 1
5C
H 1c Comp
DB-9
H 1b Return for RTD H1 & H 2
RS-232
( DC ONLY )
H 2a Hot (front)
RTD H 2
H 2c Comp
H 3a Hot UR COMPUTER
RTD H 3
H 3c Comp 1 1 8
H 3b Return for RTD H 3 & H 4 TXD 2 2 3 RX D
H 4a Hot RX D 3 3 2 TXD
RTD H 4
H 4c Comp 4 4 20
SGND 5 5 7 SGND
H 5a Hot
RTD H 5 6 6 6
H 5c Comp
H 5b Return for RTD H 5 & H 6 G E Po w er M a n a g e m e n t 7 7 4
8 8 5
H 6a Hot
RTD H 6 9 9 22
H 6c Comp
M60 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY
H 7a Hot 9 PIN 25 PIN
RTD H 7
H 7c Comp CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
ANALOG I/ O
H 7b Return for RTD H7 & H 8

H 8a Hot
RTD H 8
H 8c Comp 1
Power
H 8b SURGE
B Supply
B 1b
CRITICAL 9
1
B 1a D
FAILURE CPU
B 2b
B 3a 48 VDC
POWER SUPPLY
B 3b OUTPUT F 8
DC B5b HI CT/ VT
CONTROL G
B 6b LO
AC or DC POWER H
B 6a 5
Shielded B 8a SURGE J RTD
twisted pairs B 8b FILTER
K
D2a
RS485 L
9A
D3a
Ground at COM 1 CONTACTS SHOWN
D4a COM M
Remote WITH NO 8
D3b CONTROL POWER CT/ VT
Device RS485 N
D4b
COM 2
D5b COM P 6
D5a
Co-axial IRIG-B R I/ O
D6a
CPU
No. 10AWG D7b SURGE S

Minimum 833700A T.C DR (Rear View)
MODULES MUST BE
GROUNDED IF HORIZONTAL MODULE ARRANGEMENT VERTICAL
GROUND
TERMINAL IS X W V U T S R P N M L K J H G F D B MODULE ARRANGEMENT
BUS
PROVIDED 6 8 5 8 9 1
I/ O VT/CT RTD VT/CT CPU Power

* * Supply
(Rear View)
* Optional
This diagram is based on the following order code: M60-D00-HCH-F8A-H5C-M8A-P6G.

CAUTION The purpose of this diagram is to provide an example of how the relay is typically wired, not specifi-
cally how to wire your own relay. Please refer to the following pages for examples to help you wire
your relay correctly based on your own relay configuration and order code.
Figure 3–5: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

3 HARDWARE 3.2 WIRING
3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH RATINGS AND TESTING
a) RATINGS
The dielectric strength of UR module hardware is shown in the following table:
Table 3–1: DIELECTRIC STRENGTH OF UR MODULE HARDWARE
MODULE MODULE FUNCTION TERMINALS DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
TYPE (AC)
FROM TO
1 Power Supply High (+); Low (+); (–) Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 min.
(See Precaution 1)
1 Power Supply 48 V DC (+) and (–) Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 min.
(See Precaution 1)
1 Power Supply Relay Terminals Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 min.
(See Precaution 1)
2 Reserved for Future N/A N/A N/A 3
3 Reserved for Future N/A N/A N/A
4 Reserved for Future N/A N/A N/A
5 Analog I/O All except 8b Chassis < 50 V DC
6 Digital I/O All (See Precaution 2) Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 min.
8 CT/VT All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 min.
9 CPU All except 7b Chassis < 50 VDC
b) TESTING
Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used in module hardware to prevent damage caused by high peak volt-
age transients, radio frequency interference (RFI) and electromagnetic interference (EMI). These protective components
can be damaged by application of the ANSI/IEEE C37.90 specified test voltage for a period longer than the specified one
minute. For testing of dielectric strength where the test interval may exceed one minute, always observe the following pre-
cautions:
Test Precautions:
1. The connection from ground to the Filter Ground (Terminal 8b) and Surge Ground (Terminal 8a) must be removed
before testing.
2. Some versions of the digital I/O module have a Surge Ground connection on Terminal 8b. On these module types, this
connection must be removed before testing.
3.2.3 CONTROL POWER
CONTROL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE RELAY MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE MATCHING POWER SUPPLY
RANGE OF THE RELAY. IF THE VOLTAGE IS APPLIED TO THE WRONG TERMINALS, DAMAGE MAY
CAUTION
OCCUR!
The power supply module can be ordered with either of two possible voltage ranges. Each range has a dedicated input
connection for proper operation. The ranges are as shown below (see the Technical Specifications section for details).
Table 3–2: CONTROL POWER VOLTAGE RANGE

RANGE NOMINAL VOLTAGE
LO 24 to 48 V (DC only)
HI 125 to 250 V
The power supply module provides power to the relay and supplies power for dry contact input connections.

Figure 3–6: CONTROL POWER CONNECTION

The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay (see TYPI-
CAL WIRING DIAGRAM). The critical failure relay is a Form-C that will be energized once control power is applied and the
relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test failures. If any of the on-going self-test features detect a critical
failure or control power is lost, the relay will de-energize.
3.2.4 CT/VT INPUTS
A CT/VT module may have voltage inputs on channels 1 through 4 inclusive, or channels 5 through 8 inclusive. Channels 1
and 5 are intended for connection to phase A, and are labeled as such in the relay. Channels 2 and 6 are intended for con-
nection to phase B, and are labeled as such in the relay. Channels 3 and 7 are intended for connection to phase C and are
labeled as such in the relay. Channels 4 and 8 are intended for connection to a single phase source. If voltage, this channel
is labelled the auxiliary voltage (VX). If current, this channel is intended for connection to a CT between a system neutral
and ground, and is labelled the ground current (IG).
a) AC CURRENT TRANSFORMER INPUTS

VERIFY THAT THE CONNECTION MADE TO THE RELAY NOMINAL CURRENT OF 1 A OR 5 A MATCHES
THE SECONDARY RATING OF THE CONNECTED CTs. UNMATCHED CTs MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT
CAUTION
DAMAGE OR INADEQUATE PROTECTION.
The CT/VT module may be ordered with a standard ground current input that is the same as the phase current inputs (type
8A) or with a sensitive ground input (type 8B) which is 10 times more sensitive (see the Technical Specifications section for
more details). Each AC current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the
input when the module is withdrawn from the chassis. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Cur-
rent transformers with 1 to 50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries may be used.
CT connections for both ABC and ACB phase rotations are identical as shown in the TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM.
The exact placement of a zero sequence CT so that ground fault current will be detected is shown below. Twisted pair
cabling on the zero sequence CT is recommended.

Figure 3–7: ZERO-SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE CT INSTALLATION
b) AC VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER INPUTS

The phase voltage channels are used for most metering and protection purposes. The auxiliary voltage channel is used as
input for the Synchrocheck and Volts/Hertz features.
~ 1b
~ 2b
~ 3b
~ 4b
~ 5a
~ 6a
~ 7a
~ 8a
~ 1a
~ 2a
~ 3a
~ 4a
~ 5c
~ 6c
~ 7c
~ 8c
~ 2c
~ 1c
~ 3c
~ 4c
VX
VB
VC
VA
VX
VB
VC
IG5
IG1
VA
IA5
IA1
IG
IB
IB5
IB1
IC5
IC1
IC
IA
VOLTAGE INPUTS CURRENT INPUTS

8A / 8B
CT V T M DL.cdr
(P/O 827831A 2.C DR)
Figure 3–8: CT/VT MODULE WIRING

~ 1b
~ 2b
~ 3b
~ 6b
~ 4b
~ 5b
~ 7b
~ 8b
~ 1a
~ 2a
~ 3a
~ 6a
~ 7a
~ 4a
~ 5a
~ 8a
~ 1c
~ 2c
~ 5c
~ 6c
~ 3c
~ 4c
~ 7c
~ 8c
IG5
IG1
IG5
IG1
IA5
IA1
IA5
IA1
IG
IG
IB
IB
IB5
IB1
IC5
IC1
IB5
IB1
IC5
IC1
IC
IC
IA
IA
CURRENT INPUTS
8C / 8D / 8Z
CT M DL8C D.cdr
(P/O 827831A 1.C DR)
Figure 3–9: CT MODULE WIRING

Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module.
NOTE

3.2.5 CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Every digital input/output module has 24 terminal connections. They are arranged as 3 terminals per row, with 8 rows in
total. A given row of three terminals may be used for the outputs of one relay. For example, for Form-C relay outputs, the
terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common contacts of the relay. For a Form-A out-
put, there are options of using current or voltage detection for feature supervision, depending on the module ordered. The
terminal configuration for contact inputs is different for the two applications. When a digital I/O module is ordered with con-
tact inputs, they are arranged in groups of four and use two rows of three terminals. Ideally, each input would be totally iso-
lated from any other input. However, this would require that every input have two dedicated terminals and limit the available
number of contacts based on the available number of terminals. So, although each input is individually optically isolated,
each group of four inputs uses a single common as a reasonable compromise. This allows each group of four outputs to be
supplied by wet contacts from different voltage sources (if required) or a mix of wet and dry contacts.
The tables and diagrams on the following pages illustrate the module types (6A, etc.) and contact arrangements that may
3 be ordered for the relay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module slot
position and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by module slot
position, row number, and column position.
UR RELAY FORM-A OUTPUT CONTACTS
Some Form-A outputs include circuits to monitor the DC voltage across the output contact when it is open, and the DC cur-
rent through the output contact when it is closed. Each of the monitors contains a level detector whose output is set to logic
“On = 1” when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting. The voltage monitor is set to “On = 1” when the cur-
rent is above about 1 to 2.5 mA, and the current monitor is set to “On = 1” when the current exceeds about 80 to 100 mA.
The voltage monitor is intended to check the health of the overall trip circuit, and the current monitor can be used to seal-in
the output contact until an external contact has interrupted current flow. The block diagrams of the circuits are below above
for the Form-A outputs with:
a) optional voltage monitor
b) optional current monitor
c) with no monitoring
If Idc ~ 80mA, Cont Op x Ion
~#a ~#a otherwise Cont Op x Ioff +
I I If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von

otherwise Cont Op x Voff
If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von
~#b + ~#b Load
V Load V
~#c
- ~#c
-
a) Voltage with optional
current monitoring Voltage monitoring only Both voltage and current monitoring

~#a ~#a otherwise Cont Op x Ioff +
V V If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von

~#b + ~#b Load
otherwise Cont Op x Ioff
I I
Load
~#c
- ~#c
-
b) Current with optional
voltage monitoring Current monitoring only Both voltage and current monitoring
(external jumper a-b is required)
~#a
~#b +
Load
c) No monitoring
~#c
-
827821A4.CDR
Figure 3–10: FORM-A CONTACT FUNCTIONS

The operation of voltage and current monitors is reflected with the corresponding FlexLogic™ operands (Cont Op # Von,
Cont Op # Voff, Cont Op # Ion, and Cont Op # Ioff) which can be used in protection, control and alarm logic. The typical
application of the voltage monitor is Breaker Trip Circuit Integrity monitoring; a typical application of the Current monitor is
seal-in of the control command. Refer DIGITAL ELEMENTS section for an example of how Form A contacts can be applied
for Breaker Trip Circuit Integrity Monitoring.
Relay contacts must be considered unsafe to touch when the unit is energized!! If the relay contacts need
to be used for low voltage accessible applications, it is the customer’s responsibility to ensure proper
WARNING
insulation levels!
USE OF FORM-A OUTPUTS IN HIGH IMPEDANCE CIRCUITS
NOTE For Form-A output contacts internally equipped with a voltage measuring cIrcuit across the contact, the circuit has
an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjunction with external high input impedance monitoring
equipment such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These monitoring circuits may continue to read the Form-
A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened, when measured as an impedance.
3
The solution to this problem is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect the
Form-A contact through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 V DC output of the power sup-
ply is used as a source, a 500 Ω, 10 W resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltage across either the
Form-A contact or the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output.
Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module; wherever a number
sign "#" appears, substitute the contact number
NOTE
When current monitoring is used to seal-in the Form-A contact outputs, the FlexLogic™ Operand driving
the contact output should be given a reset delay of 10 ms to prevent damage of the output contact (in situ-
NOTE
ations when the element initiating the contact output is bouncing, at values in the region of the pickup
value).
Table 3–3: DIGITAL I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENTS

~6A I/O MODULE ~6B I/O MODULE ~6C I/O MODULE
TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-C
~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C
~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C
~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C ~5 Form-C
~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6 Form-C
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Form-C
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Form-C
~6D I/O MODULE ~6E I/O MODULE ~6F I/O MODULE

TERMINAL INPUT TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT
ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT
~1a, ~1c 2 Inputs ~1 Form-C ~1 Fast Form-C
~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Fast Form-C

~6G I/O MODULE ~6H I/O MODULE ~6K I/O MODULE

TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT
~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-A ~5 Fast Form-C
~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-A ~6 Fast Form-C
3
~6L I/O MODULE ~6M I/O MODULE ~6N I/O MODULE
TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-A
~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-A
~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~6P I/O MODULE ~6R I/O MODULE ~6S I/O MODULE

TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT
~3 Form-A ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C
~4 Form-A ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C
~5 Form-A ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C
~6 Form-A ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C
~6T I/O MODULE ~6U I/O MODULE

TERMINAL OUTPUT OR TERMINAL OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT INPUT ASSIGNMENT INPUT
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A
~3 Form-A ~3 Form-A
~4 Form-A ~4 Form-A
~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-A
~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-A
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs

~ 5a CONTACT IN ~ 5a DIGITAL I/ O 6A I ~1a ~ 5a CONTACT IN ~ 5a DIGITAL I/ O 6E ~ 1a

~ 5c CONTACT IN ~ 5c ~1 ~1b ~ 5c CONTACT IN ~ 5c ~1 ~ 1b
V
~ 6a CONTACT IN ~ 6a ~1c ~ 6a CONTACT IN ~ 6a ~ 1c
~ 6c CONTACT IN ~ 6c I ~2a ~ 6c CONTACT IN ~ 6c ~ 2a
~ 5b COMMON ~ 5b ~2 ~2b ~ 5b COMMON ~ 5b ~2 ~ 2b
V
~2c ~ 2c
~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a ~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a
~3a ~ 3a
~7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c
~3 ~3b ~3 ~ 3b
~3c ~ 3c
~ 8c CONTACT IN ~ 8c ~ 8c CONTACT IN ~ 8c
~4a ~ 4a
~7b COMMON ~7b ~ 7b COMMON ~7b
~4 ~4b ~4 ~ 4b
~ 8b SURGE ~4c ~ 8b SURGE ~ 4c
~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a DIGITAL I/ O 6B I ~ 1a ~ 5a CONTACT IN ~ 5a DIGITAL I/ O 6G I ~ 1a

~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~1 ~ 1b ~ 5c CONTACT IN ~ 5c ~1 ~ 1b
V V
~ 8a CONTACT IN ~ 8a ~ 1c ~ 6a CONTACT IN ~ 6a ~ 1c
~ 8c CONTACT IN ~ 8c I ~ 2a ~ 6c CONTACT IN ~ 6c I ~ 2a
~2
~ 7b ~ 7b ~ 2b ~ 5b ~2 ~ 2b
3
COMMON COMMON ~5b
V V
~ 2c ~ 2c
~ 8b SURGE ~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a
~ 3a I ~ 3a
~3 ~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c
~ 3b ~3 ~ 3b
~ 8a CONTACT IN ~ 8a V
~ 3c ~ 3c
~ 8c CONTACT IN ~ 8c
~ 4a I ~ 4a
~4 ~ 7b COMMON ~7b
~ 4b ~4 ~ 4b
V
~ 4c ~ 8b SURGE ~ 4c
~ 5a
~5 ~ 5b
~ 5c
~ 6a
~6 ~ 6b
~ 6c
~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a DIGITAL I/ O 6H I ~ 1a
~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~1 ~ 1b
V
~ 8a CONTACT IN ~ 8a ~ 1c
~ 8c CONTACT IN ~ 8c I ~ 2a
~ 7b COMMON ~7b ~2 ~ 2b
V
~ 1a ~ 1a ~ 2c
6C
6F
~1 ~1 ~ 8b SURGE
~ 1b ~ 1b I ~ 3a
~ 1c ~ 1c ~3 ~ 3b
V
~ 2a ~ 2a ~ 3c
~2 ~ 2b ~2 ~ 2b I ~ 4a
~ 2c ~ 2c ~4 ~ 4b
V
~ 3a ~ 3a ~ 4c
~3 ~ 3b ~3 ~ 3b I ~ 5a
~ 3c ~ 3c ~5 ~ 5b
V
~ 4a ~ 4a ~ 5c
~4 ~ 4b ~4 ~ 4b I ~ 6a
~ 4c ~ 4c ~6 ~ 6b
V
~ 5a ~ 5a ~ 6c
~5 ~ 5b ~5 ~ 5b
~ 5c ~ 5c
~ 6a ~ 6a
~6 ~ 6b ~6 ~ 6b
~ 6c ~ 6c
~ 7a ~ 7a
~7 ~ 7b ~7 ~ 7b
DIGITAL I/ O
DIGITAL I/ O
~ 5a CONTACT IN ~ 5a DIGITAL I/ O 6I I ~ 1a
~ 7c ~ 7c
~ 8a ~ 8a ~ 5c CONTACT IN ~ 5c ~1 V
~ 1b
~8 ~ 8b ~8 ~ 8b ~ 6a CONTACT IN ~ 6a ~ 1c
~ 8c ~ 8c
~ 5b COMMON ~5b ~2 ~ 2b
V
~ 2c
~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a I ~ 3a
~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c
~3 ~ 3b
~ 8a CONTACT IN ~ 8a V
~ 3c
~1a ~1a ~ 7b COMMON ~7b
~ 1a CONTACT IN ~4 ~ 4b
6K
6D
V
~ 1c CONTACT IN ~1c ~1 ~1b ~ 8b SURGE ~ 4c
~ 2a CONTACT IN ~2a ~1c
~ 2c CONTACT IN ~2c ~2a
~ 1b COMMON ~1b ~2 ~2b
~ 3a CONTACT IN ~3a ~2c
~ 3c CONTACT IN ~3c ~3a
~ 4a ~4a ~3 ~3b
CONTACT IN
~ 4c CONTACT IN ~4c ~3c
~ 3b COMMON ~3b ~4a
~4 ~4b ~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a DIGITAL I/ O 6J I ~1a
~ 5a CONTACT IN ~5a ~ 7c CONTACT IN ~7c ~1 ~1b
~4c V
~ 5c CONTACT IN ~5c ~ 8a CONTACT IN ~ 8a ~1c
~5a
~ 6a CONTACT IN ~6a ~5 ~ 8c CONTACT IN ~8c I ~2a
~5b
~ 6c CONTACT IN ~6c ~ 7b COMMON ~7b ~2 ~2b
~5c V
~ 5b COMMON ~5b ~2c
~6a
~ 8b SURGE
~ 7a CONTACT IN ~7a ~6 ~6b I ~3a
~ 7c CONTACT IN ~7c ~6c ~3 ~3b
DIGITAL I/ O
V
~ 8a CONTACT IN ~8a ~7a ~3c
~ 8c CONTACT IN ~8c ~7 ~7b I ~4a
DIGITAL I/ O
~ 7b COMMON ~7b ~7c ~4 ~4b

V
~ 8b SURGE ~8a ~4c
~8 ~8b I ~5a
~8c ~5 ~5b
V
~5c
I ~6a
~6 ~6b
V
~6c
Figure 3–11: DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING (SHEET 1 OF 2)

~ 5a CONTACT IN ~ 5a DIGITAL I/ O 6L V ~ 1a ~ 5a CONTACT IN ~ 5a DIGITAL I/ O 6R ~ 1a

I
~ 6c CONTACT IN ~ 6c V ~ 2a ~ 6c CONTACT IN ~ 6c ~ 2a
I
~ 5b COMMON ~ 5b ~2 ~ 2b ~ 5b COMMON ~ 5b ~2 ~ 2b
~ 2c ~ 2c
~ 3a ~ 3a
~7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c
~3 ~ 3b ~3 ~ 3b
~ 3c ~ 3c
~ 4a ~ 4a
~7b COMMON ~ 7b ~7b COMMON ~ 7b
~4 ~ 4b ~4 ~ 4b
~ 8b SURGE ~ 4c ~ 8b SURGE ~ 4c
~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a DIGITAL I/ O 6M V ~ 1a ~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a DIGITAL I/ O 6S ~ 1a

~1 I ~1
~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~ 1b ~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~ 1b
3 ~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b ~2
V
I
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b ~2
~ 1c
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 2c ~ 2c
~ 8b SURGE ~ 8b SURGE
~ 3a ~ 3a
~3 ~ 3b ~3 ~ 3b
~ 3c ~ 3c
~ 4a ~ 4a
~4 ~ 4b ~4 ~ 4b
~ 4c ~ 4c
~ 5a ~ 5a
~5 ~ 5b ~5 ~ 5b
~ 5c ~ 5c
~ 6a ~ 6a
~6 ~ 6b ~6 ~ 6b
~ 6c ~ 6c
~ 5a CONTACT IN ~ 5a DIGITAL I/ O 6N V ~ 1a ~ 5a CONTACT IN ~ 5a DIGITAL I/ O 6T ~ 1a

I
I
~ 5b COMMON ~ 5b ~2 ~ 2b ~ 5b COMMON ~ 5b ~2 ~ 2b
~ 2c ~ 2c
V ~ 3a ~ 3a
~7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c I ~7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c
~3 ~ 3b ~3 ~ 3b
~ 3c ~ 3c
V ~ 4a ~ 4a
~7b COMMON ~ 7b I ~7b COMMON ~ 7b
~4 ~ 4b ~4 ~ 4b
~ 8b SURGE ~ 4c ~ 8b SURGE ~ 4c
~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a DIGITAL I/ O 6P V ~ 1a ~ 7a CONTACT IN ~ 7a DIGITAL I/ O 6U ~ 1a

~1 I ~1
~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~ 1b ~ 7c CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~ 1b
~2 I ~2
~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b ~ 2b ~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b ~ 2b
~ 2c ~ 2c
V ~ 3a ~ 3a
~3 I ~3
~ 3b ~ 3b
~ 3c ~ 3c
V ~ 4a ~ 4a
~4 I ~4
~ 4b ~ 4b
~ 4c ~ 4c
V ~ 5a ~ 5a
~5 I ~ 5b ~5 ~ 5b
~ 5c ~ 5c
V ~ 6a ~ 6a
~6 I ~6
~ 6b ~ 6b
~ 6c ~ 6c
827719AR.CDR
Sheet 2 of 2
Figure 3–12: DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING (SHEET 2 OF 2)
CORRECT POLARITY MUST BE OBSERVED FOR ALL CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS OR EQUIP-
MENT DAMAGE MAY RESULT.
CAUTION

A dry contact has one side connected to terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 V DC voltage rail supplied by the power sup-
ply module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Each contact input group
has its own common (negative) terminal which must be connected to the DC negative terminal (B3a) of the power supply
module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA will flow through the associated circuit.
A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other side of this contact
is connected to the required contact input terminal. In addition, the negative side of the external source must be connected
to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact input group. The maximum external source voltage for this
arrangement is 300 V DC.
The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs will detect a closed contact input is programmable as
16 V DC for 24 V sources, 30 V DC for 48 V sources, 80 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 140 V DC for 250 V sources.
(Dry) DIGITAL I/ O 6B (Wet) DIGITAL I/ O 6B

~ 7a + CONTACT IN
~ 7c + CONTACT IN
~ 8a + CONTACT IN
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 7a + CONTACT IN ~ 7a
~ 7c + CONTACT IN ~ 7c
~ 8a + CONTACT IN ~ 8a
3
~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 8c 24-250V ~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 8c
~ 7b - COMMON ~ 7b ~ 7b - COMMON ~ 7b
B 1b
1
B 1a CRITICAL
FAILURE
B 2b
B 3a - 48 VDC
POWER SUPPLY
B 3b + OUTPUT
B 5b HI+
CONTROL
B 6b LO+
POWER
B 6a -
B 8a SURGE
B 8b FILTER
827741A4.CDR
Figure 3–13: DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS

NOTE
Contact outputs may be ordered as Form-A or Form-C. The Form A contacts may be connected for external circuit supervi-
sion. These contacts are provided with voltage and current monitoring circuits used to detect the loss of DC voltage in the
circuit, and the presence of DC current flowing through the contacts when the Form-A contact closes. If enabled, the cur-
rent monitoring can be used as a seal-in signal to ensure that the Form-A contact does not attempt to break the energized
inductive coil circuit and weld the output contacts.

3.2.6 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Transducer input/output modules can receive input signals from external dcmA output transducers (dcmA In) or resistance
temperature detectors (RTD). Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from these external transducers and
convert these signals into a digital format for use as required.
Every transducer input/output module has a total of 24 terminal connections. These connections are arranged as three ter-
minals per row with a total of eight rows. A given row may be used for either inputs or outputs, with terminals in column "a"
having positive polarity and terminals in column "c" having negative polarity. Since an entire row is used for a single input/
output channel, the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number.
Each module also requires that a connection from an external ground bus be made to Terminal 8b. The figure below illus-
trates the transducer module types (5C, 5E, and 5F) and channel arrangements that may be ordered for the relay.
3 NOTE
~ 1a Hot ~ 1a ~ 1a
RTD ~ 1 dcmA In ~ 1
5C
dcmA In ~ 1
5E
5F
~ 1c Comp ~ 1c ~ 1c
~ 1b Return for RTD ~1 & ~ 2 ~ 2a dcmA In ~ 2 ~ 2a dcmA In ~ 2
~ 2a Hot ~ 2c ~ 2c
RTD ~ 2
~ 2c Comp
~ 3a ~ 3a
dcmA In ~ 3 dcmA In ~ 3
~ 3a Hot ~ 3c ~ 3c
RTD ~ 3
~ 3c Comp ~ 4a ~ 4a
dcmA In ~ 4 dcmA In ~ 4
~ 3b Return for RTD ~3 & ~4 ~ 4c ~ 4c
~ 4a Hot
RTD ~ 4 ~ 5a Hot ~ 5a
~ 4c Comp RTD ~ 5 dcmA In ~ 5
~ 5c Comp ~ 5c
~ 5a Hot ~ 5b Return for RTD ~ 5 & ~ 6 ~ 6a
RTD ~ 5 dcmA In ~ 6
~ 5c Comp ~ 6a Hot ~ 6c
RTD ~ 6
~ 5b Return for RTD ~5 & ~ 6 ~ 6c Comp
~ 7a
dcmA In ~ 7
ANALOG I/ O
~ 6a Hot
RTD ~ 6 ~ 7a Hot ~ 7c
~ 6c Comp RTD ~ 7
~ 7c Comp ~ 8a
dcmA In ~ 8
ANALOG I/ O
~ 7a Hot ~ 7b Return for RTD ~7 & ~ 8 ~ 8c

RTD ~ 7
~ 7c Comp ~ 8a Hot
RTD ~ 8 ~ 8b SURGE
ANALOG I/ O
~ 7b Return for RTD ~7 & ~ 8 ~ 8c Comp

~ 8a Hot
RTD ~ 8 ~ 8b SURGE
~ 8c Comp
ANALOGIO.CDR
~ 8b SURGE
FROM 827831A6.CDR
Figure 3–14: TRANSDUCER I/O MODULE WIRING

3.2.7 RS232 FACEPLATE PROGRAM PORT
A 9 pin RS232C serial port is located on the relay’s faceplate for programming with a portable (personal) computer. All that
is required to use this interface is a personal computer running the URPC software provided with the relay. Cabling for the
RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9 pin and 25 pin connectors.
Note that the baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps.
Front panel 9 pin RS232 Program port
1: N/A
2: (TXD)
3: (RXD)
RELAY
PERSONAL 4: N/A
FRONT PANEL
COMPUTER 5:
6:
(SGND) Signal Ground
N/A
3
PROGRAM PORT 7: N/A
8: N/A
9: N/A
9 PIN
RS232 RS232
D CONNECTOR D CONNECTOR
RS232 INTERFACE COM1 OR COM2

SERIAL PORT
RELAY
RELA COMPUTER
1 1 8 827758A3.DWG
TXD 2 2 3 RXD
RXD 3 3 2 TXD
4 4 20
SGND 5 5 7 SGND
6 6 6
7 7 4
8 8 5
9 9 22
9 PIN 25 PIN
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
Figure 3–15: RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION
3.2.8 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS
In addition to the RS232 port on the faceplate, the relay provides the user with two additional communication port(s)
depending on the CPU module installed.
Table 3–4: CPU COMMUNICATION PORT OPTIONS

CPU TYPE COM 1 COM 2
9A RS485 RS485
9C 10BASE-F RS485
9D Redundant 10BASE-F RS485
Tx1
Rx110BaseF NORMAL
9D
D2a Tx
Rx 10BaseF NORMAL
Tx2
Rx210BaseF ALTERNATE COM
9C
RS485 1
9A
D3a COM
COM 1 1 10BaseT TEST ONLY
D4a COM 10BaseT TEST ONLY
D3b D3b D3b
RS485 RS485 RS485
D4b D4b D4b
COM 2 COM 2 COM 2
D5b COM D5b COM D5b COM
D5a D5a D5a
IRIG-B IRIG-B IRIG-B
CPU
CPU
CPU
D6a D6a D6a

D7b SURGE D7b SURGE D7b SURGE GROUND
COMMOD.CDR
P/O 827719C2.CDR
Figure 3–16: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING

a) RS485 PORTS
RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted pair with transmit and receive data alternat-
ing over the same two wires. Through the use of these port(s), continuous monitoring and control from a remote computer,
SCADA system or PLC is possible.
To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must also be
observed. For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 “+” terminals connected together, and all RS485 “–”
terminals connected together. The COM terminal should be connected to the common wire inside the shield, when pro-
vided. To avoid loop currents, the shield should be grounded at one point only. Each relay should also be daisy chained to
the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this manner without exceeding driver capability. For
larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also possible to use commercially available repeaters to
increase the number of relays on a single channel to more than 32. Star or stub connections should be avoided entirely.
Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the
3 communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are internally provided at both communication ports. An iso-
lated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling. To ensure maximum reliability, all
equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed.
Both ends of the RS485 circuit should also be terminated with an impedance as shown below.
TWISTED
RELAY
SHIELD
ZT (*) PAIR D2a RS485 +
DATA RS485 PORT DATA
D3a RS485 -
36V
COM
D7b SURGE
Required
CHASSIS GROUND
D4a COMP 485COM
SCADA/PLC/COMPUTER
GROUND SHIELD AT
SCADA/PLC/COMPUTER ONLY
OR AT UR RELAY ONLY
RELAY
(*) TERMINATING IMPEDANCE AT
D2a RS485 +
EACH END (TYPICALLY 120 Ohms and 1 nF)
D3a 485 -
D7b SURGE
D4a COMP 485COM
UP TO 32 DEVICES,
MAXIMUM 4000 FEET RELAY
ZT (*)
D2a 485 +
D3a 485 -
D7b SURGE
D4a COMP 485COM LAST DEVICE
827757A5.DWG
Figure 3–17: RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION

b) 10BASE-F FIBER OPTIC PORT
ENSURE THE DUST COVERS ARE INSTALLED WHEN THE FIBER IS NOT IN USE. DIRTY OR SCRATCHED
CONNECTORS CAN LEAD TO HIGH LOSSES ON A FIBER LINK.
CAUTION
OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
CAUTION
The fiber optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 10 Mbps. Optical fiber
may be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 820 nanometers in multimode. Optical fiber is only available for
CPU types 9C and 9D. The 9D CPU has a 10BaseF transmitter and receiver for optical fiber communications and a second
pair of identical optical fiber transmitter and receiver for redundancy.
The optical fiber sizes supported include 50/125 µm, 62.5/125 µm and 100/140 µm. The fiber optic port is designed such
that the response times will not vary for any core that is 100 µm or less in diameter. For optical power budgeting, splices are 3
required every 1 km for the transmitter/receiver pair (the ST type connector contributes for a connector loss of 0.2 dB).
When splicing optical fibers, the diameter and numerical aperture of each fiber must be the same. In order to engage or dis-
engage the ST type connector, only a quarter turn of the coupling is required.
3.2.9 IRIG-B
GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM

GPS CONNECTION
OPTIONAL
IRIG-B RELAY
RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE
TIME CODE
GENERATOR + D5a IRIG-B(+)
(DC SHIFT OR RECEIVER
AMPLITUDE MODULATED
SIGNAL CAN BE USED)
- D6a IRIG-B(-)
827756A4.CDR
TO OTHER DEVICES
Figure 3–18: IRIG-B CONNECTION

IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices within
1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shifted or ampli-
tude modulated (AM). Third party equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS
satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can also be synchronized.


4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 URPC® SOFTWARE INTERFACE
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 URPC® SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4.1.1 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE
The URPC software provides a graphical user interface (GUI) as one of two human interfaces to a UR device. The alter-
nate human interface is implemented via the device’s faceplate keypad and display (see FACEPLATE INTERFACE section
in this chapter).
URPC provides a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain, and trouble-shoot the operation of relay functions, con-
nected over local or wide area communication networks. It can be used while disconnected (i.e. off-line) or connected (i.e.
on-line) to a UR device. In off-line mode, settings files can be created for eventual downloading to the device. In on-line
mode, you can communicate with the device in real-time.
The URPC software, provided with every M60 relay, can be run from any computer supporting Microsoft Windows® 95, 98,
or NT. This chapter provides a summary of the basic URPC software interface features. The URPC Help file provides
details for getting started and using the URPC software interface.
4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST
To start using the URPC program, a Site List must first be created. See the instructions in the URPC Help program under
the topic “Creating a Site List”.
4.1.3 URPC® SOFTWARE OVERVIEW 4

a) ENGAGING A COMMUNICATING DEVICE
The URPC software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with a UR relay. Communicat-
ing relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any number of relays
selected from the UR product series.
b) USING SETTINGS FILES

The URPC software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings:
• In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays.
• While connected to a communicating relay to directly modify any relay settings via relay data view windows, and then
save the settings to the relay.
• You can create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while the interface is connected to the relay.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the
following types of relay settings:
• Device Definition
• Product Setup
• System Setup
• FlexLogic™
• Grouped Elements
• Control Elements
• Inputs/Outputs
• Testing
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
c) CREATING / EDITING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS

You can create or edit a FlexLogic™ equation in order to customize the relay. You can subsequently view the automatically
generated logic diagram.
d) VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES

You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measured parameters.

4.1 URPC® SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
e) VIEWING TRIGGERED EVENTS

While the interface is in either on-line or off-line mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered specified
parameters, via:
• Event Recorder facility
The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed in chronological order from
most recent to oldest.
• Oscillography facility
The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of power system and relay
operation data captured during specific triggered events.
f) CREATING INTERACTIVE SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS

The URPC® software provides an icon-based interface facility for designing and monitoring electrical schematic diagrams
of sites employing UR relays.
g) FILE SUPPORT
• Execution
4 Any URPC file which is double clicked or opened will launch the application, or provide focus to the already opened
application. If the file was a settings file (*.urs) which had been removed from the Settings List tree menu, it will be
added back to the Settings List tree menu.
• Drag and Drop
The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target for device-order-
code-compatible files or individual menu items. Also, the Settings List control bar window and any Windows Explorer
directory folder are each mutually a file drag source and drop target.
New files which are dropped into the Settings List window are added to the tree which is automatically sorted alphabet-
ically with respect to settings file names. Files or individual menu items which are dropped in the selected device menu
in the Site List window will automatically be sent to the on-line communicating device.
h) UR FIRMWARE UPGRADES
The firmware of a UR device can be upgraded, locally or remotely, via the URPC® software. The corresponding instructions
are provided by the URPC® Help program under the topic “Upgrading Firmware”.
Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default
values, min/max values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware. The
NOTE
addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified. The
“EEPROM DATA ERROR” message displayed after upgrading/downgrading the firmware is a resettable, self-test
message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware. This
message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades.

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 URPC® SOFTWARE INTERFACE
4.1.4 URPC® SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW
The URPC software main window supports the following primary display components:
a. Title bar which shows the pathname of the active data view
b. Main window menu bar
c. Main window tool bar
d. Site List control bar window
e. Settings List control bar window
f. Device data view window(s), with common tool bar
g. Settings File data view window(s), with common tool bar
h. Workspace area with data view tabs
i. Status bar
Figure 4–1: URPC SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW

4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.2.1 FACEPLATE
The keypad/display/LED interface is one of two alternate human interfaces supported. The other alternate human interface
is implemented via the URPC software. The faceplate interface consists of several functional panels.
The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over
the faceplate which must be removed in order to access the keypad panel. The following figure shows the arrangement of
faceplate panels.
LED PANEL 1 LED PANEL 2 LED PANEL 3 DISPLAY
STATUS EVENT CAUSE

IN S ERVICE V O LTA G E
TR O U BLE C U RRE N T RE S ET
TE S T M O D E FRE Q U E N CY
TRIP O THER U S ER 1
A LA R M PH A SE A
PICK U P PH A SE B U S ER 2
PH A SE C
N E U TRA L/G R O U N D U S ER 3
MENU 7 8 9
HELP MESSAGE 4 5 6
ESCAPE 1 2 3
4 ENTER VALUE 0 . +/-
KEYPAD
Figure 4–2: UR HORIZONTAL FACEPLATE PANELS

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.2.2 LED INDICATORS
a) LED PANEL 1
This panel provides several LED indicators, several keys, and a communications port. The RESET key is used to reset any
latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions can also be reset
via the SETTINGS INPUT/OUTPUTS RESETTING menu). The USER keys are not used in this relay. The RS232 port is
intended for connection to a portable PC.
Figure 4–3: LED PANEL 1

STATUS INDICATORS: 4
• IN SERVICE: Indicates that control power is applied; all monitored I/O and internal systems are OK; the relay has been
programmed.
• TROUBLE: Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem.
• TEST MODE: Indicates that the relay is in test mode.
• TRIP: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic™ operand serving as a Trip switch has operated. This indicator always
latches; the RESET command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
• ALARM: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic™ operand serving as an Alarm switch has operated. This indicator is
never latched.
• PICKUP: Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS:
These indicate the input type that was involved in a condition detected by an element that is operated or has a latched flag
waiting to be reset.
• VOLTAGE: Indicates voltage was involved.
• CURRENT: Indicates current was involved.
• FREQUENCY: Indicates frequency was involved.
• OTHER: Indicates a composite function was involved.
• PHASE A: Indicates Phase A was involved.
• PHASE B: Indicates Phase B was involved.
• PHASE C: Indicates Phase C was involved.
• NEUTRAL/GROUND: Indicates neutral or ground was involved.

b) LED PANELS 2 AND 3

These panels provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. Support for applying a custom-
ized label beside every LED is provided.
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to
communicate with operators. Refer to the USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs section in Chapter 5 for the settings used to
program the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
Figure 4–4: LED PANELS 2 AND 3 (INDEX TEMPLATE)

4 c) DEFAULT LABELS FOR LED PANEL 2
SETTINGS IN USE
GROUP 1
GROUP 2
GROUP 3
GROUP 4
GROUP 5
GROUP 6
GROUP 7
GROUP 8
The default labels are meant to represent:

• GROUP 1...8: The illuminated GROUP is the active settings group.
The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2. The LEDs, however, are not pre-programmed. To match the
pre-printed label, the LED settings must be entered as shown in the USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs section of the SET-
TINGS chapter. The LEDs are fully user-programmable. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels for both
LED panels 2 and 3 as explained in the next section.

4.2.3 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDs
Custom labeling of an LED-only panel is facilitated by downloading a ‘zip’ file from

http://www.ge.com/indsys/pm/drawings/ur/custmod.zip.
This file provides templates and instructions for creating appropriate labeling for the LED panel. The following procedures
are contained in the downloadable file. The CorelDRAW panel-templates provide relative LED locations and located exam-
ple-text (x) edit boxes. The following procedure demonstrates how to install/uninstall the custom panel labeling.
1. Remove the clear LEXAN FRONT COVER (P/N: 1501-0014).
Push in
and gently lift
up the cover.
2. Pop out the LED MODULE and/or BLANK MODULE with a screwdriver as shown below. Be careful not to damage the 4
plastic.
( LED MODULE ) ( BLANK MODULE )
3. Place the left side of the customized module back to the front panel frame, then snap back the right side.
4. Put the clear LEXAN FRONT COVER back into place.
4.2.4 CUSTOMIZING THE DISPLAY MODULE
The following items are required to customize the UR display module:

• Black and white or color printer (color preferred)
• CorelDRAW version 5.0 or later software
• 1 each of: 8.5 x 11 white paper, exacto knife, ruler, custom display module (P/N: 1516-0069),
custom module cover (P/N: 1502-0015)
1. Open the LED panel customization template in CorelDRAW. Add text in places of the Xs on the template(s) with the
Edit > Text menu command. Delete the X place holders as required.Setup the print copy by selecting the File > Print
menu command and pressing the "Properties" button.
2. On the Page Setup tab, choose Paper Size: "Letter" and Orientation: "Landscape" and press "OK".
3. Click the "Options" button and select the Layout tab.
4. For Position and Size enable the "Center image" and "Maintain aspect ratio" check boxes and press "OK", then "OK"
once more to print.
5. From the printout, cut-out the BACKGROUND TEMPLATE from the three windows (use the cropmarks as a guide).

6. Put the BACKGROUND TEMPLATE on top of the custom display module (P/N: 1513-0069) and snap the clear cutome
module cover (P/N: 1502-0015) over it and the templates.
CUT
CUT OUT CUT OUT CUT OUT
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
CUT
CUT
CUT
BACKGROUND TEMPLATE BACKGROUND TEMPLATE BACKGROUND TEMPLATE
4 Figure 4–5: LED PANEL CUSTOMIZATION TEMPLATES (EXAMPLE)
4.2.5 DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 2 × 20 character vacuum fluorescent display to make them visible under poor lighting con-
ditions. Messages are displayed in English and do not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the
keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to defined messages. Any high priority event driven
message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display.
4.2.6 KEYPAD
Display messages are organized into ‘pages’ under the following headings: Actual Values, Settings, Commands, and Tar-
gets. The key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement
numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit
mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad.
The key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The key may be
pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The key stores altered setting values.
MENU 7 8 9
HELP MESSAGE 4 5 6
ESCAPE 1 2 3
ENTER VALUE 0 . +/-
Figure 4–6: KEYPAD

4.2.7 MENUS
a) NAVIGATION
Press the key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily fol-
lowed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the key advances through the main heading pages as
illustrated below.
ACTUAL VALUES SETTINGS COMMANDS TARGETS
ACTUAL VALUES SETTINGS COMMANDS No Active

STATUS PRODUCT SETUP VIRTUAL INPUTS Targets
USER DISPLAYS
(when in use)
4
User Display 1
b) HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double
scroll bar characters ( ), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters ( ). The header display
pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE
and keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the
MESSAGE key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually
pressing the MESSAGE key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)

SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP

c) EXAMPLE NAVIGATION SCENARIO
ACTUAL VALUES Press the key until the header for the first Actual Values page appears. This
STATUS page contains system and relay status information. Repeatedly press the
MESSAGE keys to display the other actual value headers.
SETTINGS Press the key until the header for the first page of Settings appears. This page
PRODUCT SETUP contains settings to configure the relay.
SETTINGS Press the MESSAGE key to move to the next Settings page. This page contains
SYSTEM SETUP settings for system setup. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE keys to display the
other setting headers and then back to the first Settings page header.
PASSWORD From the Settings page one header (Product Setup), press the MESSAGE key
SECURITY once to display the first sub-header (Password Security).
4 ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
Press the MESSAGE key once more and this will display the first setting for Pass-
word Security. Pressing the MESSAGE key repeatedly will display the remaining
setting messages for this sub-header.
PASSWORD Press the MESSAGE key once to move back to the first sub-header message.
SECURITY
DISPLAY Pressing the MESSAGE key will display the second setting sub-header associ-
PROPERTIES ated with the Product Setup header.
FLASH MESSAGE Press the MESSAGE key once more and this will display the first setting for Dis-
TIME: 1.0 s play Properties.
DEFAULT MESSAGE To view the remaining settings associated with the Display Properties subheader,
INTENSITY: 25% repeatedly press the MESSAGE key. The last message appears as shown.
4.2.8 CHANGING SETTINGS
a) ENTERING NUMERICAL DATA

Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters define
what values are acceptable for a setting.
FLASH MESSAGE For example, select the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH
TIME: 1.0 s MESSAGE TIME setting.
MINIMUM: 0.5 Press the key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the key
MAXIMUM: 10.0 again to view the next context sensitive help message.
Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available.
• 0 to 9 and (decimal point): The relay numeric keypad works the same as that of any electronic calculator. A num-
ber is entered one digit at a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the
MESSAGE key or pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display.
• VALUE : The VALUE key increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum value
allowed. While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE key again will allow the setting selection to continue

upward from the minimum value. The VALUE key decrements the displayed value by the step value, down to the
minimum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE key again will allow the setting selection to con-
tinue downward from the maximum value.
FLASH MESSAGE As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate
TIME: 2.5 s numeric keys in the sequence "2 . 5". The display message will change as the digits are
being entered.
NEW SETTING Until the key is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. There-
HAS BEEN STORED fore, press the key to store the new value in memory. This flash message will
momentarily appear as confirmation of the storing process. Numerical values which con-
tain decimal places will be rounded-off if more decimal place digits are entered than
specified by the step value.
b) ENTERING ENUMERATION DATA

Enumeration settings have data values which are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A set is
comprised of two or more members.
For example, the selections available for ACCESS LEVEL are "Restricted", "Command",
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted "Setting", and "Factory Service". 4
Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE key displays the next selection while
the VALUE key displays the previous selection.
ACCESS LEVEL: If the ACCESS LEVEL needs to be "Setting", press the VALUE keys until the
Setting proper selection is displayed. Press the key at any time for the context sensitive
help messages.
NEW SETTING Changes are not registered by the relay until the key is pressed. Pressing
HAS BEEN STORED stores the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirma-
tion of the storing process.
c) ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT

Text settings have data values which are fixed in length, but user-defined in character. They may be comprised of upper
case letters, lower case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters.
In order to allow the relay to be customized for specific applications, there are several places where text messages may be
programmed. One example is the MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD. To enter alphanumeric text messages, the following proce-
dure should be followed:
Example: to enter the text, “Breaker #1”
1. Press to enter text edit mode.
2. Press the VALUE or VALUE key until the character 'B' appears; press to advance the cursor to the next
position.
3. Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1.
4. Press to store the text.
5. If you have any problem, press the key to view the context sensitive help. Flash messages will sequentially
appear for several seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, the key displays how to edit and store
a new value.

d) ACTIVATING THE RELAY
RELAY SETTINGS: When the relay is powered up, the TROUBLE indicator will be on, the IN SERVICE
Not Programmed indicator off, and this message displayed. This indicates that the relay is in the "Not
Programmed" state and is safeguarding (output relays blocked) against the installation
of a relay whose settings have not been entered. This message will remain until the
relay is explicitly put in the "Programmed" state.
To change the RELAY SETTINGS: "Not Programmed" mode to "Programmed", proceed as follows:
1. Press the key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP message
appears on the display.
2. Press the MESSAGE key until the PASSWORD SECURITY message appears on the display.
3. Press the MESSAGE key until the INSTALLATION message appears on the display.
4. Press the MESSAGE key until the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message is displayed.
SETTINGS
4
SETTINGS PASSWORD
PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY
DISPLAY
PROPERTIES
COMMUNICATIONS
USER-DEFINABLE
DISPLAYS
INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
5. After the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message appears on the display, press the VALUE key or the VALUE
key to change the selection to "Programmed".
6. Press the key.
RELAY SETTINGS: RELAY SETTINGS: NEW SETTING

Not Programmed Programmed HAS BEEN STORED
7. When the "NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED" message appears, the relay will be in "Programmed" state and the
IN SERVICE indicator will turn on.
e) ENTERING INITIAL PASSWORDS

To enter the initial SETTING (or COMMAND) PASSWORD, proceed as follows:
1. Press the key until the 'SETTINGS' header flashes momentarily and the ‘SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP’ mes-
sage appears on the display.
2. Press the MESSAGE key until the ‘ACCESS LEVEL:’ message appears on the display.

3. Press the MESSAGE key until the ‘CHANGE SETTING (or COMMAND) PASSWORD:’ message appears on the
display.
SETTINGS

CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
ENCRYPTED COMMAND
PASSWORD: ----------
ENCRYPTED SETTING
4. After the 'CHANGE...PASSWORD' message appears on the display, press the VALUE
change the selection to Yes.
key or the VALUE key to
4
5. Press the key and the display will prompt you to 'ENTER NEW PASSWORD'.
6. Type in a numerical password (up to 10 characters) and press the key.
7. When the 'VERIFY NEW PASSWORD' is displayed, re-type in the same password and press .
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING ENTER NEW

PASSWORD: Yes PASSWORD: ##########
VERIFY NEW
PASSWORD: ##########
NEW PASSWORD
HAS BEEN STORED
8. When the 'NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED' message appears, your new SETTING (or COMMAND) PASS-
WORD will be active.
f) CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD

To change an existing password, follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception. A message will
prompt you to type in the existing password (for each security level) before a new password can be entered.
In the event that a password has been lost (forgotten), submit the corresponding Encrypted Password from the PASS-
WORD SECURITY menu to the Factory for decoding.


5 SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW 5.1.1 SETTINGS MAIN MENU
SETTINGS PASSWORD
See page 5-7.
PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY
DISPLAY
See page 5-8.
PROPERTIES
COMMUNICATIONS
See page 5-8.
MODBUS USER MAP

See page 5-15.
REAL TIME
See page 5-15.
CLOCK
OSCILLOGRAPHY
See page 5-16.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
See page 5-18.
LEDS
FLEX STATE
See page 5-19.
PARAMETERS
USER-DEFINABLE
See page 5-19.
DISPLAYS
5
INSTALLATION
See page 5-21.
SETTINGS AC INPUTS
See page 5-22.
SYSTEM SETUP
POWER SYSTEM
See page 5-23.
SIGNAL SOURCES
See page 5-24.
MOTOR
See page 5-26.
FLEXCURVES
See page 5-28.
SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC
See page 5-41.
FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
FLEXLOGIC
See page 5-41.
TIMERS
FLEXELEMENTS
See page 5-42.
SETTINGS SETTING GROUP 1

See page 5-46.
GROUPED ELEMENTS
SETTING GROUP 2

5.1 OVERVIEW 5 SETTINGS
SETTING GROUP 8
SETTINGS SETTING GROUPS

See page 5-82.
CONTROL ELEMENTS
DIGITAL ELEMENTS
See page 5-83.
DIGITAL COUNTERS
See page 5-86.
SETTINGS CONTACT INPUTS

See page 5-88.
INPUTS / OUTPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
See page 5-90.
CONTACT OUTPUTS
See page 5-91.
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
See page 5-92.
REMOTE DEVICES
5 See page 5-92.
REMOTE INPUTS
See page 5-93.
REMOTE OUTPUTS
See page 5-94.
DNA BIT PAIRS
REMOTE OUTPUTS
See page 5-95.
UserSt BIT PAIRS
RESETTING
See page 5-95.
SETTINGS DCMA INPUTS

See page 5-96.
TRANSDUCER I/O
RTD INPUTS
See page 5-97.
SETTINGS TEST MODE

See page 5-98.
TESTING FUNCTION:
FORCE CONTACT
See page 5-98.
INPUTS
FORCE CONTACT
See page 5-98.
OUTPUTS
RESET THERMAL MODEL?
See page 5-98.

5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS
In the design of UR relays, the term “element” is used to describe a feature that is based around a comparator. The com-
parator is provided with an input (or set of inputs) that is tested against a programmed setting (or group of settings) to deter-
mine if the input is within the defined range that will set the output to logic 1, also referred to as “setting the flag”. A single
comparator may make multiple tests and provide multiple outputs; for example, the time overcurrent comparator sets a
Pickup flag when the current input is above the setting and sets an Operate flag when the input current has been at a level
above the pickup setting for the time specified by the time-current curve settings. All comparators, except the Digital Ele-
ment which uses a logic state as the input, use analog parameter actual values as the input.
Elements are arranged into two classes, GROUPED and CONTROL. Each element classed as a GROUPED element is
provided with eight alternate sets of settings, in setting groups numbered 1 through 8. The performance of a GROUPED
element is defined by the setting group that is active at a given time. The performance of a CONTROL element is indepen-
dent of the selected active setting group.
The main characteristics of an element are shown on the element scheme logic diagram. This includes the input(s), set-
tings, fixed logic, and the output operands that are generated (abbreviations used on scheme logic diagrams are defined in
Appendix F).
Some settings for current and voltage elements are specified in per-unit (pu) calculated quantities:
pu quantity = (actual quantity) / (base quantity)
• For current elements, the ‘base quantity’ is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT. Where the current
source is the sum of two CTs with different ratios, the ‘base quantity’ will be the common secondary or primary current
to which the sum is scaled (i.e. normalized to the larger of the 2 rated CT inputs). For example, if CT1 = 300 / 5 A and
CT2 = 100 / 5 A, then in order to sum these, CT2 is scaled to the CT1 ratio. In this case, the ‘base quantity’ will be 5 A
secondary or 300 A primary.
• For voltage elements, the ‘base quantity’ is the nominal secondary or primary voltage of the VT. 5
Some settings are common to most elements and are discussed below:
FUNCTION Setting
This setting programs the element to be operational when selected as "Enabled". The factory default is "Disabled". Once
programmed to "Enabled", any element associated with the Function becomes active and all options become available.
NAME Setting
This setting is used to uniquely identify the element.
SOURCE Setting
This setting is used to select the parameter or set of parameters to be monitored.
PICKUP Setting
For simple elements, this setting is used to program the level of the measured parameter above or below which the pickup
state is established. In more complex elements, a set of settings may be provided to define the range of the measured
parameters which will cause the element to pickup.
PICKUP DELAY Setting
This setting sets a time-delay-on-pickup, or on-delay, for the duration between the Pickup and Operate output states.
RESET DELAY Setting
This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-dropout, or off-delay, for the duration between the Operate output state and the
return to logic 0 after the input transits outside the defined pickup range.
BLOCK Setting
The default output operand state of all comparators is a logic 0 or “flag not set”. The comparator remains in this default
state until a logic 1 is asserted at the RUN input, allowing the test to be performed. If the RUN input changes to logic 0 at
any time, the comparator returns to the default state. The RUN input is used to supervise the comparator. The BLOCK input
is used as one of the inputs to RUN control.

TARGET Setting
This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When set to Disabled, no target message or illu-
mination of a faceplate LED indicator is issued upon operation of the element. When set to Self-Reset, the target message
and LED indication follow the Operate state of the element, and self-resets once the operate element condition clears.
When set to Latched, the target message and LED indication will remain visible after the element output returns to logic 0 -
until a RESET command is received by the relay.
EVENTS Setting
This setting is used to control whether the Pickup, Dropout or Operate states are recorded by the event recorder. When set
to Disabled, element pickup, dropout or operate are not recorded as events.
When set to Enabled, an event is created for:
• (Element) PKP (pickup)
• (Element) DPO (dropout)
• (Element) OP (operate)
The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state (logic 1) to the
dropout state (logic 0). This could happen when the element is in the operate state if the reset delay time is not ‘0’.
5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES
a) BACKGROUND
The M60 may be used on systems with breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations. In these applications, each of the two
three-phase sets of individual phase currents (one associated with each breaker) can be used as an input to a breaker fail-
ure element. The sum of both breaker phase currents and 3I_0 residual currents may be required for the circuit relaying
5 and metering functions. For a three-winding transformer application, it may be required to calculate watts and vars for each
of three windings, using voltage from different sets of VTs. All these requirements can be satisfied with a single UR relay,
equipped with sufficient CT and VT input channels, by selecting the parameter to be measured. A mechanism is provided
to specify the AC parameter (or group of parameters) used as the input to protection/control comparators and some meter-
ing elements.
Selection of the parameter(s) to be measured is partially performed by the design of a measuring element or protection/
control comparator, by identifying the type of parameter (fundamental frequency phasor, harmonic phasor, symmetrical
component, total waveform RMS magnitude, phase-phase or phase-ground voltage, etc.) to be measured. The user com-
pletes the selection process by selecting the instrument transformer input channels to be used and some of the parameters
calculated from these channels. The input parameters available include the summation of currents from multiple input
channels. For the summed currents of phase, 3I_0 and ground current, current from CTs with different ratios are adjusted to
a single ratio before the summation.
A mechanism called a "Source" configures the routing of input CT and VT channels to measurement sub-systems.
Sources, in the context of the UR family of relays, refer to the logical grouping of current and voltage signals such that one
Source contains all of the signals required to measure the load or fault in a particular power apparatus. A given Source may
contain all or some of the following signals: three-phase currents, single-phase ground current, three-phase voltages and
an auxiliary voltage from a single VT for checking for synchronism.
To illustrate the concept of Sources, as applied to current inputs only, consider the breaker-and-a-half scheme as illustrated
in the following figure. In this application, the current flows as shown by the labeled arrows. Some current flows through the
upper bus bar to some other location or power equipment, and some current flows into transformer winding 1. The current
into winding 1 of the power transformer is the phasor sum (or difference) of the currents in CT1 and CT2 (whether the sum
or difference is used, depends on the relative polarity of the CT connections). The same considerations apply to trans-
former winding 2. The protection elements need access to the net current for the protection of the transformer, but some
elements may need access to the individual currents from CT1 and CT2.

Figure 5–1: BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME

In conventional analog or electronic relays, the sum of the currents is obtained from an appropriate external connection of
all the CTs through which any portion of the current for the element being protected could flow. Auxiliary CTs are required to
perform ratio matching if the ratios of the primary CTs to be summed are not identical. In the UR platform, provisions have
been included for all the current signals to be brought to the UR device where grouping, ratio correction and summation are
applied internally via configuration settings.
A major advantage of using internal summation is that the individual currents are available to the protection device, as addi-
tional information to calculate a restraint current, for example, or to allow the provision of additional protection features that 5
operate on the individual currents such as breaker failure.
Given the flexibility of this approach, it becomes necessary to add configuration settings to the platform to allow the user to
select which sets of CT inputs will be added to form the net current into the protected device.
The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an internal Source. This Source can be given a specific name
through the settings, and becomes available to protection and metering elements in the UR platform. Individual names can
be given to each Source to help identify them more clearly for later use. For example, in the scheme shown in the
BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME above, the user would configure one Source to be the sum of CT1 and CT2 and could
name this Source as 'Wdg 1 Current'.
Once the Sources have been configured, the user has them available as selections for the choice of input signal for the pro-
tection elements and as metered quantities.
b) CT/VT MODULE CONFIGURATIONS

CT and VT input channels are contained in CT/VT modules in UR products. The type of input channel can be phase/neu-
tral/other voltage, phase/ground current, or sensitive ground current. The CT/VT modules calculate total waveform RMS
levels, fundamental frequency phasors, symmetrical components and harmonics for voltage or current, as allowed by the
hardware in each channel. These modules may calculate other parameters as directed by the CPU module.
A CT/VT module can contain up to eight input channels numbered 1 through 8. The numbering of channels in a CT/VT
module corresponds to the module terminal numbering of 1 through 8 and is arranged as follows; channels 1, 2, 3 and 4
are always provided as a group, hereafter called a "bank," and all four are either current or voltage, as are channels 5, 6, 7
and 8. Channels 1, 2, 3 and 5, 6, 7 are arranged as phase A, B and C respectively. Channels 4 and 8 are either another
current or voltage.
Banks are ordered sequentially from the block of lower-numbered channels to the block of higher-numbered channels, and
from the CT/VT module with the lowest slot position letter to the module with the highest slot position letter, as follows:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER -->
CT/VT MODULE 1 CT/VT MODULE 2 CT/VT MODULE 3
< bank 1 > < bank 3 > < bank 5 >
< bank 2 > < bank 4 > < bank 6 >

The UR platform allows for a maximum of three sets of three-phase voltages and six sets of three-phase currents. The
result of these restrictions leads to the maximum number of CT/VT modules in a chassis to three. The maximum number of
Sources is six. A summary of CT/VT module configurations is shown below.
ITEM MAXIMUM NUMBER
CT/VT Module 3
CT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 ground channel) 6
VT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 auxiliary channel) 3
c) CT/VT INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

Upon startup of the relay, configuration settings for every bank of current or voltage input channels in the relay are automat-
ically generated, as determined from the order code. Within each bank, a channel identification label is automatically
assigned to each bank of channels in a given product. The ‘bank’ naming convention is based on the physical location of
the channels, required by the user to know how to connect the relay to external circuits. Bank identification consists of the
letter designation of the slot in which the CT/VT module is mounted as the first character, followed by numbers indicating
the channel, either 1 or 5.
For three-phase channel sets, the number of the lowest numbered channel identifies the set. For example, F1 represents
the three-phase channel set of F1/F2/F3, where F is the slot letter and 1 is the first channel of the set of three channels.
Upon startup, the CPU configures the settings required to characterize the current and voltage inputs, and will display them
in the appropriate section in the sequence of the banks (as described above) as shown below for a maximum configuration:
F1, F5, M1, M5, U1, U5.
The above section explains how the input channels are identified and configured to the specific application instrument
transformers and the connections of these transformers. The specific parameters to be used by each measuring element
5 and comparator, and some actual values are controlled by selecting a specific Source. The Source is a group of current
and voltage input channels selected by the user to facilitate this selection. With this mechanism, a user does not have to
make multiple selections of voltage and current for those elements that need both parameters, such as a distance element
or a watt calculation. It also gathers associated parameters for display purposes.
The basic idea of arranging a Source is to select a point on the power system where information is of interest. An applica-
tion example of the grouping of parameters in a Source is a transformer winding, on which a three phase voltage is mea-
sured, and the sum of the currents from CTs on each of two breakers is required to measure the winding current flow.

5 SETTINGS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.1 PASSWORD SECURITY
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP PASSWORD SECURITY
PASSWORD ACCESS LEVEL: Range: Restricted, Command, Setting,

SECURITY Restricted Factory Service (for factory use only)
CHANGE COMMAND Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
PASSWORD: No
ENCRYPTED COMMAND Range: 0 to 9999999999
MESSAGE Note: ---------- indicates no password
ENCRYPTED SETTING Range: 0 to 9999999999
MESSAGE Note: ---------- indicates no password
The M60 provides two user levels of password security: Command and Setting. Operations under password supervision
are as follows:
COMMAND:
• Changing the state of virtual inputs
• Clearing the event records
• Clearing the oscillography records
SETTING:
• Changing any setting.
5
The Command and Setting passwords are defaulted to "Null" when the relay is shipped from the factory. When a password
is set to "Null", the password security feature is disabled.
Programming a password code is required to enable each access level. A password consists of 1 to 10 numerical charac-
ters. When a CHANGE ... PASSWORD setting is set to "Yes", the following message sequence is invoked:
1. ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________
2. VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________
3. NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED
To gain write access to a "Restricted" setting, set ACCESS LEVEL to "Setting" and then change the setting, or attempt to
change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the password is correctly entered, access
will be allowed. If no keys are pressed for longer than 30 minutes or control power is cycled, accessibility will automatically
revert to the "Restricted" level.
If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory service department with the corresponding ENCRYPTED
PASSWORD.
If the SETTING password and COMMAND password are set the same, the one password will allow access to
commands and settings.
NOTE

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES
DISPLAY FLASH MESSAGE Range: 0.5 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1

PROPERTIES TIME: 1.0 s
DEFAULT MESSAGE Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 300 s
DEFAULT MESSAGE Range: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%
MESSAGE
INTENSITY: 25 %
Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the display properties settings.
Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several seconds in response to certain
key presses during setting programming. These messages override any normal messages. The time a flash message
remains on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates. If no keys are pressed for a period of time,
the relay automatically displays a default message. This time can be modified to ensure messages remain on the screen
long enough during programming or reading of actual values.
To extend the life of the phosphor in the vacuum fluorescent display, the brightness can be attenuated when displaying
default messages. When interacting with the display using the keypad, the display always operates at full brightness.
a) SERIAL PORTS
5 PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS SERIAL PORTS
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL PORTS
RS485 COM1 BAUD Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600,
MESSAGE 38400, 57600, 115200. Only active if CPU 9A is ordered.
RATE: 19200
RS485 COM1 PARITY: Range: None, Odd, Even

MESSAGE Only active if CPU Type 9A is ordered
None
RS485 COM1 RESPONSE Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10

MESSAGE Only active if CPU Type 9A is ordered
MIN TIME: 0 ms
RS485 COM2 BAUD Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600,
MESSAGE 38400, 57600, 115200
RATE: 19200
RS485 COM2 PARITY: Range: None, Odd, Even

MESSAGE
None
RS485 COM2 RESPONSE Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10

MESSAGE
MIN TIME: 0 ms
The M60 is equipped with up to 3 independent serial communication ports. The faceplate RS232 port is intended for local
use and has fixed parameters of 19200 baud and no parity. The rear COM1 port type will depend on the CPU ordered: it
may be either an Ethernet or an RS485 port. The rear COM2 port is RS485. The RS485 ports have settings for baud rate
and parity. It is important that these parameters agree with the settings used on the computer or other equipment that is
connected to these ports. Any of these ports may be connected to a personal computer running URPC. This software is
used for downloading or uploading setting files, viewing measured parameters, and upgrading the relay firmware to the lat-
est version. A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC or PC using the RS485 ports.
For each RS485 port, the minimum time before the port will transmit after receiving data from a host can be
set. This feature allows operation with hosts which hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time after
NOTE
each transmission.

b) NETWORK
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK
IP ADDRESS: Range: Standard IP address format

MESSAGE Only active if CPU Type 9C or 9D is ordered.
0.0.0.0
SUBNET IP MASK: Range: Standard IP address format

0.0.0.0
GATEWAY IP ADDRESS: Range: Standard IP address format

0.0.0.0
OSI NETWORK Note: Press the MESSAGE key to enter the OSI NETWORK
MESSAGE ADDRESS. Only active if CPU Type 9C or 9D is ordered.
ADDRESS (NSAP)
ETHERNET OPERATION Range: Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex

MODE: Half-Duplex
ETHERNET PRI LINK Range: Disabled, Enabled

MONITOR: Disabled
ETHERNET SEC LINK Range: Disabled, Enabled

MONITOR: Disabled
5
The Network setting messages will appear only if the UR is ordered with an Ethernet card. The Ethernet Primary and Sec-
ondary Link Monitor settings allow internal self test targets to be triggered when either the Primary or Secondary ethernet
fibre link status indicates a connection loss. The IP addresses are used with DNP/Network, Modbus/TCP, MMS/UCA2, IEC
60870-5-104, TFTP, and HTTP (web server) protocols. The NSAP address is used with the MMS/UCA2 protocol over the
OSI (CLNP/TP4) stack only. Each network protocol has a setting for the TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER. These settings are used
only in advanced network configurations. They should normally be left at their default values, but may be changed if
required; for example, to allow access to multiple URs behind a router. By setting a different TCP/UCP Port Number for a
given protocol on each UR, the router can map the URs to the same external IP address. The client software (URPC, for
example) must be configured to use the correct port number if these settings are used.
Do not set more than one protocol to use the same TCP/UDP Port Number, as this will result in unreliable
operation of those protocols.
WARNING
When the NSAP address, any TCP/UDP Port Number, or any User Map setting (when used with DNP) is changed,
it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (OFF/ON).
NOTE

c) MODBUS PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS PROTOCOL
COMMUNICATIONS
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MODBUS SLAVE Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
ADDRESS: 254
MODBUS TCP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
NUMBER: 502
The serial communication ports utilize the Modbus protocol, unless configured for DNP operation (see DNP PROTOCOL
below). This allows the URPC program to be used. UR relays operate as Modbus slave devices only. When using Modbus
protocol on the RS232 port, the M60 will respond regardless of the MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS programmed. For the RS485
ports each M60 must have a unique address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address which all Modbus slave
devices listen to. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same address or conflicts
resulting in errors will occur. Generally, each device added to the link should use the next higher address starting at 1.
Refer to Appendix B for more information on the Modbus protocol.
d) DNP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP PROTOCOL
COMMUNICATIONS
5
DNP PROTOCOL
DNP PORT: Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485, FRONT PANEL -
MESSAGE RS232, NETWORK
NONE
DNP ADDRESS: Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
255
DNP NETWORK Note: Press the MESSAGE key to enter the DNP NETWORK
MESSAGE CLIENT ADDRESSES
CLIENT ADDRESSES
DNP TCP/UDP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
NUMBER: 20000
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: Enabled, Disabled

MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Disabled
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: 0 to 60 s in steps of 1

MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 5 s
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: 1 to 255 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
MAX RETRIES: 10
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
DEST ADDRESS: 1
USER MAP FOR DNP Range: Enabled, Disabled

MESSAGE
ANALOGS: Disabled
NUMBER OF SOURCES Range: 1 to 6 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
IN ANALOG LIST: 1

DNP CURRENT SCALE Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000

MESSAGE
FACTOR: 1
DNP VOLTAGE SCALE Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000

MESSAGE
FACTOR: 1
DNP CURRENT SCALE Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000

MESSAGE
FACTOR: 1
DNP POWER SCALE Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000

MESSAGE
FACTOR: 1
DNP ENERGY SCALE Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000

MESSAGE
FACTOR: 1
DNP OTHER SCALE Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000

MESSAGE
FACTOR: 1
DNP CURRENT DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP VOLTAGE DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP POWER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP ENERGY DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
5
DNP OTHER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DEADBAND: 30000
DNP TIME SYNC IIN Range: 1 to 10080 min. in steps of 1

MESSAGE
PERIOD: 1440 min
DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT Range: 30 to 2048 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
SIZE: 240
DNP BINARY INPUTS

MESSAGE
USER MAP
The M60 supports the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0. The M60 can be used as a DNP slave device con-
nected to a single DNP master (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the M60 maintains one set of
DNP data change buffers and connection information, only one DNP master should actively communicate with the M60 at
one time. The DNP PORT setting is used to select the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol. DNP can be
assigned to a single port only. Once DNP is assigned to a serial port, the Modbus protocol is disabled on that port. Note that
COM1 can be used only in non-ethernet UR relays. When this setting is set to NETWORK, the DNP protocol can be used
over either TCP/IP or UDP/IP. Refer to Appendix E for more information on the DNP protocol.
The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave address. This number identifies the M60 on a DNP communications link. Each
DNP slave should be assigned a unique address.
The DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS settings can force the M60 to respond to a maximum of five specific DNP masters.
The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION should be set to "Disabled" for RS485 applications since there is no collision avoid-
ance mechanism.
The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT sets the time the M60 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited response.
The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES setting determines the number of times the M60 will retransmit an unsolicited
response without receiving a confirmation from the master. A value of 255 allows infinite re-tries.
The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS setting is the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP
address to which unsolicited responses are sent is determined by the M60 from either the current DNP TCP connection or
the most recent UDP message.

The USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting allows the large pre-defined Analog Inputs points list to be replaced by the much
smaller Modbus User Map. This can be useful for users wishing to read only selected Analog Input points from the M60.
See Appendix E for more information
The NUMBER OF SOURCES IN ANALOG LIST setting allows the selection of the number of current/voltage source values that
are included in the Analog Inputs points list. This allows the list to be customized to contain data for only the sources that
are configured. This setting is relevant only when the User Map is not used.
The DNP SCALE FACTOR settings are numbers used to scale Analog Input point values. These settings group the M60 Ana-
log Input data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the scale factor for all Analog
Input points of that type. For example, if the DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR setting is set to a value of 1000, all DNP Analog
Input points that are voltages will be returned with values 1000 times smaller (e.g. a value of 72000 V on the M60 will be
returned as 72). These settings are useful when Analog Input values must be adjusted to fit within certain ranges in DNP
masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (i.e. the value will be 10 times larger).
The DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND settings are the values used by the M60 to determine when to trigger unsolicited responses
containing Analog Input data. These settings group the M60 Analog Input data into types: current, voltage, power, energy,
and other. Each setting represents the default deadband value for all Analog Input points of that type. For example, in order
to trigger unsolicited responses from the M60 when any current values change by 15 A, the DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEAD-
BAND setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands. DNP object 34 points
can be used to change deadband values, from the default, for each individual DNP Analog Input point. Whenever power is
removed and re-applied to the M60, the default deadbands will be in effect.
The DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD setting determines how often the "Need Time" Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the M60.
Changing this time allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required.
The DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large
fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to be
5 necessary which can provide for more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels.
The DNP BINARY INPUTS USER MAP setting allows for the creation of a custom DNP Binary Inputs points list. The default
DNP Binary Inputs list on the M60 contains 928 points representing various binary states (contact inputs and outputs, vir-
tual inputs and outputs, protection element states, etc.). If not all of these points are required in the DNP master, a custom
Binary Inputs points list can be created by selecting up to 58 blocks of 16 points. Each block represents 16 Binary Input
points. Block 1 represents Binary Input points 0 to 15, block 2 represents Binary Input points 16 to 31, block 3 represents
Binary Input points 32 to 47, etc. The minimum number of Binary Input points that can be selected is 16 (1 block). If all of
the BIN INPUT BLOCK X settings are set to "Not Used", the standard list of 928 points will be in effect. The M60 will form the
Binary Inputs points list from the BIN INPUT BLOCK X settings up to the first occurrence of a setting value of "Not Used".
When using either of the User Maps for DNP data points (Analog Inputs and/or Binary Inputs), for UR relays
with the ethernet option installed, check the "DNP Points Lists" M60 web page to ensure the desired points
NOTE
lists have been created. This web page can be viewed using Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator by
entering the M60 IP address to access the M60 "Main Menu", then by selecting the "Device Information
Menu", and then selecting the "DNP Points Lists".
e) UCA/MMS PROTCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS UCA/MMS PROTOCOL
COMMUNICATIONS
UCA/MMS PROTOCOL
DEFAULT GOOSE UPDATE Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1

MESSAGE See UserSt BIT PAIRS in the REMOTE OUTPUTS section.
TIME: 60 s
UCA LOGICAL DEVICE: Range: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters representing the name of

MESSAGE the UCA logical device.
UCADevice
UCA/MMS TCP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
NUMBER: 102

The M60 supports the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) protocol as specified by the Utility Communication
Architecture (UCA). UCA/MMS is supported over two protocol stacks: TCP/IP over ethernet and TP4/CLNP (OSI) over eth-
ernet. The M60 operates as a UCA/MMS server. Appendix C describes the UCA/MMS protocol implementation in more
detail. The REMOTE INPUTS and REMOTE OUTPUT sections of Chapter 5: SETTINGS describes the peer-to-peer
GOOSE message scheme.
The UCA LOGICAL DEVICE setting represents the name of the MMS domain (UCA logical device) in which all UCA
objects are located.
f) WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
COMMUNICATIONS
WEB SERVER
HTTP PROTOCOL
HTTP TCP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
NUMBER: 80
The M60 contains an embedded web server. That is, the M60 is capable of transferring web pages to a web browser such
as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator. This feature is available only if the M60 has the ethernet option
installed. The web pages are organized as a series of menus that can be accessed starting at the M60 "Main Menu". Web
pages are available showing DNP and IEC 60870-5-104 points lists, Modbus registers, Event Records, Fault Reports, etc.
The web pages can be accessed by connecting the UR and a computer to an ethernet network. The Main Menu will be dis-
played in the web browser on the computer simply by entering the IP address of the M60 into the "Address" box on the web
browser. 5
g) TFTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS TFTP PROTOCOL
COMMUNICATIONS
TFTP PROTOCOL
TFTP MAIN UDP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
NUMBER: 69
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
NUMBER: 0
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
NUMBER: 0
The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) can be used to transfer files from the UR over a network. The M60 operates as a
TFTP server. TFTP client software is available from various sources, including Microsoft Windows NT. The file "dir.txt" is an
ASCII text file that can be transferred from the M60. This file contains a list and description of all the files available from the
UR (event records, oscillography, etc.).

h) IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
COMMUNICATIONS
IEC 60870-5-104
PROTOCOL
IEC 60870-5-104 Range: Enabled, Disabled

MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Disabled
IEC TCP PORT Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
NUMBER: 2404
IEC COMMON ADDRESS Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
OF ASDU: 0
IEC CYCLIC DATA Range: 1 to 65535 s in steps of 1

MESSAGE
PERIOD: 60 s
NUMBER OF SOURCES Range: 1 to 6 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
IN MMENC1 LIST: 1
IEC CURRENT DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30
IEC VOLTAGE DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
5 THRESHOLD: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
IEC POWER DEFAULT
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC ENERGY DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC OTHER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 30000
The M60 supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. The M60 can be used as an IEC 60870-5-104 slave device connected to
a single master (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the M60 maintains one set of IEC 60870-5-104
data change buffers, only one master should actively communicate with the M60 at one time. For situations where a sec-
ond master is active in a "hot standby" configuration, the UR supports a second IEC 60870-5-104 connection providing the
standby master sends only IEC 60870-5-104 Test Frame Activation messages for as long as the primary master is active.
The NUMBER OF SOURCES IN MMENC1 LIST setting allows the selection of the number of current/voltage source values that
are included in the M_ME_NC_1 (Measured value, short floating point) Analog points list. This allows the list to be custom-
ized to contain data for only the sources that are configured.
The IEC ------- DEFAULT THRESHOLD settings are the values used by the UR to determine when to trigger spontaneous
responses containing M_ME_NC_1 analog data. These settings group the UR analog data into types: current, voltage,
power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the default threshold value for all M_ME_NC_1 analog points of that
type. For example, in order to trigger spontaneous responses from the UR when any current values change by 15 A, the
IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the dead-
bands. P_ME_NC_1 (Parameter of measured value, short floating point value) points can be used to change threshold val-
ues, from the default, for each individual M_ME_NC_1 analog point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the UR,
the default thresholds will be in effect.
The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols can not be used at the same time. When the IEC 60870-5-104
FUNCTION setting is set to Enabled, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed
NOTE
it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (OFF/ON).

5.2.4 MODBUS® USER MAP
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP MODBUS USER MAP
MODBUS USER MAP ADDRESS 1: 0 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

VALUE: 0
↓
↓
ADDRESS 256: 0 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
VALUE: 0
The Modbus® User Map provides up to 256 registers with read only access. To obtain a value for a memory map address,
enter the desired location in the ADDRESS line (the value must be converted from hex to decimal format). The correspond-
ing value from the is displayed in the VALUE line. A value of “0” in subsequent register ADDRESS lines automatically return
values for the previous ADDRESS lines incremented by “1”. An address value of “0” in the initial register means “none” and
values of “0” will be displayed for all registers.
Different ADDRESS values can be entered as required in any of the register positions.
These settings can also be used with the DNP protocol. See the DNP ANALOG INPUT POINTS section in
Appendix E for details.
NOTE
5.2.5 REAL TIME CLOCK
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP REAL TIME CLOCK
REAL TIME
CLOCK
IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE:
None
Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated
5
The date and time for the relay clock can be synchronized to other relays using an IRIG-B signal. It has the same accuracy
as an electronic watch, approximately ±1 minute per month.
An IRIG-B signal may be connected to the relay to synchronize the clock to a known time base and to other relays. If an
IRIG-B signal is used, only the current year needs to be entered.
See also the COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME menu for manually setting the relay clock.

5.2.6 OSCILLOGRAPHY
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY
OSCILLOGRAPHY
NUMBER OF RECORDS: Range: 1 to 64 in steps of 1

15
TRIGGER MODE: Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected

Automatic Overwrite
TRIGGER POSITION: Range: 0 to 100 in steps of 1

50%
TRIGGER SOURCE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

Off
AC INPUT WAVEFORMS: Range: Off; 8, 16, 32, 64 samples/cycle

16 samples/cycle
DIGITAL CHANNELS Range: 2 to 63 channels
DIGITAL CHANNEL 2: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

Off
↓
5 DIGITAL CHANNEL 63: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Off
ANALOG CHANNELS Range: 1 to 16 channels
ANALOG CHANNEL 1: Range: Off, any analog Actual Value parameter

Off
↓
ANALOG CHANNEL 16: Range: Off, any analog Actual Value parameter
Off
Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger.
Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic™ operand. Multiple oscillography records may be cap-
tured simultaneously.
The NUMBER OF RECORDS is selectable, but the number of cycles captured in a single record varies considerably based on
other factors such as sample rate and the number of operational CT/VT modules. There is a fixed amount of data storage
for oscillography; the more data captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record. See the ACTUAL VALUES

RECORDS OSCILLOGRAPHY menu to view the number of cycles captured per record. The following table provides sam-
ple configurations with corresponding cycles/record.
Table 5–1: OSCILLOGRAPHY CYCLES/RECORD EXAMPLE
# RECORDS # CT/VTS SAMPLE # DIGITALS # ANALOGS CYCLES/
RATE RECORD
1 1 8 0 0 1872.0
1 1 16 16 0 1685.0
8 1 16 16 0 266.0
8 1 16 16 4 219.5
8 2 16 16 4 93.5
8 2 16 64 16 93.5
8 2 32 64 16 57.6
8 2 64 64 16 32.3
32 2 64 64 16 9.5
A new record may automatically overwrite an older record if TRIGGER MODE is set to "Automatic Overwrite".
The TRIGGER POSITION is programmable as a percent of the total buffer size (e.g. 10%, 50%, 75%, etc.). A trigger position
of 25% consists of 25% pre- and 75% post-trigger data.
The TRIGGER SOURCE is always captured in oscillography and may be any FlexLogic™ parameter (element state, contact
input, virtual output, etc.). The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per cycle.
The AC INPUT WAVEFORMS setting determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals (i.e. current and voltage) are
stored. Reducing the sampling rate allows longer records to be stored. This setting has no effect on the internal sampling
rate of the relay which is always 64 samples per cycle, i.e. it has no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device.
5
An ANALOG CHANNEL setting selects the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscil-
lography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to ‘Off’ are ignored. The param-
eters available in a given relay are dependent on: (a) the type of relay, (b) the type and number of CT/VT hardware modules
installed, and (c) the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup, the relay will automati-
cally prepare the parameter list. Tables of all possible analog metering actual value parameters are presented in Appendix
A: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expedite the selec-
tion of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay
keypad/display - entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed.
All eight CT/VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file. The CT/VT module channels are named as follows:
<slot_letter><terminal_number>—<I or V><phase A, B, or C, or 4th input>
The fourth current input in a bank is called IG, and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX. For example, F2-IB des-
ignates the IB signal on terminal 2 of the CT/VT module in slot F. If there are no CT/VT modules and Analog Input modules,
no analog traces will appear in the file; only the digital traces will appear.
When the NUMBER OF RECORDS setting is altered, all oscillography records will be CLEARED.
WARNING

5.2.7 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LEDS
TRIP & ALARM

LEDS
TRIP LED INPUT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

OFF
ALARM LED INPUT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

OFF
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LED 1
LED 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

Off
LED 1 TYPE: Range: Self-Reset, Latched

Self-Reset
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LED 2
↓
5 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LED 48
The TRIP and ALARM LEDs are on LED panel 1. Each indicator can be programmed to become illuminated when the
selected FlexLogic™ operand is in the logic 1 state. There are 48 amber LEDs across the relay faceplate LED panels.
Each of these indicators can be programmed to illuminate when the selected FlexLogic™ operand is in the logic 1 state.
• LEDs 1 through 24 inclusive are on LED panel 2; LEDs 25 through 48 inclusive are on LED panel 3.
Refer to the LED INDICATORS section in the HUMAN INTERFACES chapter for the locations of these indexed LEDs. This
menu selects the operands to control these LEDs. Support for applying user-customized labels to these LEDs is provided.
If the LED X TYPE setting is "Self-Reset" (default setting), the LED illumination will track the state of the selected LED oper-
and. If the LED X TYPE setting is ‘Latched’, the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button, from a
remote device via a communications channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state de-asserts.
Table 5–6: RECOMMENDED SETTINGS FOR LED PANEL 2 LABELS

SETTING PARAMETER SETTING PARAMETER
LED 1 Operand SETTING GROUP ACT 1 LED 13 Operand Off
LED 9 Operand Off LED 21 Operand Off
Refer to the CONTROL OF SETTINGS GROUPS example in the CONTROL ELEMENTS section for group activation.

5.2.8 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
FLEX STATE PARAMETER 1: Range: FlexLogic™ Operand

PARAMETERS Off
PARAMETER 2: Range: FlexLogic™ Operand
MESSAGE
Off
↓
↓
PARAMETER 256: Range: FlexLogic™ Operand

MESSAGE
Off
This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic™ operand states can be used for efficient moni-
toring. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic™ operand states in the relay. The state bits are packed
so that 16 states may be read out in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all of the states
which are of interest to the user are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers.
The state bits may be read out in the "Flex States" register array beginning at Modbus address 900 hex. 16 states are
packed into each register, with the lowest-numbered state in the lowest-order bit. There are 16 registers in total to accom-
modate the 256 state bits.
5.2.9 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
USER-DEFINABLE
5
DISPLAYS
USER DISPLAY 1
DISP 1 TOP LINE: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 1 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
0

MESSAGE
0

MESSAGE
0

MESSAGE
0
DISP 1 ITEM 5: Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE
0
USER DISPLAY 2
USER DISPLAY 8

This menu provides a mechanism for manually creating up to 8 user-defined information displays in a convenient viewing
sequence in the USER DISPLAYS menu (between the TARGETS and ACTUAL VALUES top-level menus). The sub-menus
facilitate text entry and Modbus Register data pointer options for defining the User Display content.
Also, any existing system display can be automatically copied into an available User Display by selecting the existing dis-
play and pressing the key. The display will then prompt “ADD TO USER DISPLAY LIST?”. After selecting ‘Yes’, a
message will indicate that the selected display has been added to the user display list. When this type of entry occurs, the
sub-menus are automatically configured with the proper content - this content may subsequently be edited.
This menu is used to enter user-defined text and/or user-selected Modbus-registered data fields into the particular User
Display. Each User Display consists of two 20-character lines (TOP & BOTTOM). The Tilde (~) character is used to mark
the start of a data field - the length of the data field needs to be accounted for. Up to 5 separate data fields (ITEM 1...5) can
be entered in a User Display - the nth Tilde (~) refers to the nth ITEM.
A User Display may be entered from the faceplate keypad or the URPC interface (preferred for convenience).
To enter text characters in the TOP LINE and BOTTOM LINE from the faceplate keypad:
1. Select the line to be edited.
2. Press the key to enter text edit mode.
3. Use either VALUE key to scroll through the characters. A space is selected like a character.
4. Press the key to advance the cursor to the next position.
5. Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed.
6. The key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help information.
7. Press the key to store the new settings.
5 To enter a numerical value for any of the 5 ITEMs (the decimal form of the selected Modbus Register Address) from the
faceplate keypad, use the number keypad. Use the value of ‘0’ for any ITEMs not being used. Use the key at any
selected system display (Setting, Actual Value, or Command) which has a Modbus address, to view the hexadecimal form
of the Modbus Register Address, then manually convert it to decimal form before entering it (URPC usage would conve-
niently facilitate this conversion).
Use the key to go to the USER DISPLAYS menu to view the user-defined content. The current user displays will
show in sequence, changing every 4 seconds. While viewing a User Display, press the key and then select the ‘Yes”
option to remove the display from the user display list. Use the key again to exit the USER DISPLAYS menu.
EXAMPLE USER DISPLAY SETUP AND RESULT:
USER DISPLAY 1 DISP 1 TOP LINE: Shows user-defined text with first Tilde marker.
Current X ~ A
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: Shows user-defined text with second Tilde marker.
MESSAGE
Current Y ~ A
DISP 1 ITEM 1: Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus Register
MESSAGE Address, corresponding to first Tilde marker.
6016
DISP 1 ITEM 2: Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus
MESSAGE Register Address, corresponding to 2nd Tilde marker.
6357
DISP 1 ITEM 3: This item is not being used - there is no corresponding
MESSAGE Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
0
MESSAGE Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
0
MESSAGE
0 Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
USER DISPLAYS Current X 0.850 A Shows the resultant display content.

→
Current Y 0.327 A

5.2.10 INSTALLATION
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS: Range: Not Programmed, Programmed

Not Programmed
RELAY NAME: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Relay-1
To safeguard against the installation of a relay whose settings have not been entered, the unit will not allow signaling of any
output relay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to "Programmed". This setting is defaulted to "Not Programmed" when the relay
leaves the factory. The UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self-test error message is displayed automatically until the relay is put
into the Programmed state.
The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will appear on generated reports. This name
is also used to identify specific devices which are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the Ethernet com-
munications channel using the UCA2/MMS protocol.

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETTINGS
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP 5.3.1 AC INPUTS
a) CURRENT BANKS
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS CURRENT BANK X1
Because energy parameters are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately
prior to changing CT characteristics.
NOTE
CURRENT BANK X1 PHASE CT X1 Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1

PRIMARY: 1 A
PHASE CT X1 Range: 1 A, 5 A
MESSAGE
SECONDARY: 1 A
GROUND CT X1 Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
MESSAGE
PRIMARY: 1 A
GROUND CT X1 Range: 1 A, 5 A
MESSAGE
SECONDARY: 1 A
‘X’ = F, M, or U. ‘F’, ‘M’, and ‘U’ are module slot position letters. See also the section INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES.
Up to 6 banks of phase/ground CTs can be set.
These settings are critical for all features that have settings dependent on current measurements. When the relay is
ordered, the CT module must be specified to include a standard or sensitive ground input. As the phase CTs are connected
in Wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (IA + IB + IC = Neutral Current = 3Io) is used as the
input for the neutral overcurrent elements. In addition, a zero sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the
5 circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the ground
CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive ground input may be used. In this
case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. For more details on CT connections, refer to the HARD-
WARE chapter.
Enter the rated CT primary current values. For both 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, the entry would be 1000. For correct opera-
tion, the CT secondary rating must match the setting (which must also correspond to the specific CT connections used).
If CT inputs (banks of current) are to be summed as one source current, the following rule applies:
EXAMPLE:
SRC1 = F1 + F5 + U1
Where F1, F5, and U1 are banks of CTs with ratios of 500:1, 1000:1 and 800:1 respectively.
1 pu is the highest primary current. In this case, 1000 is entered and the secondary current from the 500:1 and 800:1 ratio
CTs will be adjusted to that which would be created by a 1000:1 CT before summation. If a protection element is set up to
act on SRC1 currents, then PKP level of 1 pu will operate on 1000 A primary.
The same rule will apply for sums of currents from CTs with different secondary taps (5 A and 1 A).

5 SETTINGS 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
b) VOLTAGE BANKS
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK X1
Because energy parameters are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately
prior to changing VT characteristics.
CAUTION
VOLTAGE BANK X5 PHASE VT X5 Range: Wye, Delta

CONNECTION: Wye
PHASE VT X5 Range: 50.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
PHASE VT X5 Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 1.00
MESSAGE
RATIO: 1.00 :1
AUXILIARY VT X5 Range: Vn, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca
MESSAGE
CONNECTION: Vag
AUXILIARY VT X5 Range: 50.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
AUXILIARY VT X5 Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 1.00
MESSAGE
RATIO: 1.00 :1
‘X’ = F, M, or U. ‘F’, ‘M’, and ‘U’ are module slot position letters. See also the INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES section.
Up to 3 banks of phase/auxiliary VTs can be set.
With VTs installed, the relay can be used to perform voltage measurements as well as power calculations. Enter the PHASE
VT xx CONNECTION made to the system as "Wye" or "Delta". An open-delta source VT connection would be entered as 5
"Delta". See the typical wiring diagram in the HARDWARE chapter for details.
The nominal Phase VT Secondary Voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when nominal volt-
age is applied to the VT primary.
NOTE
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400:120 Volt VT in a Delta connec-
tion, the secondary voltage would be 115, i.e. (13800 / 14400) × 120. For a Wye connection, the voltage value
entered must be the phase to neutral voltage which would be 115 / 3 = 66.4.
On a 14.4 kV system with a Delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the voltage
value entered would be 120, i.e. 14400 / 120.
5.3.2 POWER SYSTEM
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM
POWER SYSTEM NOMINAL FREQUENCY: Range: 25 to 60 Hz in steps of 1

60 Hz
PHASE ROTATION: Range: ABC, ACB
MESSAGE
ABC
FREQUENCY AND PHASE Range: SRC 1, SRC 2,..., SRC 6
MESSAGE
REFERENCE: SRC 1
FREQUENCY TRACKING: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Enabled
The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system frequency
cannot be measured from available signals. This may happen if the signals are not present or are heavily distorted. Before
reverting to the nominal frequency, the frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid frequency measurement for a safe
period of time while waiting for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay.

The phase sequence of the power system is required to properly calculate sequence components and power parameters.
The PHASE ROTATION setting matches the power system phase sequence. Note that this setting informs the relay of the
actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on the relay, labeled as A, B, and C, must be con-
nected to system phases A, B, and C for correct operation.
The FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting determines which signal source is used (and hence which AC signal) for
phase angle reference. The AC signal used is prioritized based on the AC inputs that are configured for the signal source:
phase voltages takes precedence, followed by auxiliary voltage, then phase currents, and finally ground current.
For three phase selection, phase A is used for angle referencing ( V ANGLE REF = VA ), while Clarke transformation of the
phase signals is used for frequency metering and tracking ( V FREQUENCY = ( 2 VA – V B – V C ) ⁄ 3 ) for better performance dur-
ing fault, open pole, and VT and CT fail conditions.
The phase reference and frequency tracking AC signals are selected based upon the Source configuration, regardless of
whether or not a particular signal is actually applied to the relay.
Phase angle of the reference signal will always display zero degrees and all other phase angles will be relative to this sig-
nal. If the pre-selected reference signal is not measurable at a given time, the phase angles are not referenced.
The phase angle referencing is done via a phase locked loop, which can synchronize independent UR relays if they have
the same AC signal reference. These results in very precise correlation of time tagging in the event recorder between differ-
ent UR relays provided the relays have an IRIG-B connection.
FREQUENCY TRACKING should only be set to "Disabled" in very unusual circumstances; consult the factory for spe-
cial variable-frequency applications.
NOTE
5.3.3 SIGNAL SOURCES
5 PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES SOURCE 1(6)
SOURCE 1 SOURCE 1 NAME: Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters

SRC 1
SOURCE 1 PHASE CT: Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,..., F1+F5+M1+M5+U1+U5
MESSAGE Only phase current inputs will be displayed.
None
SOURCE 1 GROUND CT: Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,..., F1+F5+M1+M5+U1+U5
MESSAGE Only ground current inputs will be displayed.
None
SOURCE 1 PHASE VT: Range: None, F1, F5, M1, M5, U1, U5
MESSAGE Only phase voltage inputs will be displayed.
None
SOURCE 1 AUX VT: Range: None, F1, F5, M1, M5, U1, U5
MESSAGE Only auxiliary voltage inputs will be displayed.
None
There are up to 6 identical Source setting menus available, numbered from 1 to 6.

"SRC 1" can be replaced by whatever name is defined by the user for the associated source.
‘F’, ‘U’, and ‘M’ are module slot position letters. The number following the letter represents either the first bank of four chan-
nels (1, 2, 3, 4) called ‘1’ or the second bank of four channels (5, 6, 7, 8) called ‘5’ in a particular CT/VT module. Refer to the
INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details.
It is possible to select the sum of any combination of CTs. The first channel displayed is the CT to which all others will be
referred. For example, the selection “F1+F5” indicates the sum of each phase from channels “F1” and “F5”, scaled to
whichever CT has the higher ratio. Selecting “None” hides the associated actual values.
The approach used to configure the AC Sources consists of several steps; first step is to specify the information about each
CT and VT input. For CT inputs, this is the nominal primary and secondary current. For VTs, this is the connection type,
ratio and nominal secondary voltage. Once the inputs have been specified, the configuration for each Source is entered,
including specifying which CTs will be summed together.

USER SELECTION OF AC PARAMETERS FOR COMPARATOR ELEMENTS:

CT/VT modules automatically calculate all current and voltage parameters that can be calculated from the inputs available.
Users will have to select the specific input parameters that are to be measured by every element, as selected in the ele-
ment settings. The internal design of the element specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for selec-
tion of the Source. In some elements where the parameter may be either fundamental or RMS magnitude, such as phase
time overcurrent, two settings are provided. One setting specifies the Source, the second selects between fundamental
phasor and RMS.
AC INPUT ACTUAL VALUES:
The calculated parameters associated with the configured voltage and current inputs are displayed in the current and volt-
age input sections of Actual Values. Only the phasor quantities associated with the actual AC physical input channels will
be displayed here. All parameters contained within a configured Source are displayed in the Sources section of Actual Val-
ues.
EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES:
An example of the use of Sources, with a relay with three CT/VT modules, is shown in the diagram below. A relay could
have the following hardware configuration:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER -->
CT/VT MODULE 1 CT/VT MODULE 2 CT/VT MODULE 3
CTs CTs VTs
CTs VTs ---
This configuration could be used on a two winding transformer, with one winding connected into a breaker-and-a-half sys-
tem. The following figure shows the arrangement of Sources used to provide the functions required in this application, and
the CT/VT inputs that are used to provide the data.
5
F1 DSP Bank
F5
Source 1 Source 2
Amps Amps
Source 3
U1 Volts Amps
A W Var 87T
A W Var 51P
Volts Amps
M1
M1 Source 4
M60 Motor Management Relay

M5
833709A1.CDR
Figure 5–2: EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES

5.3.4 MOTOR
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP MOTOR
MOTOR MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS Range: 0.050 to 1.000 pu in steps of 0.001
(FLA): 1.000 pu
MOTOR SERVICE Range: 1.00 to 1.25
MESSAGE
FACTOR: 1.00
MOTOR OFFLINE: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
EMERGENCY RESTART: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
MOTOR LINE SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2,..., SRC 6
MESSAGE
SRC 1
STATOR TEMP SENSOR Range: None, RTD Ip 1,..., RTD Ip N
MESSAGE Message will not appear if there are no RTDs
1: None
2: None
3: None
5 MESSAGE
4: None Message will not appear if there are no RTDs

5: None
6: None
These settings reflect the design and configuration of the motor that the relay will protect. Note that some protection ele-
ments are dependent on these settings for correct operation.
MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS:
This setting is used by the motor thermal and current unbalance elements.
MOTOR SERVICE FACTOR:
This setting is used to cutoff the Motor Thermal Model overload curve for service factor motors. The effect of this setting is
to eliminate the portion of the thermal overload curve between the motor full load current and the selected service factor
times the full load current.
MOTOR OFFLINE:
This input must be connected to the appropriate external contact. This setting is selected to a contact input that is con-
nected to an auxiliary contact of the breaker or contactor used to switch the motor. The motor is declared to be stopped
when the phase current falls below 2% of motor full load current (FLA) and the external contact indicates the switching
device is open.
For example, a circuit breaker 52b auxiliary contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is
closed. Therefore the setting should be ‘Cont Ip n On’. For a 52a contact the setting should be ‘Cont Ip n Off’.
Four mutually exclusive FlexLogic™ operands that reflect the motor state are generated by a state machine in the relay to
determine motor status, counting starts, etc. They are:
• MOTOR OFFLINE
• MOTOR STARTING
• MOTOR RUNNING
• MOTOR OVERLOAD

The state machine initially sets the Motor Offline operand, as the auxiliary contact reports the switching device is open and
motor current is less than 2% of FLA. When a phase current greater than 2% of FLA is detected, the Motor Starting oper-
and becomes true. After 1 second, if motor current is less than FLA times the Service Factor setting, the Motor Running
operand is set. (This accounts for the use of a soft-starter mechanism that slowly increases current such that it never
exceeds FLA × Service Factor during a starting sequence.) For normal starting, the Motor Starting operand remains set
until the current falls below FLA × Service Factor, at which time the Motor Running operand is set. If current rises above
FLA × Service Factor at that point, the Motor Overload operand is set. If current then falls below FLA × Service Factor, the
Motor Overload operand is reset and the Running operand is set. A Motor Offline state is determined per the logic noted
above.
EMERGENCY RESTART:
As the name implies, this feature should only be used in an emergency, as it defeats the purpose of the relay – PROTECT-
ING THE MOTOR. The input selected by this setting is used to reset the motor Thermal Capacity Used from its current
value to 0% so that a hot motor may be restarted. However, trip conditions that are still present (for example, hot RTD) will
still cause a trip. In the event of a real emergency, the Emergency Restart operand should remain at logic 1 until the emer-
gency is over. Any Emergency Restart operand transition will be logged as an event.
MOTOR LINE SOURCE:
This setting selects the Source connected to phase current transformers on the power system side of the stator winding.
STATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1(6):
These settings are used to select the RTDs that are measuring the motor stator winding, if available.

5.3.5 FLEXCURVES™
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP FLEXCURVES FLEXCURVE A
FLEXCURVE A FLEXCURVE A TIME AT Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1

0.00 xPKP: 0 ms
FlexCurves™ A and B have settings for entering times to Reset/Operate at the following pickup levels: 0.00 to 0.98 / 1.03
to 20.00. This data is converted into 2 continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points. To enter a custom
FlexCurve™, enter the Reset/Operate time (using the VALUE keys) for each selected pickup point (using the
MESSAGE keys) for the desired protection curve (A or B).
Table 5–9: FLEXCURVE™ TABLE

RESET TIME RESET TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME OPERATE TIME
MS MS MS MS MS MS
0.00 0.68 1.03 2.9 4.9 10.5
0.05 0.70 1.05 3.0 5.0 11.0
0.10 0.72 1.1 3.1 5.1 11.5
0.15 0.74 1.2 3.2 5.2 12.0
0.20 0.76 1.3 3.3 5.3 12.5
0.25 0.78 1.4 3.4 5.4 13.0
5 0.30 0.80 1.5 3.5 5.5 13.5
0.35 0.82 1.6 3.6 5.6 14.0
0.40 0.84 1.7 3.7 5.7 14.5
0.45 0.86 1.8 3.8 5.8 15.0
0.48 0.88 1.9 3.9 5.9 15.5
0.50 0.90 2.0 4.0 6.0 16.0
0.52 0.91 2.1 4.1 6.5 16.5
0.54 0.92 2.2 4.2 7.0 17.0
0.56 0.93 2.3 4.3 7.5 17.5
0.58 0.94 2.4 4.4 8.0 18.0
0.60 0.95 2.5 4.5 8.5 18.5
0.62 0.96 2.6 4.6 9.0 19.0
0.64 0.97 2.7 4.7 9.5 19.5
0.66 0.98 2.8 4.8 10.0 20.0
The relay using a given FlexCurve™ applies linear approximation for times between the user-entered
points. Special care must be applied when setting the two points that are close to the multiple of pickup of
NOTE
1, i.e. 0.98 pu and 1.03 pu. It is recommended to set the two times to a similar value; otherwise, the linear
approximation may result in undesired behavior for the operating quantity the is close to 1.00 pu.

5 SETTINGS 5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™ 5.4.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC™
To provide maximum flexibility to the user, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed
parameters. Logic upon which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from digital input signals through
elements or combinations of elements to digital outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic
through FlexLogic™. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs which it uses to produce analog and digital
outputs. The major sub-systems of a generic UR relay involved in this process are shown below.
Figure 5–3: UR ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW

The states of all digital signals used in the UR are represented by flags (or FlexLogic™ operands, which are described later
in this section). A digital "1" is represented by a 'set' flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an ele-
ment from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic™ equation, or to operate a contact output. The state of
the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. If a simple scheme
where a contact input is used to block an element is desired, this selection is made when programming the element. This
capability also applies to the other features that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes, and human
operators.
If more complex logic than presented above is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic™. For example, if it is desired to
have the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of
the phase time overcurrent element, the two control input states are programmed in a FlexLogic™ equation. This equation
ANDs the two control inputs to produce a "virtual output" which is then selected when programming the phase time overcur-
rent to be used as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can only be created by FlexLogic™ equations.
Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks, blocking, or
supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic™ minimizes the requirement for
auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.

5.4 FLEXLOGIC™ 5 SETTINGS
The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs is field programmable through the use
of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available
internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic™).
FlexLogic™ allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands. The
operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers and latches (with
set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of specified operands to be assigned as
inputs to specified operators to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual out-
put. Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a
seal-in or other type of feedback.
A FlexLogic™ equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1 or 0.
Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the combinations of parame-
ters to be used to set a VIRTUAL OUTPUT flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1 (= ON, i.e. flag set) or 0 (=
OFF, i.e. flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least 4 times every power system cycle.
Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances; e.g. contact and remote inputs. These types of oper-
ands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the faceplate display. The characteristics of the different
types of operands are listed in the table: FLEXLOGIC™ OPERAND TYPES.
Table 5–10: UR FLEXLOGIC™ OPERAND TYPES

OPERAND TYPE STATE EXAMPLE FORMAT CHARACTERISTICS
[INPUT IS ‘1’ (= ON) IF...]
Contact Input On Cont Ip On Voltage is presently applied to the input (external contact
closed).
Off Cont Ip Off Voltage is presently not applied to the input (external
contact open).
5 Contact Output
(type Form-A contact
Voltage On Cont Op 1 VOn Voltage exists across the contact.
only) Voltage Off Cont Op 1 VOff Voltage does not exists across the contact.
Current On Cont Op 1 IOn Current is flowing through the contact.
Current Off Cont Op 1 IOff Current is not flowing through the contact.
Element Pickup PHASE TOC1 PKP The tested parameter is presently above the pickup setting
(Analog) of an element which responds to rising values or below the
pickup setting of an element which responds to falling
values.
Dropout PHASE TOC1 DPO This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP
operand.
Operate PHASE TOC1 OP The tested parameter has been above/below the pickup
setting of the element for the programmed delay time, or
has been at logic 1 and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer
has not finished timing.
Block PH DIR1 BLK The output of the comparator is set to the block function.
Element Pickup Dig Element 1 PKP The input operand is at logic 1.
(Digital)
Dropout Dig Element 1 DPO This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP
operand.
Operate Dig Element 1 OP The input operand has been at logic 1 for the programmed
pickup delay time, or has been at logic 1 for this period and
is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing.
Element Higher than Counter 1 HI The number of pulses counted is above the set number.
(Digital Counter)
Equal to Counter 1 EQL The number of pulses counted is equal to the set number.
Lower than Counter 1 LO The number of pulses counted is below the set number.
Fixed On On Logic 1
Off Off Logic 0
Remote Input On REMOTE INPUT 1 On The remote input is presently in the ON state.
Virtual Input On Virt Ip 1 On The virtual input is presently in the ON state.
Virtual Output On Virt Op 1 On The virtual output is presently in the set state (i.e.
evaluation of the equation which produces this virtual
output results in a "1").

The operands available for this relay are listed alphabetically by types in the following table.
Table 5–11: M60 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS (Sheet 1 of 4)
OPERAND TYPE OPERAND SYNTAX OPERAND DESCRIPTION
ELEMENT: AMP UNBALANCE 1 PKP Amp Unbalance 1 element is picked up
Amp Unbalance AMP UNBALANCE 1 OP Amp Unbalance 1 element is operated
AMP UNBALANCE 1 DPO Amp Unbalance 1 element is dropped out
AMP UNBALANCE 2... Same set of operands as shown for AMP UNBALANCE 1
ELEMENT: AUX OV1 PKP Auxiliary Overvoltage element has picked up
Auxiliary OV AUX OV1 DPO Auxiliary Overvoltage element has dropped out
AUX OV1 OP Auxiliary Overvoltage element has operated
ELEMENT: AUX UV1 PKP Auxiliary Undervoltage element has picked up
Auxiliary UV AUX UV1 DPO Auxiliary Undervoltage element has dropped out
AUX UV1 OP Auxiliary Undervoltage element has operated
ELEMENT: Counter 1 HI Digital Counter 1 output is ‘more than’ comparison value
Digital Counter Counter 1 EQL Digital Counter 1 output is ‘equal to’ comparison value
Counter 1 LO Digital Counter 1 output is ‘less than’ comparison value
↓ ↓
Counter 8 HI Digital Counter 8 output is ‘more than’ comparison value
Counter 8 EQL Digital Counter 8 output is ‘equal to’ comparison value
Counter 8 LO Digital Counter 8 output is ‘less than’ comparison value
ELEMENT: Dig Element 1 PKP Digital Element 1 is picked up
Digital Element Dig Element 1 OP Digital Element 1 is operated
Dig Element 1 DPO Digital Element 1 is dropped out
↓ ↓
Dig Element 16 PKP Digital Element 16 is picked up
Dig Element 16 OP Digital Element 16 is operated
Dig Element 16 DPO Digital Element 16 is dropped out
ELEMENT: DIR POWER 1 STG1 PKP Stage 1 of the Directional Power element 1 has picked up
Sensitive Directional DIR POWER 1 STG2 PKP Stage 2 of the Directional Power element 1 has picked up
Power DIR POWER 1 STG1 DPO
DIR POWER 1 STG2 DPO
Stage 1 of the Directional Power element 1 has dropped out
Stage 2 of the Directional Power element 1 has dropped out 5
DIR POWER 1 STG1 OP Stage 1 of the Directional Power element 1 has operated
DIR POWER 1 STG2 OP Stage 2 of the Directional Power element 1 has operated
DIR POWER 1 PKP The Directional Power element has picked up
DIR POWER 1 DPO The Directional Power element has dropped out
DIR POWER 1 OP The Directional Power element has operated
DIR POWER 2 Same set of operands as DIR POWER 1
ELEMENT: FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP FlexElement 1 has picked up
FlexElements™ FLEXELEMENT 1 OP FlexElement 1 has operated
FLEXELEMENT 1 DPO FlexElement 1 has dropped out
↓ ↓
FLEXELEMENT 16 PKP FlexElement 16 has picked up
FLEXELEMENT 16 OP FlexElement 16 has operated
FLEXELEMENT 16 DPO FlexElement 16 has dropped out
ELEMENT: GROUND IOC1 PKP Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has picked up
Ground IOC GROUND IOC1 OP Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has operated
GROUND IOC1 DPO Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has dropped out
GROUND IOC2 Same set of operands as shown for GROUND IOC 1
ELEMENT: GROUND TOC1 PKP Ground Time Overcurrent 1 has picked up
Ground TOC GROUND TOC1 OP Ground Time Overcurrent 1 has operated
GROUND TOC1 DPO Ground Time Overcurrent 1 has dropped out
GROUND TOC2 Same set of operands as shown for GROUND TOC1
ELEMENT: MOTOR THERMAL PKP The Thermal Model element has picked up
Motor Thermal MOTOR THERMAL OP The Thermal Model element has operated
Model MOTOR THERMAL DPO The Thermal Model element has dropped out
MOTOR RESTART The motor has restarted
MOTOR START INHIBIT A motor start inhibit condition has occurred
MOTOR OFFLINE The motor is offline
MOTOR STARTING The motor is starting
MOTOR RUNNING The motor is running
MOTOR OVERLOAD A motor overload condition has occurred
ELEMENT: NEG SEQ OV PKP Negative Sequence Overvoltage element has picked up
Negative Sequence NEG SEQ OV DPO Negative Sequence Overvoltage element has dropped out
OV NEG SEQ OV OP Negative Sequence Overvoltage element has operated
ELEMENT: NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has picked up
Neutral IOC NEUTRAL IOC1 OP Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has operated
NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has dropped out
NEUTRAL IOC2 Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL IOC1


ELEMENT: NEUTRAL OV1 PKP Neutral Overvoltage element has picked up
Neutral OV NEUTRAL OV1 DPO Neutral Overvoltage element has dropped out
NEUTRAL OV1 OP Neutral Overvoltage element has operated
ELEMENT: PHASE IOC1 PKP At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has picked up
Phase IOC PHASE IOC1 OP At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has operated
PHASE IOC1 DPO At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC1 PKP A Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has picked up
PHASE IOC1 PKP B Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has picked up
PHASE IOC1 PKP C Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has picked up
PHASE IOC1 OP A Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has operated
PHASE IOC1 OP B Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has operated
PHASE IOC1 OP C Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has operated
PHASE IOC1 DPO A Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC1 DPO B Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC1 DPO C Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC2 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE IOC1
ELEMENT: PHASE OV1 PKP At least one phase of OV1 has picked up
Phase OV PHASE OV1 OP At least one phase of OV1 has operated
PHASE OV1 DPO At least one phase of OV1 has dropped out
PHASE OV1 PKP A Phase A of OV1 has picked up
PHASE OV1 PKP B Phase B of OV1 has picked up
PHASE OV1 PKP C Phase C of OV1 has picked up
PHASE OV1 OP A Phase A of OV1 has operated
PHASE OV1 OP B Phase B of OV1 has operated
PHASE OV1 OP C Phase C of OV1 has operated
PHASE OV1 DPO A Phase A of OV1 has dropped out
PHASE OV1 DPO B Phase B of OV1 has dropped out
PHASE OV1 DPO C Phase C of OV1 has dropped out
ELEMENT: PHASE TOC1 PKP At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has picked up
5 Phase TOC PHASE TOC1 OP
PHASE TOC1 DPO
At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has operated
At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC1 PKP A Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has picked up
PHASE TOC1 PKP B Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has picked up
PHASE TOC1 PKP C Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has picked up
PHASE TOC1 OP A Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has operated
PHASE TOC1 OP B Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has operated
PHASE TOC1 OP C Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has operated
PHASE TOC1 DPO A Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC1 DPO B Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC1 DPO C Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC2 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE TOC1
ELEMENT: PHASE UV1 PKP At least one phase of UV1 has picked up
Phase UV PHASE UV1 OP At least one phase of UV1 has operated
PHASE UV1 DPO At least one phase of UV1 has dropped out
PHASE UV1 PKP A Phase A of UV1 has picked up
PHASE UV1 PKP B Phase B of UV1 has picked up
PHASE UV1 PKP C Phase C of UV1 has picked up
PHASE UV1 OP A Phase A of UV1 has operated
PHASE UV1 OP B Phase B of UV1 has operated
PHASE UV1 OP C Phase C of UV1 has operated
PHASE UV1 DPO A Phase A of UV1 has dropped out
PHASE UV1 DPO B Phase B of UV1 has dropped out
PHASE UV1 DPO C Phase C of UV1 has dropped out
PHASE UV2 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE UV1
ELEMENT: SETTING GROUP ACT 1 Setting group 1 is active
Setting Group ↓ ↓
SETTING GROUP ACT 8 Setting group 8 is active


ELEMENT: STATOR DIFF OP At least one phase of Stator Differential has operated
Stator Differential STATOR DIFF PKP A Phase A of Stator Differential has picked up
STATOR DIFF PKP B Phase B of Stator Differential has picked up
STATOR DIFF PKP C Phase C of Stator Differential has picked up
STATOR DIFF OP A Phase A of Stator Differential has operated
STATOR DIFF OP B Phase B of Stator Differential has operated
STATOR DIFF OP C Phase C of Stator Differential has operated
STATOR DIFF DPO A Phase A of Stator Differential has dropped out
STATOR DIFF DPO B Phase B of Stator Differential has dropped out
STATOR DIFF DPO C Phase C of Stator Differential has dropped out
STATOR DIFF SAT A Phase A of Stator Differential is saturated
STATOR DIFF SAT B Phase B of Stator Differential is saturated
STATOR DIFF SAT C Phase C of Stator Differential is saturated
STATOR DIFF DIR A Phase A of Stator Differential Phase Comparison has been satisfied
STATOR DIFF DIR B Phase B of Stator Differential Phase Comparison has been satisfied
STATOR DIFF DIR C Phase C of Stator Differential Phase Comparison has been satisfied
FIXED OPERANDS Off Logic = 0. Does nothing and may be used as a delimiter in an equation list;
used as ‘Disable’ by other features.
On Logic = 1. Can be used as a test setting.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Cont Ip 1 On (will not appear unless ordered)
Contact Inputs Cont Ip 2 On (will not appear unless ordered)
↓ ↓
Cont Ip 1 Off (will not appear unless ordered)
Cont Ip 2 Off (will not appear unless ordered)
↓ ↓
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Cont Op 1 IOn (will not appear unless ordered)
Contact Outputs, Cont Op 2 IOn (will not appear unless ordered)
Current ↓ ↓
(from detector on
Form-A output only) Cont Op 1
Cont Op 2
↓
IOff
IOff
(will not appear unless ordered)
(will not appear unless ordered)
↓
5
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Cont Op 1 VOn (will not appear unless ordered)
Contact Outputs, Cont Op 2 VOn (will not appear unless ordered)
Voltage ↓ ↓
(from detector on
Form-A output only) Cont Op 1 VOff (will not appear unless ordered)
Cont Op 2 VOff (will not appear unless ordered)
↓ ↓
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: REMOTE INPUT 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Remote Inputs ↓ ↓
REMOTE INPUT 32 On Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virt Ip 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Virtual Inputs ↓ ↓
Virt Ip 32 On Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virt Op 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Virtual Outputs ↓ ↓
Virt Op 64 On Flag is set, logic=1
REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICE 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
REMOTE DEVICE 16 On Flag is set, logic=1
REMOTE DEVICE 1 Off Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
REMOTE DEVICE 16 Off Flag is set, logic=1


RESETTING RESET OP Reset command is operated (set by all 3 operands below)
RESET OP (COMMS) Communications source of the reset command
RESET OP (OPERAND) Operand source of the reset command
RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON) Reset key (pushbutton) source of the reset command
SELF- ANY MAJOR ERROR Any of the major self-test errors generated (major error)
DIAGNOSTICS ANY MINOR ERROR Any of the minor self-test errors generated (minor error)
ANY SELF-TEST Any self-test errors generated (generic, any error)
LOW ON MEMORY See description in the COMMANDS chapter.
WATCHDOG ERROR See description in the COMMANDS chapter.
PROGRAM ERROR See description in the COMMANDS chapter.
EEPROM DATA ERROR See description in the COMMANDS chapter.
PRI ETHERNET FAIL See description in the COMMANDS chapter.
SEC ETHERNET FAIL See description in the COMMANDS chapter.
BATTERY FAIL See description in the COMMANDS chapter.
SYSTEM EXCEPTION See description in the COMMANDS chapter.
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED See description in the COMMANDS chapter.
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH See description in the COMMANDS chapter.
FLEXLGC ERROR TOKEN See description in the COMMANDS chapter.
PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE See description in the COMMANDS chapter.
UNIT NOT CALIBRATED See description in the COMMANDS chapter.
NO DSP INTERRUPTS See description in the COMMANDS chapter.
DSP ERROR See description in the COMMANDS chapter.
IRIG-B FAILURE See description in the COMMANDS chapter.
REMOTE DEVICE OFFLINE See description in the COMMANDS chapter.
Some operands can be re-named by the user. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control feature, the ID
(identification) of contact inputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the user changes the default name/
ID of any of these operands, the assigned name will appear in the relay list of operands. The default names are shown in
the FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS table above.
5 The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated below, and the operators available in FlexLogic™ are listed in the FLEX-
LOGIC™ OPERATORS table.
Table 5–12: FLEXLOGIC™ GATE CHARACTERISTICS

GATES NUMBER OF INPUTS OUTPUT IS ‘1’ (= ON) IF...
NOT 1 input is ‘0’
OR 2 to 16 any input is ‘1’
AND 2 to 16 all inputs are ‘1’
NOR 2 to 16 all inputs are ‘0’
NAND 2 to 16 any input is ‘0’
XOR 2 only one input is ‘1’

Table 5–13: FLEXLOGIC™ OPERATORS

OPERATOR OPERATOR DESCRIPTION NOTES
TYPE SYNTAX
Editor INSERT Insert a parameter in an equation list.
DELETE Delete a parameter from an equation list.
End END The first END encountered signifies the last entry in
the list of FlexLogic™ parameters that is
processed.
One Shot POSITIVE ONE One shot that responds to a positive going edge. A ‘one shot’ refers to a single input gate
SHOT that generates a pulse in response to an
edge on the input. The output from a ‘one
NEGATIVE ONE One shot that responds to a negative going edge. shot’ is True (positive) for only one pass
SHOT through the FlexLogic™ equation. There is
DUAL ONE One shot that responds to both the positive and a maximum of 32 ‘one shots’.
SHOT negative going edges.
Logic Gate NOT Logical Not Operates on the previous parameter.
OR(2) 2 input OR gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓ ↓ ↓
OR(16) 16 input OR gate Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
AND(2) 2 input AND gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓ ↓ ↓
AND(16) Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
16 input AND gate
NOR(2) 2 input NOR gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓ ↓ ↓
NOR(16) 16 input NOR gate Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
NAND(2) 2 input NAND gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓
NAND(16)
↓
16 input NAND gate
↓
Operates on the 16 previous parameters. 5
XOR(2) 2 input Exclusive OR gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
LATCH (S,R) Latch (Set, Reset) - reset-dominant The parameter preceding LATCH(S,R) is
the Reset input. The parameter preceding
the Reset input is the Set input.
Timer TIMER 1 Timer as configured with FlexLogic™ Timer 1 The timer is started by the preceding
↓ settings. parameter. The output of the timer is
TIMER 32 ↓ TIMER #.
Timer as configured with FlexLogic™ Timer 32
settings.
Assign = Virt Op 1 Assigns previous FlexLogic™ parameter to Virtual The virtual output is set by the preceding
Virtual Output ↓ Output 1. parameter
= Virt Op 64 ↓
Assigns previous FlexLogic™ parameter to Virtual
Output 64.
5.4.2 FLEXLOGIC™ RULES
When forming a FlexLogic™ equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules:
1. Operands must precede the operator which uses the operands as inputs.
2. Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is to be used as
an input to two or more operators.
3. Assigning the output of an operator to a Virtual Output terminates the equation.
4. A timer operator (e.g. "TIMER 1") or virtual output assignment (e.g. " = Virt Op 1") may only be used once. If this rule is
broken, a syntax error will be declared.

5.4.3 FLEXLOGIC™ EVALUATION
Each equation is evaluated in the order in which the parameters have been entered.
FLEXLOGIC™ PROVIDES LATCHES WHICH BY DEFINITION HAVE A MEMORY ACTION, REMAINING IN
THE SET STATE AFTER THE SET INPUT HAS BEEN ASSERTED. HOWEVER, THEY ARE VOLATILE; I.E.
CAUTION
THEY RESET ON THE RE-APPLICATION OF CONTROL POWER.
WHEN MAKING CHANGES TO PROGRAMMING, ALL FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS ARE RE-COMPILED
WHEN ANY NEW SETTING IS ENTERED, SO ALL LATCHES ARE AUTOMATICALLY RESET. IF IT IS
REQUIRED TO RE-INITIALIZE FLEXLOGIC™ DURING TESTING, FOR EXAMPLE, IT IS SUGGESTED TO
POWER THE UNIT DOWN AND THEN BACK UP.
5.4.4 FLEXLOGIC™ PROCEDURE EXAMPLE
This section provides an example of implementing logic for a typical application. The sequence of the steps is quite impor-
tant as it should minimize the work necessary to develop the relay settings. Note that the example presented in the figure
below is intended to demonstrate the procedure, not to solve a specific application situation.
In the example below, it is assumed that logic has already been programmed to produce Virtual Outputs 1 and 2, and is
only a part of the full set of equations used. When using FlexLogic™, it is important to make a note of each Virtual Output
used – a Virtual Output designation (1 to 64) can only be properly assigned once.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
Set
State=ON
5 VIRTUAL INPUT 1 OR #1 Reset
LATCH
State=ON Timer 2
XOR Time Delay Operate Output
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 OR #2
on Dropout Relay H1
State=Pickup
(200 ms)
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 Timer 1

State=Operated Time Delay
AND
on Pickup
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c 827025A2.vsd
State=Closed
Figure 5–4: EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME

1. Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic™ opera-
tors. If this is not possible, the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied. Once this is done, count the inputs
to each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic™ limits, which is unlikely but possible. If
the number of inputs is too high, subdivide the inputs into multiple gates to produce an equivalent. For example, if 25
inputs to an AND gate are required, connect inputs 1 through 16 to one AND(16), 17 through 25 to another AND(9),
and the outputs from these two gates to a third AND(2).
Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the operator
is used as an input to more than one following operator. If so, the operator output must be assigned as a Virtual Output.
For the example shown above, the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR#1 and Timer 1, and must
therefore be made a Virtual Output and assigned the next available number (i.e. Virtual Output 3). The final output
must also be assigned to a Virtual Output as Virtual Output 4, which will be programmed in the contact output section
to operate relay H1 (i.e. Output Contact H1).

Therefore, the required logic can be implemented with two FlexLogic™ equations with outputs of Virtual Output 3 and
Virtual Output 4 as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
Set
State=ON
LATCH
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 OR #1 Reset
State=ON Timer 2
XOR Time Delay
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 OR #2 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
on Dropout
State=Pickup (200 ms)
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 Timer 1

State=Operated Time Delay
AND
on Pickup
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
827026A2.VSD
Figure 5–5: LOGIC EXAMPLE WITH VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

2. Prepare a logic diagram for the equation to produce Virtual Output 3, as this output will be used as an operand in the
Virtual Output 4 equation (create the equation for every output that will be used as an operand first, so that when these
operands are required they will already have been evaluated and assigned to a specific Virtual Output). The logic for
Virtual Output 3 is shown below with the final output assigned.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2
State=Operated
5
AND(2) VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
CONTACT INPUT H1c

State=Closed
827027A2.VSD
Figure 5–6: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3

3. Prepare a logic diagram for Virtual Output 4, replacing the logic ahead of Virtual Output 3 with a symbol identified as
Virtual Output 3, as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
Set
State=ON
LATCH
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 OR #1 Reset
State=ON Timer 2
XOR Time Delay VIRTUAL
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 OR #2
on Dropout OUTPUT 4
State=Pickup
(200 ms)
Timer 1
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 Time Delay
State=ON on Pickup
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed 827028A2.VSD
Figure 5–7: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

4. Program the FlexLogic™ equation for Virtual Output 3 by translating the logic into available FlexLogic™ parameters.
The equation is formed one parameter at a time until the required logic is complete. It is generally easier to start at the
output end of the equation and work back towards the input, as shown in the following steps. It is also recommended to
list operator inputs from bottom to top. For demonstration, the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99,
and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn. Until accustomed to using FlexLogic™, it is suggested that
a worksheet with a series of cells marked with the arbitrary parameter numbers be prepared, as shown below.

01
02
03
04
05
.....
97
98
99
827029A1.VSD
Figure 5–8: FLEXLOGIC™ WORKSHEET

5. Following the procedure outlined, start with parameter 99, as follows:
99: The final output of the equation is Virtual Output 3, which is created by the operator "= Virt Op n". This parameter
is therefore "= Virt Op 3."
98: The gate preceding the output is an AND, which in this case requires two inputs. The operator for this gate is a 2-
input AND so the parameter is “AND(2)”. Note that FlexLogic™ rules require that the number of inputs to most
types of operators must be specified to identify the operands for the gate. As the 2-input AND will operate on the
two operands preceding it, these inputs must be specified, starting with the lower.
97: This lower input to the AND gate must be passed through an inverter (the NOT operator) so the next parameter is
5 “NOT”. The NOT operator acts upon the operand immediately preceding it, so specify the inverter input next.
96: The input to the NOT gate is to be contact input H1c. The ON state of a contact input can be programmed to be
set when the contact is either open or closed. Assume for this example the state is to be ON for a closed contact.
The operand is therefore "Cont Ip H1c On".
95: The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate, the operated state of digital element
2. This operand is "DIG ELEM 2 OP".
Writing the parameters in numerical order can now form the equation for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3:
[95] DIG ELEM 2 OP
[96] Cont Ip H1c On
[97] NOT
[98] AND(2)
[99] = Virt Op 3
It is now possible to check that this selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parame-
ters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to figure: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL
OUTPUT 3 as a check.
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
95 DIG ELEM 2 OP VIRTUAL
AND
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: OUTPUT 3
96 Cont Ip H1c On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
97 NOT
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
98 AND (2)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
99 =Virt Op 3
827030A2.VSD
Figure 5–9: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION & LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3

6. Repeating the process described for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3, select the FlexLogic™ parameters for Virtual Output 4.

99: The final output of the equation is VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 which is parameter “= Virt Op 4".
98: The operator preceding the output is Timer 2, which is operand “TIMER 2". Note that the settings required for the
timer are established in the timer programming section.
97: The operator preceding Timer 2 is OR #2, a 3-input OR, which is parameter “OR(3)”.
96: The lowest input to OR #2 is operand “Cont Ip H1c On”.
95: The center input to OR #2 is operand “TIMER 1".
94: The input to Timer 1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
93: The upper input to OR #2 is operand “LATCH (S,R)”.
92: There are two inputs to a latch, and the input immediately preceding the latch reset is OR #1, a 4-input OR, which
is parameter “OR(4)”.
91: The lowest input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
90: The input just above the lowest input to OR #1 is operand “XOR(2)”.
89: The lower input to the XOR is operand “DIG ELEM 1 PKP”.
88: The upper input to the XOR is operand “Virt Ip 1 On".
87: The input just below the upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 2 On".
86: The upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 1 On".
85: The last parameter is used to set the latch, and is operand “Virt Op 4 On".
The equation for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 is:
[85]
[86]
Virt Op 4 On
Virt Op 1 On
5
[87] Virt Op 2 On
[88] Virt Ip 1 On
[89] DIG ELEM 1 PKP
[90] XOR(2)
[91] Virt Op 3 On
[92] OR(4)
[93] LATCH (S,R)
[94] Virt Op 3 On
[95] TIMER 1
[96] Cont Ip H1c On
[97] OR(3)
[98] TIMER 2
[99] = Virt Op 4
It is now possible to check that the selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parame-
ters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to figure: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL
OUTPUT 4, as a check.

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
85 Virt Op 4 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
86 Virt Op 1 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
87 Virt Op 2 On
Set
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
88 Virt Ip 1 On
LATCH
XOR OR Reset
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
89 DIG ELEM 1 PKP
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
90 XOR
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
91 Virt Op 3 On VIRTUAL
OR T2 OUTPUT 4
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
92 OR (4)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
93 LATCH (S,R)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
94 Virt Op 3 On T1
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
95 TIMER 1
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
96 Cont Ip H1c On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
97 OR (3)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
98 TIMER 2
5 99
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
=Virt Op 4 827031A2.VSD
Figure 5–10: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION & LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

7. Now write the complete FlexLogic™ expression required to implement the required logic, making an effort to assemble
the equation in an order where Virtual Outputs that will be used as inputs to operators are created before needed. In
cases where a lot of processing is required to perform considerable logic, this may be difficult to achieve, but in most
cases will not cause problems because all of the logic is calculated at least 4 times per power frequency cycle. The
possibility of a problem caused by sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of Flex-
Logic™ before it is placed in service.
In the following equation, Virtual Output 3 is used as an input to both Latch 1 and Timer 1 as arranged in the order
shown below:
DIG ELEM 2 OP
Cont Ip H1c On
NOT
AND(2)
= Virt Op 3
Virt Op 4 On
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 2 On
Virt Ip 1 On
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
XOR(2)
Virt Op 3 On
OR(4)
LATCH (S,R)
Virt Op 3 On
TIMER 1
Cont Ip H1c On
OR(3)

TIMER 2
= Virt Op 4
END
In the expression above, the Virtual Output 4 input to the 4-input OR is listed before it is created. This is typical of a
form of feedback, in this case, used to create a seal-in effect with the latch, and is correct.
8. The logic should always be tested after it is loaded into the relay, in the same fashion as has been used in the past.
Testing can be simplified by placing an "END" operator within the overall set of FlexLogic™ equations. The equations
will then only be evaluated up to the first "END" operator.
The "On" and "Off" operands can be placed in an equation to establish a known set of conditions for test purposes, and
the "INSERT" and "DELETE" commands can be used to modify equations.
5.4.5 FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR
PATH: SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 1: Range: FlexLogic™ parameters

EQUATION EDITOR END
↓
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 512: Range: FlexLogic™ parameters

MESSAGE
END
There are 512 FlexLogic™ entries available, numbered from 1 to 512, with default ‘END’ entry settings. If a "Disabled" Ele-
ment is selected as a FlexLogic™ entry, the associated state flag will never be set to ‘1’. The ‘+/–‘ key may be used when
editing FlexLogic™ equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types.
5
5.4.6 FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS
PATH: SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC TIMERS FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1(32)
FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1 Range: millisecond, second, minute

TIMER 1 TYPE: millisecond
TIMER 1 PICKUP Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0
TIMER 1 DROPOUT Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0
There are 32 identical FlexLogic™ timers available, numbered from 1 to 32. These timers can be used as operators for
FlexLogic™ equations.
TIMER 1 TYPE:
This setting is used to select the time measuring unit.
TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY:
This setting is used to set the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to "0".
TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY:
This setting is used to set the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to "0".

5.4.7 FLEXELEMENTS™
PATH: SETTING FLEXLOGIC FLEXELEMENTS FLEXELEMENT 1(16)
FLEXELEMENT 1 FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

FUNCTION: Disabled
FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME: Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
FxE1
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
MESSAGE
Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
MESSAGE
Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT Range: Signed, Absolute
MESSAGE
MODE: Signed
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP Range: Level, Delta
MESSAGE
MODE: Level
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Over, Under
MESSAGE
DIRECTION: Over
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
5 MESSAGE
HYSTERESIS: 3.0%
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt Range: milliseconds, seconds, minutes
MESSAGE
UNIT: milliseconds
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt: Range: 20 to 86400 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
20
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 sec. in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST Range: 0.000 to 65.535 sec. in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
BLOCK: Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
A FlexElement™ is a universal comparator that can be used to monitor any analog actual value calculated by the relay or a
net difference of any two analog actual values of the same type. The effective operating signal could be treated as a signed
number or its absolute value could be used as per user's choice.
The element can be programmed to respond either to a signal level or to a rate-of-change (delta) over a pre-defined period
of time. The output operand is asserted when the operating signal is higher than a threshold or lower than a threshold as
per user's choice.

SETTING
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
MODE:
Enabled = 1
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP
MODE:
Disabled = 0
FLEXELEMENT 1
DIRECTION:
SETTING
FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP:
FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK:
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
AND HYSTERESIS:
Off = 0
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT: SETTINGS
SETTINGS FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP

FLEXELEMENT 1 dt: DELAY:
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN: FLEXELEMENT 1 RST
RUN DELAY:
Actual Value FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
+ tPKP
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN: FLEXELEMENT 1 OP
- tRST
Actual Value FLEXELEMENT 1 DPO
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
ACTUAL VALUE
FlexElement 1 OpSig 842004A1.CDR
Figure 5–11: FLEXELEMENT™ SCHEME LOGIC

The FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN setting specifies the first (non-inverted) input to the FlexElement™. Zero is assumed as the input if
this setting is set to "Off". For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands. 5
This FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN setting specifies the second (inverted) input to the FlexElement™. Zero is assumed as the input if
this setting is set to "Off". For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands. This input should be used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the
element respond to a differential signal such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm. The element will not
operate if the two input signals are of different types, for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build
the effective operating signal.
The element responds directly to the differential signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting is set to "Signed". The ele-
ment responds to the absolute value of the differential signal if this setting is set to "Absolute". Sample applications for the
"Absolute" setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both
directions; monitoring power regardless of its direction, or monitoring a trend regardless of whether the signal increases of
decreases.
The element responds directly to its operating signal – as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN, FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN and FLEX-
ELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE settings – if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to "Threshold". The element responds to
the rate of change of its operating signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to "Delta". In this case the FLEXELE-
MENT 1 dt UNIT and FLEXELEMENT 1 dt settings specify how the rate of change is derived.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION setting enables the relay to respond to either high or low values of the operating signal. The
following figure explains the application of the FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION, FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP and FLEXELEMENT 1 HYS-
TERESIS settings.

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
PICKUP
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
PICKUP
842705A1.CDR
Figure 5–12: FLEXELEMENT™ DIRECTION, PICKUP, AND HYSTERESIS

In conjunction with the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting the element could be programmed to provide two extra charac-
teristics as shown in the figure below.
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
5 FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT COMP
MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT COMP
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT COMP
MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT COMP
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842706A1.CDR
Figure 5–13: FLEXELEMENT™ INPUT MODE SETTING

The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting specifies the operating threshold for the effective operating signal of the element. If set
to "Over", the element picks up when the operating signal exceeds the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value. If set to "Under", the
element picks up when the operating signal falls below the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting controls the element dropout. It should be noticed that both the operating signal
and the pickup threshold can be negative facilitating applications such as reverse power alarm protection. The FlexEle-
ment™ can be programmed to work with all analog actual values measured by the relay. The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP set-
ting is entered in pu values using the following definitions of the base units:
Table 5–14: FLEXELEMENT™ BASE UNITS

CURRENT UNBALANCE BASE = 100%
(Amp Unbalance)
dcmA BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
under the +IN and –IN inputs.
FREQUENCY fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE ϕBASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)
POWER FACTOR PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs BASE = 100°C
SENSITIVE DIR POWER PBASE = maximum value of 3 × VBASE × IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs of the sources
(Sns Dir Power) configured for the Sensitive Power Directional element(s).
SOURCE CURRENT IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE ENERGY EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively
(SRC X Positive Watthours)
(SRC X Negative Watthours)
(SRC X Positive Varhours)
(SRC X Negative Varhours)
SOURCE POWER PBASE = maximum value of VBASE × IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs
5
SOURCE VOLTAGE VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
STATOR DIFFERENTIAL IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
CURRENT (CT primary for source currents, and bus reference primary current for bus differential currents)
(Stator Diff Iar, Ibr, and Icr)
STATOR RESTRAINING IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
(Stator Diff Iad, Ibd, and Icd)
THERMAL MODEL BASE =100%
(Model Capacity Used)
(Model Motor Unbalance)
THERMAL MODEL BASE = 10 minutes
(Model Lockout Time)
THERMAL MODEL BASE = 1.00 pu of FLA
(Thermal Model Load)
(Biased Motor Load)
THERMAL MODEL BASE = 10 seconds
(Trip Time on Overload)
The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting defines the pickup–dropout relation of the element by specifying the width of the
hysteresis loop as a percentage of the pickup value as shown in the FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION, PICKUP, AND HYS-
TERESIS diagram.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT UNIT setting specifies the time unit for the setting FLEXELEMENT 1 dt. This setting is applicable only if
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to "Delta". The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT setting specifies duration of the time interval for the
rate of change mode of operation. This setting is applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to "Delta".
This FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY setting specifies the pickup delay of the element. The FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY setting
specifies the reset delay of the element.

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.5.1 OVERVIEW
Each protection element can be assigned up to 8 different sets of settings according to SETTING GROUP designations 1
to 8. The performance of these elements is defined by the active SETTING GROUP at a given time. Multiple setting groups
allow the user to conveniently change protection settings for different operating situations (e.g. altered power system con-
figuration, season of the year). The active setting group can be preset or selected via the SETTING GROUPS menu (see
the CONTROL ELEMENTS section). See also the INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS section at the front of this chapter.
5.5.2 SETTING GROUP
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(8)
SETTING GROUP 1 MOTOR

See page 5-46.
STATOR
MESSAGE See page 5-58.
DIFFERENTIAL
SENSTIVE
DIRECTIONAL POWER
PHASE CURRENT
NEUTRAL CURRENT
5 MESSAGE
GROUND CURRENT
See page 5-73.
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
Each of the 8 SETTING GROUP menus is identical. SETTING GROUP 1 (the default active group) automatically becomes
active if no other group is active (see the CONTROL ELEMENTS section for additional details).
5.5.3 MOTOR ELEMENTS
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(8) MOTOR
MOTOR THERMAL MODEL
AMP UNBALANCE 1
AMP UNBALANCE 2

5 SETTINGS 5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.5.4 THERMAL MODEL
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(8) MOTOR THERMAL MODEL
THERMAL MODEL THERMAL MODEL Range: Disabled, Enabled

FUNCTION: Disabled
THERMAL MODEL Range: Motor, Flexcurve A, Flexcurve B
MESSAGE
CURVE: Motor
THERMAL MODEL Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
UNBALANCE BIAS Range: 0 to 19 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
K FACTOR: 0
COOL TIME CONSTANT Range: 1 to 65000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
RUNNING: 15 min.
COOL TIME CONSTANT Range: 1 to 65000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
STOPPED: 30 min.
HOT/COLD SAFE Range: 0.01 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
STALL RATIO: 1.00
RTD BIAS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
RTD BIAS MINIMUM Range: 0 to 250
MESSAGE
40 C 5
RTD BIAS CENTER Range: 0 to 250
MESSAGE
POINT: 130 C
RTD BIAS MAXIMUM: Range: 0 to 250
MESSAGE
155 C
START INHIBIT Range: 0 to 25%
MESSAGE
TCU MARGIN: 0%
THERMAL MODEL Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
BLOCK: Off
THERMAL MODEL Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGETS: Self-Reset
THERMAL MODEL Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The thermal model is the primary protective function of the relay. It consists of five key functions:
• thermal model curve (overload)
• overload pickup level
• unbalance biasing of the motor current while the motor is running
• motor cooling time constants
• biasing of the thermal model based on Hot/Cold information and/or measured stator temperature.
The algorithm integrates both stator and rotor heating into a single model. The level of motor heating is maintained in a reg-
ister called Thermal Capacity Used. If the motor has been stopped for a long time, it will be at ambient temperature and
thermal capacity used will be zero. If the motor is in overload, once the thermal capacity used reaches 100%, the output
operand will be set.

THERMAL MODEL CURVE:

The thermal model curve detects overload conditions that can damage the motor. This curve accounts for motor heating in
both the stator and rotor during stall, acceleration, and running conditions. The overload curve can take one of three for-
mats: Motor, Flexcurve A, or Flexcurve B. The algorithm uses memory in the form of a register called Thermal Capacity
Used. This register is updated every 100 ms using the following equation:
100 ms
TC used = TC used ( t – 100 ms ) + ------------------------------- × 100%
time_to_trip
where: time_to_trip = time taken from the overload curve, a function of the MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS setting at Iequivalent
(the average 3-phase RMS current measured from the CTs specified in SYSTEM SETUP MOTOR LINE SOURCE).
Always set the overload curve slightly lower than the thermal limits provided by the motor manufacturer. This ensures that
the motor is tripped before the thermal limit is reached. If the motor starting times are well within the safe stall times, it is
recommended that the "Motor" curve is selected. This curve is based on typical motor thermal limit curves (see STAN-
DARD MOTOR CURVES and STANDARD MOTOR MULTIPLIERS on following pages).
MOTOR CURVE:
This curve is based on the MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS setting, as this is the base used by motor manufacturers for data on
thermal limits. Because a motor that has a service factor greater than one can be operated safely between full load current
and the product of full load current times service factor, the standard curve must be manipulated to permit full use of the
motor. This is done by using the SYSTEM SETUP MOTOR MOTOR SERVICE FACTOR setting to eliminate the portion of
the curve between full load current and service factor permitted current so no output is permitted in this region.
Table 5–15: M60 STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVE MULTIPLIERS
PICKUP STANDARD CURVE MULTIPLIERS
LEVEL ×1 ×2 ×3 ×4 ×5 ×6 ×7 ×8 ×9 × 10 × 11 × 12 × 13 × 14 × 15
5 1.01 4353.6 8707.2 13061 17414 21768 26122 30475 34829 39183 43536 47890 52243 56597 60951 65304
1.05 853.71 1707.4 2561.1 3414.9 4268.6 5122.3 5976.0 6829.7 7683.4 8537.1 9390.8 10245 11098 11952 12806
1.10 416.68 833.36 1250.0 1666.7 2083.4 2500.1 2916.8 3333.5 3750.1 4166.8 4583.5 5000.2 5416.9 5833.6 6250.2
1.20 198.86 397.72 596.58 795.44 994.30 1193.2 1392.0 1590.9 1789.7 1988.6 2187.5 2386.3 2585.2 2784.1 2982.9
1.30 126.80 253.61 380.41 507.22 634.02 760.82 887.63 1014.4 1141.2 1268.0 1394.8 1521.6 1648.5 1775.3 1902.1
1.40 91.14 182.27 273.41 364.55 455.68 546.82 637.96 729.09 820.23 911.37 1002.5 1093.6 1184.8 1275.9 1367.0
1.50 69.99 139.98 209.97 279.96 349.95 419.94 489.93 559.92 629.91 699.90 769.89 839.88 909.87 979.86 1049.9
1.75 42.41 84.83 127.24 169.66 212.07 254.49 296.90 339.32 381.73 424.15 466.56 508.98 551.39 593.81 636.22
2.00 29.16 58.32 87.47 116.63 145.79 174.95 204.11 233.26 262.42 291.58 320.74 349.90 379.05 408.21 437.37
2.25 21.53 43.06 64.59 86.12 107.65 129.18 150.72 172.25 193.78 215.31 236.84 258.37 279.90 301.43 322.96
2.50 16.66 33.32 49.98 66.64 83.30 99.96 116.62 133.28 149.94 166.60 183.26 199.92 216.58 233.24 249.90
2.75 13.33 26.65 39.98 53.31 66.64 79.96 93.29 106.62 119.95 133.27 146.60 159.93 173.25 186.58 199.91
3.00 10.93 21.86 32.80 43.73 54.66 65.59 76.52 87.46 98.39 109.32 120.25 131.19 142.12 153.05 163.98
3.25 9.15 18.29 27.44 36.58 45.73 54.87 64.02 73.16 82.31 91.46 100.60 109.75 118.89 128.04 137.18
3.50 7.77 15.55 23.32 31.09 38.87 46.64 54.41 62.19 69.96 77.73 85.51 93.28 101.05 108.83 116.60
3.75 6.69 13.39 20.08 26.78 33.47 40.17 46.86 53.56 60.25 66.95 73.64 80.34 87.03 93.73 100.42
4.00 5.83 11.66 17.49 23.32 29.15 34.98 40.81 46.64 52.47 58.30 64.13 69.96 75.79 81.62 87.45
4.25 5.12 10.25 15.37 20.50 25.62 30.75 35.87 41.00 46.12 51.25 56.37 61.50 66.62 71.75 76.87
4.50 4.54 9.08 13.63 18.17 22.71 27.25 31.80 36.34 40.88 45.42 49.97 54.51 59.05 63.59 68.14
4.75 4.06 8.11 12.17 16.22 20.28 24.33 28.39 32.44 36.50 40.55 44.61 48.66 52.72 56.77 60.83
5.00 3.64 7.29 10.93 14.57 18.22 21.86 25.50 29.15 32.79 36.43 40.08 43.72 47.36 51.01 54.65
5.50 2.99 5.98 8.97 11.96 14.95 17.94 20.93 23.91 26.90 29.89 32.88 35.87 38.86 41.85 44.84
6.00 2.50 5.00 7.49 9.99 12.49 14.99 17.49 19.99 22.48 24.98 27.48 29.98 32.48 34.97 37.47
6.50 2.12 4.24 6.36 8.48 10.60 12.72 14.84 16.96 19.08 21.20 23.32 25.44 27.55 29.67 31.79
7.00 1.82 3.64 5.46 7.29 9.11 10.93 12.75 14.57 16.39 18.21 20.04 21.86 23.68 25.50 27.32
7.50 1.58 3.16 4.75 6.33 7.91 9.49 11.08 12.66 14.24 15.82 17.41 18.99 20.57 22.15 23.74
8.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82
10.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82
15.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82
20.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82

Portion of Characteristic Removed

by
FLA Service Factor
100000
10000
1000
Time To Trip in Seconds
100
x15
10
x1
1.00
0.10 1.00 10 100
833003A1.CDR
Multiples of Full Load Amps (FLA)

Figure 5–14: STANDARD MOTOR CURVES

“FLEXCURVE” CURVE:
If the motor starting current crosses the thermal damage curve, it may become necessary to use a custom curve to tailor
the protection to the motor so that successful starting may be possible without compromising motor protection. Further-
more, the characteristics of the starting thermal damage curve (locked rotor and acceleration) and the running thermal
damage curves may not fit together smoothly. In this instance, it may be necessary to use a custom curve so the motor can
be started successfully and used to its full potential without compromising protection. The distinct parts of the thermal limit
curves now become more critical. For these conditions, it is recommended that Flexcurve be used. The Flexcurve allows
the user to program selected trip times for pre-determined current levels.
It can be seen in the figure below that if the running overload thermal limit curve were smoothed into one curve with the
locked rotor overload curve, the motor could not start at 80% line voltage. A custom curve is required.
The programming of the Flexcurve is based on per unit current. The equivalent primary amperes and multi-
plier of Full Load Current are also shown below.
NOTE
TYPICAL FLEXCURVE
6500 HP, 13800 VOLT INDUCED DRAFT FAN MOTOR
Full Loa d Amps 280; CT Ra dio = 500/5
10000
1 PROGRAMMED CUSTOM CURVE
2 RUNNING SAFETIME (STATOR LIMIT)
3 ACCELERATION SAFETIME (ROTOR LIMIT)
4 MOTOR CURRENT @ 100% VOLTAGE
5 1000
5 MOTOR CURRENT @ 80% VOLTAGE
1
Time To Trip in Seconds
2
100
3
10
4
5
1.0
0.1
pu 0.56 5.6 56
Amp 280 2800 28000
xFLA 1 10 100
Figure 5–15: FLEXCURVE EXAMPLE

THERMAL MODEL TD MULTIPLIER:

This setting applies only to the Motor curve. This multiplier is used to shift the overload curve on the time axis to create a
set of 15 different curves with a standard shape. The multiplier acts as below:
TD_Multiplier × 2.2116623
Time to Trip = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2
0.02530337 × ( Pickup – 1 ) + 0.05054758 × ( Pickup – 1 )
This setting is used to select the curve that best matches the thermal characteristics of the protected motor.
During the interval of discontinuity, the longer of the two trip times is used to reduce the chance of nui-
sance tripping during motor starts.
NOTE
UNBALANCE BIAS K FACTOR:

Unbalanced phase currents will cause rotor heating that is not shown in the motor thermal damage curve. When the motor
is running, the rotor will rotate in the direction of the positive sequence current at near synchronous speed. Negative
sequence current, which has a phase rotation that is opposite to the positive sequence current, and hence opposite to the
direction of rotor rotation, will generate a rotor voltage that will produce a substantial current in the rotor. This current will
have a frequency that is approximately 2 times the line frequency, 100 Hz for a 50 Hz system or 120 Hz for a 60 Hz system.
Skin effect in the rotor bars at this frequency will cause a significant increase in rotor resistance and therefore, a significant
increase in rotor heating. This extra heating is not accounted for in the thermal limit curves supplied by the motor manufac-
turer as these curves assume positive sequence currents from a perfectly balanced supply voltage and motor design.
The thermal model may be biased to reflect the additional heating that is caused by negative sequence current when the
motor is running. This biasing is done by creating an equivalent motor heating current rather than simply using average
three phase RMS. This equivalent current is calculated using the equation shown below.
Ieq = equivalent motor heating current
I eq = I
2   I_2  ,
per_unit ⋅ 1 + k ⋅ --------
2
where : Iper_unit = per unit current based on FLA 5
  I_1 
I_1 = negative sequence current
I_2 = positive sequence current
k = constant
The motor derating as a function of voltage unbalance as recommended by NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers
Association) is shown below. Assuming a typical induction motor with an inrush of 6 × FLA and a negative sequence imped-
ance of 0.167, voltage unbalances of 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5% equals current unbalances of 6, 12, 18, 24, and 30% respectively.
Based on this assumption, the amount of motor derating for different values of k entered for setting UNBALANCE BIAS K FAC-
TOR is also shown below. Note that the curve created when k = 8 is almost identical to the NEMA derating curve.
1.05 1.05
1.00 1.00
DERATING FACTOR
DERATING FACTOR
0.95 0.95
k=2
0.90 0.90
0.85 0.85 k=4
0.80 0.80 k=6
k=8
0.75 0.75
k = 10
0.70 0.70
0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5
PERCENT VOLTAGE UNBALANCE PERCENT VOLTAGE UNBALANCE

NEMA GE Power Management
Figure 5–16: MEDIUM MOTOR DERATING FACTOR DUE TO UNBALANCED VOLTAGE
If a value of k = 0 is entered, unbalance biasing is defeated and the overload curve will time out against the measured per
unit motor positive sequence current. The following equations can be used to calculate k.
k = 175 230
---------- (typical estimate); k = ---------- (conservative estimate), where I LR is the per unit locked rotor current
2 2
ILR I LR

COOL TIME CONSTANT RUNNING / STOPPED:

The Thermal Capacity Used value is reduced in an exponential manner when the motor current is below the Full Load
Amps × Service Factor settings to simulate motor cooling. The motor cooling time constants should be entered for both the
stopped and running cases. A stopped motor will normally cool significantly slower than a running motor.
Motor cooling is calculated as follows:
–t ⁄ τ
TCused = ( TCused_start – TCused_end ) ( e ) + TC used_end
I eq hot- × 100%
TC used_end =  ------------------------------------------
-  1 – ----------
 overload_pickup  cold
where: TCused = thermal capacity used
TCused_start = TCused value caused by overload condition
TCused_end = TCused value dictated by the hot/cold curve ratio when the motor is running
(= 0 when the motor is stopped)
t = time in minutes
τ = Cool Time Constant (running or stopped)
Ieq = equivalent motor heating current
overload_pickup= overload pickup setpoint as a multiple of FLA
hot / cold = hot/cold curve ratio
100 100
75 75
Thermal Capacity Used
5 Cool Time Constant= 15 min

TCused_start= 85%
Cool Time Constant= 15 min
TCused_start= 85%
Hot/Cold Ratio= 80% Hot/Cold Ratio= 80%
50 Ieq/Overload Pickup= 80% 50 Ieq/Overload Pickup= 100%
25 25
0 0
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 0 30 60 90 120 150 180
Time in Minutes Time in Minutes
80% LOAD 100% LOAD

100 100
75 75
Cool Time Constant= 30 min Cool Time Constant= 30 min

TCused_start= 85% TCused_start= 100%
Hot/Cold Ratio= 80% Hot/Cold Ratio= 80%
Motor Stopped after running Rated Load Motor Stopped after Overload Trip
50 TCused_end= 0% 50 TCused_end= 0%
25 25
0
0
0 30 60 90 120 150 180
0 30 60 90 120 150 180
Time in Minutes
Time in Minutes
MOTOR STOPPED MOTOR TRIPPED
Figure 5–17: THERMAL MODEL COOLING

HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO:

The motor manufacturer will sometimes provide thermal limit information for a hot/cold motor. The algorithm will use this
data if this setting is programmed. The value entered for this setting dictates the level at which Thermal Capacity Used will
settle for current that is below the Motor Service Factor times FLA. When the motor is running at a level that is below this
limit Thermal Capacity Used will rise or fall to a value based on Iequivalent (average three phase RMS and the selected set-
ting. Thermal Capacity Used will either rise at the fixed rate of 5% per minute or fall as dictated by the running cool time
constant.
hot- × 100%
TC used_end = I eq ×  1 – ----------
 cold
where: TCused_end = THERMAL CAPACITY USED if Iequivalent remains steady state
Ieq = Iequivalent motor heating current
hot / cold = HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO setting
RTD BIAS:
This setting enables or disables the RTD bias mechanism. See the following setting for usage.
RTD BIAS MINIMUM / CENTER / MAXIMUM:
The relay thermal replica operates as a complete and independent model. The thermal overload curves however, are
based solely on measured current, assuming a normal 40 °C ambient and normal motor cooling. If there is an unusually
high ambient temperature, or if motor cooling is blocked, motor temperature will increase. If the motor stator has embedded
RTDs, the RTD bias feature should be used to augment the thermal model calculation of Thermal Capacity Used.
The RTD bias feature is a two-part curve, RTD Bias Thermal Capacity Used, constructed from three points, Minimum, Cen-
ter and Maximum. If the maximum stator RTD temperature is below the RTD BIAS MINIMUM setting (typically 40°C), no bias-
ing occurs. If the maximum stator RTD temperature is above the RTD BIAS MAXIMUM setting (typically at the stator insulation
rating or slightly higher), then the thermal memory is fully biased and RTD Bias Thermal Capacity Used is forced to 100%.
At values in between, the present RTD Bias Thermal Capacity Used created by other features of the thermal model is com-
5
pared to the RTD Bias Thermal Capacity Used. If the value of the RTD Bias Thermal Capacity Used is higher, then this
value is used from that point onward. The RTD BIAS CENTER setting should be selected to the rated running temperature of
the motor. The relay will automatically determine the RTD Bias Thermal Capacity Used value for the center point using the
HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO setting.
hot
TC used @ RTD_Bias_Center =  1 – ----------- × 100%
 cold
At < RTD_Bias_Center temperature,
Temp actual – Temp min
RTD_Bias_TC used = -------------------------------------------------------- × ( 100 – TC used @ RTD_Bias_Center ) + TC used @ RTD_Bias_Center
Temp center – Temp min
At > RTD_Bias_Center temperature,

Temp actual – Temp center
RTD_Bias_TC used = ------------------------------------------------------------
- × ( 100 – TC used @ RTD_Bias_Center ) + TC used @ RTD_Bias_Center
Temp max – Temp center
where: RTD_Bias_TCused = TC used due to hottest stator RTD

Tempacutal = current temperature of the hottest stator RTD
Tempmin = RTD Bias minimum setting
Tempcenter = RTD Bias center setting
Tempmax = RTD Bias maximum setting
TCused @ RTD_Bias_Center = TC used defined by the HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO setting
In simple terms, the RTD bias feature is feedback of measured stator temperature. This feedback acts to correct the
assumed thermal model. Since RTDs have a relatively slow response, RTD biasing is useful for slow motor heating. Other
portions of the thermal model are required during starting and heavy overload conditions when motor heating is relatively
fast.

It should be noted that the RTD bias feature alone cannot create a trip. Even if the RTD bias feature forces the RTD Bias
Thermal Capacity Used to 100%, the thermal model Thermal Capacity Used must also be above 100% for the output to be
set.
RTD Bias Maximum

100
Hot/Cold = 0.85
RTD Bias Thermal Capacity Used

80 Rated Temperature = 130 C
Insulation Rating = 155 C
60
40
20
RTD Bias Center Point
RTD Bias Minimum
0
-50 0 50 100 150 200 250
Maximum Stator RTD Temperature
Figure 5–18: RTD BIAS CURVE

START INHIBIT TCU MARGIN:
5 The START INHIBIT TCU MARGIN setting is intended to prevent starting of a motor if there is insufficient thermal capacity avail-
able for a successful start. The element monitors motor starting and captures the amount of Thermal Capacity Used from
the last five successful starts, and determines which is the largest (a successful motor start is one in which phase current
rises from 0 to greater than the thermal model overload curve pickup level, and then falls below the pickup level). This larg-
est value is multiplied by [100% + START INHIBIT TCU MARGIN / 100%] and then stored as THERMAL CAPACITY USED ON
START (the result of this calculation is limited to a maximum of 100%).
If The START INHIBIT TCU MARGIN is not equal zero, each time the motor is stopped, the amount of thermal capacity avail-
able (i.e. 100% – Thermal Capacity Used) is compared to the Thermal Capacity Used On Start. If the thermal capacity
available does not exceed the Thermal Capacity Used On Start or is not equal to 100%, the START INHIBIT output is
asserted and maintained until there is sufficient thermal capacity available. The inhibiting interval is the time required for the
motor to cool from the present Thermal Capacity Used to the level (100% – Thermal Capacity Used On Start), using the fol-
lowing formula:
–t ⁄ τ
TC used = ( TCused_start – TCused_end ) ( e ) + TCused_end

SETTINGS
RTD BIAS:
RTD BIAS
MINIMUM:
RTD BIAS CENTER
5 SETTINGS
POINT:
RTD BIAS
MAXIMUM:
GE Power Management
TCU MARGIN:
THERMAL MODEL
CURVE:
SETTING
THERMAL MODEL
THERMAL MODEL TD MULTIPLIER:
FUNCTION:
COOL TIME CONSTANT
Disabled=0
RUNNING:
Enabled=1
COOL TIME CONSTANT
STOPPED:
SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND RUN MOTOR START INHIBIT
THERMAL MODEL
BLOCK : START INHIBIT TC Used on START < TC Used available
AND
Off=0
TCU 100% Stop OR R
TC Used MARGIN > 0%
AND
Stop TC Used
on START TC Used < 15%
START INHIBIT
M60 Motor Relay

SETTING THERM MOD OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS MOTOR STATUS
EMERGENCY
RESTART: MOTOR OFFLINE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off=0 Reset TC Used To 0% MOTOR STARTING MOTOR THERMAL OP
ACTUAL VALUES
MOTOR RUNNING
ACTUAL VALUE MOTOR OVERLOAD
I Eq PICKUP MOTOR THERMAL PKP
Figure 5–19: THERMAL MODEL LOGIC DIAGRAM

MOTOR LINE
SOURCE: MOTOR THERMAL DPO
IA RMS
IB RMS t
IC RMS AND
TC used = TC Used > 15%
Pos Seq I
Neg Seq I TC used 100% S
I OR TC Used 100%
ACTUAL VALUE
STATOR TEMP SENSOR 1 AND
TC OR
STATOR TEMP SENSOR 2
TC used RTD=
STATOR TEMP SENSOR 5 MAX STATOR RTD TC used 100%
STATOR TEMP SENSOR 6 Hottest RTD 833007A2.CDR
5-55
5
5.5.5 AMP UNBALANCE
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(8) AMP UNBALANCE 1(2)
AMP UNBALANCE 1 AMP UNBAL 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

FUNCTION: Disabled
AMP UNBAL 1 PICKUP: Range: 0.0 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
0.0%
AMP UNBAL 1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
AMP UNBAL 1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
AMP UNBAL 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AMP UNBAL 1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
AMP UNBAL 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
This element receives current inputs from the Source selected by the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP MOTOR MOTOR
LINE SOURCE setting. Generally, this element compares the ratio of motor negative sequence current (I_2) to the positive
sequence current (I_1) times an adjustment factor to compensate for the actual motor load to a set threshold. The adjust-
5 ment factor is used to prevent nuisance alarms at light loads. If the motor is operating at an average current level equal to
or greater than the programmed full load current (FLA, as selected by the SYSTEM SETUP MOTOR MOTOR FULL LOAD
AMPS setting) the adjustment factor is one. If the motor is operating at an average current level less than the programmed
full load current (as selected by the SYSTEM SETUP MOTOR MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS setting) the adjustment factor is
the ratio of average current to full load current. It is intended that AMP UNBALANCE 1 is used to generate an alarm and
AMP UNBALANCE 2 is used to generate a trip.
A declaration of a "single-phasing" condition is made 2 seconds after:
• the unbalanced current level exceeds 40%, or
• the average current is above 25% of FLA and the current in any one phase is less than 2% of FLA
AMP UNBAL 1 PICKUP:
This setting selects the level of unbalanced current that generates a stage 1 (intended to alarm) output. Note that a supply
voltage unbalance of 1% creates a current unbalance of 6% in a typical three-phase induction motor; a supply voltage
unbalance of 2% creates a current unbalance of 12%. As a 2% voltage unbalance is common in most applications, a set-
ting of 0.15 is often used as the alarm level, and AMP UNBAL 1 PICKUP is usually set to this level or higher.
AMP UNBAL 1 PICKUP DELAY:
The alarm delay is often set from 5 to 10 seconds. A higher level of unbalance will cause motor stress in a shorter period;
thus, a reasonable setting is 3 to 10 seconds.
AMP UNBAL 1 RESET DELAY:
This timer can be used to maintain the output until other equipment or an operator can react to the unbalance condition.

5 SETTINGS
GE Power Management
SETTING
AMP UNBAL 1
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
ACTUAL VALUES
AMP UNBALANCE
SETTING
AND
AMP UNBAL 1
BLK:
Off = 0 NOTE: SETTING
- FLA is programmed in AMP UNBAL 1
*SYSTEM SETUP / MOTOR / FULL LOAD AMPS
SETTING SETTING PICKUP DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SYSTEM SETUP/MOTOR/ AMP UNBAL 1 AMP UNBAL 1 AMP UNBALANCE 1 PKP
MOTOR LINE SOURCE: PICKUP: PICKUP RESET: AMP UNBALANCE 1 DPO
I_1 RUN t PKP
I_2 I _2
Kx x100% UNBAL >= PKP 1
IA I _1 t RST
If I avg >= FLA*, K=1
IB
I A+ I B+ I C = I avg Iavg FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
3 If I avg < FLA*, K=
IC FLA* OR AMP UNBALANCE 1 OP
M60 Motor Relay

UNBAL > 40 % AND
Iavg >= 0.25 FLA*

OR 2s
0
AND
Figure 5–20: AMP UNBALANCE LOGIC

AND
IA < 0.02 FLA*
AND OR
IB < 0.02 FLA*
AND
IC < 0.02 FLA* 833002A4.CDR
5-57
5
5.5.6 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(8) GENERATOR STATOR DIFFERENTIAL
STATOR STATOR DIFF Range: Disabled, Enabled

DIFFERENTIAL FUNCTION: Disabled
STATOR DIFF LINE Range: SRC 1, SRC 2,..., SRC 6
MESSAGE
END SOURCE: SRC 1
STATOR DIFF NEUTRAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2,..., SRC 6
MESSAGE
END SOURCE: SRC 1
STATOR DIFF Range: 0.050 to 1.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 0.100 pu
STATOR DIFF Range: 1 to 100% in steps of 1
MESSAGE
SLOPE 1: 10 %
MESSAGE
BREAK 1: 1.15 pu
STATOR DIFF Range: 1 to 100% in steps of 1
MESSAGE
SLOPE 2: 80 %
MESSAGE
BREAK 2: 8.00 pu
STATOR DIFF Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
5 BLK: Off
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
STATOR DIFF
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
STATOR DIFF Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
a) SETTINGS
The stator differential protection element is intended for use on the stator windings of rotating machinery.
|I D|
differential
OPERATE
SLOPE 2
BLOCK
SLOPE 1
PICKUP
restraining
BREAK 1
BREAK 2
IR
Figure 5–21: STATOR DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC

This element has a dual slope characteristic. The main purpose of the percent-slope characteristic is to prevent a maloper-
ation caused by unbalances between CTs during external faults. CT unbalances arise as a result of the following factors:
1. CT accuracy errors
2. CT saturation

The characteristic allows for very sensitive settings when fault current is low and less sensitive settings when fault current is
high and CT performance may produce incorrect operate signals.
STATOR DIFF LINE END SOURCE:
This setting selects the Source connected to CTs in the end of the machine stator winding closest to the load and furthest
from the winding neutral point. Both line and neutral-side CTs should be wired to measure their currents in the same direc-
tion with respect to the neutral point of the winding.
STATOR DIFF NEUTRAL END SOURCE:
This setting selects the Source connected to CTs in the end of the machine stator winding furthest from the load and closest
to the winding neutral point. Both line and neutral-side CTs should be wired to measure their currents in the same direction
with respect to the neutral point of the winding.
STATOR DIFF PICKUP:
This setting defines the minimum differential current required for operation. This setting is based on the amount of differen-
tial current that might be seen under normal operating conditions. A setting of 0.1 to 0.3 pu is generally recommended.
STATOR DIFF SLOPE 1:
This setting is applicable for restraint currents from zero to BREAK 1, and defines the ratio of differential to restraint current
above which the element will operate. This slope is set to ensure sensitivity to internal faults at normal operating current
levels. The criteria for setting this slope is to allow for maximum expected CT mismatch error when operating at the maxi-
mum permitted current. This maximum error is generally in the range of 5 to 10% of CT rating.
STATOR DIFF BREAK 1:
This setting defines the end of the SLOPE 1 region and the start of the transition region. It should be set just above the
maximum normal operating current level of the machine.
STATOR DIFF SLOPE 2: 5
This setting is applicable for restraint currents above the BREAK 2 setting when the element is applied to generator stator
windings. This slope is set to ensure stability under heavy external fault conditions that could lead to high differential cur-
rents as a result of CT saturation. A setting of 80 to 100% is recommended. The transition region (as shown on the charac-
teristic plot) is a cubic spline, automatically calculated by the relay to result in a smooth transition between SLOPE 1 and
SLOPE 2 with no discontinuities.
STATOR DIFF BREAK 2:
This setting defines the end of the transition region and the start of the SLOPE 2 region. It should be set to the level at
which any of the protection CTs are expected to begin to saturate.
SETTING
STATOR DIFF SETTINGS
FUNCTION:
STATOR DIFF
Disabled = 0 PICKUP:
Enabled = 1
STATOR DIFF
SLOPE 1:
SETTING
AND STATOR DIFF
BREAK 1:
STATOR DIFF BLOCK:
STATOR DIFF
Off = 0 SLOPE 2:
STATOR DIFF
SETTING BREAK 2:
STATOR DIFF RUN
LINE END SOURCE: Differentia l Pha sors FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Iad
IA Iad STATOR DIFF PKP A
IB Ibd STATOR DIFF DPO A
IC Icd Iar
RUN
DC Offset
Ibd FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Removal
D.F.T. STATOR DIFF PKP B
SETTING
and STATOR DIFF DPO B
STATOR DIFF Differential Ibr
NEUTRAL END SOURCE: and Restraint Restra int Pha sors RUN
IA Iar Icd FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
IB Ibr STATOR DIFF PKP C
IC Icr STATOR DIFF DPO C
Icr
Figure 5–22: STATOR DIFFERENTIAL LOGIC

b) SATURATION DETECTION
External faults near generators typically result in very large time constants of DC components in the fault currents. Also,
when energizing a step-up transformer, the inrush current being limited only by the machine impedance may be significant
and may last for a very long time. In order to provide additional security against maloperations during these events, the
M60 incorporates saturation detection logic. When saturation is detected the element will make an additional check on the
angle between the neutral and output current. If this angle indicates an internal fault then tripping is permitted.
STATE MACHINE:
The saturation detector is implemented as a state machine (see below). "NORMAL" is the initial state of the machine.
When in "NORMAL" state, the saturation flag is not set (SAT = 0). The algorithm calculates the saturation condition, SC. If
SC = 1 while the state machine is "NORMAL", the saturation detector goes into the "EXTERNAL FAULT" state and sets the
saturation flag (SAT = 1). The algorithm returns to the "NORMAL" state if the differential current is below the first slope, SL,
for more than 200 ms. When in the "EXTERNAL FAULT" state, the algorithm goes into the "EXTERNAL FAULT & CT SAT-
URATION" state if the differential flag is set (DIF = 1). When in the "EXTERNAL FAULT & CT SATURATION" state, the
algorithm keeps the saturation flag set (SAT = 1). The state machine returns to the "EXTERNAL FAULT" state if the differ-
ential flag is reset (DIF = 0) for 100 ms.
NORMAL
SC = (|ID| < SL x IR) and (IR > BL)
SAT := 0
where: IR = restraint current
ID = differential current
(|ID| < SL x IR or |ID| < PICKUP) DIF = stator differential pickup flag
AND SC SL = slope 1 setting
(NOT (SC)) for 200 msec ("saturation condition") BL = break point 1 setting
PICKUP = pickup setting
5 EXTERNAL
FAULT
SAT := 1
DIF=1 DIF=0
for 100 msec
EXTERNAL
FAULT & CT
SATURATION
SAT := 1
Figure 5–23: SATURATION DETECTOR STATE MACHINE

PHASE COMPARISON PRINCIPLE:
The test for direction can be summarized by the following equation:
If ( ITS > BL or ( I TS > K ⋅ IR and I TS > 0.1 pu ) ) and ( I NS > B L or ( I NS > K ⋅ I R and I NS > 0.1 pu ) )
then DIR = abs ( ∠I TS – ∠I NS ) > 90°
else DIR = 1
where: IR = restraining current
DIR = flag indicating that the phase comparison principle is satisfied
BL = breakpoint 1 setting
ITS, INS = current at the terminal and neutral sources, respectively
K = factory constant of 0.5

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
STATOR DIFF PKP A FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
STATOR DIFF SAT A AND STATOR DIFF OP A
OR
STATOR DIFF DIR A
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
STATOR DIFF PKP B FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
STATOR DIFF SAT B AND STATOR DIFF OP B
OR
STATOR DIFF DIR B
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
STATOR DIFF PKP C FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
STATOR DIFF SAT C AND STATOR DIFF OP C
OR
STATOR DIFF DIR C
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR STATOR DIFF OP
842707A1.CDR
Figure 5–24: STATOR DIFFERENTIAL FINAL OUTPUT LOGIC

5.5.7 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(8) SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
SENSITIVE
DIRECTIONAL POWER
DIRECTIONAL
POWER 1
DIR POWER 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Disabled
DIR POWER 1 Range: SRC 1, SRC 2,..., SRC 6

MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
DIR POWER 1 Range: 0 to 359° in steps of 1

MESSAGE
RCA: 0°
DIR POWER 1 Range: 0 to 0.95° in steps of 0.05

MESSAGE
CALIBRATION: 0.00°
DIR POWER 1 STG1 Range: –1.200 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE
SMIN: 0.100 pu
DIR POWER 1 STG1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.50 s
Range: –1.200 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001
5 MESSAGE
DIR POWER 1 STG2
SMIN: 0.100 pu
DIR POWER 1 STG2 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE
DELAY: 20.00 s
DIR POWER 1 BLK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

MESSAGE
Off
DIR POWER 1 Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-Reset
DIR POWER 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
DIRECTIONAL
POWER 2
The Directional Power element responds to three-phase active power and is designed for reverse power and low forward
power applications for synchronous machines or interconnections involving co-generation. The relay measures the three-
phase power from either full set of wye-connected VTs or full-set of delta-connected VTs. In the latter case, the two-wattme-
ter method is used. Refer to the UR METERING CONVENTIONS section in Chapter 6 for conventions regarding the active
and reactive powers used by the Directional Power element.
The element has an adjustable characteristic angle and minimum operating power as shown in the DIRECTIONAL
POWER CHARACTERISTIC diagram.
The element responds to the following condition:
P cos θ + Q sin θ > SMIN
where: P and Q are active and reactive powers as measured per the UR convention,
θ is a sum of the element characteristic (RCA) and calibration (CALIBRATION) angles, and
SMIN is the minimum operating power
The operating quantity is available for display as under ACTUAL VALUES METERING SENSITIVE POWER 1(2).
The element has two independent (as to the pickup and delay settings) stages for alarm and trip, respectively.

n
tio
c
re
Di
OPERATE
RCA+
CALIBRATION
SMIN
P
+
RESTRAIN
-
Figure 5–25: DIRECTIONAL POWER CHARACTERISTIC

By making the characteristic angle adjustable and providing for both negative and positive values of the minimum operating
power a variety of operating characteristics can be achieved as presented in the figure below. For example, Figure (a)
below shows settings for reverse power application, while Figure (b) shows settings for low forward power application.
(a) Q (b) Q
RESTRAIN
OPERATE RESTRAIN OPERATE
P P
RCA = 180o RCA = 180o

5
SMIN > 0 SMIN < 0
(c) Q (d) Q
OPERATE OPERATE
P P
RESTRAIN RESTRAIN
RCA = 0o RCA = 0o
SMIN < 0 SMIN > 0
(e) Q
OPERATE
(f) Q
RESTRAIN
RESTRAIN OPERATE
P P
RCA = 90o RCA = 270o

SMIN > 0 SMIN < 0
842702A1.CDR
Figure 5–26: DIRECTIONAL POWER ELEMENT SAMPLE APPLICATIONS

DIR POWER 1 RCA:

Specifies the relay characteristic angle (RCA) for the directional power function. Application of this setting is threefold:
• It allows the element to respond to active or reactive power in any direction (active overpower, active underpower, etc.)
• Together with a precise calibration angle, it allows compensation for any CT and VT angular errors to permit more sen-
sitive settings.
• It allows for required direction in situations when the voltage signal is taken from behind a delta-wye connected power
transformer and the phase angle compensation is required.
For example, the active overpower characteristic is achieved by setting DIR POWER X RCA = 0°, reactive overpower by set-
ting DIR POWER X RCA = 90°, active underpower by setting DIR POWER X RCA = 180°, and reactive underpower by settings
DIR POWER X RCA = 270°.
DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION:

This setting allows the RCA to change in small steps of 0.05°. This may be useful when a small difference in VT and CT
angular errors is to be compensated to permit more sensitive settings. This setting virtually enables calibration of the Direc-
tional Power function in terms of the angular error of applied VTs and CTs.
The element responds to the sum of the DIR POWER X RCA and DIR POWER X CALIBRATION settings.
DIR POWER 1 STG1 SMIN:
This setting specifies the minimum power as defined along the RCA angle for the stage 1 of the element. The positive val-
ues imply a shift towards the operate region along the RCA line. The negative values imply a shift towards the restrain
region along the RCA line. Refer to the DIRECTIONAL POWER SAMPLE APPLICATIONS figure for an illustration.
Together with the RCA, this setting enables a wide range of operating characteristics. This setting applies to three-phase
power and is entered in pu. The base quantity is 3 × VT pu base × CT pu base.
5 For example, a setting of 2% for a 200 MW machine, is 0.02 × 200 MW = 4 MW. If 7.967 kV is a primary VT voltage and 10
kA is a primary CT current, the source pu quantity is 239 MVA, and thus, SMIN should be set at 4 MW / 239 MVA = 0.0167
pu ≈ 0.017 pu. If the reverse power application is considered, RCA = 180° and SMIN = 0.017 pu.
The element drops out if the magnitude of the positive-sequence current becomes virtually zero, that is, it drops below the
cutoff level.
DIR POWER 1 STG1 DELAY:
This setting specifies a time delay for the stage 1 of the element. For reverse power or low forward power applications for a
synchronous machine, stage 1 is typically applied for alarming and stage 2 for tripping.
SETTING
DIR POWER 1
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1
SETTINGS SETTING
SETTING DIR POWER 1 RCA: DIR POWER 1 STG1
DIR POWER 1 BLK: DELAY:
AND
DIR POWER 1 tPKP

CALIBRATION:
Off
DIR POWER 1 STG1 100ms
SMIN:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
DIR POWER 1 STG2 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING SMIN: DIR POWER 1 STG1 OP
RUN DIR POWER 1 STG1 DPO
DIR POWER 1 SOURCE: DIR POWER 1 DPO
DIR POWER 1 STG1 PKP
OR
DIRECTIONAL POWER DIR POWER 1 PKP

3Φ Active Power (P)
CHARACTERISTICS DIR POWER 1 STG2 PKP
OR
DIR POWER 1 OP
3Φ Reactive Power (Q)
DIR POWER 1 STG2 DPO
DIR POWER 1 STG2 OP
SETTING
DIR POWER 1 STG2
DELAY:
tPKP
100ms
842003A2.CDR
Figure 5–27: DIRECTIONAL POWER SCHEME LOGIC

5.5.8 CURRENT ELEMENTS
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(8)
PHASE CURRENT PHASE IOC1

See page 5–71.
PHASE IOC2
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL IOC1

See page 5–72.
NEUTRAL IOC2
MESSAGE
GROUND CURRENT GROUND TOC1

See page 5–73.
GROUND TOC2
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1
MESSAGE See page 5–74.
GROUND IOC2
MESSAGE
The relay current elements menu consists of time overcurrent (TOC), instantaneous overcurrent (IOC), and directional cur-
rent elements. These elements can be used for tripping, alarming, or other functions. 5

5.5.9 INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT CURVE CHARACTERISTICS
The inverse time overcurrent curves used by the TOC (time overcurrent) Current Elements are the IEEE, IEC, GE Type
IAC, and I2t standard curve shapes. This allows for simplified coordination with downstream devices. If however, none of
these curve shapes is adequate, the FlexCurve™ may be used to customize the inverse time curve characteristics. The
Definite Time curve is also an option that may be appropriate if only simple protection is required.
Table 5–16: OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES

IEEE IEC GE TYPE IAC OTHER
IEEE Extremely Inv. IEC Curve A (BS142) IAC Extremely Inv. I2t
IEEE Very Inverse IEC Curve B (BS142) IAC Very Inverse FlexCurve A
IEEE Moderately Inv. IEC Curve C (BS142) IAC Inverse FlexCurve B
IEC Short Inverse IAC Short Inverse Definite Time
A time dial multiplier setting allows selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multiplier = 1) with
the curve shape (CURVE) setting. Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, operate times are directly proportional
to the time multiplier (TD MULTIPLIER) setting value. For example, all times for a multiplier of 10 are 10 times the multiplier 1
or base curve values. Setting the multiplier to zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup.
Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal “energy capacity” memory variable. When this variable indi-
cates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent element will operate. If less than 100% energy capac-
ity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98% of the pickup value, the
variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available: “Instantaneous” and “Timed”. The Instan-
taneous selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which set the energy capacity
5 directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The Timed selection can be used where the relay must
coordinate with electromechanical relays. With this setting, the energy capacity variable is decremented according to the
equation provided.
Graphs of standard time-current curves on 11” × 17” log-log graph paper are available upon request from
the GE Power Management literature department. The original files are also available in PDF format on the
NOTE
UR Software Installation CD and the GE Power Management Web Page.

IEEE CURVES:
The IEEE time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the IEEE C37.112-1996 curve classifications
for extremely, very, and moderately inverse. The IEEE curves are derived from the formulae:
A
---------------------------------- + B tr
---------------------------------
-
I - p
T = TDM ×  --------------- TRESET = TDM ×  I  2
 I pickup – 1 ---------------- – 1
 I pickup
where: T = Operate Time (sec.)

TDM = Multiplier Setting
I = Input Current
Ipickup = Pickup Current Setting
A, B, p = Constants
TRESET = reset time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
tr = characteristic constant
Table 5–17: IEEE INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS
IEEE CURVE SHAPE A B P TR
IEEE EXTREMELY INVERSE 28.2 0.1217 2.0000 29.1
IEEE VERY INVERSE 19.61 0.491 2.0000 21.6
IEEE MODERATELY INVERSE 0.0515 0.1140 0.02000 4.85
Table 5–18: IEEE CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

MULTIPLIER
(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0
CURRENT ( I / Ipickup)
5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
5
IEEE EXTREMELY INVERSE
0.5 11.341 4.761 1.823 1.001 0.648 0.464 0.355 0.285 0.237 0.203
1.0 22.682 9.522 3.647 2.002 1.297 0.927 0.709 0.569 0.474 0.407
2.0 45.363 19.043 7.293 4.003 2.593 1.855 1.418 1.139 0.948 0.813
4.0 90.727 38.087 14.587 8.007 5.187 3.710 2.837 2.277 1.897 1.626
6.0 136.090 57.130 21.880 12.010 7.780 5.564 4.255 3.416 2.845 2.439
8.0 181.454 76.174 29.174 16.014 10.374 7.419 5.674 4.555 3.794 3.252
10.0 226.817 95.217 36.467 20.017 12.967 9.274 7.092 5.693 4.742 4.065
IEEE VERY INVERSE
0.5 8.090 3.514 1.471 0.899 0.654 0.526 0.450 0.401 0.368 0.345
1.0 16.179 7.028 2.942 1.798 1.308 1.051 0.900 0.802 0.736 0.689
2.0 32.358 14.055 5.885 3.597 2.616 2.103 1.799 1.605 1.472 1.378
4.0 64.716 28.111 11.769 7.193 5.232 4.205 3.598 3.209 2.945 2.756
6.0 97.074 42.166 17.654 10.790 7.849 6.308 5.397 4.814 4.417 4.134
8.0 129.432 56.221 23.538 14.387 10.465 8.410 7.196 6.418 5.889 5.513
10.0 161.790 70.277 29.423 17.983 13.081 10.513 8.995 8.023 7.361 6.891
IEEE MODERATELY INVERSE
0.5 3.220 1.902 1.216 0.973 0.844 0.763 0.706 0.663 0.630 0.603
1.0 6.439 3.803 2.432 1.946 1.688 1.526 1.412 1.327 1.260 1.207
2.0 12.878 7.606 4.864 3.892 3.377 3.051 2.823 2.653 2.521 2.414
4.0 25.756 15.213 9.729 7.783 6.753 6.102 5.647 5.307 5.041 4.827
6.0 38.634 22.819 14.593 11.675 10.130 9.153 8.470 7.960 7.562 7.241
8.0 51.512 30.426 19.458 15.567 13.507 12.204 11.294 10.614 10.083 9.654
10.0 64.390 38.032 24.322 19.458 16.883 15.255 14.117 13.267 12.604 12.068

IEC CURVES
For European applications, the relay offers three standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142. These
are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, and IEC Curve C. The formulae for these curves are:
K tr
---------------------------------- ---------------------------------
-
I E
T = TDM ×  --------------- T RESET = TDM ×  I  2
- –1 ---------------- – 1
 I pickup  I pickup
where: T = Operate Time (sec.) TDM = Multiplier Setting I = Input Current

Ipickup = Pickup Current Setting K, E = Constants tr = Characteristic Constant
TRESET = Reset Time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
Table 5–19: IEC (BS) INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEC (BS) CURVE SHAPE K E TR
IEC CURVE A (BS142) 0.140 0.020 9.7
IEC CURVE B (BS142) 13.500 1.000 43.2
IEC CURVE C (BS142) 80.000 2.000 58.2
IEC SHORT INVERSE 0.050 0.040 0.500
Table 5–20: IEC CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

MULTIPLIER CURRENT ( I / Ipickup)
(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEC CURVE A
0.05 0.860 0.501 0.315 0.249 0.214 0.192 0.176 0.165 0.156 0.149
5 0.10 1.719 1.003 0.630 0.498 0.428 0.384 0.353 0.330 0.312 0.297
0.20 3.439 2.006 1.260 0.996 0.856 0.767 0.706 0.659 0.623 0.594
0.40 6.878 4.012 2.521 1.992 1.712 1.535 1.411 1.319 1.247 1.188
0.60 10.317 6.017 3.781 2.988 2.568 2.302 2.117 1.978 1.870 1.782
0.80 13.755 8.023 5.042 3.984 3.424 3.070 2.822 2.637 2.493 2.376
1.00 17.194 10.029 6.302 4.980 4.280 3.837 3.528 3.297 3.116 2.971
IEC CURVE B
0.05 1.350 0.675 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.135 0.113 0.096 0.084 0.075
0.10 2.700 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.270 0.225 0.193 0.169 0.150
0.20 5.400 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.540 0.450 0.386 0.338 0.300
0.40 10.800 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 1.080 0.900 0.771 0.675 0.600
0.60 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.620 1.350 1.157 1.013 0.900
0.80 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 2.160 1.800 1.543 1.350 1.200
1.00 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 2.700 2.250 1.929 1.688 1.500
IEC CURVE C
0.05 3.200 1.333 0.500 0.267 0.167 0.114 0.083 0.063 0.050 0.040
0.10 6.400 2.667 1.000 0.533 0.333 0.229 0.167 0.127 0.100 0.081
0.20 12.800 5.333 2.000 1.067 0.667 0.457 0.333 0.254 0.200 0.162
0.40 25.600 10.667 4.000 2.133 1.333 0.914 0.667 0.508 0.400 0.323
0.60 38.400 16.000 6.000 3.200 2.000 1.371 1.000 0.762 0.600 0.485
0.80 51.200 21.333 8.000 4.267 2.667 1.829 1.333 1.016 0.800 0.646
1.00 64.000 26.667 10.000 5.333 3.333 2.286 1.667 1.270 1.000 0.808
IEC SHORT TIME
0.05 0.153 0.089 0.056 0.044 0.038 0.034 0.031 0.029 0.027 0.026
0.10 0.306 0.178 0.111 0.088 0.075 0.067 0.062 0.058 0.054 0.052
0.20 0.612 0.356 0.223 0.175 0.150 0.135 0.124 0.115 0.109 0.104
0.40 1.223 0.711 0.445 0.351 0.301 0.269 0.247 0.231 0.218 0.207
0.60 1.835 1.067 0.668 0.526 0.451 0.404 0.371 0.346 0.327 0.311
0.80 2.446 1.423 0.890 0.702 0.602 0.538 0.494 0.461 0.435 0.415
1.00 3.058 1.778 1.113 0.877 0.752 0.673 0.618 0.576 0.544 0.518

IAC CURVES:
The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae:
B D E tr
A + -------------------------------- + ----------------------------------2- + ----------------------------------3-
T = TDM × I - – C  I
 --------------- I T RESET = TDM × ---------------------------------
-
  - – C I - 2
I   ---------------
I pickup
- – C  ---------------
I pickup
 ---------------
 Ipickup – 1
pickup
where: T = Operate Time (sec.) TDM = Multiplier Setting I = Input Current

Ipickup = Pickup Current Setting A to E = Constants tr = Characteristic Constant
Table 5–21: GE TYPE IAC INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IAC CURVE SHAPE A B C D E TR
IAC EXTREME INVERSE 0.0040 0.6379 0.6200 1.7872 0.2461 6.008
IAC VERY INVERSE 0.0900 0.7955 0.1000 –1.2885 7.9586 4.678
IAC INVERSE 0.2078 0.8630 0.8000 –0.4180 0.1947 0.990
IAC SHORT INVERSE 0.0428 0.0609 0.6200 –0.0010 0.0221 0.222
Table 5–22: IAC CURVE TRIP TIMES

(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IAC EXTREMELY INVERSE
0.5 1.699 0.749 0.303 0.178 0.123 0.093 0.074 0.062 0.053 0.046
1.0
2.0
3.398
6.796
1.498
2.997
0.606
1.212
0.356
0.711
0.246
0.491
0.186
0.372
0.149
0.298
0.124
0.248
0.106
0.212
0.093
0.185
5
4.0 13.591 5.993 2.423 1.422 0.983 0.744 0.595 0.495 0.424 0.370
6.0 20.387 8.990 3.635 2.133 1.474 1.115 0.893 0.743 0.636 0.556
8.0 27.183 11.987 4.846 2.844 1.966 1.487 1.191 0.991 0.848 0.741
10.0 33.979 14.983 6.058 3.555 2.457 1.859 1.488 1.239 1.060 0.926
IAC VERY INVERSE
0.5 1.451 0.656 0.269 0.172 0.133 0.113 0.101 0.093 0.087 0.083
1.0 2.901 1.312 0.537 0.343 0.266 0.227 0.202 0.186 0.174 0.165
2.0 5.802 2.624 1.075 0.687 0.533 0.453 0.405 0.372 0.349 0.331
4.0 11.605 5.248 2.150 1.374 1.065 0.906 0.810 0.745 0.698 0.662
6.0 17.407 7.872 3.225 2.061 1.598 1.359 1.215 1.117 1.046 0.992
8.0 23.209 10.497 4.299 2.747 2.131 1.813 1.620 1.490 1.395 1.323
10.0 29.012 13.121 5.374 3.434 2.663 2.266 2.025 1.862 1.744 1.654
IAC INVERSE
0.5 0.578 0.375 0.266 0.221 0.196 0.180 0.168 0.160 0.154 0.148
1.0 1.155 0.749 0.532 0.443 0.392 0.360 0.337 0.320 0.307 0.297
2.0 2.310 1.499 1.064 0.885 0.784 0.719 0.674 0.640 0.614 0.594
4.0 4.621 2.997 2.128 1.770 1.569 1.439 1.348 1.280 1.229 1.188
6.0 6.931 4.496 3.192 2.656 2.353 2.158 2.022 1.921 1.843 1.781
8.0 9.242 5.995 4.256 3.541 3.138 2.878 2.695 2.561 2.457 2.375
10.0 11.552 7.494 5.320 4.426 3.922 3.597 3.369 3.201 3.072 2.969
IAC SHORT INVERSE
0.5 0.072 0.047 0.035 0.031 0.028 0.027 0.026 0.026 0.025 0.025
1.0 0.143 0.095 0.070 0.061 0.057 0.054 0.052 0.051 0.050 0.049
2.0 0.286 0.190 0.140 0.123 0.114 0.108 0.105 0.102 0.100 0.099
4.0 0.573 0.379 0.279 0.245 0.228 0.217 0.210 0.204 0.200 0.197
6.0 0.859 0.569 0.419 0.368 0.341 0.325 0.314 0.307 0.301 0.296
8.0 1.145 0.759 0.559 0.490 0.455 0.434 0.419 0.409 0.401 0.394
10.0 1.431 0.948 0.699 0.613 0.569 0.542 0.524 0.511 0.501 0.493

I2t CURVES:
The curves for the I2t are derived from the formulae:
100 100
T = TDM × ------------------------
- TRESET = TDM × --------------------------
-
I - 2
 --------------- I - – 2
 ---------------
 I pickup  I pickup

I = Input Current
Table 5–23: I2t CURVE TRIP TIMES

(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.01 0.44 0.25 0.11 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01
0.10 4.44 2.50 1.11 0.63 0.40 0.28 0.20 0.16 0.12 0.10
1.00 44.44 25.00 11.11 6.25 4.00 2.78 2.04 1.56 1.23 1.00
10.00 444.44 250.00 111.11 62.50 40.00 27.78 20.41 15.63 12.35 10.00
100.00 4444.4 2500.0 1111.1 625.00 400.00 277.78 204.08 156.25 123.46 100.00
600.00 26666.7 15000.0 6666.7 3750.0 2400.0 1666.7 1224.5 937.50 740.74 600.00
5 FLEXCURVE™:
The custom FlexCurve™ is described in detail in the FLEXCURVE™ section of this chapter. The curve shapes for the Flex-
Curves™ are derived from the formulae:
I -
T = TDM × FlexcurveTime@  --------------- I
When  ---------------- ≥ 1.00
I pickup  Ipickup
I I
T RESET = TDM × FlexcurveTime@  ---------------- When  ---------------- ≤ 0.98
I pickup I pickup

I = Input Current
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
DEFINITE TIME CURVE:
The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time. The base
definite time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.00 to 600.00 makes this delay adjustable from instanta-
neous to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms.
T = TDM in seconds, when I > Ipickup
TRESET = –TDM in seconds
I = Input Current
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)

5.5.10 PHASE CURRENT
a) PHASE IOC1 / IOC2 (PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT: ANSI 50P)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(8) PHASE CURRENT PHASE IOC 1
PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

FUNCTION: Disabled
PHASE IOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2,..., SRC 6
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE IOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
PHASE IOC1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
PHASE IOC1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK A: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK B: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK C: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
5
TARGET: Self-reset
PHASE IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The phase instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a
Definite Time element. The input current is the fundamental phasor magnitude.
SETTING SETTING SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC

PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC1 PICKUP OPERANDS
FUNCTION: PICKUP: DELAY: PHASE IOC1 A PKP
Enabled = 1 AND RUN PHASE IOC1 RESET
Disabled = 0 DELAY: PHASE IOC1 A DPO
IA ³ PICKUP tPKP
SETTING tRST PHASE IOC1 B PKP
AND RUN
PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC1 B DPO
SOURCE: tPKP
IB ³ PICKUP
IA tRST PHASE IOC1 C PKP
AND RUN
IB
tPKP PHASE IOC1 C DPO
IC
IC ³ PICKUP tRST
PHASE IOC1 A OP
SETTING PHASE IOC1 B OP

PHASE IOC1
BLOCK-A: PHASE IOC1 C OP
Off = 0
OR PHASE IOC1 PKP
SETTING OR PHASE IOC1 OP

PHASE IOC1
BLOCK-B:
827033A5.VSD
Off = 0
SETTING
PHASE IOC1
BLOCK-C:
Off = 0
Figure 5–28: PHASE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

5.5.11 NEUTRAL CURRENT
a) NEUTRAL IOC1 / IOC2 (NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT: ANSI 50N)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(8) NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL IOC1
NEUTRAL IOC1 NEUTRAL IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

FUNCTION: Disabled
NEUTRAL IOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2,..., SRC 6
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
NEUTRAL IOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
NEUTRAL IOC1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
NEUTRAL IOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
NEUTRAL IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
5 The Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous function with no intentional delay or as a
Definite Time function. The element essentially responds to the magnitude of a neutral current fundamental frequency pha-
sor calculated from the phase currents. A “positive-sequence restraint” is applied for better performance. A small portion
(6.25%) of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero-sequence current magnitude when forming
the operating quantity of the element as follows:
I op = 3 × ( I_0 – K ⋅ I_1 ) , where K = 1/16.
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence currents
resulting from:
• system unbalances under heavy load conditions
• transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults
• switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple of
pickup). The operating quantity depends on how test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection:
I op = 0.9375 ⋅ I injected ; three-phase pure zero-sequence injection: I op = 3 × I injected ).
SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 FUNCTION: SETTINGS
Disabled=0 NEUTRAL IOC1

SETTING PICKUP DELAY :
Enabled=1 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
NEUTRAL IOC1
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP: NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP
RESET DELAY :
SETTING NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO
AND RUN tPKP
tRST NEUTRAL IOC1 OP
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK: 3( I _0 - K I _1 ) PICKUP
Off=0
SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 SOURCE:

827035A4.CDR
I_0
Figure 5–29: NEUTRAL IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

5.5.12 GROUND CURRENT
a) GROUND TOC1 / TOC2 (GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT: ANSI 51G)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(8) GROUND CURRENT GROUND TOC1
GROUND TOC1 GROUND TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

FUNCTION: Disabled
GROUND TOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2,..., SRC 6
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
GROUND TOC1 Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
INPUT: Phasor
GROUND TOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
GROUND TOC1 Range: see OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES table
MESSAGE
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
GROUND TOC1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
GROUND TOC1 Range: Instantaneous, Timed
MESSAGE
RESET: Instantaneous
GROUND TOC1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
5
TARGET: Self-reset
GROUND TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
This element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple
Definite Time element. The ground current input value is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the funda-
mental phasor or RMS magnitude. Two methods of resetting operation are available; “Timed” and “Instantaneous” (refer to
the INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT CURVE CHARACTERISTICS section for details). When the element is blocked, the
time accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to
"Instantaneous" and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
SETTINGS
GROUND TOC1
SETTING INPUT:
GROUND TOC1 GROUND TOC1
FUNCTION: PICKUP:
Disabled = 0 GROUND TOC1
Enabled = 1 CURVE:
GROUND TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
GROUND TOC 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
RESET: GROUND TOC1 PKP
GROUND TOC1
AND RUN IG ≥ PICKUP GROUND TOC1 DPO
SOURCE:
GROUND TOC1 OP
IG t
I
SETTING
GROUND TOC1
BLOCK:
827036A3.VSD
Off = 0
Figure 5–30: GROUND TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. This channel
may be equipped with a standard or sensitive input. The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46
NOTE
times the CT rating. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.
Once picked up, the GROUND TOCx PKP output operand remains picked up until the thermal memory of
the element resets completely. The PKP operand will not reset immediately after the operating current
NOTE
drops below the pickup threshold unless GROUND TOCx RESET is set to "Instantaneous".

b) GROUND IOC1 / IOC2 (GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT: ANSI 50G)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(8) GROUND CURRENT GROUND IOC1
GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

FUNCTION: Disabled
GROUND IOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2,..., SRC 6
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
GROUND IOC1 Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
GROUND IOC1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
GROUND IOC1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.00 s
GROUND IOC1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
GROUND IOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
GROUND IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The ground instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a
5 Definite Time element. The ground current input value is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the funda-
mental phasor magnitude.
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING GROUND IOC1 PKP
GROUND IOC1
GROUND IOIC DPO
FUNCTION:
SETTINGS GROUND IOC1 OP
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1 GROUND IOC1 PICKUP
SETTING DELAY:
GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC1 RESET
SETTING
PICKUP: DELAY:
GROUND IOC1
AND RUN tPKP
SOURCE:
IG
IG ≥ PICKUP tRST
SETTING
GROUND IOC1
BLOCK:
827037A4.VSD
Off = 0
Figure 5–31: GROUND IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. This channel
may be equipped with a standard or sensitive input. The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46
NOTE
times the CT rating. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.

5.5.13 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(8) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS PHASE

UNDERVOLTAGE1
PHASE
MESSAGE
UNDERVOLTAGE2
PHASE
MESSAGE
OVERVOLTAGE1
NEUTRAL OV1
MESSAGE
NEG SEQ OV
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY UV1
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY OV1
MESSAGE
These protection elements can be used for a variety of applications such as:
Undervoltage Protection: For voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors, a drop in voltage increases the drawn
current which may cause dangerous overheating in the motor. The undervoltage protection feature can be used to either
cause a trip or generate an alarm when the voltage drops below a specified voltage setting for a specified time delay. 5
Permissive Functions: The undervoltage feature may be used to block the functioning of external devices by operating an
output relay when the voltage falls below the specified voltage setting. The undervoltage feature may also be used to block
the functioning of other elements through the block feature of those elements.
Source Transfer Schemes: In the event of an undervoltage, a transfer signal may be generated to transfer a load from its
normal source to a standby or emergency power source.
The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have a Definite Time delay characteristic. The Definite Time curve oper-
ates when the voltage drops below the pickup level for a specified period of time. The time delay is adjustable from 0 to
600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms. The undervoltage elements can also be programmed to have an inverse time delay
characteristic. The undervoltage delay setting defines the family of curves shown below.
D=5.0 2.0 1.0
20.0
D
T = ---------------------------------
-
V  18.0
 1 – ------------------
 Vpickup 16.0
14.0
Time (seconds)
where: T = Operating Time 12.0

D = Undervoltage Delay Setting
10.0
(D = 0.00 operates instantaneously)
8.0
V = Secondary Voltage applied to the relay
Vpickup = Pickup Level 6.0
4.0
At 0% of pickup, the operating time equals the
UNDERVOLTAGE DELAY setting. 2.0
NOTE 0.0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
% of V pickup
Figure 5–32: INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES

5.5.14 PHASE VOLTAGE
a) PHASE UV1 / UV2 (PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE: ANSI 27P)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(8) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1
PHASE PHASE UV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

UNDERVOLTAGE1 FUNCTION: Disabled
PHASE UV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2,..., SRC 6
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE UV1 MODE: Range: Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase
MESSAGE
Phase to Ground
PHASE UV1 Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
PHASE UV1 Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
MESSAGE
CURVE: Definite Time
PHASE UV1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
PHASE UV1 MINIMUM Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu
PHASE UV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
5 MESSAGE
PHASE UV1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
PHASE UV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The phase undervoltage element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied fun-
damental voltage (phase to ground or phase to phase for Wye VT connection, or phase to phase only for Delta VT connec-
tion) or as a simple Definite Time element. The element resets instantaneously if the applied voltage exceeds the dropout
voltage. The delay setting selects the minimum operating time of the phase undervoltage element. The minimum voltage
setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked (a setting of ‘0’ will allow a dead source to be con-
sidered a fault condition).
SETTING SETTING
PHASE UV1 PHASE UV1
FUNCTION: PICKUP:
Disabled = 0
PHASE UV1
Enabled = 1 CURVE:
PHASE UV1
SETTING DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
PHASE UV1 AND RUN VAG or VAB < PICKUP PHASE UV1 A PKP
BLOCK:
t PHASE UV1 A DPO
Off = 0 PHASE UV1 A OP
V
SETTING RUN VBG or VBC< PICKUP PHASE UV1 B PKP
t PHASE UV1 B DPO
PHASE UV1 SOURCE:
SETTING PHASE UV1 B OP
Source VT = Delta PHASE UV1 V
}
VAB MINIMUM VOLTAGE: RUN VCG or VCA < PICKUP PHASE UV1 C PKP
VBC VAG or VAB < Minimum t PHASE UV1 C DPO
VCA VBG or VBC < Minimum OR PHASE UV1 C OP
Source VT = Wye VCG or VCA < Minimum V
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING OR PHASE UV1 PKP
PHASE UV1 MODE:
Phase to Ground Phase to Phase FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

VAG VAB OR PHASE UV1 OP
VBG VBC
VCG VCA
827039A9.CDR
Figure 5–33: PHASE UV1 SCHEME LOGIC

b) PHASE OV1 (PHASE OVERVOLTAGE: ANSI 59P)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(8) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1
PHASE PHASE OV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

OVERVOLTAGE1 FUNCTION: Disabled
PHASE OV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2,..., SRC 6
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE OV1 Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
PHASE OV1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
PHASE OV1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
PHASE OV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ Operand
MESSAGE
Off
PHASE OV1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
PHASE OV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The phase overvoltage element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional time delay or as a Definite
Time element. The input voltage is the phase-to-phase voltage, either measured directly from Delta-connected VTs or as
calculated from phase-to-ground (Wye) connected VTs. The specific voltages to be used for each phase are shown on the 5
logic diagram.
SETTING SETTING SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC

PHASE OV1 PHASE OV1 PHASE OV1 PICKUP OPERANDS
FUNCTION: PICKUP: DELAY: PHASE OV1 A PKP
Disabled = 0 AND RUN PHASE OV1 RESET
Enabled = 1 DELAY: PHASE OV1 A DPO
V ≥ PICKUP tPKP
SETTING tRST PHASE OV1 B PKP
AND RUN
PHASE OV1 PHASE OV1 B DPO
SOURCE: tPKP
V ≥ PICKUP
Sequence=ABC Sequence=ACB tRST PHASE OV1 C PKP
AND RUN
VAB VAC
tPKP PHASE OV1 C DPO
VBC VCB tRST
V ≥ PICKUP
VCA VBA PHASE OV1 A OP
PHASE OV1 B OP
SETTING
PHASE OV1 C OP
PHASE OV1
BLOCK:
OR PHASE OV1 PKP
Off = 0
OR PHASE OV1 OP
827066A2.VSD
Figure 5–34: PHASE OV1 SCHEME LOGIC

5.5.15 NEUTRAL VOLTAGE
a) NEUTRAL OV1 (NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE: ANSI 59N)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(8) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS NEUTRAL OV1
NEUTRAL OV1 NEUTRAL OV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

FUNCTION: Disabled
NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2,..., SRC 6
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: Range: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.300 pu
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
NEUTRAL OV1 RESET: Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
NEUTRAL OV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
NEUTRAL OV1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
Self-reset
NEUTRAL OV1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
5 The Neutral Overvoltage element can be used to detect asymmetrical system voltage condition due to a ground fault or to
the loss of one or two phases of the source.
The element responds to the system neutral voltage (3V_0), calculated from the phase voltages. The nominal secondary
voltage of the phase voltage channels entered under SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK
PHASE VT SECONDARY is the p.u. base used when setting the pickup level.
VT errors and normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element. This function requires the VTs to
be Wye connected.
SETTING
NEUTRAL OV1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
SETTING
Enabled=1
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: SETTING
SETTING
AND RUN NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP
DELAY :
NEUTRAL OV1 BLOCK:
NEUTRAL OV1 RESET
Off=0 DELAY :
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
3V_0 < Pickup tPKP
SETTING tRST NEUTRAL OV1 OP
NEUTRAL OV1 DPO
NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: NEUTRAL OV1 PKP
ZERO SEQ VOLT (V_0)
827848A1.CDR
Figure 5–35: NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

5.5.16 NEGATIVE-SEQUENCE VOLTAGE
a) NEG SEQ OV (NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE: ANSI 59_2)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(8) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS NEG SEQ OV
NEG SEQ OV NEG SEQ OV Range: Disabled, Enabled

FUNCTION: Disabled
NEG SEQ OV SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2,..., SRC 6
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
NEG SEQ OV Range: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PICKUP: 0.300 pu
NEG SEQ OV PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.50 s
NEG SEQ OV RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.50 s
NEG SEQ OV BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
NEG SEQ OV Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
NEG SEQ OV Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The negative sequence overvoltage element may be used to detect loss of one or two phases of the source, a reversed 5
phase sequence of voltage, or a non-symmetrical system voltage condition.
SETTING
NEG SEQ OV
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
SETTING
Enabled = 1
NEG SEQ OV PICKUP: SETTINGS
SETTING NEG SEQ OV PICKUP
AND RUN DELAY:
NEG SEQ OV BLOCK: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
NEG SEQ OV RESET
NEG SEQ OV PKP
DELAY:
Off = 0 NEG SEQ OV DPO
t PKP
t RST NEG SEQ OV OP
SETTING
V_2 or 3 * V_2 >= PKP
NEG SEQ OV SIGNAL
SOURCE:
Source VT=Wye Source VT=Delta
V_2 3 * V_2 827839A2.CDR
Figure 5–36: NEG SEQ OV SCHEME LOGIC

5.5.17 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
a) AUXILIARY UV1 (AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE: ANSI 27X)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(8) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS AUXILIARY UV1
AUXILIARY UV1 AUX UV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

FUNCTION: Disabled
AUX UV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2,..., SRC 6
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
AUX UV1 PICKUP: Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.700 pu
AUX UV1 CURVE: Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
MESSAGE
Definite Time
AUX UV1 DELAY: Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
1.00 s
AUX UV1 MINIMUM: Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu
AUX UV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AUX UV1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
5 MESSAGE
AUX UV1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
This element is intended for monitoring undervoltage conditions of the auxiliary voltage. The PICKUP selects the voltage
level at which the time undervoltage element starts timing. The nominal secondary voltage of the auxiliary voltage channel
entered under SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK X5 / AUXILIARY VT X5 SECONDARY is the p.u. base
used when setting the pickup level.
The DELAY setting selects the minimum operating time of the phase undervoltage element. Both PICKUP and DELAY settings
establish the operating curve of the undervoltage element. The auxiliary undervoltage element can be programmed to use
either Definite Time Delay or Inverse Time Delay characteristics. The operating characteristics and equations for both Defi-
nite and Inverse Time Delay are as for the Phase Undervoltage Element.
The element resets instantaneously. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is
blocked.
SETTING
AUX UV1
FUNCTION: SETTING
Disabled=0
AUX UV1 PICKUP:
Enabled=1
AUX UV1 CURVE:

SETTING
AUX UV1 BLOCK: AUX UV1 DELAY:

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Off=0 AND RUN Vx < Pickup AUX UV1 PKP
AUX UV1 DPO
SETTING
SETTING t AUX UV1 OP
AUX UV1 MINIMUM
AUX UV1 SIGNAL VOLTAGE:
SOURCE:
AUX VOLT Vx Vx < Minimum
V
827849A2.CDR
Figure 5–37: AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

b) AUXILIARY OV1 (AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE: ANSI 59X)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(8) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS AUXILIARY OV1
AUXILIARY OV1 AUX OV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

FUNCTION: Disabled
AUX OV1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2,..., SRC 6
MESSAGE
SOURCE: SRC 1
AUX OV1 PICKUP: Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
0.300 pu
AUX OV1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
AUX OV1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DELAY: 1.00 s
AUX OV1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
AUX OV1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
AUX OV1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
This element is intended for monitoring overvoltage conditions of the auxiliary voltage. A typical application for this element
is monitoring the zero-sequence voltage (3V_0) supplied from an open-corner-delta VT connection. The nominal second-
ary voltage of the auxiliary voltage channel entered under SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK X5 5
AUXILIARY VT X5 SECONDARY is the p.u. base used when setting the pickup level.
SETTING
AUX OV1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
SETTING
Enabled=1
AUX OV1 PICKUP: SETTING
SETTING
AND RUN AUX OV1 PICKUP
DELAY :
AUX OV1 BLOCK:
AUX OV1 RESET
Off=0 DELAY :
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Vx < Pickup tPKP
SETTING tRST AUX OV1 OP
AUX OV1 DPO
AUX OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: AUX OV1 PKP
AUXILIARY VOLT (Vx)
827836A2.CDR
Figure 5–38: AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.6.1 OVERVIEW
CONTROL elements are generally used for control rather than protection. See the INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS sec-
tion at the front of this chapter for further information.
5.6.2 SETTING GROUPS
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTINGS GROUPS
SETTING GROUPS SETTING GROUPS Range: Disabled, Enabled

FUNCTION: Disabled
SETTING GROUPS BLK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
↓
GROUP 8 ACTIVATE ON: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
SETTING GROUP Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
The Setting Groups menu controls the activation/deactivation of up to eight possible groups of settings in the GROUPED ELE-
5 MENTS settings menu. The faceplate ‘SETTINGS IN USE’ LEDs indicate which active group (with a non-flashing energized
LED) is in service.
The SETTING GROUPS BLK setting prevents the active setting group from changing when the FlexLogic™ parameter is set to
"On". This can be useful in applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions, such as the
breaker being open.
Each GROUP ~ ACTIVATE ON setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand which, when set, will make the particular setting group
active for use by any grouped element. A priority scheme ensures that only one group is active at a given time – the high-
est-numbered group which is activated by its ACTIVATE ON parameter takes priority over the lower-numbered groups.
There is no "activate on" setting for group 1 (the default active group), because group 1 automatically becomes active if no
other group is active.
The relay can be set up via a FlexLogic™ equation to receive requests to activate or de-activate a particular non-default
settings group. The following FlexLogic™ equation (see the figure below) illustrates requests via remote communications
(e.g. VIRTUAL INPUT 1) or from a local contact input (e.g. H7a) to initiate the use of a particular settings group, and
requests from several overcurrent pickup measuring elements to inhibit the use of the particular settings group. The
assigned VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 operand is used to control the ON state of a particular settings group.
Figure 5–39: EXAMPLE FLEXLOGIC™ CONTROL OF A SETTINGS GROUP

5 SETTINGS 5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.6.3 DIGITAL ELEMENTS
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS DIGITAL ELEMENTS
DIGITAL ELEMENTS
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE
FUNCTION: Disabled
DIG ELEM 1 NAME: Range: 16 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE
Dig Element 1
DIG ELEM 1 INPUT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

MESSAGE
Off
DIG ELEM 1 PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
DIG ELEM 1 RESET Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.000 s
DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

MESSAGE
Off
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset 5
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2
↓
DIGITAL ELEMENT 16
There are 16 identical Digital Elements available, numbered 1 to 16. A Digital Element can monitor any FlexLogic™ oper-
and and present a target message and/or enable events recording depending on the output operand state. The digital ele-
ment settings include a ‘name’ which will be referenced in any target message, a blocking input from any selected
FlexLogic™ operand, and a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT: Selects a FlexLogic™ operand to be monitored by the Digital Element.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set to "0".
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DELAY: Sets the time delay to reset. If a reset delay is not required, set to "0".
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0 SETTINGS
Enabled = 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
SETTING PICKUP DELAY:
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
NAME: RESET DELAY:
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 DIG ELEM 01 DPO
AND RUN tPKP
INPUT: DIG ELEM 01 PKP
Off = 0 DIG ELEM 01 OP
INPUT = 1 tRST
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
BLOCK:
827042A1.VSD
Off = 0
Figure 5–40: DIGITAL ELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC

a) CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS

Some versions of the digital input modules include an active Voltage Monitor circuit connected across Form-A contacts.
The Voltage Monitor circuit limits the trickle current through the output circuit (see Technical Specifications for Form-A).
As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above a threshold (see Technical Specifications for Form-A), the Flex-
Logic™ operand "Cont Op # VOn" will be set. (# represents the output contact number). If the output circuit has a high
resistance or the DC current is interrupted, the trickle current will drop below the threshold and the FlexLogic™ operand
"Cont Op # VOff" will be set. Consequently, the state of these operands can be used as indicators of the integrity of the cir-
cuits in which Form-A contacts are inserted.
b) BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING – EXAMPLE 1

In many applications it is desired to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity so problems can be detected before a trip oper-
ation is required. The circuit is considered to be healthy when the Voltage Monitor connected across the trip output contact
detects a low level of current, well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil. If the circuit presents a high resis-
tance, the trickle current will fall below the monitor threshold and an alarm would be declared.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact which is open when the
breaker is open (see diagram below). To prevent unwanted alarms in this situation, the trip circuit monitoring logic must
include the breaker position.
DC+
UR Relay - Form-A
H1a
I = Current Monitor I
H1b
5 V = Voltage Monitor V
H1c
52a
Trip
Coil
827073A1.vsd
DC–
Figure 5–41: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 1
Assume the output contact H1 is a trip contact. Using the contact output settings, this output will be given an ID name, e.g.
"Cont Op 1". Assume a 52a breaker auxiliary contact is connected to contact input H7a to monitor breaker status. Using the
contact input settings, this input will be given an ID name, e.g. "Cont Ip 1" and will be set "ON" when the breaker is closed.
Using Digital Element 1 to monitor the breaker trip circuit, the settings will be:
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: Enabled
DIG ELEM 1 NAME:
MESSAGE
Bkr Trip Cct Out
DIG ELEM 1 INPUT:
MESSAGE
Cont Op 1 VOff
DIG ELEM 1 PICKUP
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.200 s
DIG ELEM 1 RESET
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.100 s
DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK:
MESSAGE
Cont Ip 1 Off

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Enabled
NOTE: The PICKUP DELAY setting should be greater than the operating time of the breaker to avoid nuisance alarms.
c) BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING – EXAMPLE 2

If it is required to monitor the trip circuit continuously, independent of the breaker position (open or closed), a method to
maintain the monitoring current flow through the trip circuit when the breaker is open must be provided (as shown in Figure:
TRIP CIRCUIT - EXAMPLE 2). This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor (as listed in the VALUES OF RESIS-
TOR ‘R’ table) across the auxiliary contact in the trip circuit. In this case, it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit
with the breaker position - the BLOCK setting is selected to Off. In this case, the settings will be:
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: Enabled
DIG ELEM 1 NAME:
MESSAGE
Bkr Trip Cct Out
DIG ELEM 1 INPUT:
MESSAGE
Cont Op 1 VOff
DIG ELEM 1 PICKUP
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.200 s
DIG ELEM 1 RESET
MESSAGE
DELAY: 0.100 s 5
DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK:
MESSAGE
Off
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
MESSAGE
TARGET: Self-reset
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Enabled
DC+
Table 5–24: VALUES OF RESISTOR ‘R’
UR Relay - Form-A
POWER RESISTANCE POWER
H1a SUPPLY (V DC) (OHMS) (WATTS)
I = Current Monitor I
24 1000 2
H1b
30 5000 2
V = Voltage Monitor V
H1c 48 10000 2
110 25000 5
52a By-pass
R 125 25000 5
Resistor
250 50000 5
Trip
Coil
827074A1.vsd
DC–
Figure 5–42: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 2

5.6.4 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS DIGITAL COUNTERS COUNTER 1(8)
COUNTER 1 COUNTER 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

FUNCTION: Disabled
COUNTER 1 NAME: Range: 12 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Counter 1
COUNTER 1 UNITS: Range: 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 PRESET: Range: –2,147,483,647 to +2,147,483,647

MESSAGE
0
COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Range: –2,147,483,647 to +2,147,483,647
MESSAGE
0
COUNTER 1 UP: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
COUNTER 1 DOWN: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
5 MESSAGE
Off
COUNTER 1 RESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT: Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
There are 8 identical digital counters, numbered from 1 to 8. A digital counter counts the number of state transitions from
Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter is used to count operations such as the pickups of an element, the changes of state of an
external contact (e.g. breaker auxiliary switch), or pulses from a watt-hour meter.
COUNTER 1 UNITS:
Assigns a label to identify the unit of measure pertaining to the digital transitions to be counted. The units label will appear
in the corresponding Actual Values status.
COUNTER 1 PRESET:
Sets the count to a required preset value before counting operations begin, as in the case where a substitute relay is to be
installed in place of an in-service relay, or while the counter is running.
COUNTER 1 COMPARE:
Sets the value to which the accumulated count value is compared. Three FlexLogic™ output operands are provided to indi-
cate if the present value is "more than (HI)", "equal to (EQL)", or "less than (LO)" the set value.
COUNTER 1 UP:
Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for incrementing the counter. If an enabled UP input is received when the accumulated
value is at the limit of +2,147,483,647 counts, the counter will rollover to –2,147,483,647.
COUNTER 1 DOWN:
Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for decrementing the counter. If an enabled DOWN input is received when the accumu-
lated value is at the limit of -2,147,483,647 counts, the counter will rollover to +2,147,483,647.

COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for blocking the counting operation.
CNT1 SET TO PRESET:
Selects the FlexLogic™ operand used to set the count to the preset value. The counter will be set to the preset value in the
following situations:
1. When the counter is enabled and the "CNT1 SET TO PRESET" operand has the value 1 (when the counter is enabled
and "CNT1 SET TO PRESET" is 0, the counter will be set to 0.)
2. When the counter is running and the "CNT1 SET TO PRESET" operand changes the state from 0 to 1 ("CNT1 SET TO
PRESET" changing from 1 to 0 while the counter is running has no effect on the count).
3. When a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the "CNT1 SET TO PRESET" operand has the value
1 (when a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the "CNT1 SET TO PRESET" operand has the
value 0, the counter will be set to 0).
COUNTER 1 RESET:
Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for setting the count to either ‘0’ or the preset value depending on the state of the "CNT1
SET TO PRESET" operand.
COUNTER 1 FREEZE/RESET:
Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date
and time of the operation, and resetting the count to ‘0’ or the preset value.
COUNTER 1 FREEZE/COUNT:
Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date
and time of the operation, and continuing counting. The present accumulated value and captured frozen value with the
associated date/time stamp are available as actual values. If control power is interrupted, the accumulated and frozen val-
5
ues are saved into non-volatile memory during the power down operation.
SETTING
COUNTER 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
SETTINGS
Enabled = 1
COUNTER 1 NAME:
SETTING AND COUNTER 1 UNITS:
COUNTER 1 PRESET:
COUNTER 1 UP:
RUN
Off = 0 SETTING
FLEXLOGIC
COUNTER 1 COMPARE: OPERANDS
SETTING
CALCULATE Count more than Comp. COUNTER 1 HI
COUNTER 1 DOWN: VALUE Count equal to Comp. COUNTER 1 EQL
Off = 0 Count less than Comp. COUNTER 1 LO
SETTING
COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
Off = 0 SET TO PRESET VALUE
SETTING SET TO ZERO

ACTUAL VALUE
CNT 1 SET TO PRESET: COUNTER 1 ACCUM:
Off = 0
AND
SETTING AND ACTUAL VALUES

COUNTER 1 RESET:
COUNTER 1 FROZEN:
Off = 0
OR STORE DATE & TIME Date & Time
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:
Off = 0
OR
827065A1.VSD
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:
Off = 0
Figure 5–43: DIGITAL COUNTER SCHEME LOGIC

5.7 INPUTS / OUTPUTS 5 SETTINGS
5.7 INPUTS / OUTPUTS 5.7.1 CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUT H5a
CONTACT INPUT H5a ID: Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE
Cont Ip 1
CONTACT INPUT H5a Range: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5

MESSAGE
DEBNCE TIME: 2.0 ms
CONTACT INPUT H5a Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
↓
CONTACT INPUT xxx
CONTACT INPUT
THRESHOLDS
Ips H5a,H5c,H6a,H6c Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
5 Ips H7a,H7c,H8a,H8c Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
↓
Ips xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

MESSAGE
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
The contact inputs menu contains configuration settings for each contact input as well as voltage thresholds for each group
of four contact inputs. Upon startup, the relay processor determines (from an assessment of the installed modules) which
contact inputs are available and then display settings for only those inputs.
An alphanumeric ID may be assigned to a contact input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording purposes. The "Contact
Ip X On" (Logic 1) FlexLogic™ operand corresponds to contact input "X" being closed, while "Contact Input X Off" corre-
sponds to contact input "X" being open. The CONTACT INPUT DEBNCE TIME defines the time required for the contact to over-
come ’contact bouncing’ conditions. As this time differs for different contact types and manufacturers, set it as a maximum
contact debounce time (per manufacturer specifications) plus some margin to ensure proper operation. If CONTACT INPUT
EVENTS is set to "Enabled", every change in the contact input state will trigger an event.
A raw status is scanned for all Contact Inputs synchronously at the constant rate of 0.5 ms as shown in the figure below.
The DC input voltage is compared to a user-settable threshold. A new contact input state must be maintained for a user-
settable debounce time in order for the M60 to validate the new contact state. In the figure below, the debounce time is set
at 2.5 ms; thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state (mark no.1 in the diagram). Once validated (de-
bounced), the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic™ operand and logs an event as per user setting.
A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that validates the new state is used when logging the change of the con-
tact input into the Event Recorder (mark no. 2 in the diagram).
Protection and control elements, as well as FlexLogic™ equations and timers, are executed eight times in a power system
cycle. The protection pass duration is controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism. The FlexLogic™ operand reflecting
the debounced state of the contact is updated at the protection pass following the validation (marks no. 3 and 4 on the fig-
ure below). The update is performed at the beginning of the protection pass so all protection and control functions, as well
as FlexLogic™ equations, are fed with the updated states of the contact inputs.

5 SETTINGS 5.7 INPUTS / OUTPUTS
The FlexLogic™ operand response time to the contact input change is equal to the debounce time setting plus up to one
protection pass (variable and depending on system frequency if frequency tracking enabled). If the change of state occurs
just after a protection pass, the recognition is delayed until the subsequent protection pass; that is, by the entire duration of
the protection pass. If the change occurs just prior to a protection pass, the state is recognized immediately. Statistically a
delay of half the protection pass is expected. Owing to the 0.5 ms scan rate, the time resolution for the input contact is
below 1msec.
For example, 8 protection passes per cycle on a 60 Hz system correspond to a protection pass every 2.1 ms. With a con-
tact debounce time setting of 3.0 ms, the FlexLogic™ operand-assert time limits are: 3.0 + 0.0 = 3.0 ms and 3.0 + 2.1 = 5.1
ms. These time limits depend on how soon the protection pass runs after the debouncing time.
Regardless of the contact debounce time setting, the contact input event is time-stamped with a 1 µs accuracy using the
time of the first scan corresponding to the new state (mark no. 2 below). Therefore, the time stamp reflects a change in the
DC voltage across the contact input terminals that was not accidental as it was subsequently validated using the debounce
timer. Keep in mind that the associated FlexLogic™ operand is asserted/de-asserted later, after validating the change.
The debounce algorithm is symmetrical: the same procedure and debounce time are used to filter the LOW-HIGH (marks
no.1, 2, 3, and 4 in the figure below) and HIGH-LOW (marks no.5, 6, 7, and 8 below) transitions.
VOLTAGE
INPUT
USER-PROGRAMMABLE THRESHOLD
6
2 1 3 5
Time stamp of the first
Time stamp of the first At this time, the The FlexLogicTM scan corresponding to the
scan corresponding to
the new validated state is
logged in the SOE record
new (HIGH)
contact state is
validated
operand is going to
be asserted at this
protection pass
new validated state is
logged in the SOE record
At this time, the new
(LOW) contact state is
validated
5
7
RAW CONTACT
The FlexLogicTM
operand is going to be
STATE
de-asserted at this
protection pass
DEBOUNCE TIME
(user setting)
4
The FlexLogicTM operand
DEBOUNCE TIME
The FlexLogicTM operand changes reflecting the
SCAN TIME (user setting)
changes reflecting the validated contact state
FLEXLOGICTM
(0.5 msec) validated contact state

OPERAND
PROTECTION PASS
(8 times a cycle controlled by the
frequency tracking mechanism)
842709A1.cdr
Figure 5–44: INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME-STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING
Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each
group. The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect a closed contact input. This
value should be selected according to the following criteria: 16 for 24 V sources, 30 for 48 V sources, 80 for 110 to 125 V
sources and 140 for 250 V sources.
For example, to use contact input H5a as a status input from the breaker 52b contact to seal-in the trip relay and record it in
the Event Records menu, make the following settings changes:
CONTACT INPUT H5A ID: "Breaker Closed (52b)"
CONTACT INPUT H5A EVENTS: "Enabled"
Note that the 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.

5.7.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS VIRTUAL INPUTS VIRTUAL INPUT 1(32)
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 VIRTUAL INPUT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

FUNCTION: Disabled
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID: Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
Virt Ip 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 Range: Self-Reset, Latched
MESSAGE
TYPE: Latched
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
There are 32 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from the keypad (COMMANDS
menu) and non-UCA2 communications protocols only. All virtual input operands are defaulted to OFF = 0 unless the appro-
priate input signal is received. Virtual input states are preserved through a control power loss.
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 FUNCTION:
If set to Disabled, the input will be forced to 'OFF' (Logic 0) regardless of any attempt to alter the input. If set to Enabled, the
input will operate as shown on the scheme logic diagram, and generate output FlexLogic™ operands in response to
received input signals and the applied settings.
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 TYPE:
There are two types of operation, Self-Reset and Latched. If set to Self-Reset, when the input signal transits from OFF = 0
5 to ON = 1, the output operand will be set to ON = 1 for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic™ equations and then return to
OFF = 0. If set to Latched, the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state as the most recent
received input, ON =1 or OFF = 0.
Virtual Input operating mode Self-Reset generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the Flex-
Logic™ equations. If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a FlexLogic™ equation, it
NOTE
will most probably have to be lengthened in time. A FlexLogic™ Timer with a delayed reset can perform
this function.
SETTING
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1 S
AND
Latch
“Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1”
SETTING
“Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0” R VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:
AND
SETTING (Flexlogic Operand)
OR
Virt Ip 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
TYPE:
Latched AND
Self - Reset 827080A2.CDR
Figure 5–45: VIRTUAL INPUTS SCHEME LOGIC

5.7.3 UCA SBO TIMER
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS VIRTUAL INPUTS UCA SBO TIMER
UCA SBO TIMER UCA SBO TIMEOUT: Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1

30 s
The Select-Before-Operate timer sets the interval from the receipt of an Operate signal to the automatic de-selection of the
virtual input, so that an input does not remain selected indefinitely (this is used only with the UCA Select-Before-Operate
feature).
5.7.4 CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters

Cont Op 1
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: Range: Flexlogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: Range: Flexlogic™ operand
MESSAGE
Off
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Enabled
Upon startup of the relay, the main processor will determine from an assessment of the modules installed in the chassis
which contact outputs are available and present the settings for only these outputs.
5
An ID may be assigned to each contact output. The signal that can OPERATE a contact output may be any FlexLogic™
operand (virtual output, element state, contact input, or virtual input). An additional FlexLogic™ operand may be used to
SEAL-IN the relay. Any change of state of a contact output can be logged as an Event if programmed to do so.
EXAMPLE:
The trip circuit current is monitored by providing a current threshold detector in series with some Form-A contacts (see the
TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE in the DIGITAL ELEMENTS section). The monitor will set a flag (see Technical Specifications for
Form-A). The name of the FlexLogic™ operand set by the monitor, consists of the output relay designation, followed by the
name of the flag; e.g. ‘Cont Op 1 IOn’ or ‘Cont Op 1 IOff’.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact used to interrupt current
flow after the breaker has tripped, to prevent damage to the less robust initiating contact. This can be done by monitoring
an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped, but this scheme is subject to incorrect oper-
ation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change-of-state and interruption of current in the
trip circuit. The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is provided by directly measuring current in the tripping
circuit, and using this parameter to control resetting of the initiating relay. This scheme is often called "trip seal-in".
This can be realized in the UR using the ‘Cont Op 1 IOn’ FlexLogic™ operand to seal-in the Contact Output. For example,
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID
Cont Op 1
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE:
MESSAGE
Off
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN:
MESSAGE
Cont Op 1 IOn
CONTACT OUTPUT H1
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Enabled

5.7.5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters

Virt Op 1
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
There are 64 virtual outputs that may be assigned via FlexLogic™. If not assigned, the output will be forced to ‘OFF’ (Logic
0). An ID may be assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of the
FlexLogic™ equations. Any change of state of a virtual output can be logged as an event if programmed to do so.
For example, if Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic™ and the trip relay is used to signal events, the settings
would be programmed as follows:
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID
Trip
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
MESSAGE
EVENTS: Disabled
5.7.6 REMOTE DEVICES
a) REMOTE INPUTS / OUTPUTS - OVERVIEW

Remote inputs and outputs, which are a means of exchanging information regarding the state of digital points between
5 remote devices, are provided in accordance with the Electric Power Research Institute’s (EPRI) UCA2 “Generic Object Ori-
ented Substation Event (GOOSE)” specifications.
The UCA2 specification requires that communications between devices be implemented on Ethernet com-
munications facilities. For UR relays, Ethernet communications is provided only on the type 9C and 9D ver-
NOTE
sions of the CPU module.
The sharing of digital point state information between GOOSE equipped relays is essentially an extension to FlexLogic™ to
allow distributed FlexLogic™ by making operands available to/from devices on a common communications network. In
addition to digital point states, GOOSE messages identify the originator of the message and provide other information
required by the communication specification. All devices listen to network messages and capture data from only those mes-
sages that have originated in selected devices.
GOOSE messages are designed to be short, high priority and with a high level of reliability. The GOOSE message structure
contains space for 128 bit pairs representing digital point state information. The UCA specification provides 32 “DNA” bit
pairs, which are status bits representing pre-defined events. All remaining bit pairs are “UserSt” bit pairs, which are status
bits representing user-definable events. The UR implementation provides 32 of the 96 available UserSt bit pairs.
The UCA2 specification includes features that are used to cope with the loss of communication between transmitting and
receiving devices. Each transmitting device will send a GOOSE message upon a successful power-up, when the state of
any included point changes, or after a specified interval (the “default update” time) if a change-of-state has not occurred.
The transmitting device also sends a “hold time” which is set to three times the programmed default time, which is required
by the receiving device.
Receiving devices are constantly monitoring the communications network for messages they require, as recognized by the
identification of the originating device carried in the message. Messages received from remote devices include the mes-
sage “hold” time for the device. The receiving relay sets a timer assigned to the originating device to the “hold” time interval,
and if it has not received another message from this device at time-out, the remote device is declared to be non-communi-
cating, so it will use the programmed default state for all points from that specific remote device. This mechanism allows a
receiving device to fail to detect a single transmission from a remote device which is sending messages at the slowest pos-
sible rate, as set by its “default update” timer, without reverting to use of the programmed default states. If a message is
received from a remote device before the “hold” time expires, all points for that device are updated to the states contained
in the message and the hold timer is restarted. The status of a remote device, where ‘Offline’ indicates ‘non-communicat-
ing’, can be displayed.
The GOOSE facility provides for 64 remote inputs and 32 remote outputs.

b) LOCAL DEVICES - ID of Device for Transmitting GOOSE Messages

In a UR relay, the device ID that identifies the originator of the message is programmed in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP
INSTALLATION RELAY NAME setting.
c) REMOTE DEVICES - ID of Device for Receiving GOOSE Messages

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
REMOTE DEVICE 1 REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

Remote Device 1
Sixteen Remote Devices, numbered from 1 to 16, can be selected for setting purposes. A receiving relay must be pro-
grammed to capture messages from only those originating remote devices of interest. This setting is used to select specific
remote devices by entering (bottom row) the exact identification (ID) assigned to those devices.
5.7.7 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1(32)
REMOTE INPUT 1 REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE: Range: 1 to 16 inclusive

Remote Device 1
REMOTE IN 1 BIT Range: None, DNA-1 to DNA-32, UserSt-1 to UserSt-32
MESSAGE
PAIR: None
REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
STATE: Off
MESSAGE
REMOTE IN 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled 5
EVENTS: Disabled
Remote Inputs which create FlexLogic™ operands at the receiving relay, are extracted from GOOSE messages originating
in remote devices. The relay provides 32 Remote Inputs, each of which can be selected from a list consisting of 64 selec-
tions: DNA-1 through DNA-32 and UserSt-1 through UserSt-32. The function of DNA inputs is defined in the UCA2 specifi-
cations and is presented in the UCA2 DNA ASSIGNMENTS table in the Remote Outputs section. The function of UserSt
inputs is defined by the user selection of the FlexLogic™ operand whose state is represented in the GOOSE message. A
user must program a DNA point from the appropriate operand.
Remote Input 1 must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device for local
use. This programming is performed via the three settings shown above.
REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE selects the number (1 to 16) of the Remote Device which originates the required signal, as previously
assigned to the remote device via the setting REMOTE DEVICE NN ID (see REMOTE DEVICES section). REMOTE IN 1 BIT PAIR
selects the specific bits of the GOOSE message required. REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE selects the logic state for this point if
the local relay has just completed startup or the remote device sending the point is declared to be non-communicating.
For more information on GOOSE specifications, see REMOTE INPUTS/OUTPUTS OVERVIEW in the
REMOTE DEVICES section.
NOTE

5.7.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS: DNA BIT PAIRS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS REMOTE OUPUTS DNA- 1 BIT PAIR
REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA- 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic™ Operand

DNA- 1 BIT PAIR Off
DNA- 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
Remote Outputs (1 to 32) are FlexLogic™ operands inserted into GOOSE messages that are transmitted to remote
devices on a LAN. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic™ oper-
and. The above operand setting represents a specific DNA function (as shown in the following table) to be transmitted.
Table 5–25: UCA DNA2 ASSIGNMENTS
DNA DEFINITION INTENDED FUNCTION LOGIC 0 LOGIC 1
1 OperDev Trip Close
2 Lock Out LockoutOff LockoutOn
3 Initiate Reclosing Initiate remote reclose sequence InitRecloseOff InitRecloseOn
4 Block Reclosing Prevent/cancel remote reclose sequence BlockOff BlockOn
5 Breaker Failure Initiate Initiate remote breaker failure scheme BFIOff BFIOn
6 Send Transfer Trip Initiate remote trip operation TxXfrTripOff TxXfrTripOn
7 Receive Transfer Trip Report receipt of remote transfer trip command RxXfrTripOff RxXfrTripOn
8 Send Perm Report permissive affirmative TxPermOff TxPermOn
9 Receive Perm Report receipt of permissive affirmative RxPermOff RxPermOn
5 10
11
Stop Perm
Send Block
Override permissive affirmative
Report block affirmative
StopPermOff
TxBlockOff
StopPermOn
TxBlockOn
12 Receive Block Report receipt of block affirmative RxBlockOff RxBlockOn
13 Stop Block Override block affirmative StopBlockOff StopBlockOn
14 BkrDS Report breaker disconnect 3-phase state Open Closed
15 BkrPhsADS Report breaker disconnect phase A state Open Closed
16 BkrPhsBDS Report breaker disconnect phase B state Open Closed
17 BkrPhsCDS Report breaker disconnect phase C state Open Closed
18 DiscSwDS Open Closed
19 Interlock DS DSLockOff DSLockOn
20 LineEndOpen Report line open at local end Open Closed
21 Status Report operating status of local GOOSE device Offline Available
22 Event EventOff EventOn
23 Fault Present FaultOff FaultOn
24 Sustained Arc Report sustained arc SustArcOff SustArcOn
25 Downed Conductor Report downed conductor DownedOff DownedOn
26 Sync Closing SyncClsOff SyncClsOn
27 Mode Report mode status of local GOOSE device Normal Test
28→32 Reserved
For more information on GOOSE specifications, see REMOTE INPUTS/OUTPUTS OVERVIEW in the
NOTE

5.7.9 REMOTE OUTPUTS: UserSt BIT PAIRS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1 BIT PAIR
REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand

UserSt- 1 BIT PAIR Off
UserSt- 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
Disabled
Remote Outputs 1 to 32 originate as GOOSE messages to be transmitted to remote devices. Each digital point in the mes-
sage must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic™ operand. The setting above is used to select the
operand which represents a specific UserSt function (as selected by the user) to be transmitted.
The following setting represents the time between sending GOOSE messages when there has been no change of state of
any selected digital point. This setting is located in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS UCA/MMS PROTOCOL set-
tings menu.
DEFAULT GOOSE UPDATE Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1
TIME: 60 s
For more information on GOOSE specifications, see REMOTE INPUTS/OUTPUTS – OVERVIEW in the
NOTE
5.7.10 RESETTING
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS RESETTING
RESETTING RESET OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic™ operand 5

Off
Some events can be programmed to latch the faceplate LED event indicators and the target message on the display. Once
set, the latching mechanism will hold all of the latched indicators or messages in the set state after the initiating condition
has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches (not including FlexLogic™ latches) to the reset
state. The RESET command can be sent from the faceplate RESET button, a remote device via a communications chan-
nel, or any programmed operand.
When the RESET command is received by the relay, two FlexLogic™ operands are created. These operands, which are
stored as events, reset the latches if the initiating condition has cleared. The three sources of RESET commands each cre-
ate the FlexLogic™ operand "RESET OP". Each individual source of a RESET command also creates its individual oper-
and RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON), RESET OP (COMMS) or RESET OP (OPERAND) to identify the source of the
command. The setting shown above selects the operand that will create the RESET OP (OPERAND) operand.

5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O 5 SETTINGS
5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O 5.8.1 DCMA INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS
DCMA INPUTS DCMA INPUT H1
↓
↓
DCMA INPUT U8
MESSAGE
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external transducers and convert these signals into a digital for-
mat for use as required. The relay will accept inputs in the range of –1 to +20 mA DC, suitable for use with most common
transducer output ranges; all inputs are assumed to be linear over the complete range. Specific hardware details are con-
tained in the HARDWARE chapter.
Before the DCMA input signal can be used, the value of the signal measured by the relay must be converted to the range
and quantity of the external transducer primary input parameter, such as DC voltage or temperature. The relay simplifies
this process by internally scaling the output from the external transducer and displaying the actual primary parameter.
DCMA input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels
with the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclu-
sive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
5 Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown below for the first channel of
a type 5F transducer module installed in slot M.
DCMA INPUT M1 DCMA INPUT M1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

FUNCTION: Disabled
DCMA INPUT M1 ID: Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
DCMA Ip 1
DCMA INPUT M1 Range: 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
UNITS: µA
DCMA INPUT M1 Range: 0 to –1, 0 to +1, –1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10,

MESSAGE 0 to 20
RANGE: 0 to -1 mA
DCMA INPUT M1 MIN Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE
VALUE: 0.000
DCMA INPUT M1 MAX Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VALUE: 0.000
The function of the channel may be either "Enabled" or "Disabled." If Disabled, there will not be an actual value created for
the channel. An alphanumeric "ID" is assigned to the channel - this ID will be included in the display of the channel actual
value, along with the programmed "UNITS" associated with the parameter measured by the transducer, such as Volt, °C,
MegaWatts, etc. This ID is also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this
type of parameter. The RANGE setting is used to select the specific mA DC range of the transducer connected to the input
channel.
The MIN VALUE and MAX VALUE settings are used to program the span of the transducer in primary units. For example, a
temperature transducer might have a span from 0 to 250°C; in this case the MIN value would be 0 and the MAX value 250.
Another example would be a Watt transducer with a span from –20 to +180 MW; in this case the MIN value would be –20
and the MAX value 180. Intermediate values between the MIN and MAX are scaled linearly.

5 SETTINGS 5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O
5.8.2 RTD INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS
RTD INPUTS RTD INPUT H1
↓
↓
RTD INPUT U8
MESSAGE
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external Resistance Temperature Detectors and convert these
signals into a digital format for use as required. These channels are intended to be connected to any of the RTD types in
common use. Specific hardware details are contained in the HARDWARE chapter.
RTD input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with
the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclu-
sive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown below for the first channel of
a type 5C transducer module installed in slot M.
RTD INPUT M5 RTD INPUT M5

FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
5
RTD INPUT M5 ID: Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
RTD Ip 1
RTD INPUT M5 TYPE: Range: 100Ω Nickel, 10Ω Copper, 100Ω Platinum,
MESSAGE 120Ω Nickel
100Ω Nickel
The function of the channel may be either "Enabled" or "Disabled." If Disabled, there will not be an actual value created for
the channel. An alphanumeric "ID" is assigned to the channel - this ID will be included in the display of the channel actual
value. This ID is also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of
parameter. Selecting the type of RTD connected to the channel configures the channel.

5.9 TESTING 5 SETTINGS
5.9 TESTING 5.9.1 TEST MODE
PATH: SETTINGS TESTING TEST MODE
SETTINGS TEST MODE Range: Disabled, Enabled

TESTING FUNCTION: Disabled
The relay provides test settings to verify that the relay is functional using simulated conditions to test all contact inputs and
outputs. While the relay is in Test Mode (TEST MODE FUNCTION: "Enabled"), the feature being tested overrides normal func-
tioning of the relay. During this time the Test Mode LED will remain on. Once out of Test Mode (TEST MODE FUNCTION: "Dis-
abled"), the normal functioning of the relay will be restored.
5.9.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TESTING FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
FORCE CONTACT FORCE Cont Ip 1 Range: Disabled, Open, Closed

INPUTS : Disabled
FORCE Cont Ip 2 Range: Disabled, Open, Closed
MESSAGE
: Disabled
↓
FORCE Cont Ip xx Range: Disabled, Open, Closed

MESSAGE
: Disabled
The Force Contact Inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs. Once
5 enabled, the relay is placed into Test Mode, allowing this feature to override the normal function of contact inputs. The Test
Mode LED will be ON indicating that the relay is in test mode. The state of each contact input may be programmed as Dis-
abled, Open, or Closed. All contact input operations return to normal when all settings for this feature are disabled.
5.9.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TESTING FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
FORCE CONTACT FORCE Cont Op 1: Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze

OUTPUTS Disabled
FORCE Cont Op 2: Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze
MESSAGE
Disabled
↓
FORCE Cont Op xx: Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze

MESSAGE
Disabled
The Force Contact Output feature provides a method of performing checks on all contact outputs. Once enabled, the relay
is placed into Test Mode, allowing this feature to override the normal contact outputs functions. The TEST MODE LED will
be ON. The state of each contact output may be programmed as Disabled, Energized, De-energized, or Freeze. The
Freeze option maintains the output contact in the state at which it was frozen. All contact output operations return to normal
when all the settings for this feature are disabled.
5.9.4 RESET THERMAL MODEL
PATH: SETTINGS TESTING RESET THERMAL MODEL
SETTINGS RESET THERMAL MODEL? Range: No, Yes

TESTING No
This setting is used to reset the motor Thermal Capacity Used from the current value to 0%. This helps to eliminate the
waiting time during the testing of the element.

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW 6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU
ACTUAL VALUES MOTOR

See page 6-3.
STATUS
CONTACT INPUTS
See page 6-3.
VIRTUAL INPUTS
See page 6-4.
REMOTE INPUTS
See page 6-4.
CONTACT OUTPUTS
See page 6-4.
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
See page 6-5.
REMOTE DEVICES
See page 6-5.
STATUS
REMOTE DEVICES
See page 6-5.
STATISTICS
DIGITAL COUNTERS
See page 6-6.
FLEX STATES
See page 6-6.
ETHERNET
See page 6-6.
6
ACTUAL VALUES STATOR
See page 6-10.
METERING DIFFERENTIAL
MOTOR
See page 6-10.
SOURCE SRC 1
See page 6-11.
SOURCE SRC 2
SOURCE SRC 3
SOURCE SRC 4
SOURCE SRC 5
SOURCE SRC 6
SENSITIVE
See page 6-14.
DIRECTIONAL POWER
TRACKING FREQUENCY
See page 6-14.

6.1 OVERVIEW 6 ACTUAL VALUES
FLEXELEMENTS
See page 6-14.
TRANSDUCER I/O
See page 6-15.
DCMA INPUTS
TRANSDUCER I/O
See page 6-15.
RTD INPUTS
ACTUAL VALUES EVENT RECORDS

See page 6-16.
RECORDS
OSCILLOGRAPHY
See page 6-16.
ACTUAL VALUES MODEL INFORMATION

See page 6-17.
PRODUCT INFO
FIRMWARE REVISIONS
See page 6-17.

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2 STATUS
6.2 STATUS 6.2.1 NOTE
For status reporting, ‘On’ represents Logic 1 and ‘Off’ represents Logic 0.
NOTE
6.2.2 MOTOR
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS MOTOR
MOTOR MOTOR STATUS:

Offline
MOTOR THERMAL
MESSAGE
CAPACITY USED: 0%
ESTIMATED TRIP TIME
MESSAGE
ON OVERLOAD: Never
LOCKOUT TIME:
MESSAGE
0 min.
MOTOR STATUS:
This value reflects operating state of the motor.
MOTOR THERMAL CAPACITY USED:
This represents the thermal model accumulated Thermal Capacity Used as a percent.
ESTIMATED TRIP TIME ON OVERLOAD:
This value represents the estimated time to trip (in seconds) from the thermal model assuming that the motor current
remains at its current level. It is looked up from thermal model curve and takes into account that some percent of the ther-
mal capacity has already been used.
LOCKOUT TIME:
This time reflect the calculated time required for the Thermal Capacity Used to decay from its current value (after the ther-
mal model operates) to 15% at which time the thermal model operate will drop out.
6
6.2.3 CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS Cont Ip 1

Off
↓
↓
Cont Ip xx
MESSAGE
Off
The present status of the contact inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
input. For example, ‘Cont Ip 1’ refers to the contact input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the contact input.

6.2 STATUS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS Virt Ip 1

Off
↓
↓
Virt Ip 32
MESSAGE
Off
The present status of the 32 virtual inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual
input. For example, ‘Virt Ip 1’ refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the dis-
play indicates the logic state of the virtual input.
6.2.5 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE INPUTS
REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1 Range: On, Off

STATUS: Off
↓
↓
REMOTE INPUT 32 Range: On, Off

MESSAGE
STATUS: Off
The present state of the 32 remote inputs is shown here.

The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been established to be "Offline" in which
case the value shown is the programmed default state for the remote input.
6 6.2.6 CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CONTACT OUTPUTS
CONTACT OUTPUTS Cont Op 1

Off
↓
Cont Op xx
MESSAGE
Off
The present state of the contact outputs is shown here.

The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact output. For example, ‘Cont Op 1’ refers to the contact out-
put in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the contact output.
For Form-A outputs, the state of the voltage(V) and/or current(I) detectors will show as: Off, VOff, IOff, On,
VOn, and/or IOn. For Form-C outputs, the state will show as Off or On.
NOTE

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2 STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS Virt Op 1

Off
↓
Virt Op 64
MESSAGE
Off
The present state of up to 64 virtual outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual
output. For example, ‘Virt Op 1’ refers to the virtual output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the virtual output, as calculated by the FlexLogic™ equation for that output.
6.2.8 REMOTE DEVICES STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATUS
REMOTE DEVICES All REMOTE DEVICES Range: Yes, No

STATUS ONLINE: No
REMOTE DEVICE 1 Range: Online, Offline
MESSAGE
STATUS: Offline
↓
REMOTE DEVICE 16 Range: Online, Offline

MESSAGE
STATUS: Offline
The present state of up to 16 programmed Remote Devices is shown here. The ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE message indi-
cates whether or not all programmed Remote Devices are online. If the corresponding state is "No", then at least one
required Remote Device is not online.
6.2.9 REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS

6
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
REMOTE DEVICE 1 REMOTE DEVICE 1

StNum: 0
REMOTE DEVICE 1
MESSAGE
SqNum: 0
Statistical data (2 types) for up to 16 programmed Remote Devices is shown here.

• The StNum number is obtained from the indicated Remote Device and is incremented whenever a change of state of
at least one DNA or UserSt bit occurs.
• The SqNum number is obtained from the indicated Remote Device and is incremented whenever a GOOSE message
is sent. This number will rollover to zero when a count of 4,294,967,295 is incremented.

6.2 STATUS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2.10 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES DIGITAL COUNTERS DIGITAL COUNTERS DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1(8)
DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1 ACCUM:

Counter 1 0
Counter 1 FROZEN:
MESSAGE
0
Counter 1 FROZEN:
MESSAGE
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Counter 1 MICROS:
MESSAGE
0
The present status of the 8 digital counters is shown here. The status of each counter, with the user-defined counter name,
includes the accumulated and frozen counts (the count units label will also appear). Also included, is the date/time stamp
for the frozen count. The Counter n MICROS value refers to the microsecond portion of the time stamp.
6.2.11 FLEX STATES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS FLEX STATES
FLEX STATES PARAM 1: Off Range: Off, On

Off
↓
PARAM 256: Off Range: Off, On

MESSAGE
Off
There are 256 FlexState bits available. The second line value indicates the state of the given FlexState bit.
6 6.2.12 ETHERNET
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS ETHERNET
ETHERNET ETHERNET PRI LINK Range: Fail, OK

STATUS: OK
ETHERNET SEC LINK Range: Fail, OK
MESSAGE
STATUS: OK

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3 METERING
6.3 METERING 6.3.1 METERING CONVENTIONS
a) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING POWER AND ENERGY

The following figure illustrates the conventions established for use in UR relays.
PER IEEE C O N V E N TIO N S

Generator
PA R A M ETERS A S S EE N
G BY THE U R RELA Y
Voltage +Q
VCG
WATTS = Positive IC
PF = Lead PF = Lag
VARS = Positive
PF = Lag IA
VAG -P +P
Current
IB IA
PF = Lag PF = Lead
UR RELAY
VBG -Q
M LOAD
- 1
Inductive Resistive S=VI
Generator
VCG
+Q
Voltage
PF = Lead PF = Lag
WATTS = Positive
IA
VARS = Negative IC
PF = Lead VAG -P +P
IA
Current
PF = Lag PF = Lead
IB
UR RELAY
VBG -Q
LOAD S=VI
-
Inductive
Resistive
Resistive
2
6
M LOAD
VCG +Q
Voltage
PF = Lead PF = Lag
IB
IA
WATTS = Negative
VAG
VARS = Negative -P +P
PF = Lag
IA
IC PF = Lag PF = Lead
Current
VBG
-Q
UR RELAY
G S=VI
- 3
Generator
Resistive
LOAD
VCG
+Q
Voltage IB
PF = Lead PF = Lag
WATTS = Negative IA
VARS = Positive VAG -P +P
PF = Lead
IC
IA
Current
PF = Lag PF = Lead
VBG -Q
UR RELAY
G 827239A C.C DR
S=VI
- 4
Generator
Figure 6–1: FLOW DIRECTION OF SIGNED VALUES FOR WATTS AND VARS

6.3 METERING 6 ACTUAL VALUES
b) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING PHASE ANGLES

All phasors calculated by UR relays and used for protection, control and metering functions are rotating phasors that main-
tain the correct phase angle relationships with each other at all times.
For display and oscillography purposes, all phasor angles in a given relay are referred to an AC input channel pre-selected
by the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting. This setting
defines a particular Source to be used as the reference.
The relay will first determine if any "Phase VT" bank is indicated in the Source. If it is, voltage channel VA of that bank is
used as the angle reference. Otherwise, the relay determines if any "Aux VT" bank is indicated; if it is, the auxiliary voltage
channel of that bank is used as the angle reference. If neither of the two conditions is satisfied, then two more steps of this
hierarchical procedure to determine the reference signal include "Phase CT" bank and "Ground CT" bank.
If the AC signal pre-selected by the relay upon configuration is not measurable, the phase angles are not referenced. The
phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction, and are presented as negative in the lagging direction, to
more closely align with power system metering conventions. This is illustrated below.
-270o
-225o -315o
positive
angle
direction
-180o 0o
UR phase angle
reference
-135o -45o
6 -90o 827845A1.CDR
Figure 6–2: UR PHASE ANGLE MEASUREMENT CONVENTION
c) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS

UR relays calculate voltage symmetrical components for the power system phase A line-to-neutral voltage, and symmetri-
cal components of the currents for the power system phase A current. Owing to the above definition, phase angle relations
between the symmetrical currents and voltages stay the same irrespective of the connection of instrument transformers.
This is important for setting directional protection elements that use symmetrical voltages.
For display and oscillography purposes the phase angles of symmetrical components are referenced to a common refer-
ence as described in the previous sub-section.
WYE-Connected Instrument Transformers:
• ABC phase rotation: • ACB phase rotation:
1 1
V_0 = --- ( VAG + VBG + V CG ) V_0 = --- ( V AG + V BG + V CG )
3 3
1 2 1 2
V_1 = --- ( VAG + aVBG + a V CG ) V_1 = --- ( V AG + a V BG + aV CG )
3 3
1 2 1 2
V_2 = --- ( VAG + a V BG + aV CG ) V_2 = --- ( V AG + aV BG + a VCG )
3 3
The above equations apply to currents as well.

DELTA-Connected Instrument Transformers:

• ABC phase rotation: • ACB phase rotation:
V_0 = N/A V_0 = N/A

1 ∠– 30 ° 1 ∠30° 2
2
V_1 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA ) V_1 = ----------------- ( V AB + a V BC + aV CA )
3 3 3 3
1 ∠30° 1 ∠– 30 ° 2
2
V_2 = ----------------- ( V AB + a V BC + aV CA ) V_2 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA )
3 3 3 3
The zero-sequence voltage is not measurable under the DELTA connection of instrument transformers and is defaulted to
zero. The table below shows an example of symmetrical components calculations for the ABC phase rotation.
Table 6–1: CALCULATING VOLTAGE SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS EXAMPLE
SYSTEM VOLTAGES, SEC. V * VT UR INPUTS, SEC. V SYMM. COMP, SEC. V
CONN.
VAG VBG VCG VAB VBC VCA F5AC F6AC F7AC V0 V1 V2
13.9 76.2 79.7 84.9 138.3 85.4 WYE 13.9 76.2 79.7 19.5 56.5 23.3
∠0° ∠–125° ∠–250° ∠–313° ∠–97° ∠–241° ∠0° ∠–125° ∠–250° ∠–192° ∠–7° ∠–187°
UNKNOWN (only V1 and V2 84.9 138.3 85.4 DELTA 84.9 138.3 85.4 N/A 56.5 23.3
can be determined) ∠0° ∠–144° ∠–288° ∠0° ∠–144° ∠–288° ∠–54° ∠–234°
* The power system voltages are phase-referenced – for simplicity – to VAG and VAB, respectively. This, however, is a
relative matter. It is important to remember that the UR displays are always referenced as specified under SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE.
The example above is illustrated in the following figure.
SYSTEM VOLTAGES SYMMETRICAL

COMPONENTS
UR phase angle
6
reference
1
UR phase angle
A
reference
WYE VTs
C
B
0
2
U
re R ph
fe a
re s e
nc a
e ng
le
A U
1
re R ph
fe a
re s e
nc a
e ng
DELTA VTs le
C
B
2
827844A1.CDR
Figure 6–3: ILLUSTRATION OF THE UR CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS

6.3.2 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING STATOR DIFFERENTIAL
STATOR STATOR DIFF OPERATE

DIFFERENTIAL Iad: 0.000 A
STATOR DIFF RESTRAIN
MESSAGE
Iar: 0.000 A
STATOR DIFF OPERATE
MESSAGE
Ibd: 0.000 A
MESSAGE
Ibr: 0.000 A
STATOR DIFF OPERATE
MESSAGE
Icd: 0.000 A
MESSAGE
Icr: 0.000 A
The phasors of differential and restraint currents are displayed in primary amperes.
6.3.3 MOTOR
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING MOTOR
MOTOR MOTOR LOAD:

0.00 x FLA
CURRENT UNBALANCE:
MESSAGE
0 %
U/B BIASED MOTOR
6 MESSAGE
LOAD: 0.00 x FLA
MOTOR LOAD:
This value represents the measured three phase average RMS current from the line source divided by the Full Load Amps
setting, in per unit.
MOTOR UNBALANCE:
This value is the amount of unbalance in the motor currents. A full explanation of the calculation of this value is presented
for the Amp Unbalance element
U/B BIASED MOTOR LOAD:
Unbalance Bias Motor Load shows the equivalent motor heating current caused by the unbalance k factor.

6.3.4 SOURCES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1
Because energy values are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately
prior to changing CT or VT characteristics.
NOTE
PHASE CURRENT SRC 1 RMS Ia: 0.000

SRC 1 b: 0.000 c: 0.000 A
SRC 1 RMS Ia:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 RMS Ib:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 RMS Ic:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 RMS In:
MESSAGE
0.000 A
SRC 1 PHASOR Ia:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Ib:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Ic:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR In:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 ZERO SEQ I0:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0° 6
SRC 1 POS SEQ I1:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
GROUND CURRENT SRC 1 RMS Ig:

SRC 1 0.000 A
SRC 1 PHASOR Ig:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Igd:
MESSAGE
0.000 A 0.0°
PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1 RMS Vag:

SRC 1 0.000 V
SRC 1 RMS Vbg:
MESSAGE
0.000 V
SRC 1 RMS Vcg:
MESSAGE
0.000 V
SRC 1 PHASOR Vag:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°

SRC 1 PHASOR Vbg:

MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Vcg:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 RMS Vab:
MESSAGE
0.000 V
SRC 1 RMS Vbc:
MESSAGE
0.000 V
SRC 1 RMS Vca:
MESSAGE
0.000 V
SRC 1 PHASOR Vab:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Vbc:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Vca:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 POS SEQ V1:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1 RMS Vx:

SRC 1 0.000 V
6 SRC 1 PHASOR Vx:
MESSAGE
0.000 V 0.0°
POWER SRC 1 REAL POWER

SRC 1 3φ: 0.000 W
SRC 1 REAL POWER
MESSAGE
φa: 0.000 W
SRC 1 REAL POWER
MESSAGE
φb: 0.000 W
SRC 1 REAL POWER
MESSAGE
φc: 0.000 W
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR
MESSAGE
3φ: 0.000 var
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR
MESSAGE
φa: 0.000 var
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR
MESSAGE
φb: 0.000 var
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR
MESSAGE
φc: 0.000 var

SRC 1 APPARENT PWR

MESSAGE
3φ: 0.000 VA
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR
MESSAGE
φa: 0.000 VA
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR
MESSAGE
φb: 0.000 VA
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR
MESSAGE
φc: 0.000 VA
SRC 1 POWER FACTOR
MESSAGE
3φ: 1.000
SRC 1 POWER FACTOR
MESSAGE
φa: 1.000
SRC 1 POWER FACTOR
MESSAGE
φb: 1.000
SRC 1 POWER FACTOR
MESSAGE
φc: 1.000
ENERGY SRC 1 POS WATTHOUR:

SRC 1 0.000 Wh
SRC 1 NEG WATTHOUR:
MESSAGE
0.000 Wh
SRC 1 POS VARHOUR:
MESSAGE
0.000 varh
SRC 1 NEG VARHOUR:
MESSAGE
0.000 varh
6
FREQUENCY SRC 1 FREQUENCY:
SRC 1 0.00 Hz
A maximum of 6 identical Source menus are available, numbered from SRC 1 to SRC 6. "SRC 1" will be replaced by what-
ever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL
SOURCES).
SOURCE FREQUENCY is measured via software-implemented zero-crossing detection of an AC signal. The signal is either a
Clarke transformation of three-phase voltages or currents, auxiliary voltage, or ground current as per source configuration
(see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM). The signal used for frequency estimation is low-pass filtered. The
final frequency measurement is passed through a validation filter that eliminates false readings due to signal distortions and
transients.
6.3.5 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER 1

DIRECTIONAL POWER 3Φ: 0.000 W
DIRECTIONAL POWER 2
MESSAGE
3Φ: 0.000 W
The effective operating quantities of the SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER elements are displayed here. The display
may be useful to calibrate the feature by compensating the angular errors of the CTs and VTs with the use of the RCA and
CALIBRATION settings.

6.3.6 TRACKING FREQUENCY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRACKING FREQUENCY
TRACKING FREQUENCY TRACKING FREQUENCY:

60.00 Hz
The tracking frequency is displayed here. The frequency is tracked based on configuration of the reference source. See
SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM for more details on frequency metering and tracking. With three-phase
inputs configured the frequency is measured digitally using a Clarke combination of all three-phase signals for optimized
performance during faults, open pole, and VT fuse fail conditions.
6.3.7 FLEXELEMENTS™
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING FLEXELEMENTS FLEXELEMENT 1(16)
FLEXELEMENT 1 FLEXELEMENT 1 OpSig:

0.000 pu
The operating signals for the FlexElements are displayed in pu values using the following definitions of the base units.
Table 6–2: FLEXELEMENT™ BASE UNITS

CURRENT UNBALANCE BASE = 100%
(Amp Unbalance)
dcmA BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
under the +IN and –IN inputs.
FREQUENCY fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE ϕBASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)
POWER FACTOR PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs BASE = 100°C
SENSITIVE DIR POWER PBASE = maximum value of 3 × VBASE × IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs of the sources
6 (Sns Dir Power)
SOURCE CURRENT
configured for the Sensitive Power Directional element(s).
IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE ENERGY EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively
(SRC X Positive Watthours)
(SRC X Negative Watthours)
(SRC X Positive Varhours)
(SRC X Negative Varhours)
SOURCE POWER PBASE = maximum value of VBASE × IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE VOLTAGE VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
STATOR DIFFERENTIAL IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
(Stator Diff Iar, Ibr, and Icr)
STATOR RESTRAINING IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
(Stator Diff Iad, Ibd, and Icd)
THERMAL MODEL BASE =100%
(Model Capacity Used)
(Model Motor Unbalance)
THERMAL MODEL BASE = 10 minutes
(Model Lockout Time)
THERMAL MODEL BASE = 1.00 pu of FLA
(Thermal Model Load)
(Biased Motor Load)
THERMAL MODEL BASE = 10 seconds
(Trip Time on Overload)

6.3.8 TRANSDUCER I/O
a) DCMA INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS DCMA INPUT xx
DCMA INPUT xx DCMA INPUT xx

0.000 mA
Actual values for each DCMA input channel that is Enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel "ID"
and the bottom line as the value followed by the programmed units.
b) RTD INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS RTD INPUT xx
RTD INPUT xx RTD INPUT xx

-50 ° C
Actual values for each RTD input channel that is Enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel "ID"
and the bottom line as the value.

6.4 RECORDS 6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.4 RECORDS 6.4.1 EVENT RECORDS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS EVENT RECORDS
EVENT RECORDS EVENT: XXXX

RESET OP(PUSHBUTTON)
↓
EVENT: 3 EVENT 3
MESSAGE
POWER ON DATE: 2000/07/14
EVENT: 2 EVENT 3
MESSAGE
POWER OFF TIME: 14:53:00.03405
EVENT: 1
MESSAGE Date and Time Stamps
EVENTS CLEARED
The Event Records menu shows the contextual data associated with up to the last 1024 events, listed in chronological
order from most recent to oldest. If all 1024 event records have been filled, the oldest record will be removed as a new
record is added. Each event record shows the event identifier/sequence number, cause, and date/time stamp associated
with the event trigger. Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing event records.
6.4.2 OSCILLOGRAPHY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS OSCILLOGRAPHY
OSCILLOGRAPHY FORCE TRIGGER? Range: No, Yes

No
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS:
MESSAGE
0
AVAILABLE RECORDS:
MESSAGE
6 0
CYCLES PER RECORD:
MESSAGE
0.0
LAST CLEARED DATE:
MESSAGE
2000/07/14 015:40:16
This menu allows the user to view the number of triggers involved and number of oscillography traces available. The
‘cycles per record’ value is calculated to account for the fixed amount of data storage for oscillography. See the OSCIL-
LOGRAPHY section of Chapter 5.
A trigger can be forced here at any time by setting "Yes" to the FORCE TRIGGER? command. Refer to the COMMANDS
CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing the oscillography records.

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION 6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION
MODEL INFORMATION ORDER CODE LINE 1: Example code shown

M60-A00-HCH-F8A-H6A
ORDER CODE LINE 2:
MESSAGE
ORDER CODE LINE 3:

MESSAGE
ORDER CODE LINE 4:

MESSAGE
SERIAL NUMBER:
MESSAGE
ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS

MESSAGE
000000000000
MANUFACTURING DATE: Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
0
OPERATING TIME:
MESSAGE
0:00:00
The product order code, serial number, Ethernet MAC address, date/time of manufacture, and operating time are shown
here.
6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO FIRMWARE REVISIONS
FIRMWARE REVISIONS M60 Motor Relay Range: 0.00 to 655.35 6

REVISION: 2.9X Revision number of the application firmware.
MODIFICATION FILE Range: 0 to 65535 (ID of the MOD FILE)

MESSAGE
NUMBER: 0 Value is 0 for each standard firmware release.
BOOT PROGRAM Range: 0.00 to 655.35

MESSAGE
REVISION: 1.12 Revision number of the boot program firmware.
FRONT PANEL PROGRAM Range: 0.00 to 655.35

MESSAGE
REVISION: 0.08 Revision number of faceplate program firmware.
COMPILE DATE: Range: Any valid date and time.

MESSAGE
2000/09/08 04:55:16 Date and time when product firmware was built.
BOOT DATE: Range: Any valid date and time.

MESSAGE
2000/05/11 16:41:32 Date and time when the boot program was built.
The shown data is illustrative only. A modification file number of 0 indicates that, currently, no modifications have been
installed.

6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION 6 ACTUAL VALUES

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1 COMMANDS
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1 COMMANDS 7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU
COMMANDS
COMMANDS
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL INPUTS
COMMANDS
MESSAGE
CLEAR RECORDS
COMMANDS
MESSAGE
SET DATE AND TIME
COMMANDS
MESSAGE
RELAY MAINTENANCE
The COMMANDS menu contains relay directives intended for operations personnel. All commands can be protected from
unauthorized access via the Command Password; see the PASSWORD SECURITY menu description in the PRODUCT
SETUP section of Chapter 5. The following flash message appears after successfully command entry:
COMMAND
EXECUTED
PATH: COMMANDS COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS
COMMANDS Virt Ip 1 Range: Off, On

VIRTUAL INPUTS Off
↓
↓
Virt Ip 32 Range: Off, On

MESSAGE
Off 7
The states of up to 32 virtual inputs are changed here. The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input. The
second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input. This status will be a logical state ‘Off’ (0) or ‘On’ (1).
7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS
PATH: COMMANDS COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS
COMMANDS CLEAR EVENT RECORDS? Range: No, Yes

CLEAR RECORDS No
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY? Range: No, Yes
No
CLEAR ENERGY? Range: No, Yes
No
This menu contains commands for clearing historical data such as the Event Records. Data is cleard by changing a com-
mand setting to "Yes" and pressing the key. After clearing data, the command setting automatically reverts to "No".

7.1 COMMANDS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
7.1.4 SET DATE AND TIME
PATH: COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME
COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME: (YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS)

SET DATE AND TIME 2000/01/14 13:47:03
The date and time can be entered here via the faceplate keypad, provided that the IRIG-B signal is not being used. The
time setting is based on the 24-hour clock. The complete date, as a minimum, must be entered to allow execution of this
command. The new time will take effect at the moment the key is clicked.
7.1.5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
PATH: COMMANDS RELAY MAINTENANCE
COMMANDS PERFORM LAMPTEST? Range: No, Yes

RELAY MAINTENANCE No
UPDATE ORDER CODE? Range: No, Yes
No
This menu contains commands for relay maintenance purposes. Commands are activated by changing a command setting
to "Yes" and pressing the key. The command setting will then automatically revert to "No".
The PERFORM LAMPTEST command turns on all faceplate LEDs and display pixels for a short duration. The UPDATE
ORDER CODE command causes the relay to scan the backplane for the hardware modules and update the order code to
match. If an update occurs, the following message is shown.
UPDATING...
PLEASE WAIT
There is no impact if there have been no changes to the hardware modules. When an update does not occur, the following
message will be shown.
ORDER CODE
NOT UPDATED

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.2 TARGETS
7.2 TARGETS 7.2.1 TARGETS MENU
TARGETS
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1: Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
MESSAGE Example shown.
LATCHED
DIGITAL ELEMENT 16: Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
MESSAGE Example shown.
LATCHED
MESSAGE
↓
↓
The status of any active targets will be displayed in the TARGETS menu. If no targets are active, the display will read:
No Active
Targets
7.2.2 TARGET MESSAGES
When there are no active targets, the first target to become active will cause the display to immediately default to that mes-
sage. If there are active targets and the user is navigating through other messages, and when the default message timer
times out (i.e. the keypad has not been used for a determined period of time), the display will again default back to the tar-
get message.
The range of variables for the target messages is described below. Phase information will be included if applicable. If a tar-
get message status changes, the status with the highest priority will be displayed.
Table 7–1: TARGET MESSAGE PRIORITY STATUS

PRIORITY ACTIVE STATUS DESCRIPTION
1 OP element operated and still picked up
2 PKP element picked up and timed out
3 LATCHED element had operated but has dropped out 7
If a self test error is detected, a message appears indicating the cause of the error. For example:
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED

:Self Test Error
7.2.3 RELAY SELF-TESTS
The relay performs a number of self-test diagnostic checks to ensure device integrity. The two types of self-tests (major and
minor) are listed in the tables below. When either type of self-test error occurs, the TROUBLE indicator will turn on and a
target message displayed. All errors record an event in the event recorder. Latched errors can be cleared by pressing the
RESET key, providing the condition is no longer present.
Major self-test errors also result in the following:
• the critical fail relay on the power supply module is de-energized
• all other output relays are de-energized and are prevented from further operation
• the faceplate IN SERVICE indicator is turned off
• a RELAY OUT OF SERVICE event is recorded

7.2 TARGETS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
Table 7–2: MAJOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

SELF-TEST ERROR LATCHED DESCRIPTION OF HOW OFTEN THE WHAT TO DO
MESSAGE TARGET PROBLEM TEST IS PERFORMED
MSG?
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED No PRODUCT SETUP On power up and whenever the Program all settings (especially
INSTALLATION setting RELAY PROGRAMMED setting those under PRODUCT SETUP
indicates relay is not in a is altered. INSTALLATION).
programmed state.
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH No Configuration of modules On power up; thereafter, the Check all module types against
with 2nd-line detail message does not match the order backplane is checked for the order code, ensure they are
code stored in the CPU. missing cards every 5 seconds. inserted properly, and cycle
control power (if problem
persists, contact the factory).
UNIT NOT CALIBRATED No Settings indicate the unit On power up. Contact the factory.
is not calibrated.
FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN No FlexLogic equations do Event driven; whenever Flex- Finish all equation editing and
with 2nd-line detail message not compile properly. Logic equations are modified. use self test to debug any errors.
DSP ERRORS: Yes CT/VT module with digital Every 1/8th of a cycle. Cycle the control power (if the
A/D RESET FAILURE signal processor may problem recurs, contact the
A/D CAL FAILURE have a problem. factory).
A/D INT. MISSING
A/D VOLT REF. FAIL
NO DSP INTERRUPTS
DSP CHECKSUM FAILED
DSP FAILED
PROGRAM MEMORY Yes Error was found while Once flash is uploaded with Contact the factory.
Test Failed checking Flash memory. new firmware.
Table 7–3: MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES

SELF-TEST LATCHED DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM HOW OFTEN THE WHAT TO DO
ERROR MESSAGE TARGET TEST IS PERFORMED
MSG?
EEPROM Yes The non-volatile memory has On power up only. Contact the factory.
CORRUPTED been corrupted.
IRIG-B FAILURE No Bad IRIG-B input signal. Monitored whenever an IRIG- • Ensure the IRIG-B cable is con-
B signal is received. nected to the relay.
• Check functionality of the cable
(i.e. look for physical damage or
perform a continuity test).
• Ensure the IRIG-B receiver is
functioning properly.
• Check the input signal level; it
may be lower than specification.
7 If none of the above items apply,

contact the factory.
PRIM ETHERNET No Primary Ethernet connection Monitored every 2 seconds Check connections.
FAIL failed
SEC ETHERNET No Secondary Ethernet connection Monitored every 2 seconds Check connections.
FAIL failed
BATTERY FAIL No Battery is not functioning. Monitored every 5 seconds. Replace the battery.
Reported after 1 minute if
problem persists.
PROTOTYPE Yes A prototype version of the On power up only. Contact the factory.
FIRMWARE firmware is loaded.
SYSTEM Yes Abnormal restart due to modules Event driven. Contact the factory.
EXCEPTION or being removed/inserted when
ABNORMAL powered-up, abnormal DC supply,
RESTART or internal relay failure.
LOW ON MEMORY Yes Memory is close to 100% capacity Monitored every 5 seconds. Contact the factory.
WATCHDOG No Some tasks are behind schedule Event driven. Contact the factory.
ERROR
REMOTE DEVICE Yes One or more GOOSE devices are Event driven. Occurs when a Check GOOSE setup
OFFLINE not responding device programmed to receive
GOOSE messages stops
receiving message. Time is 1
to 60 sec. depending on
GOOSE protocol packets.

8 COMMISSIONING 8.1 PRODUCT SETUP

The following tables are provided to keep a record of settings to be used on a relay.
8.1.1 PRODUCT SETUP
Table 8–1: PRODUCT SETUP (Sheet 1 of 13) Table 8–1: PRODUCT SETUP (Sheet 2 of 13)
SETTING VALUE SETTING VALUE
PASSWORD SECURITY DNP Current Scale Factor
Access Level DNP Voltage Scale Factor
Command Password DNP Power Scale Factor
Setting Password DNP Energy Scale Factor
Encrypted Command Password DNP Other Scale Factor
Encrypted Setting Password DNP Current Default Deadband
DISPLAY PROPERTIES DNP Voltage Default Deadband
Flash Message Time DNP Power Default Deadband
Default Message Timeout DNP Energy Default Deadband
Default Message Intensity DNP Other Default Deadband
REAL TIME CLOCK DNP Time Sync In IIN Period
IRIG-B Signal Type DNP Message Fragment Size
COMMUNICATIONS > SERIAL PORTS COMMUNICATIONS > UCA/MMS PROTOCOL
RS485 COM1 Baud Rate Default GOOSE Update Time
RS485 COM1 Parity UCA Logical Device
RS485 COM2 Baud Rate UCA/MMS TCP Port Number
RS485 COM2 Parity COMMUNICATIONS > WEB SERVER HTTP PROT.
COMMUNICATIONS > NETWORK HTTP TCP Port Number
IP Address COMMUNICATIONS > TFTP PROTOCOL
Subnet IP Mask TFTP Main UDP Port Number
Gateway IP Address TFTP Data UDP Port 1 Number
OSI Network Address (NSAP) TFTP Data UDP Port 2 Number
COMMUNICATIONS > IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
Ethernet Operation Mode
IEC 60870-5-104 Function
Ethernet Primary Link Monitor
IEC TCP Port Number
Ethernet Secondary Link Monitor
IEC Common Address of ASDU
COMMUNICATIONS > MODBUS PROTOCOL
IEC Cyclic Data Period
Modbus Slave Address
Number of Sources in MMENC1 List
Modbus TCP Port Number
IEC Current Default Threshold
COMMUNICATIONS > DNP PROTOCOL
IEC Voltage Default Threshold 8
DNP Port
IEC Power Default Threshold
DNP Address
IEC Energy Default Threshold
DNP Network Client Address 1
IEC Other Default Threshold
DNP Network Client Address 2
OSCILLOGRAPHY
DNP TCP/UDP Port Number
Number of Records
DNP Unsol Response Function
Trigger Mode
DNP Unsol Response Timeout
Trigger Position
DNP Unsol Response Max Retries
Trigger Source
Unsol Response Dest Address
AC Input Waveforms
User Map for DNP Analogs
Number of Sources in Analog List

8.1 PRODUCT SETUP 8 COMMISSIONING
OSCILLOGRAPHY > DIGITAL CHANNELS Digital Channel 47
Digital Channel 1 Digital Channel 48
Digital Channel 18 OSCILLOGRAPHY > ANALOG CHANNELS
Digital Channel 19 Analog Channel 1
8 Digital Channel 35 USER PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
Digital Channel 36 Trip LED Input
Digital Channel 37 Alarm LED Input
Digital Channel 38 LED 1 Operand
Digital Channel 39 LED 1 Type

LED 5 Type LED 29 Operand
LED 6 Operand LED 29 Type
LED 23 Operand LED 46 Type 8
LED 25 Type FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
LED 26 Operand Flex State Parameter 1
LED 26 Type Flex State Parameter 2

Flex State Parameter 7 Flex State Parameter 54
8 Flex State Parameter 42 Flex State Parameter 89

Flex State Parameter 136 Flex State Parameter 183 8

Flex State Parameter 210 USER DISPLAY 1
Flex State Parameter 211 Disp 1 Top Line
Flex State Parameter 212 Disp 1 Bottom Line
Flex State Parameter 213 Disp 1 Item 1
8 Flex State Parameter 230 Disp 3 Item 2

Table 8–1: PRODUCT SETUP (Sheet 13 of 13)

SETTING VALUE
USER DISPLAY 5
Disp 5 Top Line
Disp 5 Bottom Line
Disp 5 Item 1
Disp 5 Item 2
Disp 5 Item 3
Disp 5 Item 4
Disp 5 Item 5
USER DISPLAY 6
Disp 6 Top Line
Disp 6 Bottom Line
Disp 6 Item 1
Disp 6 Item 2
Disp 6 Item 3
Disp 6 Item 4
Disp 6 Item 5
USER DISPLAY 7
Disp 7 Top Line
Disp 7 Bottom Line
Disp 7 Item 1
Disp 7 Item 2
Disp 7 Item 3
Disp 7 Item 4
Disp 7 Item 5
USER DISPLAY 8
Disp 8 Top Line
Disp 8 Bottom Line
Disp 8 Item 1
Disp 8 Item 2
Disp 8 Item 3
Disp 8 Item 4
Disp 8 Item 5
INSTALLATION
Relay Settings
Relay Name
8

8.2 SYSTEM SETUP 8 COMMISSIONING
8.2 SYSTEM SETUP 8.2.1 SYSTEM SETUP
Table 8–2: SYSTEM SETUP (Sheet 1 of 3) Table 8–2: SYSTEM SETUP (Sheet 2 of 3)
CURRENT BANK 1 VOLTAGE BANK 3
Phase CT ______ Primary Phase VT ______ Connection
Phase CT ______ Secondary Phase VT ______ Secondary
Ground CT ______ Primary Phase VT ______ Ratio
Ground CT ______ Secondary Auxiliary VT ______ Connection
CURRENT BANK 2 Auxiliary VT ______ Secondary
Phase CT ______ Primary Auxiliary VT ______ Ratio
Phase CT ______ Secondary POWER SYSTEM
Ground CT ______ Primary Nominal Frequency
Ground CT ______ Secondary Phase Rotation
CURRENT BANK 3 Frequency and Phase Reference
Phase CT ______ Primary Frequency Tracking
Phase CT ______ Secondary SIGNAL SOURCE 1
Ground CT ______ Primary Source 1 Name
Ground CT ______ Secondary Source 1 Phase CT
CURRENT BANK 4 Source 1 Ground CT
Phase CT ______ Primary Source 1 Phase VT
Phase CT ______ Secondary Source 1 Auxiliary VT
Ground CT ______ Primary SIGNAL SOURCE 2
Ground CT ______ Secondary Source 2 Name
CURRENT BANK 5 Source 2 Phase CT
Phase CT ______ Primary Source 2 Ground CT
Phase CT ______ Secondary Source 2 Phase VT
Ground CT ______ Primary Source 2 Auxiliary VT
Ground CT ______ Secondary SIGNAL SOURCE 3
CURRENT BANK 6 Source 3 Name
Phase CT ______ Primary Source 3 Phase CT
Phase CT ______ Secondary Source 3 Ground CT
Ground CT ______ Primary Source 3 Phase VT
Ground CT ______ Secondary Source 3 Auxiliary VT
VOLTAGE BANK 1 SIGNAL SOURCE 4
Phase VT ______ Connection Source 4 Name
8 Phase VT ______ Secondary Source 4 Phase CT
Phase VT ______ Ratio Source 4 Ground CT
Auxiliary VT ______ Connection Source 4 Phase VT
Auxiliary VT ______ Secondary Source 4 Auxiliary VT
Auxiliary VT ______ Ratio SIGNAL SOURCE 5
VOLTAGE BANK 2 Source 5 Name
Phase VT ______ Connection Source 5 Phase CT
Phase VT ______ Secondary GSource 5 round CT
Phase VT ______ Ratio Source 5 Phase VT
Auxiliary VT ______ Connection Source 5 Auxiliary VT
Auxiliary VT ______ Secondary SIGNAL SOURCE 6
Auxiliary VT ______ Ratio Source 6 Name

8 COMMISSIONING 8.2 SYSTEM SETUP
Table 8–2: SYSTEM SETUP (Sheet 3 of 3)

SETTING VALUE
Source 6 Phase CT
Source 6 Ground CT
Source 6 Phase VT
Source 6 Auxiliary VT
MOTOR
Motor Full Load Amps
Motor Service Factor
Motor Offline
Emergency Restart
Motor Line Source
Stator Temp Sensor 1

8.2 SYSTEM SETUP 8 COMMISSIONING
8.2.2 FLEXCURVE™ A

MS MS MS MS MS MS
0.00 0.68 1.03 2.9 4.9 10.5
0.05 0.70 1.05 3.0 5.0 11.0
0.10 0.72 1.1 3.1 5.1 11.5
0.15 0.74 1.2 3.2 5.2 12.0
0.20 0.76 1.3 3.3 5.3 12.5
0.25 0.78 1.4 3.4 5.4 13.0
0.30 0.80 1.5 3.5 5.5 13.5
0.35 0.82 1.6 3.6 5.6 14.0
0.40 0.84 1.7 3.7 5.7 14.5
0.45 0.86 1.8 3.8 5.8 15.0
0.48 0.88 1.9 3.9 5.9 15.5
0.50 0.90 2.0 4.0 6.0 16.0
0.52 0.91 2.1 4.1 6.5 16.5
0.54 0.92 2.2 4.2 7.0 17.0
0.56 0.93 2.3 4.3 7.5 17.5
0.58 0.94 2.4 4.4 8.0 18.0
0.60 0.95 2.5 4.5 8.5 18.5
0.62 0.96 2.6 4.6 9.0 19.0
0.64 0.97 2.7 4.7 9.5 19.5
0.66 0.98 2.8 4.8 10.0 20.0

8 COMMISSIONING 8.2 SYSTEM SETUP
8.2.3 FLEXCURVE™ B

MS MS MS MS MS MS
0.00 0.68 1.03 2.9 4.9 10.5
0.05 0.70 1.05 3.0 5.0 11.0
0.10 0.72 1.1 3.1 5.1 11.5
0.15 0.74 1.2 3.2 5.2 12.0
0.20 0.76 1.3 3.3 5.3 12.5
0.25 0.78 1.4 3.4 5.4 13.0
0.30 0.80 1.5 3.5 5.5 13.5
0.35 0.82 1.6 3.6 5.6 14.0
0.40 0.84 1.7 3.7 5.7 14.5
0.45 0.86 1.8 3.8 5.8 15.0
0.48 0.88 1.9 3.9 5.9 15.5
0.50 0.90 2.0 4.0 6.0 16.0
0.52 0.91 2.1 4.1 6.5 16.5
0.54 0.92 2.2 4.2 7.0 17.0
0.56 0.93 2.3 4.3 7.5 17.5
0.58 0.94 2.4 4.4 8.0 18.0
0.60 0.95 2.5 4.5 8.5 18.5
0.62 0.96 2.6 4.6 9.0 19.0
0.64 0.97 2.7 4.7 9.5 19.5
0.66 0.98 2.8 4.8 10.0 20.0

8.3 FLEXLOGIC™ 8 COMMISSIONING
8.3 FLEXLOGIC™ 8.3.1 FLEXLOGIC™
Table 8–5: FLEXLOGIC™ (Sheet 1 of 17) Table 8–5: FLEXLOGIC™ (Sheet 2 of 17)
FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR FlexLogic Entry 44
FlexLogic Entry 1 FlexLogic Entry 45
8 FlexLogic Entry 32 FlexLogic Entry 76

8 COMMISSIONING 8.3 FLEXLOGIC™
FlexLogic Entry 123 FlexLogic Entry 170 8


FlexLogic Entry 311 FlexLogic Entry 358 8


FlexLogic Entry 466 FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1
FlexLogic Entry 467 FlexLogic Timer 1 Type
FlexLogic Entry 468 FlexLogic Timer 1 Pickup Delay
FlexLogic Entry 469 FlexLogic Timer 1 Dropout Delay
FlexLogic Entry 499 FlexLogic Timer 9 Type 8
FlexLogic Entry 510

FLEXLOGIC TIMER 12 FlexLogic Timer 23 Dropout Delay
FlexLogic Timer 12 Type FLEXLOGIC TIMER 24
FlexLogic Timer 12 Pickup Delay FlexLogic Timer 24 Type
FlexLogic Timer 12 Dropout Delay FlexLogic Timer 24 Pickup Delay
8 FlexLogic Timer 20 Dropout Delay FlexLogic Timer 32 Pickup Delay
FlexLogic Timer 21 Type FLEXLELEMENT 1
FlexLogic Timer 21 Pickup Delay FlexElement 1 Function
FlexLogic Timer 21 Dropout Delay FlexElement 1 Name
FLEXLOGIC TIMER 22 FlexElement 1 +IN
FlexLogic Timer 22 Type FlexElement 1 –IN
FlexLogic Timer 22 Pickup Delay FlexElement 1 Input Mode
FlexLogic Timer 22 Dropout Delay FlexElement 1 Comp Mode
FLEXLOGIC TIMER 23 FlexElement 1 Direction
FlexLogic Timer 23 Type FlexElement 1 Pickup
FlexLogic Timer 23 Pickup Delay FlexElement 1 Hysteresis

FlexElement 1 dt Unit FlexElement 4 Comp Mode
FlexElement 1 dt FlexElement 4 Direction
FlexElement 1 Pkp Delay FlexElement 4 Pickup
FlexElement 1 Rst Delay FlexElement 4 Hysteresis
FlexElement 1 Blk FlexElement 4 dt Unit
FlexElement 1 Target FlexElement 4 dt
FlexElement 1 Events FlexElement 4 Pkp Delay
FLEXLELEMENT 2 FlexElement 4 Rst Delay
FlexElement 2 Function FlexElement 4 Blk
FlexElement 2 Name FlexElement 4 Target
FlexElement 2 +IN FlexElement 4 Events
FlexElement 2 –IN FLEXLELEMENT 5
FlexElement 2 Input Mode FlexElement 5 Function
FlexElement 2 Comp Mode FlexElement 5 Name
FlexElement 2 Direction FlexElement 5 +IN
FlexElement 2 Pickup FlexElement 5 –IN
FlexElement 2 Hysteresis FlexElement 5 Input Mode
FlexElement 2 dt FlexElement 5 Direction
FlexElement 3 Comp Mode FlexElement 6 Name
FlexElement 3 Direction FlexElement 6 +IN
FlexElement 3 Pickup FlexElement 6 –IN
FlexElement 3 Hysteresis FlexElement 6 Input Mode
FlexElement 3 dt FlexElement 6 Direction 8

Table 8–5: FLEXLOGIC™ (Sheet 17 of 17)

SETTING VALUE
FlexElement 7 Name
FlexElement 7 +IN
FlexElement 7 –IN
FlexElement 7 Input Mode
FlexElement 7 Comp Mode
FlexElement 7 Direction
FlexElement 7 Pickup
FlexElement 7 Hysteresis
FlexElement 7 dt Unit
FlexElement 7 dt
FlexElement 7 Pkp Delay
FlexElement 7 Rst Delay
FlexElement 7 Blk
FlexElement 7 Target
FlexElement 7 Events
FLEXLELEMENT 8
FlexElement 8 Function
FlexElement 8 Name
FlexElement 8 +IN
FlexElement 8 –IN
FlexElement 8 Input Mode
FlexElement 8 Comp Mode
FlexElement 8 Direction
FlexElement 8 Pickup
FlexElement 8 Hysteresis
FlexElement 8 dt Unit
FlexElement 8 dt
FlexElement 8 Pkp Delay
FlexElement 8 Rst Delay
FlexElement 8 Blk
FlexElement 8 Target
FlexElement 8 Events

8 COMMISSIONING 8.4 GROUPED ELEMENTS
8.4 GROUPED ELEMENTS 8.4.1 GROUPED ELEMENTS
Table 8–6: GROUPED ELEMENTS (Sheet 1 of 5) Table 8–6: GROUPED ELEMENTS (Sheet 2 of 5)
DIFFERENTIAL ELEMENTS Amp Unbal 2 Target
STATOR DIFFERENTIAL Amp Unbal 2 Events
Stator Diff Function CURRENT ELEMENTS
Stator Diff Line End Source PHASE IOC1
Stator Diff Neutral End Source Phase IOC1 Function
Stator Diff Pickup Phase IOC1 Signal Source
Stator Diff Slope 1 Phase IOC1 Pickup
Stator Diff Break 1 Phase IOC1 Pickup Delay
Stator Diff Slope 2 Phase IOC1 Reset Delay
Stator Diff Break 2 Phase IOC1 Block A
Stator Diff Block Phase IOC1 Block B
Stator Diff Target Phase IOC1 Block C
Stator Diff Events Phase IOC1 Target
MOTOR ELEMENTS Phase IOC1 Events
THERMAL MODEL PHASE IOC2
Thermal Model Function Phase IOC2 Function
Thermal Model Curve Phase IOC2 Signal Source
Thermal Model TD Multiplier Phase IOC2 Pickup
Unbalance Bias K Factor Phase IOC2 Pickup Delay
Cool Time Constant Running Phase IOC2 Reset Delay
Cool Time Constant Stopped Phase IOC2 Block A
Hot/Cold Safe Stall Ratio Phase IOC2 Block B
RTD Bias Phase IOC2 Block C
RTD Bias Minimum Phase IOC2 Target
RTD Bias Center Point Phase IOC2 Events
RTD Bias Maximum NEUTRAL IOC1
Start Inhibit TCU Margin Neutral IOC1 Function
Thermal Model Block Neutral IOC1 Signal Source
Thermal Model Target Neutral IOC1 Pickup
Thermal Model Events Neutral IOC1 Pickup Delay
AMP UNBALANCE 1 Neutral IOC1 Reset Delay
Amp Unbal 1 Function Neutral IOC1 Block
Amp Unbal 1 Pickup Neutral IOC1 Target 8
Amp Unbal 1 Pickup Delay Neutral IOC1 Events
Amp Unbal 1 Reset Delay NEUTRAL IOC2
Amp Unbal 1 Block Neutral IOC2 Function
Amp Unbal 1 Target Neutral IOC2 Signal Source
Amp Unbal 1 Events Neutral IOC2 Pickup
AMP UNBALANCE 2 Neutral IOC2 Pickup Delay
Amp Unbal 2 Function Neutral IOC2 Reset Delay
Amp Unbal 2 Pickup Neutral IOC2 Block
Amp Unbal 2 Pickup Delay Neutral IOC2 Target
Amp Unbal 2 Reset Delay Neutral IOC2 Events
Amp Unbal 2 Block

8.4 GROUPED ELEMENTS 8 COMMISSIONING
Table 8–6: GROUPED ELEMENTS (Sheet 3 of 5) Table 8–6: GROUPED ELEMENTS (Sheet 4 of 5)
GROUND TOC1 Phase UV1 Delay
Ground TOC1 Function Phase UV1 Minimum Voltage
Ground TOC1 Signal Source Phase UV1 Block
Ground TOC1 Input Phase UV1 Target
Ground TOC1 Pickup Phase UV1 Events
Ground TOC1 Curve PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE 2
Ground TOC1 TD Multiplier Phase UV2 Function
Ground TOC1 Reset Phase UV2 Signal Source
Ground TOC1 Block Phase UV2 Mode
Ground TOC1 Target Phase UV2 Pickup
Ground TOC1 Events Phase UV2 Curve
GROUND TOC2 Phase UV2 Delay
Ground TOC2 Function Phase UV2 Minimum Voltage
Ground TOC2 Signal Source Phase UV2 Block
Ground TOC2 Input Phase UV2 Target
Ground TOC2 Pickup Phase UV2 Events
Ground TOC2 Curve PHASE OVERVOLTAGE 1
Ground TOC2 TD Multiplier Phase OV1 Function
Ground TOC2 Reset Phase OV1 Signal Source
Ground TOC2 Block Phase OV1 Pickup
Ground TOC2 Target Phase OV1 Delay
Ground TOC2 Events Phase OV1 Reset Delay
GROUND IOC1 Phase OV1 Block
Ground IOC1 Function Phase OV1 Target
Ground IOC1 Signal Source Phase OV1 Events
Ground IOC1 Pickup NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE 1
Ground IOC1 Pickup Delay Neutral OV1 Function
Ground IOC1 Reset Delay Neutral OV1 Signal Source
Ground IOC1 Block Neutral OV1 Pickup
Ground IOC1 Target Neutral OV1 Pickup Delay
Ground IOC1 Events Neutral OV1 Reset Delay
GROUND IOC2 Neutral OV1 Block
Ground IOC2 Function Neutral OV1 Target
Ground IOC2 Signal Source Neutral OV1 Events
Ground IOC2 Pickup NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE
8 Ground IOC2 Pickup Delay Neg Seq OV Function
Ground IOC2 Reset Delay Neg Seq OV Signal Source
Ground IOC2 Block Neg Seq OV Pickup
Ground IOC2 Target Neg Seq OV Delay
Ground IOC2 Events Neg Seq OV Reset Delay
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS Neg Seq OV Block
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE 1 Neg Seq OV Target
Phase UV1 Function Neg Seq OV Events
Phase UV1 Signal Source AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE 1
Phase UV1 Mode Aux UV1 Function
Phase UV1 Pickup Aux UV1 Signal Source
Phase UV1 Curve Aux UV1 Pickup

8 COMMISSIONING 8.4 GROUPED ELEMENTS
Table 8–6: GROUPED ELEMENTS (Sheet 5 of 5)

SETTING VALUE
Aux UV1 Curve
Aux UV1 Delay
Aux UV1 Minimum Voltage
Aux UV1 Block
Aux UV1 Target
Aux UV1 Events
AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE 1
Aux OV1 Function
Aux OV1 Signal Source
Aux OV1 Pickup
Aux OV1 Pickup Delay
Aux OV1 Reset Delay
Aux OV1 Block
Aux OV1 Target
Aux OV1 Events
SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
DIRECTIONAL POWER 1
Dir Power 1 Function
Dir Power 1 Source
Dir Power 1 RCA
Dir Power 1 Calibration
Dir Power 1 STG1 SMIN
Dir Power 1 STG1 Delay
Dir Power 1 Blk
Dir Power 1 Target
Dir Power 1 Events
DIRECTIONAL POWER 2
Dir Power 2 Function
Dir Power 2 Source
Dir Power 2 RCA
Dir Power 2 Calibration
Dir Power 2 STG2 SMIN 8
Dir Power 2 Blk
Dir Power 2 Target
Dir Power 2 Events

8.5 CONTROL ELEMENTS 8 COMMISSIONING
8.5 CONTROL ELEMENTS 8.5.1 CONTROL ELEMENTS
Table 8–7: CONTROL ELEMENTS (Sheet 1 of 6) Table 8–7: CONTROL ELEMENTS (Sheet 2 of 6)
SETTING GROUPS Dig Elem 4 Block
Setting Groups Function Digital Element 4 Target
Setting Groups Block Digital Element 4 Events
Group 2 Activate On DIGITAL ELEMENT 5
Group 3 Activate On Digital Element 5 Function
Group 4 Activate On Dig Elem 5 Name
Group 5 Activate On Dig Elem 5 Input
Group 6 Activate On Dig Elem 5 Pickup Delay
Group 7 Activate On Dig Elem 5 Reset Delay
Group 8 Activate On Dig Elem 5 Block
Setting Group Events Digital Element 5 Target
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 Digital Element 5 Events
Digital Element 1 Function DIGITAL ELEMENT 6
Dig Elem 1 Name Digital Element 6 Function
Dig Elem 1 Input Dig Elem 6 Name
Dig Elem 1 Pickup Delay Dig Elem 6 Input
Dig Elem 1 Reset Delay Dig Elem 6 Pickup Delay
Dig Elem 1 Block Dig Elem 6 Reset Delay
Digital Element 1 Target Dig Elem 6 Block
Digital Element 1 Events Digital Element 6 Target
8 Dig Elem 3 Input Dig Elem 8 Name

8 COMMISSIONING 8.5 CONTROL ELEMENTS
Dig Elem 9 Reset Delay Digital Element 14 Target
Dig Elem 9 Block Digital Element 14 Events
Digital Element 9 Target DIGITAL ELEMENT 15
Digital Element 9 Events Digital Element 15 Function
DIGITAL ELEMENT 10 Dig Elem 15 Name
Digital Element 10 Function Dig Elem 15 Input
Dig Elem 10 Name Dig Elem 15 Pickup Delay
Dig Elem 10 Input Dig Elem 15 Reset Delay
Dig Elem 10 Pickup Delay Dig Elem 15 Block
Digital Element 10 Target DIGITAL ELEMENT 16
Digital Element 10 Events Digital Element 16 Function
DIGITAL ELEMENT 11 Dig Elem 16 Name
Digital Element 11 Function Dig Elem 16 Input
Dig Elem 11 Name Dig Elem 16 Pickup Delay
Dig Elem 11 Input Dig Elem 16 Reset Delay
Dig Elem 11 Pickup Delay Dig Elem 16 Block
Digital Element 11 Target DIGITAL COUNTER 1
Digital Element 11 Events Counter 1 Function
DIGITAL ELEMENT 12 Counter 1 Name
Digital Element 12 Function Counter 1 Units
Dig Elem 12 Name Counter 1 Preset
Dig Elem 12 Input Counter 1 Compare
Dig Elem 12 Pickup Delay Counter 1 Up
Dig Elem 12 Reset Delay Counter 1 Down
Dig Elem 12 Block Counter 1 Block
Digital Element 12 Target Counter 1 Set to Preset
Digital Element 12 Events Counter 1 Reset
DIGITAL ELEMENT 13 Counter 1 Freeze/Reset
Digital Element 13 Function Counter 1 Freeze/Count
Dig Elem 13 Name DIGITAL COUNTER 2
Dig Elem 13 Input Counter 2 Function
Dig Elem 13 Pickup Delay Counter 2 Name 8
Dig Elem 13 Reset Delay Counter 2 Units
Dig Elem 13 Block Counter 2 Preset
Digital Element 13 Target Counter 2 Compare
Digital Element 13 Events Counter 2 Up
DIGITAL ELEMENT 14 Counter 2 Down
Digital Element 14 Function Counter 2 Block
Dig Elem 14 Name Counter 2 Set to Preset
Dig Elem 14 Input Counter 2 Reset
Dig Elem 14 Pickup Delay Counter 2 Freeze/Reset
Dig Elem 14 Reset Delay Counter 2 Freeze/Count
Dig Elem 14 Block

8.5 CONTROL ELEMENTS 8 COMMISSIONING
DIGITAL COUNTER 3 Counter 6 Block
Counter 3 Function Counter 6 Set to Preset
Counter 3 Name Counter 6 Reset
Counter 3 Units Counter 6 Freeze/Reset
Counter 3 Preset Counter 6 Freeze/Count
Counter 3 Compare DIGITAL COUNTER 7
Counter 3 Up Counter 7 Function
Counter 3 Down Counter 7 Name
Counter 3 Block Counter 7 Units
Counter 3 Set to Preset Counter 7 Preset
Counter 3 Reset Counter 7 Compare
Counter 3 Freeze/Reset Counter 7 Up
Counter 3 Freeze/Count Counter 7 Down
Counter 4 Compare DIGITAL COUNTER 8
Counter 4 Up Counter 8 Function
Counter 4 Down Counter 8 Name
Counter 4 Block Counter 8 Units
Counter 4 Set to Preset Counter 8 Preset
Counter 4 Reset Counter 8 Compare
Counter 4 Freeze/Reset Counter 8 Up
Counter 4 Freeze/Count Counter 8 Down
Counter 5 Compare
Counter 5 Up
Counter 5 Down
Counter 5 Block
8 Counter 5 Set to Preset
Counter 5 Reset
Counter 5 Freeze/Reset
Counter 5 Freeze/Count
DIGITAL COUNTER 6
Counter 6 Function
Counter 6 Name
Counter 6 Units
Counter 6 Preset
Counter 6 Compare
Counter 6 Up
Counter 6 Down

8 COMMISSIONING 8.6 INPUTS / OUTPUTS
8.6 INPUTS / OUTPUTS 8.6.1 CONTACT INPUTS
Table 8–8: CONTACT INPUTS

CONTACT INPUT ID DEBNCE TIME EVENTS THRESHOLD

8.6 INPUTS / OUTPUTS 8 COMMISSIONING
Table 8–9: VIRTUAL INPUTS

VIRTUAL INPUT FUNCTION ID TYPE EVENTS
Virtual Input 1
Virtual Input 2
Virtual Input 3
Virtual Input 4
Virtual Input 5
Virtual Input 6
Virtual Input 7
Virtual Input 8
Virtual Input 9
Virtual Input 10
Virtual Input 11
Virtual Input 12
Virtual Input 13
Virtual Input 14
Virtual Input 15
Virtual Input 16
Virtual Input 17
Virtual Input 18
Virtual Input 19
Virtual Input 20
Virtual Input 21
Virtual Input 22
Virtual Input 23
Virtual Input 24
Virtual Input 25
Virtual Input 26
Virtual Input 27
Virtual Input 28
Virtual Input 29
Virtual Input 30
Virtual Input 31
Virtual Input 32
8 8.6.3 SBO TIMER
Table 8–10: UCA SBO TIMER

UCA SBO TIMER
UCA SBO Timeout

8.6.4 CONTACT OUTPUTS
Table 8–11: CONTACT OUTPUTS

CONTACT OUTPUT ID OPERATE SEAL-IN EVENTS

Table 8–12: VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (Sheet 1 of 2) Table 8–12: VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (Sheet 2 of 2)
VIRTUAL ID EVENTS VIRTUAL ID EVENTS
OUTPUT OUTPUT
1 44
2 45
3 46
4 47
5 48
6 49
7 50
8 51
9 52
10 53
11 54
12 55
13 56
14 57
15 58
16 59
17 60
18 61
19 62
20 63
21 64
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
8 32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43

8.6.6 REMOTE DEVICES
Table 8–13: REMOTE DEVICES

REMOTE DEVICE ID
Remote Device 1
Remote Device 2
Remote Device 3
Remote Device 4
Remote Device 5
Remote Device 6
Remote Device 7
Remote Device 8
Remote Device 9
Remote Device 10
Remote Device 11
Remote Device 12
Remote Device 13
Remote Device 14
Remote Device 15
Remote Device 16

8.6.7 REMOTE INPUTS
Table 8–14: REMOTE INPUTS

REMOTE INPUT REMOTE DEVICE BIT PAIR DEFAULT STATE EVENTS
Remote Input 1
Remote Input 2
Remote Input 3
Remote Input 4
Remote Input 5
Remote Input 6
Remote Input 7
Remote Input 8
Remote Input 9
Remote Input 10
Remote Input 11
Remote Input 12
Remote Input 13
Remote Input 14
Remote Input 15
Remote Input 16
Remote Input 17
Remote Input 18
Remote Input 19
Remote Input 20
Remote Input 21
Remote Input 22
Remote Input 23
Remote Input 24
Remote Input 25
Remote Input 26
Remote Input 27
Remote Input 28
Remote Input 29
Remote Input 30
Remote Input 31
Remote Input 32
8

8.6.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS
Table 8–15: REMOTE OUTPUTS (Sheet 1 of 2) Table 8–15: REMOTE OUTPUTS (Sheet 2 of 2)
OUTPUT # OPERAND EVENTS OUTPUT # OPERAND EVENTS
REMOTE OUTPUTS – DNA REMOTE OUTPUTS – UserSt
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22
23 23
24 24
25 25
26 26
27 27
28 28
29 29
30 30
31 31
32 32 8
8.6.9 RESETTING
SETTING VALUE
RESETTING
Reset Operand

8.7 TRANSDUCER I/O 8 COMMISSIONING
8.7 TRANSDUCER I/O 8.7.1 DCMA INPUTS
Table 8–16: DCMA INPUTS

DCMA FUNCTION ID UNITS RANGE VALUES
INPUT
MIN MAX

8 COMMISSIONING 8.7 TRANSDUCER I/O
8.7.2 RTD INPUTS
Table 8–17: RTD INPUTS

RTD INPUT FUNCTION ID TYPE

8.8 TESTING 8 COMMISSIONING
8.8 TESTING 8.8.1 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Table 8–18: FORCE CONTACT INPUTS Table 8–19: FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
FORCE CONTACT INPUT FORCE CONTACT OUTPUT

APPENDIX A A.1 FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS
APPENDIX A FLEXANALOG PARAMETERSA.1 FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS A.1.1 PARAMETER LIST
A
Table A–1: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS (Sheet 1 of 4)
SETTING DISPLAY TEXT DESCRIPTION
5728 Stator Diff Iad Stator Differential Iad (A)
5730 Stator Rest Iar Stator Restraint Iar (A)
5732 Stator Diff Ibd Stator Differential Ibd (A)
5734 Stator Rest Ibr Stator Restraint Ibr (A)
5736 Stator Diff Icd Stator Differential Icd (A)
5738 Stator Rest Icr Stator Restraint Icr (A)
5760 Sns Dir Power 1 Sensitive Dir Power 1 Actual (W)
5762 Sns Dir Power 2 Sensitive Dir Power 2 Actual (W)
6144 SRC 1 Ia RMS SRC 1 Phase A Current RMS (A)
6146 SRC 1 Ib RMS SRC 1 Phase B Current RMS (A)
6148 SRC 1 Ic RMS SRC 1 Phase C Current RMS (A)
6150 SRC 1 In RMS SRC 1 Neutral Current RMS (A)
6152 SRC 1 Ia Mag SRC 1 Phase A Current Magnitude (A)
6154 SRC 1 Ia Angle SRC 1 Phase A Current Angle (°)
6155 SRC 1 Ib Mag SRC 1 Phase B Current Magnitude (A)
6157 SRC 1 Ib Angle SRC 1 Phase B Current Angle (°)
6158 SRC 1 Ic Mag SRC 1 Phase C Current Magnitude (A)
6160 SRC 1 Ic Angle SRC 1 Phase C Current Angle (°)
6161 SRC 1 In Mag SRC 1 Neutral Current Magnitude (A)
6163 SRC 1 In Angle SRC 1 Neutral Current Angle (°)
6164 SRC 1 Ig RMS SRC 1 Ground Current RMS (A)
6166 SRC 1 Ig Mag SRC 1 Ground Current Magnitude (A)
6168 SRC 1 Ig Angle SRC 1 Ground Current Angle (°)
6169 SRC 1 I_0 Mag SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude (A)
6171 SRC 1 I_0 Angle SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle (°)
6172 SRC 1 I_1 Mag SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude (A)
6174 SRC 1 I_1 Angle SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle (°)
6175 SRC 1 I_2 Mag SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude (A)
6177 SRC 1 I_2 Angle SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle (°)
6178 SRC 1 Igd Mag SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude (A)
6180 SRC 1 Igd Angle SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Angle (°)
6208 SRC 2 Ia RMS SRC 2 Phase A Current RMS (A)
6210 SRC 2 Ib RMS SRC 2 Phase B Current RMS (A)
6212 SRC 2 Ic RMS SRC 2 Phase C Current RMS (A)
6214 SRC 2 In RMS SRC 2 Neutral Current RMS (A)
6216 SRC 2 Ia Mag SRC 2 Phase A Current Magnitude (A)
6218 SRC 2 Ia Angle SRC 2 Phase A Current Angle (°)
6219 SRC 2 Ib Mag SRC 2 Phase B Current Magnitude (A)
6221 SRC 2 Ib Angle SRC 2 Phase B Current Angle (°)
6222 SRC 2 Ic Mag SRC 2 Phase C Current Magnitude (A)
6224 SRC 2 Ic Angle SRC 2 Phase C Current Angle (°)
6225 SRC 2 In Mag SRC 2 Neutral Current Magnitude (A)
6227 SRC 2 In Angle SRC 2 Neutral Current Angle (°)
6228 SRC 2 Ig RMS SRC 2 Ground Current RMS (A)
GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay A-1

A.1 FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS APPENDIX A
A SETTING
6230
DISPLAY TEXT
SRC 2 Ig Mag
DESCRIPTION
SRC 2 Ground Current Magnitude (A)
6232 SRC 2 Ig Angle SRC 2 Ground Current Angle (°)
6233 SRC 2 I_0 Mag SRC 2 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude (A)
6235 SRC 2 I_0 Angle SRC 2 Zero Sequence Current Angle (°)
6236 SRC 2 I_1 Mag SRC 2 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude (A)
6238 SRC 2 I_1 Angle SRC 2 Positive Sequence Current Angle (°)
6239 SRC 2 I_2 Mag SRC 2 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude (A)
6241 SRC 2 I_2 Angle SRC 2 Negative Sequence Current Angle (°)
6242 SRC 2 Igd Mag SRC 2 Differential Ground Current Magnitude (A)
6244 SRC 2 Igd Angle SRC 2 Differential Ground Current Angle (°)
6656 SRC 1 Vag RMS SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS (V)
6658 SRC 1 Vbg RMS SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS (V)
6660 SRC 1 Vcg RMS SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS (V)
6662 SRC 1 Vag Mag SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude (V)
6664 SRC 1 Vag Angle SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle (°)
6665 SRC 1 Vbg Mag SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude (V)
6667 SRC 1 Vbg Angle SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle (°)
6668 SRC 1 Vcg Mag SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude (V)
6670 SRC 1 Vcg Angle SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle (°)
6671 SRC 1 Vab RMS SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage RMS (V)
6673 SRC 1 Vbc RMS SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage RMS (V)
6675 SRC 1 Vca RMS SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage RMS (V)
6677 SRC 1 Vab Mag SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude (V)
6679 SRC 1 Vab Angle SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Angle (°)
6680 SRC 1 Vbc Mag SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude (V)
6682 SRC 1 Vbc Angle SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Angle (°)
6683 SRC 1 Vca Mag SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude (V)
6685 SRC 1 Vca Angle SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Angle (°)
6686 SRC 1 Vx RMS SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS (V)
6688 SRC 1 Vx Mag SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude (V)
6690 SRC 1 Vx Angle SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle (°)
6691 SRC 1 V_0 Mag SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude (V)
6693 SRC 1 V_0 Angle SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle (°)
6694 SRC 1 V_1 Mag SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude (V)
6696 SRC 1 V_1 Angle SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle (°)
6697 SRC 1 V_2 Mag SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude (V)
6699 SRC 1 V_2 Angle SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle (°)
6720 SRC 2 Vag RMS SRC 2 Phase AG Voltage RMS (V)
6722 SRC 2 Vbg RMS SRC 2 Phase BG Voltage RMS (V)
6724 SRC 2 Vcg RMS SRC 2 Phase CG Voltage RMS (V)
6726 SRC 2 Vag Mag SRC 2 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude (V)
6728 SRC 2 Vag Angle SRC 2 Phase AG Voltage Angle (°)
6729 SRC 2 Vbg Mag SRC 2 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude (V)
6731 SRC 2 Vbg Angle SRC 2 Phase BG Voltage Angle (°)
6732 SRC 2 Vcg Mag SRC 2 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude (V)
6734 SRC 2 Vcg Angle SRC 2 Phase CG Voltage Angle (°)
6735 SRC 2 Vab RMS SRC 2 Phase AB Voltage RMS (V)
A-2 M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

APPENDIX A A.1 FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS

SETTING DISPLAY TEXT DESCRIPTION
A
6737 SRC 2 Vbc RMS SRC 2 Phase BC Voltage RMS (V)
6739 SRC 2 Vca RMS SRC 2 Phase CA Voltage RMS (V)
6741 SRC 2 Vab Mag SRC 2 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude (V)
6743 SRC 2 Vab Angle SRC 2 Phase AB Voltage Angle (°)
6744 SRC 2 Vbc Mag SRC 2 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude (V)
6746 SRC 2 Vbc Angle SRC 2 Phase BC Voltage Angle (°)
6747 SRC 2 Vca Mag SRC 2 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude (V)
6749 SRC 2 Vca Angle SRC 2 Phase CA Voltage Angle (°)
6750 SRC 2 Vx RMS SRC 2 Auxiliary Voltage RMS (V)
6752 SRC 2 Vx Mag SRC 2 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude (V)
6754 SRC 2 Vx Angle SRC 2 Auxiliary Voltage Angle (°)
6755 SRC 2 V_0 Mag SRC 2 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude (V)
6757 SRC 2 V_0 Angle SRC 2 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle (°)
6758 SRC 2 V_1 Mag SRC 2 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude (V)
6760 SRC 2 V_1 Angle SRC 2 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle (°)
6761 SRC 2 V_2 Mag SRC 2 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude (V)
6763 SRC 2 V_2 Angle SRC 2 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle (°)
7168 SRC 1 P SRC 1 Three Phase Real Power (W)
7170 SRC 1 Pa SRC 1 Phase A Real Power (W)
7172 SRC 1 Pb SRC 1 Phase B Real Power (W)
7174 SRC 1 Pc SRC 1 Phase C Real Power (W)
7176 SRC 1 Q SRC 1 Three Phase Reactive Power (var)
7178 SRC 1 Qa SRC 1 Phase A Reactive Power (var)
7180 SRC 1 Qb SRC 1 Phase B Reactive Power (var)
7182 SRC 1 Qc SRC 1 Phase C Reactive Power (var)
7184 SRC 1 S SRC 1 Three Phase Apparent Power (VA)
7186 SRC 1 Sa SRC 1 Phase A Apparent Power (VA)
7188 SRC 1 Sb SRC 1 Phase B Apparent Power (VA)
7190 SRC 1 Sc SRC 1 Phase C Apparent Power (VA)
7192 SRC 1 PF SRC 1 Three Phase Power Factor
7193 SRC 1 Phase A PF SRC 1 Phase A Power Factor
7194 SRC 1 Phase B PF SRC 1 Phase B Power Factor
7195 SRC 1 Phase C PF SRC 1 Phase C Power Factor
7200 SRC 2 P SRC 2 Three Phase Real Power (W)
7202 SRC 2 Pa SRC 2 Phase A Real Power (W)
7204 SRC 2 Pb SRC 2 Phase B Real Power (W)
7206 SRC 2 Pc SRC 2 Phase C Real Power (W)
7208 SRC 2 Q SRC 2 Three Phase Reactive Power (var)
7210 SRC 2 Qa SRC 2 Phase A Reactive Power (var)
7212 SRC 2 Qb SRC 2 Phase B Reactive Power (var)
7214 SRC 2 Qc SRC 2 Phase C Reactive Power (var)
7216 SRC 2 S SRC 2 Three Phase Apparent Power (VA)
7218 SRC 2 Sa SRC 2 Phase A Apparent Power (VA)
7220 SRC 2 Sb SRC 2 Phase B Apparent Power (VA)
7222 SRC 2 Sc SRC 2 Phase C Apparent Power (VA)
7224 SRC 2 PF SRC 2 Three Phase Power Factor
7225 SRC 2 Phase A PF SRC 2 Phase A Power Factor
GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay A-3

A.1 FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS APPENDIX A
A SETTING
7226
DISPLAY TEXT
SRC 2 Phase B PF
DESCRIPTION
SRC 2 Phase B Power Factor
7227 SRC 2 Phase C PF SRC 2 Phase C Power Factor
7424 SRC 1 Pos Watthour SRC 1 Positive Watthour (Wh)
7426 SRC 1 Neg Watthour SRC 1 Negative Watthour (Wh)
7428 SRC 1 Pos varh SRC 1 Positive Varhour (varh)
7430 SRC 1 Neg varh SRC 1 Negative Varhour (varh)
7440 SRC 2 Pos Watthour SRC 2 Positive Watthour (Wh)
7442 SRC 2 Neg Watthour SRC 2 Negative Watthour (Wh)
7444 SRC 2 Pos varh SRC 2 Positive Varhour (varh)
7446 SRC 2 Neg varh SRC 2 Negative Varhour (varh)
7552 SRC 1 Frequency SRC 1 Frequency (Hz)
7553 SRC 2 Frequency SRC 2 Frequency (Hz)
26177 Model Capacity Used Thermal Model Capacity Used (%)
26179 rip Time On Overload Thermal Model Trip Time On Overload
26180 l Model Lockout Time Thermal Model Lockout Time (min.)
26184 Thermal Model Load Thermal Model Load (x FLA)
26186 odel Motor Unbalance Thermal Model Motor Unbalance (%)
26187 el Biased Motor Load Thermal Model Biased Motor Load (x FLA)
32768 Tracking Frequency Tracking Frequency (Hz)
39425 FlexElement 1 OpSig FlexElement 1 Actual
40960 Communications Group Communications Group
40971 Active Setting Group Current Setting Group
41728 Amp Unbalance Amp Unbalance (%)
A-4 M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

APPENDIX B B.1 OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B MODBUS® RTU PROTOCOLB.1 OVERVIEW B.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The UR series relays support a number of communications protocols to allow connection to equipment such as personal
computers, RTUs, SCADA masters, and programmable logic controllers. The Modicon Modbus RTU protocol is the most
basic protocol supported by the UR. Modbus is available via RS232 or RS485 serial links or via ethernet (using the Mod-
bus/TCP specification). The following description is intended primarily for users who wish to develop their own master com-
munication drivers and applies to the serial Modbus RTU protocol. Note that:
• The UR always acts as a slave device, meaning that it never initiates communications; it only listens and responds to B
requests issued by a master computer.
• For Modbus®, a subset of the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) protocol format is supported that allows extensive monitor-
ing, programming, and control functions using read and write register commands.
B.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER
The Modbus® RTU protocol is hardware-independent so that the physical layer can be any of a variety of standard hard-
ware configurations including RS232 and RS485. The relay includes a faceplate (front panel) RS232 port and two rear ter-
minal communications ports that may be configured as RS485, fiber optic, 10BaseT, or 10BaseF. Data flow is half-duplex in
all configurations. See Chapter 3: HARDWARE for details on wiring.
Each data byte is transmitted in an asynchronous format consisting of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and possibly 1 parity
bit. This produces a 10 or 11 bit data frame. This can be important for transmission through modems at high bit rates (11 bit
data frames are not supported by many modems at baud rates greater than 300).
The baud rate and parity are independently programmable for each communications port. Baud rates of 300, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps are available. Even, odd, and no parity are avail-
able. Refer to the COMMUNICATIONS section of the SETTINGS chapter for further details.
The master device in any system must know the address of the slave device with which it is to communicate. The relay will
not act on a request from a master if the address in the request does not match the relay’s slave address (unless the
address is the broadcast address – see below).
A single setting selects the slave address used for all ports, with the exception that for the faceplate port, the relay will
accept any address when the Modbus® RTU protocol is used.
B.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER
Communications takes place in packets which are groups of asynchronously framed byte data. The master transmits a
packet to the slave and the slave responds with a packet. The end of a packet is marked by ‘dead-time’ on the communica-
tions line. The following describes general format for both transmit and receive packets. For exact details on packet format-
ting, refer to subsequent sections describing each function code.
Table B–1: MODBUS PACKET FORMAT

DESCRIPTION SIZE
SLAVE ADDRESS 1 byte
FUNCTION CODE 1 byte
DATA N bytes
CRC 2 bytes
DEAD TIME 3.5 bytes transmission time
SLAVE ADDRESS
This is the address of the slave device that is intended to receive the packet sent by the master and to perform the desired
action. Each slave device on a communications bus must have a unique address to prevent bus contention. All of the
relay’s ports have the same address which is programmable from 1 to 254; see Chapter 5 for details. Only the addressed
slave will respond to a packet that starts with its address. Note that the faceplate port is an exception to this rule; it will act
on a message containing any slave address.
GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay B-1

B.1 OVERVIEW APPENDIX B
A master transmit packet with a slave address of 0 indicates a broadcast command. All slaves on the communication link
will take action based on the packet, but none will respond to the master. Broadcast mode is only recognized when associ-
ated with FUNCTION CODE 05h. For any other function code, a packet with broadcast mode slave address 0 will be
ignored.
FUNCTION CODE
This is one of the supported functions codes of the unit which tells the slave what action to perform. See the SUPPORTED
FUNCTION CODES section for complete details. An exception response from the slave is indicated by setting the high
B order bit of the function code in the response packet. See the EXCEPTION RESPONSES section for further details.
DATA
This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the function code. This may include actual values, settings, or
addresses sent by the master to the slave or by the slave to the master.
CRC
This is a two byte error checking code. The RTU version of Modbus® includes a 16 bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC-16)
with every packet which is an industry standard method used for error detection. If a Modbus® slave device receives a
packet in which an error is indicated by the CRC, the slave device will not act upon or respond to the packet thus preventing
any erroneous operations. See the CRC-16 ALGORITHM section for a description of how to calculate the CRC.
DEAD TIME
A packet is terminated when no data is received for a period of 3.5 byte transmission times (about 15 ms at 2400 bps, 2 ms
at 19200 bps, and 300 µs at 115200 bps). Consequently, the transmitting device must not allow gaps between bytes longer
than this interval. Once the dead time has expired without a new byte transmission, all slaves start listening for a new
packet from the master except for the addressed slave.
B-2 M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

APPENDIX B B.1 OVERVIEW
B.1.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM
The CRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data bits only; start, stop and parity ignored) as one contin-
uous binary number. This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristic polynomial
(11000000000000101B). The 16 bit remainder of the division is appended to the end of the packet, MSByte first. The
resulting packet including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial at the receiver will give a zero remainder if no trans-
mission errors have occurred. This algorithm requires the characteristic polynomial to be reverse bit ordered. The most sig-
nificant bit of the characteristic polynomial is dropped, since it does not affect the value of the remainder.
B
Note: A C programming language implementation of the CRC algorithm will be provided upon request.
Table B–2: CRC-16 ALGORITHM

SYMBOLS: --> data transfer
A 16 bit working register
Alow low order byte of A
Ahigh high order byte of A
CRC 16 bit CRC-16 result
i,j loop counters
(+) logical EXCLUSIVE-OR operator
N total number of data bytes
Di i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1)
G 16 bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 (binary) with MSbit dropped and bit order reversed
shr (x) right shift operator (th LSbit of x is shifted into a carry flag, a '0' is shifted into the MSbit of x, all other bits
are shifted right one location)
ALGORITHM: 1. FFFF (hex) --> A

2. 0 --> i
3. 0 --> j
4. Di (+) Alow --> Alow
5. j + 1 --> j
6. shr (A)
7. Is there a carry? No: go to 8
Yes: G (+) A --> A and continue.
8. Is j = 8? No: go to 5
Yes: continue
9. i + 1 --> i
10. Is i = N? No: go to 3
Yes: continue
11. A --> CRC

B.2 FUNCTION CODES APPENDIX B
B.2 FUNCTION CODES B.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES
Modbus® officially defines function codes from 1 to 127 though only a small subset is generally needed. The relay supports
some of these functions, as summarized in the following table. Subsequent sections describe each function code in detail.
FUNCTION CODE MODBUS DEFINITION GE POWER MANAGEMENT DEFINITION
HEX DEC
B 03
04
3
4
Read Holding Registers
Read Holding Registers
Read Actual Values or Settings
Read Actual Values or Settings
05 5 Force Single Coil Execute Operation
06 6 Preset Single Register Store Single Setting
10 16 Preset Multiple Registers Store Multiple Settings
B.2.2 FUNCTION CODE 03H/04H - READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS
This function code allows the master to read one or more consecutive data registers (actual values or settings) from a relay.
Data registers are always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted with high order byte first. The maximum number of registers
that can be read in a single packet is 125. See the section MODBUS® MEMORY MAP for exact details on the data regis-
ters.
Since some PLC implementations of Modbus® only support one of function codes 03h and 04h, the relay interpretation
allows either function code to be used for reading one or more consecutive data registers. The data starting address will
determine the type of data being read. Function codes 03h and 04h are therefore identical.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting 3
register values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h (17 decimal); the slave device responds with the values 40,
300, and 0 from registers 4050h, 4051h, and 4052h, respectively.
Table B–3: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE

MASTER TRANSMISSION SLAVE RESPONSE
PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE (HEX) PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE (HEX)
SLAVE ADDRESS 11 SLAVE ADDRESS 11
FUNCTION CODE 04 FUNCTION CODE 04
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi 40 BYTE COUNT 06
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo 50 DATA #1 - hi 00
NUMBER OF REGISTERS - hi 00 DATA #1 - lo 28
NUMBER OF REGISTERS - lo 03 DATA #2 - hi 01
CRC - lo A7 DATA #2 - lo 2C
CRC - hi 4A DATA #3 - hi 00
DATA #3 - lo 00
CRC - lo 0D
CRC - hi 60

APPENDIX B B.2 FUNCTION CODES
B.2.3 FUNCTION CODE 05H - EXECUTE OPERATION
This function code allows the master to perform various operations in the relay. Available operations are in the table SUM-
MARY OF OPERATION CODES.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting the
slave device 11H (17 dec) to perform a reset. The hi and lo CODE VALUE bytes always have the values ‘FF’ and ‘00’
respectively and are a remnant of the original Modbus® definition of this function code.
B
OPERATION CODE - hi 00 OPERATION CODE - hi 00
OPERATION CODE - lo 01 OPERATION CODE - lo 01
CODE VALUE - hi FF CODE VALUE - hi FF
CODE VALUE - lo 00 CODE VALUE - lo 00
CRC - lo DF CRC - lo DF
CRC - hi 6A CRC - hi 6A
Table B–5: SUMMARY OF OPERATION CODES (FUNCTION CODE 05H)

OPERATION DEFINITION DESCRIPTION
CODE (HEX)
0000 NO OPERATION Does not do anything.
0001 RESET Performs the same function as the faceplate RESET key.
0005 CLEAR EVENT RECORDS Performs the same function as the faceplate CLEAR EVENT RECORDS menu
command.
0006 CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY Clears all oscillography records.
1000 to 101F VIRTUAL IN 1-32 ON/OFF Sets the states of Virtual Inputs 1 to 32 either “ON” or “OFF”.
B.2.4 FUNCTION CODE 06H - STORE SINGLE SETTING
This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a single setting register in an relay. Setting registers are
always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device storing the
value 200 at memory map address 4051h to slave device 11h (17 dec).

DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi 40 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi 40
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo 51 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo 51
DATA - hi 00 DATA - hi 00
DATA - lo C8 DATA - lo C8
CRC - lo CE CRC - lo CE
CRC - hi DD CRC - hi DD

B.2 FUNCTION CODES APPENDIX B
B.2.5 FUNCTION CODE 10H - STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS
This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a one or more consecutive setting registers in a relay. Set-
ting registers are 16-bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The maximum number of setting registers that
can be stored in a single packet is 60. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example
shows a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h, and the value 1 at memory map address
4052h to slave device 11h (17 dec).
B Table B–7: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
PACKET FORMAT EXAMPLE (HEX) PACKET FORMAT EXMAPLE (HEX)
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi 40 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi 40
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo 51 DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo 51
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi 00 NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi 00
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo 02 NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo 02
BYTE COUNT 04 CRC - lo 07
DATA #1 - high order byte 00 CRC - hi 64
DATA #1 - low order byte C8
DATA #2 - high order byte 00
DATA #2 - low order byte 01
CRC - low order byte 12
CRC - high order byte 62
B.2.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES
Programming or operation errors usually happen because of illegal data in a packet. These errors result in an exception
response from the slave. The slave detecting one of these errors sends a response packet to the master with the high order
bit of the function code set to 1.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device sending the
unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11.

FUNCTION CODE 39 FUNCTION CODE B9
CRC - low order byte CD ERROR CODE 01
CRC - high order byte F2 CRC - low order byte 93
CRC - high order byte 95

APPENDIX B B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS B.3.1 OBTAINING UR FILES USING MODBUS® PROTOCOL
The UR relay has a generic file transfer facility, meaning that you use the same method to obtain all of the different types of
files from the unit. The Modbus registers that implement file transfer are found in the "Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)"
and "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" modules, starting at address 3100 in the Modbus Memory Map. To read a file from
the UR relay, use the following steps:
1. Write the filename to the "Name of file to read" register using a write multiple registers command. If the name is shorter
than 80 characters, you may write only enough registers to include all the text of the filename. Filenames are not case B
sensitive.
2. Repeatedly read all the registers in "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" using a read multiple registers command. It is
not necessary to read the entire data block, since the UR relay will remember which was the last register you read. The
"position" register is initially zero and thereafter indicates how many bytes (2 times the number of registers) you have
read so far. The "size of..." register indicates the number of bytes of data remaining to read, to a maximum of 244.
3. Keep reading until the "size of..." register is smaller than the number of bytes you are transferring. This condition indi-
cates end of file. Discard any bytes you have read beyond the indicated block size.
4. If you need to re-try a block, read only the "size of.." and "block of data", without reading the position. The file pointer is
only incremented when you read the position register, so the same data block will be returned as was read in the pre-
vious operation. On the next read, check to see if the position is where you expect it to be, and discard the previous
block if it is not (this condition would indicate that the UR relay did not process your original read request).
The UR relay retains connection-specific file transfer information, so files may be read simultaneously on multiple Modbus
connections.
a) OBTAINING FILES FROM THE UR USING OTHER PROTOCOLS
All the files available via Modbus may also be retrieved using the standard file transfer mechanisms in other protocols (for
example, TFTP or MMS).
b) COMTRADE AND OSCILLOGRAPHY FILES

Oscillography files are formatted using the COMTRADE file format per IEEE PC37.111 Draft 7c (02 September 1997). The
files may be obtained in either text or binary COMTRADE format.
c) READING OSCILLOGRAPHY FILES

Familiarity with the oscillography feature is required to understand the following description. Refer to the OSCILLOGRA-
PHY section in the SETTINGS chapter for additional details.
The Oscillography_Number_of_Triggers register is incremented by one every time a new oscillography file is triggered
(captured) and cleared to zero when oscillography data is cleared. When a new trigger occurs, the associated oscillography
file is assigned a file identifier number equal to the incremented value of this register; the newest file number is equal to the
Oscillography_Number_of_Triggers register. This register can be used to determine if any new data has been captured by
periodically reading it to see if the value has changed; if the number has increased then new data is available.
The Oscillography_Number_of_Records setting specifies the maximum number of files (and the number of cycles of data
per file) that can be stored in memory of the relay. The Oscillography_Available_Records register specifies the actual num-
ber of files that are stored and still available to be read out of the relay.
Writing ‘Yes’ (i.e. the value 1) to the Oscillography_Clear_Data register clears oscillography data files, clears both the
Oscillography_Number_of_Triggers and Oscillography_Available_Records registers to zero, and sets the
Oscillography_Last_Cleared_Date to the present date and time.
To read binary COMTRADE oscillography files, read the following filenames:
• OSCnnnn.CFG
• OSCnnn.DAT
Replace "nnn" with the desired oscillography trigger number. For ASCII format, use the following file names
• OSCAnnnn.CFG
• OSCAnnn.DAT

B.3 FILE TRANSFERS APPENDIX B
d) READING EVENT RECORDER FILES

To read the entire event recorder contents in ASCII format (the only available format), use the following filename:
• EVT.TXT
To read from a specific record to the end of the log, use the following filename:
• EVTnnn.TXT (replace "nnn" with the desired starting record number)
B B.3.2 MODBUS® PASSWORD OPERATION
The COMMAND password is set up at memory location 4000. Storing a value of "0" removes COMMAND password protec-
tion. When reading the password setting, the encrypted value (zero if no password is set) is returned. COMMAND security
is required to change the COMMAND password. Similarly, the SETTING password is set up at memory location 4002.
These are the same settings and encrypted values found in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP PASSWORD SECURITY
menu via the keypad. Enabling password security for the faceplate display will also enable it for Modbus, and vice-versa.
To gain COMMAND level security access, the COMMAND password must be entered at memory location 4008. To gain
SETTING level security access, the SETTING password must be entered at memory location 400A. The entered SETTING
password must match the current SETTING password setting, or must be zero, to change settings or download firmware.
COMMAND and SETTING passwords each have a 30-minute timer. Each timer starts when you enter the particular pass-
word, and is re-started whenever you “use” it. For example, writing a setting re-starts the SETTING password timer and
writing a command register or forcing a coil re-starts the COMMAND password timer. The value read at memory location
4010 can be used to confirm whether a COMMAND password is enabled or disabled (0 for Disabled). The value read at
memory location 4011 can be used to confirm whether a SETTING password is enabled or disabled.
COMMAND or SETTING password security access is restricted to the particular port or particular TCP/IP connection on
which the entry was made. Passwords must be entered when accessing the relay through other ports or connections, and
the passwords must be re-entered after disconnecting and re-connecting on TCP/IP.

APPENDIX B B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING B.4.1 MODBUS® MEMORY MAP
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 1 of 28)

ADDR REGISTER NAME RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT DEFAULT
Product Information (Read Only)
0000 UR Product Type 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
0002 Product Version 0 to 655.35 --- 0.01 F001 1 B
Product Information (Read Only -- Written by Factory)
0010 Serial Number --- --- --- F203 "0"
0020 Manufacturing Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
0022 Modification Number 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
0040 Order Code --- --- --- F204 "Order Code x "
0090 Ethernet MAC Address --- --- --- F072 0
0093 Reserved (13 items) --- --- --- F001 0
00A0 CPU Module Serial Number --- --- --- F203 (none)
00B0 CPU Supplier Serial Number --- --- --- F203 (none)
00C0 Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number (8 items) --- --- --- F203 (none)
Self Test Targets (Read Only)
0200 Self Test States (2 items) 0 to 4294967295 0 1 F143 0
Front Panel (Read Only)
0204 LED Column x State (9 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F501 0
0220 Display Message --- --- --- F204 (none)
Keypress Emulation (Read/Write)
0280 Simulated keypress – write zero before each keystroke 0 to 26 --- 1 F190 0 (No key – use
between real key)
Virtual Input Commands (Read/Write Command) (32 modules)
0400 Virtual Input x State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
0401 ...Repeated for module number 2
040A ...Repeated for module number 11
040B ...Repeated for module number 12
040C ...Repeated for module number 13
040D ...Repeated for module number 14
040E ...Repeated for module number 15
040F ...Repeated for module number 16

B.4 MEMORY MAPPING APPENDIX B

Digital Counter States (Read Only Non-Volatile) (8 modules)
0800 Digital Counter x Value –2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
B 0802 Digital Counter x Frozen

2147483647
–2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
2147483647
0804 Digital Counter x Frozen Time Stamp 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
0806 Digital Counter x Frozen Time Stamp us 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
Flex States (Read Only)
0900 Flex State Bits (16 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element States (Read Only)
1000 Element Operate States (64 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F502 0
User Displays Actuals (Read Only)
1080 Formatted user-definable displays (8 items) --- --- --- F200 (none)
Modbus User Map Actuals (Read Only)
1200 User Map Values (256 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element Targets (Read Only)
14C0 Target Sequence 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
14C1 Number of Targets 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element Targets (Read/Write)
14C2 Target to Read 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Element Targets (Read Only)
14C3 Target Message --- --- --- F200 "."
Digital I/O States (Read Only
1500 Contact Input States (6 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1508 Virtual Input States (2 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1510 Contact Output States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1518 Contact Output Current States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1520 Contact Output Voltage States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1528 Virtual Output States (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1530 Contact Output Detectors (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
Remote I/O States (Read Only)
1540 Remote Device x States 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1542 Remote Input x States (2 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F500 0
1550 Remote Devices Online 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Remote Device Status (Read Only) (16 modules)
1551 Remote Device x StNum 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
1553 Remote Device x SqNum 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0


1589 ...Repeated for module number 15 B
Ethernet Fibre Channel Status (Read/Write)
1610 Ethernet Primary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 0 (Fail)
1611 Ethernet Secondary Fibre Channel Status 0 to 2 --- 1 F134 0 (Fail)
Stator Differential Actuals (Read Only)
1660 Generator Differential Iad 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1662 Generator Rest Iar 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1664 Generator Differential Ibd 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1666 Generator Rest Ibr 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1668 Generator Differential Icd 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
166A Generator Rest Icr 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
Sensitive Directional Power Actuals (Read Only) (2 modules)
1680 Sensitive Directional Power X Power -2147483647 to W 1 F060 0
2147483647
Source Current (Read Only) (6 modules)
1800 Phase A Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1802 Phase B Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1804 Phase C Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1806 Neutral Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1808 Phase A Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
180A Phase A Current Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0
180B Phase B Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
180D Phase B Current Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0
180E Phase C Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1810 Phase C Current Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0
1811 Neutral Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1813 Neutral Current Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0
1814 Ground Current RMS 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1816 Ground Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1818 Ground Current Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0
1819 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
181B Zero Sequence Current Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0
181C Positive Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
181E Positive Sequence Current Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0
181F Negative Sequence Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1821 Negative Sequence Current Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0
1822 Differential Ground Current Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 A 0.001 F060 0
1824 Differential Ground Current Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0
1825 Reserved (27 items) --- --- --- F001 0
18C0 ...Repeated for module number 4
Source Voltage (Read Only) (6 modules)
1A00 Phase AG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A02 Phase BG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0


1A04 Phase CG Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A06 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A08 Phase AG Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0
1A09 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A0B Phase BG Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0
B 1A0C
1A0E
Phase CG Voltage Magnitude
Phase CG Voltage Angle
0 to 999999.999
-359.9 to 0
V
°
0.001
0.1
F060
F002
0
0
1A0F Phase AB or AC Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A11 Phase BC or BA Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A13 Phase CA or CB Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A15 Phase AB or AC Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A17 Phase AB or AC Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0
1A18 Phase BC or BA Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A1A Phase BC or BA Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0
1A1B Phase CA or CB Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A1D Phase CA or CB Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0
1A1E Auxiliary Voltage RMS 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A20 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A22 Auxiliary Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0
1A23 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A25 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0
1A26 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A28 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0
1A29 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude 0 to 999999.999 V 0.001 F060 0
1A2B Negative Sequence Voltage Angle -359.9 to 0 ° 0.1 F002 0
1A2C Reserved (20 items) --- --- --- F001 0
1A40 ...Repeated for module number 2
1AC0 ...Repeated for module number 4
1B00 ...Repeated for module number 5
Source Power (Read Only) (6 modules)
1C00 Three Phase Real Power -1000000000000 to W 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C02 Phase A Real Power -1000000000000 to W 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C04 Phase B Real Power -1000000000000 to W 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C06 Phase C Real Power -1000000000000 to W 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C08 Three Phase Reactive Power -1000000000000 to var 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C0A Phase A Reactive Power -1000000000000 to var 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C0C Phase B Reactive Power -1000000000000 to var 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C0E Phase C Reactive Power -1000000000000 to var 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C10 Three Phase Apparent Power -1000000000000 to VA 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C12 Phase A Apparent Power -1000000000000 to VA 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C14 Phase B Apparent Power -1000000000000 to VA 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C16 Phase C Apparent Power -1000000000000 to VA 0.001 F060 0
1000000000000
1C18 Three Phase Power Factor -0.999 to 1 --- 0.001 F013 0
1C19 Phase A Power Factor -0.999 to 1 --- 0.001 F013 0


1C1A Phase B Power Factor -0.999 to 1 --- 0.001 F013 0
1C1B Phase C Power Factor -0.999 to 1 --- 0.001 F013 0
1C1C Reserved (4 items) --- --- --- F001 0
1C60 ...Repeated for module number 4 B
1CA0 ...Repeated for module number 6
Source Energy (Read Only Non-Volatile) (6 modules)
1D00 Positive Watthour 0 to 1000000000000 Wh 0.001 F060 0
1D02 Negative Watthour 0 to 1000000000000 Wh 0.001 F060 0
1D04 Positive Varhour 0 to 1000000000000 varh 0.001 F060 0
1D06 Negative Varhour 0 to 1000000000000 varh 0.001 F060 0
1D08 Reserved (8 items) --- --- --- F001 0
1D10 ...Repeated for module number 2
Energy Commands (Read/Write Command)
1D60 Energy Clear Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Source Frequency (Read Only) (6 modules)
1D80 Frequency 2 to 90 Hz 0.01 F001 0
Expanded FlexStates (Read Only)
2B00 FlexStates, one per register (256 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Expanded Digital I/O states (Read Only)
2D00 Contact Input States, one per register (96 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
2D80 Contact Output States, one per register (64 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
2E00 Virtual Output States, one per register (64 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Expanded Remote I/O Status (Read Only)
2F00 Remote Device States, one per register (16 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F155 0 (Offline)
2F80 Remote Input States, one per register (32 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
Oscillography Values (Read Only)
3000 Oscillography Number of Triggers 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
3001 Oscillography Available Records 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
3002 Oscillography Last Cleared Date 0 to 400000000 --- 1 F050 0
3004 Oscillography Number Of Cycles Per Record 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Oscillography Commands (Read/Write Command)
3005 Oscillography Force Trigger 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
3011 Oscillography Clear Data 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)
3100 Name of file to read --- --- --- F204 (none)
Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)
3200 Character position of current block within file 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
3202 Size of currently-available data block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
3203 Block of data from requested file (122 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Event Recorder (Read Only)
3400 Events Since Last Clear 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
3402 Number of Available Events 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0


3404 Event Recorder Last Cleared Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
Event Recorder (Read/Write Command)
3406 Event Recorder Clear Command 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
DCMA Input Values (Read Only) (24 modules)
34C0 DCMA Inputs x Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 0
B 34C2
34C4
...Repeated for module number 2
34CA ...Repeated for module number 6
34CC ...Repeated for module number 7
34CE ...Repeated for module number 8
34DA ...Repeated for module number 14
34DC ...Repeated for module number 15
34DE ...Repeated for module number 16
34E0 ...Repeated for module number 17
34EA ...Repeated for module number 22
34EC ...Repeated for module number 23
34EE ...Repeated for module number 24
RTD Input Values (Read Only) (48 modules)
34F0 RTD Inputs x Value -32768 to 32767 °C 1 F002 0
34F1 ...Repeated for module number 2
34FA ...Repeated for module number 11
34FB ...Repeated for module number 12
34FC ...Repeated for module number 13
34FD ...Repeated for module number 14
34FE ...Repeated for module number 15
34FF ...Repeated for module number 16


350E ...Repeated for module number 31 B
Ohm Input Values (Read Only) (2 modules)
3520 Ohm Inputs x Value 0 to 65535 Ω 1 F001 0
Passwords (Read/Write Command)
4000 Command Password Setting 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
Passwords (Read/Write Setting)
4002 Setting Password Setting 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
Passwords (Read/Write)
4008 Command Password Entry 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
400A Setting Password Entry 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
Passwords (Read Only)
4010 Command Password Status 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
4011 Setting Password Status 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Preferences (Read/Write Setting)
4050 Flash Message Time 0.5 to 10 s 0.1 F001 10
4051 Default Message Timeout 10 to 900 s 1 F001 300
4052 Default Message Intensity 0 to 3 --- 1 F101 0 (25%)
Communications (Read/Write Setting)
407E COM1 minimum response time 0 to 1000 ms 10 F001 0
407F COM2 minimum response time 0 to 1000 ms 10 F001 0
4080 Modbus Slave Address 1 to 254 --- 1 F001 254
4083 RS485 Com1 Baud Rate 0 to 11 --- 1 F112 5 (19200)
4084 RS485 Com1 Parity 0 to 2 --- 1 F113 0 (None)
4085 RS485 Com2 Baud Rate 0 to 11 --- 1 F112 5 (19200)
4086 RS485 Com2 Parity 0 to 2 --- 1 F113 0 (None)
4087 IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 56554706
4089 IP Subnet Mask 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 4294966272
408B Gateway IP Address 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 56554497
408D Network Address NSAP --- --- --- F074 0
4097 Default GOOSE Update Time 1 to 60 s 1 F001 60
4098 Ethernet Primary Fibre Channel Link Monitor 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)


4099 Ethernet Secondary Fibre Channel Link Monitor 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
409A DNP Port 0 to 4 --- 1 F177 0 (NONE)
409B DNP Address 0 to 65519 --- 1 F001 255
409C DNP Client Addresses (2 items) 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
40A0 TCP Port Number for the Modbus protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 502
B 40A1
40A2
TCP/UDP Port Number for the DNP Protocol
TCP Port Number for the UCA/MMS Protocol
1 to 65535
1 to 65535
---
---
1
1
F001
F001
20000
102
40A3 TCP Port No. for the HTTP (Web Server) Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 80
40A4 Main UDP Port Number for the TFTP Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 69
40A5 Data Transfer UDP Port Numbers for the TFTP Protocol 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
(zero means "automatic") (2 items)
40A7 DNP Unsolicited Responses Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
40A8 DNP Unsolicited Responses Timeout 0 to 60 s 1 F001 5
40A9 DNP Unsolicited Responses Max Retries 1 to 255 --- 1 F001 10
40AA DNP Unsolicited Responses Destination Address 0 to 65519 --- 1 F001 1
40AB Ethernet Operation Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F192 0 (Half-Duplex)
40AC DNP User Map Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
40AD DNP Number of Sources used in Analog points list 1 to 6 --- 1 F001 1
40AE DNP Current Scale Factor 0 to 5 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40AF DNP Voltage Scale Factor 0 to 5 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B0 DNP Power Scale Factor 0 to 5 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B1 DNP Energy Scale Factor 0 to 5 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B2 DNP Other Scale Factor 0 to 5 --- 1 F194 2 (1)
40B3 DNP Current Default Deadband 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40B4 DNP Voltage Default Deadband 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40B5 DNP Power Default Deadband 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40B6 DNP Energy Default Deadband 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40B7 DNP Other Default Deadband 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40B8 DNP IIN Time Sync Bit Period 1 to 10080 min 1 F001 1440
40B9 DNP Message Fragment Size 30 to 2048 --- 1 F001 240
40BA DNP Client Address 3 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
40BC DNP Client Address 4 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
40BE DNP Client Address 5 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
40C0 DNP Communications Reserved (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
40C8 UCA Logical Device Name --- --- --- F203 "UCADevice"
40D0 UCA Communications Reserved (16 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
40E0 TCP Port Number for the IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol 1 to 65535 --- 1 F001 2404
40E1 IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
40E2 IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Common Addr of ASDU 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
40E3 IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Cyclic Data Tx Period 1 to 65535 s 1 F001 60
40E4 IEC No. of Sources used in M_ME_NC_1 point list 1 to 6 --- 1 F001 1
40E5 IEC Current Default Threshold 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40E6 IEC Voltage Default Threshold 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40E7 IEC Power Default Threshold 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40E8 IEC Energy Default Threshold 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40E9 IEC Other Default Threshold 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 30000
40EA IEC Communications Reserved (22 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
4100 DNP Binary Input Block of 16 Points (58 items) 0 to 58 --- 1 F197 0 (Not Used)
Clock (Read/Write Command)
41A0 RTC Set Time 0 to 235959 --- 1 F003 0
Clock (Read/Write Setting)
41A2 SR Date Format 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F051 0
41A4 SR Time Format 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F052 0
41A6 IRIG-B Signal Type 0 to 2 --- 1 F114 0 (None)


Oscillography (Read/Write Setting)
41C0 Oscillography Number of Records 1 to 64 --- 1 F001 15
41C1 Oscillography Trigger Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F118 0 (Auto Overwrite)
41C2 Oscillography Trigger Position 0 to 100 % 1 F001 50
41C3 Oscillography Trigger Source 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
41C4 Oscillography AC Input Waveforms 0 to 4 --- 1 F183 2 (16 samples/cycle) B
41D0 Oscillography Analog Channel X (16 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
4200 Oscillography Digital Channel X (63 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Trip and Alarm LEDs (Read/Write Setting)
4260 Trip LED Input FlexLogic Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4261 Alarm LED Input FlexLogic Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
User Programmable LEDs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
4280 FlexLogic Operand to Activate LED 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
4281 User LED type (latched or self-resetting) 0 to 1 --- 1 F127 1 (Self-Reset)
42AA ...Repeated for module number 22
42AC ...Repeated for module number 23
42AE ...Repeated for module number 24
42BA ...Repeated for module number 30
42BC ...Repeated for module number 31
42BE ...Repeated for module number 32
42CA ...Repeated for module number 38
42CC ...Repeated for module number 39
42CE ...Repeated for module number 40


42DA ...Repeated for module number 46
B 42DC
42DE
Installation (Read/Write Setting)
43E0 Relay Programmed State 0 to 1 --- 1 F133 0 (Not Programmed)
43E1 Relay Name --- --- --- F202 "Relay-1"
CT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
4480 Phase CT Primary 1 to 65000 A 1 F001 1
4481 Phase CT Secondary 0 to 1 --- 1 F123 0 (1 A)
4482 Ground CT Primary 1 to 65000 A 1 F001 1
4483 Ground CT Secondary 0 to 1 --- 1 F123 0 (1 A)
VT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (3 modules)
4500 Phase VT Connection 0 to 1 --- 1 F100 0 (Wye)
4501 Phase VT Secondary 50 to 240 V 0.1 F001 664
4502 Phase VT Ratio 1 to 24000 :1 1 F060 1
4504 Auxiliary VT Connection 0 to 6 --- 1 F166 1 (Vag)
4505 Auxiliary VT Secondary 50 to 240 V 0.1 F001 664
4506 Auxiliary VT Ratio 1 to 24000 :1 1 F060 1
Source Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
4580 Source Name --- --- --- F206 "SRC 1 "
4583 Source Phase CT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
4584 Source Ground CT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
4585 Source Phase VT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
4586 Source Auxiliary VT 0 to 63 --- 1 F400 0
Power System (Read/Write Setting)
4600 Nominal Frequency 25 to 60 Hz 1 F001 60
4601 Phase Rotation 0 to 1 --- 1 F106 0 (ABC)
4602 Frequency And Phase Reference 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
4603 Frequency Tracking 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
Flexcurve A (Read/Write Setting)
4800 FlexCurve A (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
Flexcurve B (Read/Write Setting)
48F0 FlexCurve B (120 items) 0 to 65535 ms 1 F011 0
Modbus User Map (Read/Write Setting)
4A00 Modbus Address Settings for User Map (256 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
User Displays Settings (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
4C00 User display top line text --- --- --- F202 ""
4C0A User display bottom line text --- --- --- F202 ""


4C14 Modbus addresses of displayed items (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
4C19 Reserved (7 items) --- --- --- F001 0
4C80 ...Repeated for module number 5 B
4CC0 ...Repeated for module number 7
4CE0 ...Repeated for module number 8
FlexLogic™ (Read/Write Setting)
5000 FlexLogic Entry (512 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 16384
FlexLogic™ Timers (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
5800 Timer x Type 0 to 2 --- 1 F129 0 (millisecond)
5801 Timer x Pickup Delay 0 to 60000 --- 1 F001 0
5802 Timer x Dropout Delay 0 to 60000 --- 1 F001 0
5803 Timer x Reserved (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Phase IOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)
5A00 Phase IOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5A01 Phase IOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5A02 Phase IOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5A03 Phase IOC1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5A04 Phase IOC1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5A05 Phase IOC1 Block For Each Phase (3 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0


5A08 Phase IOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5A09 Phase IOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5A0A Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
B 5A30
5A40
5AA0 ...Repeated for module number 11
5AB0 ...Repeated for module number 12
Neutral IOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)
5C00 Neutral IOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5C01 Neutral IOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5C02 Neutral IOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5C03 Neutral IOC1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5C04 Neutral IOC1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5C05 Neutral IOC1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5C06 Neutral IOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5C07 Neutral IOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5C08 Reserved (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
5CB0 ...Repeated for module number 12
Ground TOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
5D00 Ground TOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5D01 Ground TOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
5D02 Ground TOC1 Input 0 to 1 --- 1 F122 0 (Phasor)
5D03 Ground TOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5D04 Ground TOC1 Curve 0 to 14 --- 1 F103 0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
5D05 Ground TOC1 Multiplier 0 to 600 --- 0.01 F001 100
5D06 Ground TOC1 Reset 0 to 1 --- 1 F104 0 (Instantaneous)
5D07 Ground TOC1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5D08 Ground TOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
5D09 Ground TOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5D0A Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
Ground IOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)
5E00 Ground IOC1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)


5E01 Ground IOC1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5E02 Ground IOC1 Pickup 0 to 30 pu 0.001 F001 1000
5E03 Ground IOC1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5E04 Ground IOC1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
5E05 Ground IOC1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
5E06 Ground IOC1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset) B
5E07 Ground IOC1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
5E08 Reserved (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
5EA0 ...Repeated for module number 11
5EB0 ...Repeated for module number 12
Current Unbalance (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
6440 Current Unbalance Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6441 Current Unbalance Pickup 0.1 to 100 % 0.1 F001 400
6442 Current Unbalance Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
6443 Current Unbalance Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 0
6444 Current Unbalance Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6445 Current Unbalance Targets 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
6446 Current Unbalance Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6447 Current Unbalance Reserved (5 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
Stator Differential (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
6470 Stator Differential Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6471 Stator Differential Pickup 0.05 to 1 pu 0.001 F001 100
6472 Stator Differential Slope 1 1 to 100 % 1 F001 10
6473 Stator Differential Slope 2 1 to 100 % 1 F001 80
6474 Stator Differential Break 1 1 to 1.5 pu 0.01 F001 115
6475 Stator Differential Break 2 1.5 to 30 pu 0.01 F001 800
6476 Stator Differential Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6477 Stator Differential Targets 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
6478 Stator Differential Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6479 Stator Differential Line End Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
647A Stator Differential Neutral End Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
Negative Sequence Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
64A0 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
64A1 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
64A2 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Pickup 0 to 1.25 pu 0.001 F001 300
64A3 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 50
64A4 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 50
64A5 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
64A6 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
64A7 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Motor Setup (Read/Write Setting)
6600 Thermal Model Motor FLA 0.05 to 1 pu 0.001 F001 1000
6601 Thermal Model Motor Service Factor 1 to 1.25 --- 0.01 F001 100
6602 Thermal Model Line Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)


6603 Thermal Model Motor Offline 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
6604 Thermal Model RTD 1 0 to 48 --- 1 F151 0 (NONE)
B 6608
6609
Thermal Model RTD 5
Thermal Model RTD 6
0 to 48
0 to 48
---
---
1
1
F151
F151
0 (NONE)
0 (NONE)
660A Motor Emergency Restart 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Thermal Model (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
6620 Thermal Model Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6621 Thermal Model Curve 0 to 2 --- 1 F099 0 (Motor)
6622 Thermal Model TD Multiplier 0 to 600 --- 0.01 F001 100
6623 Thermal Model Bias K Factor 0 to 19 --- 1 F001 0
6624 Thermal Model Time Constant Running 1 to 65000 min 1 F001 15
6625 Thermal Model Time Constant Stopped 1 to 65000 min 1 F001 30
6626 Thermal Model Hot Cold Ratio 0.01 to 1 --- 0.01 F001 100
6627 Thermal Model RTD Bias 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
6628 Thermal Model RTD Bias Min 0 to 250 C 1 F001 40
6629 Thermal Model RTD Bias Center 0 to 250 C 1 F001 130
662A Thermal Model RTD Bias Max 0 to 250 C 1 F001 155
662B Thermal Model Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
662C Thermal Model Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
662D Thermal Model Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
662E Thermal Model Start Inhibit Margin 0 to 25 % 1 F001 0
Thermal Model Actuals (Read Only)
6640 Thermal Model Motor Status 0 to 3 --- 1 F098 1 (Starting)
6641 Thermal Model Capacity Used 0 to 100 % 1 F001 0
6643 Trip Time On Overload 0 to 10000 --- 1 F001 0
6644 Thermal Model Lockout Time 0 to 65000 min. 1 F001 0
6648 Thermal Model Load 0 to 40 x FLA 0.01 F001 0
664A Thermal Model Motor Unbalance 0 to 100 % 1 F001 0
664B Thermal Model Biased Motor Load 0 to 40 x FLA 0.01 F001 0
Sensitive Directional Power (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
66A0 Sensitive Directional Power Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
66A1 Sensitive Directional Power Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
66A2 Sensitive Directional Power RCA 0 to 359 ° 1 F001 0
66A3 Sensitive Directional Power Calibration 0 to 0.95 ° 0.05 F001 0
66A4 Sensitive Directional Power STG1 SMIN -1.2 to 1.2 pu 0.001 F002 100
66A5 Sensitive Directional Power STG1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 50
66A6 Sensitive Directional Power STG2 SMIN -1.2 to 1.2 pu 0.001 F002 100
66A7 Sensitive Directional Power STG2 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 2000
66A8 Sensitive Directional Power Block --- --- --- F001 0
66A9 Sensitive Directional Power Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
66AA Sensitive Directional Power Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
66AB Sensitive Directional Power X Reserved (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Phase Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
7000 Phase UV1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7001 Phase UV1 Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7002 Phase UV1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 1000
7003 Phase UV1 Curve 0 to 1 --- 1 F111 0 (Definite Time)
7004 Phase UV1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7005 Phase UV1 Minimum Voltage 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 100
7006 Phase UV1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0


7007 Phase UV1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7008 Phase UV1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7009 Phase UV Measurement Mode 0 to 1 --- 1 F186 0 (Phase to Ground)
700A Reserved (6 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
Phase Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) B
7100 Phase OV1 Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7101 Phase OV1 Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
7102 Phase OV1 Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 1000
7103 Phase OV1 Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7104 Phase OV1 Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
7105 Phase OV1 Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
7106 Phase OV1 Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
7107 Phase OV1 Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7108 Reserved (8 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
DCMA Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules)
7300 DCMA Inputs x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7301 DCMA Inputs x ID --- --- --- F205 "DCMA Ip 1 "
7307 DCMA Inputs x Reserved 1 (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
730B DCMA Inputs x Units --- --- --- F206 "mA"
730E DCMA Inputs x Range 0 to 6 --- 1 F173 6 (4 to 20 mA)
730F DCMA Inputs x Minimum Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 4000
7311 DCMA Inputs x Maximum Value -9999.999 to 9999.999 --- 0.001 F004 20000
7313 DCMA Inputs x Reserved (5 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
RTD Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
7540 RTD Inputs x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7541 RTD Inputs x ID --- --- --- F205 "RTD Ip 1 "
7547 RTD Inputs x Reserved 1 (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
754B RTD Inputs x Type 0 to 3 --- 1 F174 0 (100 Ω Platinum)
754C RTD Inputs x Reserved 2 (4 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0


B 75B0
75C0
Ohm Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
7840 Ohm Inputs x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
7841 Ohm Inputs x ID --- --- --- F205 "Ohm Ip 1 "
7847 Ohm Inputs x Reserved (9 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Frequency (Read Only)
8000 Tracking Frequency 2 to 90 Hz 0.01 F001 0
FlexState Settings (Read/Write Setting)


8800 FlexState Parameters (256 items) --- --- --- F300 0
FlexElement (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
9000 FlexElement Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
9001 FlexElement Name --- --- --- F206 "FxE \x040"
9004 FlexElement InputP 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0
9005 FlexElement InputM 0 to 65535 --- 1 F600 0 B
9006 FlexElement Compare 0 to 1 --- 1 F516 0 (LEVEL)
9007 FlexElement Input 0 to 1 --- 1 F515 0 (SIGNED)
9008 FlexElement Direction 0 to 1 --- 1 F517 0 (OVER)
9009 FlexElement Hysteresis 0.1 to 50 % 0.1 F001 30
900A FlexElement Pickup -90 to 90 pu 0.001 F004 1000
900C FlexElement DeltaT Units 0 to 2 --- 1 F518 0 (Milliseconds)
900D FlexElement DeltaT 20 to 86400 --- 1 F003 20
900F FlexElement Pkp Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
9010 FlexElement Rst Delay 0 to 65.535 s 0.001 F001 0
9011 FlexElement Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
9012 FlexElement Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
9013 FlexElement Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
90DC ...Repeated for module number 12
FlexElement Actuals (Read Only) (16 modules)
9A01 FlexElement Actual -2147483.647 to --- 0.001 F004 0
2147483.647
9A0B ...Repeated for module number 6
9A0D ...Repeated for module number 7
9A0F ...Repeated for module number 8
9A1B ...Repeated for module number 14
9A1D ...Repeated for module number 15
9A1F ...Repeated for module number 16
Setting Groups (Read/Write Setting)
A000 Setting Group for Modbus Comm (0 means group 1) 0 to 7 --- 1 F001 0
A001 Setting Groups Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0


A002 FlexLogic Operands to Activate Grps 2 to 8 (7 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
A009 Setting Group Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
A00A Setting Group Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Setting Groups (Read Only)
A00B Current Setting Group 0 to 7 --- 1 F001 0
B Current Unbalance Actuals (Read Only)

A300 Amp Unbalance 0 to 100 % 0.1 F001 0
Digital Elements (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
B000 Digital Element x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B001 Digital Element x Name --- --- --- F203 "Dig Element 1 "
B015 Digital Element x Input 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B016 Digital Element x Pickup Delay 0 to 999999.999 s 0.001 F003 0
B018 Digital Element x Reset Delay 0 to 999999.999 s 0.001 F003 0
B01A Digital Element x Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B01B Digital Element x Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
B01C Digital Element x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B01D Digital Element x Reserved (3 items) --- --- --- F001 0
B020 ...Repeated for module number 2
B0A0 ...Repeated for module number 6
B0C0 ...Repeated for module number 7
B0E0 ...Repeated for module number 8
Digital Counter (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
B300 Digital Counter x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
B301 Digital Counter x Name --- --- --- F205 "Counter 1 "
B307 Digital Counter x Units --- --- --- F206 (none)
B30A Digital Counter x Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B30B Digital Counter x Up 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B30C Digital Counter x Down 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B30D Digital Counter x Preset -2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
2147483647
B30F Digital Counter x Compare -2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
2147483647
B311 Digital Counter x Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B312 Digital Counter x Freeze/Reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B313 Digital Counter x Freeze/Count 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B314 Digital Counter Set To Preset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
B315 Digital Counter x Reserved (11 items) --- --- --- F001 0


Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
C000 Contact Input x Name --- --- --- F205 "Cont Ip 1 "
C006 Contact Input x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C007 Contact Input x Debounce Time 0 to 16 ms 0.5 F001 20
C008 ...Repeated for module number 2
C010 ...Repeated for module number 3 B
C0A0 ...Repeated for module number 21
C0B0 ...Repeated for module number 23
C0C0 ...Repeated for module number 25
C0D0 ...Repeated for module number 27
C0E0 ...Repeated for module number 29
C0F0 ...Repeated for module number 31


B C1C0
C1C8
Contact Input Thresholds (Read/Write Setting)
C600 Contact Input x Threshold (24 items) 0 to 3 --- 1 F128 1 (33 Vdc)
Virtual Inputs Global Settings (Read/Write Setting)
C680 Virtual Inputs SBO Timeout 1 to 60 s 1 F001 30
Virtual Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
C690 Virtual Input x Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C691 Virtual Input x Name --- --- --- F205 "Virt Ip 1 "
C69B Virtual Input x Programmed Type 0 to 1 --- 1 F127 0 (Latched)
C69C Virtual Input x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)


C69D Virtual Input x UCA SBOClass 1 to 2 --- 1 F001 1
C69E Virtual Input x UCA SBOEna 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
C69F Virtual Input x Reserved --- --- --- F001 0
C6C0 ...Repeated for module number 4 B
Virtual Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
CC90 Virtual Output x Name --- --- --- F205 "Virt Op 1 "
CC9A Virtual Output x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
CC9B Virtual Output x Reserved (5 items) --- --- --- F001 0
CCA0 ...Repeated for module number 2
CCB0 ...Repeated for module number 3
CCC0 ...Repeated for module number 4
CCD0 ...Repeated for module number 5
CCE0 ...Repeated for module number 6
CCF0 ...Repeated for module number 7
CD00 ...Repeated for module number 8


CDA0 ...Repeated for module number 18
CDB0 ...Repeated for module number 19
CDC0 ...Repeated for module number 20
CDD0 ...Repeated for module number 21
CDE0 ...Repeated for module number 22
B CDF0
CE00
CE10 ...Repeated for module number 25
CEA0 ...Repeated for module number 34
CEB0 ...Repeated for module number 35
CEC0 ...Repeated for module number 36
CED0 ...Repeated for module number 37
CEE0 ...Repeated for module number 38
CEF0 ...Repeated for module number 39
CF00 ...Repeated for module number 40
CFA0 ...Repeated for module number 50
CFB0 ...Repeated for module number 51
CFC0 ...Repeated for module number 52
CFD0 ...Repeated for module number 53
CFE0 ...Repeated for module number 54
CFF0 ...Repeated for module number 55
D000 ...Repeated for module number 56
Mandatory (Read/Write Setting)
D280 Test Mode Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
D290 Contact Output x Name --- --- --- F205 "Cont Op 1 "
D29A Contact Output x Operation 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D29B Contact Output x Seal-In 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
D29C Reserved --- --- 1 F001 0


D29D Contact Output x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 1 (Enabled)
D29E Reserved (2 items) --- --- --- F001 0
D2A0 ...Repeated for module number 2
D2B0 ...Repeated for module number 3
D2C0 ...Repeated for module number 4
D2D0 ...Repeated for module number 5 B
D2E0 ...Repeated for module number 6
D2F0 ...Repeated for module number 7
D3D0 ...Repeated for module number 21


B D630
D640
Reset (Read/Write Setting)
D800 FlexLogic operand which initiates a reset 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
Force Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting)
D8B0 Force Contact Input x State (96 items) 0 to 2 --- 1 F144 0 (Disabled)
Force Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting)
D910 Force Contact Output x State (64 items) 0 to 3 --- 1 F131 0 (Disabled)
Remote Devices (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
E000 Remote Device x ID --- --- --- F202 "Remote Device 1 "
E00A ...Repeated for module number 2
E014 ...Repeated for module number 3
E01E ...Repeated for module number 4
E03C ...Repeated for module number 7
E05A ...Repeated for module number 10
E06E ...Repeated for module number 12
Remote Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
E100 Remote Input x Device 1 to 16 --- 1 F001 1
E101 Remote Input x Bit Pair 0 to 64 --- 1 F156 0 (None)
E102 Remote Input x Default State 0 to 1 --- 1 F108 0 (Off)
E103 Remote Input x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)


E154 ...Repeated for module number 22 B
Remote Output DNA Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
E600 Remote Output DNA x Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
E601 Remote Output DNA x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
E602 Remote Output DNA x Reserved (2 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
Remote Output UserSt Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
E680 Remote Output UserSt x Operand 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
E681 Remote Output UserSt x Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)


E682 Remote Output UserSt x Reserved (2 items) 0 to 1 --- 1 F001 0
B E694
E698
E6A0 ...Repeated for module number 9
E6AC ...Repeated for module number 12
E6B0 ...Repeated for module number 13
E6BC ...Repeated for module number 16
E6C0 ...Repeated for module number 17
E6CC ...Repeated for module number 20
E6D0 ...Repeated for module number 21
E6DC ...Repeated for module number 24
E6E0 ...Repeated for module number 25
E6EC ...Repeated for module number 28
E6F0 ...Repeated for module number 29
E6FC ...Repeated for module number 32
Factory Service Password Protection (Read/Write)
F000 Modbus Factory Password 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
Factory Service Password Protection (Read Only)
F002 Factory Service Password Status 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
Factory Service - Initialization (Read Only -- Written by Factory)
F008 Load Default Settings 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
F009 Reboot Relay 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Factory Service - Calibration (Read Only -- Written by Factory)
F010 Calibration 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
F011 DSP Card to Calibrate 0 to 15 --- 1 F172 0 (F)
F012 Channel to Calibrate 0 to 7 --- 1 F001 0
F013 Channel Type 0 to 6 --- 1 F140 0 (Disabled)
F014 Channel Name --- --- --- F201 "0"
Factory Service - Calibration (Read Only)
F018 A/D Counts -32767 to 32767 --- 1 F002 0
F019 Offset -32767 to 32767 --- 1 F002 0
F01B Gain Stage 0 to 1 --- 1 F135 0 (x1)
F01C CT Winding 0 to 1 --- 1 F123 0 (1 A)
F01D Measured Input 0 to 300 --- 0.0001 F060 0


F01F Gain Parameter 0.8 to 1.2 --- 0.0001 F060 1
F02A DSP Calibration Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
Factory Service - Debug Data (Read Only -- Written by Factory)
F040 Debug Data 16 (16 items) -32767 to 32767 --- 1 F002 0 B
F050 Debug Data 32 (16 items) -2147483647 to --- 1 F004 0
2147483647
Transducer Calibration (Read Only -- Written by Factory)
F0A0 Transducer Calibration Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
F0A1 Transducer Card to Calibrate 0 to 15 --- 1 F172 0 (F)
F0A2 Transducer Channel to Calibrate 0 to 7 --- 1 F001 0
F0A3 Transducer Channel to Calibrate Type 0 to 3 --- 1 F171 0 (dcmA IN)
F0A4 Transducer Channel to Calibrate Gain Stage 0 to 1 --- 1 F170 0 (LOW)
Transducer Calibration (Read Only)
F0A5 Transducer Channel to Calibrate Counts 0 to 4095 --- 1 F001 0
Transducer Calibration (Read Only -- Written by Factory)
F0A6 Transducer Channel to Calibrate Offset -4096 to 4095 --- 1 F002 0
F0A7 Transducer Channel to Calibrate Value -1.1 to 366.5 --- 0.001 F004 0
F0A9 Transducer Channel to Calibrate Gain 0.8 to 1.2 --- 0.0001 F060 1
F0AB Transducer Calibration Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
Transducer Calibration (Read Only)
F0AD Transducer Channel to Calibrate Units --- --- --- F206 (none)
Factory Service Software Revisions (Read Only)
F0F0 Compile Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
F0F3 Boot Version 0 to 655.35 --- 0.01 F001 1
F0F4 Front Panel Version 0 to 655.35 --- 0.01 F001 1
F0F5 Boot Date 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
Factory Service - Serial EEPROM (Read Only -- Written by Factory)
F100 Serial EEPROM Enable 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
F101 Serial EEPROM Slot 0 to 15 --- 1 F172 0 (F)
F102 Serial EEPROM Load Factory Defaults 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
F110 Serial EEPROM Module Serial Number --- --- --- F203 (none)
F120 Serial EEPROM Supplier Serial Number --- --- --- F203 (none)
F130 Serial EEPROM Sub Module Serial Number (8 items) --- --- --- F203 (none)
Factory Service CPU Diagnostics (Read Only Non-Volatile)
F200 Operating Hours 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F050 0
Factory Service CPU Diagnostics (Read Only)
F210 DSP Spurious Interrupt Counter 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
Factory Service CPU Diagnostics (Read Only -- Written by Factory)
F220 Real Time Profiling 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
F221 Enable Windview 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
F222 Factory Reload Cause --- --- --- F200 (none)
F236 Clear Diagnostics 0 to 1 --- 1 F126 0 (No)
Factory Service CPU Performance (Read Only)
F300 CPU Utilization 0 to 100 % 0.1 F001 0
Factory Service CPU Performance (Read/Write)
F301 CPU Overload 0 to 6553.5 % 0.1 F001 0
Factory Service CPU Performance (Read Only)
F302 Protection Pass Time 0 to 65535 us 1 F001 0
Factory Service CPU Performance (Read/Write)
F303 Protection Pass Worst Time 0 to 65535 us 1 F001 0
Factory Service DSP Diagnostics (Read Only) (3 modules)
F380 DSP Checksum Error Counter 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0


F382 DSP Corrupt Settings Counter 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
F384 DSP Out Of Sequence Error Counter 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
F386 DSP Flags Error Counter 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
F38D DSP Error Flags 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
F38E DSP Error Code 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
B F38F
F390
DSP Usage
0 to 100 --- 0.1 F001 0
F3A0 ...Repeated for module number 3

Modbus File Transfer Area 2 (Read/Write)
FA00 Name of file to read --- --- --- F204 (none)
Modbus File Transfer Area 2 (Read Only)
FB00 Character position of current block within file 0 to 4294967295 --- 1 F003 0
FB02 Size of currently-available data block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
FB03 Block of data from requested file (122 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Neutral Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)
FC00 Neutral OV X Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
FC01 Neutral OV X Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
FC02 Neutral OV X Pickup 0 to 1.25 pu 0.001 F001 300
FC03 Neutral OV X Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
FC04 Neutral OV X Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
FC05 Neutral OV X Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
FC06 Neutral OV X Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
FC07 Neutral OV X Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
FC08 Neutral OV Reserved (8 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
FC10 ...Repeated for module number 2
Auxiliary Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)
FC30 Auxiliary OV X Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
FC31 Auxiliary OV X Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
FC32 Auxiliary OV X Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 300
FC33 Auxiliary OV X Pickup Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
FC34 Auxiliary OV X Reset Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
FC35 Auxiliary OV X Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
FC36 Auxiliary OV X Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
FC37 Auxiliary OV X Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
FC38 Auxiliary OV X Reserved (8 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0
Auxiliary Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)
FC60 Auxiliary UV X Function 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
FC61 Auxiliary UV X Signal Source 0 to 5 --- 1 F167 0 (SRC 1)
FC62 Auxiliary UV X Pickup 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 700
FC63 Auxiliary UV X Delay 0 to 600 s 0.01 F001 100
FC64 Auxiliary UV X Curve 0 to 1 --- 1 F111 0 (Definite Time)
FC65 Auxiliary UV X Minimum Voltage 0 to 3 pu 0.001 F001 100
FC66 Auxiliary UV X Block 0 to 65535 --- 1 F300 0
FC67 Auxiliary UV X Target 0 to 2 --- 1 F109 0 (Self-reset)
FC68 Auxiliary UV X Events 0 to 1 --- 1 F102 0 (Disabled)
FC69 Auxiliary UV X Reserved (7 items) 0 to 65535 --- 1 F001 0

B.4.2 MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS
F001 F040
UR_UINT16 UNSIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER UR_UINT48 48-BIT UNSIGNED INTEGER
F002
UR_SINT16 SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER
F050
UR_UINT32 TIME and DATE (UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER)
B
Gives the current time in seconds elapsed since 00:00:00 January
F003 1, 1970.
UR_UINT32 UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers)
High order word is stored in the first register. F051

Low order word is stored in the second register. UR_UINT32 DATE in SR format (alternate format for F050)
First 16 bits are Month/Day (MM/DD/xxxx). Month: 1=January,

F004 2=February,...,12=December; Day: 1 to 31 in steps of 1
UR_SINT32 SIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers) Last 16 bits are Year (xx/xx/YYYY): 1970 to 2106 in steps of 1
High order word is stored in the first register/

Low order word is stored in the second register. F052
UR_UINT32 TIME in SR format (alternate format for F050)
F005 First 16 bits are Hours/Minutes (HH:MM:xx.xxx).

UR_UINT8 UNSIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER Hours: 0=12am, 1=1am,...,12=12pm,...23=11pm;
Minutes: 0 to 59 in steps of 1
Last 16 bits are Seconds (xx:xx:.SS.SSS): 0=00.000s,
F006
1=00.001,...,59999=59.999s)
UR_SINT8 SIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
F060
F011
FLOATING_POINT IEE FLOATING POINT (32 bits)
UR_UINT16 FLEXCURVE DATA (120 points)
A FlexCurve is an array of 120 consecutive data points (x, y) which F070

are interpolated to generate a smooth curve. The y-axis is the user
HEX2 2 BYTES - 4 ASCII DIGITS
defined trip or operation time setting; the x-axis is the pickup ratio
and is pre-defined. Refer to format F119 for a listing of the pickup
ratios; the enumeration value for the pickup ratio indicates the off-
F071
set into the FlexCurve base address where the corresponding time HEX4 4 BYTES - 8 ASCII DIGITS
value is stored.
F072
F012
DISPLAY_SCALE DISPLAY SCALING
(unsigned 16-bit integer)
F073
MSB indicates the SI units as a power of ten. LSB indicates the
number of decimal points to display.
Example: Current values are stored as 32 bit numbers with three
decimal places and base units in Amps. If the retrieved value is F074
12345.678 A and the display scale equals 0x0302 then the dis- HEX20 20 BYTES - 40 ASCII DIGITS
played value on the unit is 12.35 kA.
F098
F013 ENUMERATION MOTOR STATUS
POWER_FACTOR PWR FACTOR (SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER)
0 = Offline, 1 = Starting, 2 = Running, 3 = Overload
Positive values indicate lagging power factor; negative values indi-
cate leading.

F099 F108
ENUMERATION MOTOR CURVES ENUMERATION: OFF/ON
0 = Motor, 1 = Flexcurve A, 2 = Flexcurve B 0 = Off, 1 = On
F100 F109
B ENUMERATION: VT CONNECTION TYPE ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT OPERATION
0 = Wye; 1 = Delta 0 = Self-reset, 1 = Latched, 2 = Disabled
F101 F110
ENUMERATION: MESSAGE DISPLAY INTENSITY ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT LED CONTROL
0 = 25%, 1 = 50%, 2 = 75%, 3 = 100% 0 = Trip, 1 = Alarm, 2 = None
F102 F111
ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED ENUMERATION: UNDERVOLTAGE CURVE SHAPES
0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled 0 = Definite Time, 1 = Inverse Time
F103 F112
ENUMERATION: CURVE SHAPES ENUMERATION: RS485 BAUD RATES
bitmask curve shape bitmask curve shape bitmask value bitmask value bitmask value
0 IEEE Mod Inv 8 IAC Very Inv 0 300 4 9600 8 115200
1 IEEE Very Inv 9 IAC Inverse 1 1200 5 19200 9 14400
2 IEEE Ext Inv 10 IAC Short Inv 2 2400 6 38400 10 28800
3 IEC Curve A 11 I2t 3 4800 7 57600 11 33600
4 IEC Curve B 12 Definite Time
5 IEC Curve C 13 Flexcurve A
F113
6 IEC Short Inv 14 Flexcurve B ENUMERATION: PARITY
7 IAC Ext Inv
0 = None, 1 = Odd, 2 = Even
F104
ENUMERATION: RESET TYPE F114
ENUMERATION: IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE
0 = Instantaneous, 1 = Timed, 2 = Linear
0 = None, 1 = DC Shift, 2 = Amplitude Modulated
F105
ENUMERATION: LOGIC INPUT F117
ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS
0 = Disabled, 1 = Input 1, 2 = Input 2
0 = 1×72 cycles, 1 = 3×36 cycles, 2 = 7×18 cycles, 3 = 15×9 cycles
F106
ENUMERATION: PHASE ROTATION F118
ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY MODE
0 = ABC, 1 = ACB
0 = Automatic Overwrite, 1 = Protected

F119 F124
ENUMERATION: FLEXCURVE PICKUP RATIOS ENUMERATION: LIST OF ELEMENTS
mask value mask value mask value mask value

bitmask element
0 0.00 30 0.88 60 2.90 90 5.90
0 PHASE IOC1
1 0.05 31 0.90 61 3.00 91 6.00
1 PHASE IOC2
2 0.10 32 0.91 62 3.10 92 6.50
3 0.15 33 0.92 63 3.20 93 7.00
2 PHASE IOC3 B
3 PHASE IOC4
4 0.20 34 0.93 64 3.30 94 7.50
4 PHASE IOC5
5 0.25 35 0.94 65 3.40 95 8.00
5 PHASE IOC6
6 0.30 36 0.95 66 3.50 96 8.50
6 PHASE IOC7
7 0.35 37 0.96 67 3.60 97 9.00
7 PHASE IOC8
8 0.40 38 0.97 68 3.70 98 9.50
8 PHASE IOC9
9 0.45 39 0.98 69 3.80 99 10.00
9 PHASE IOC10
10 0.48 40 1.03 70 3.90 100 10.50
10 PHASE IOC11
11 0.50 41 1.05 71 4.00 101 11.00
11 PHASE IOC12
12 0.52 42 1.10 72 4.10 102 11.50
16 PHASE TOC1
13 0.54 43 1.20 73 4.20 103 12.00
17 PHASE TOC2
14 0.56 44 1.30 74 4.30 104 12.50
18 PHASE TOC3
15 0.58 45 1.40 75 4.40 105 13.00
19 PHASE TOC4
16 0.60 46 1.50 76 4.50 106 13.50
20 PHASE TOC5
17 0.62 47 1.60 77 4.60 107 14.00
21 PHASE TOC6
18 0.64 48 1.70 78 4.70 108 14.50
24 PH DIR1
19 0.66 49 1.80 79 4.80 109 15.00
25 PH DIR2
20 0.68 50 1.90 80 4.90 110 15.50
32 NEUTRAL IOC1
21 0.70 51 2.00 81 5.00 111 16.00
33 NEUTRAL IOC2
22 0.72 52 2.10 82 5.10 112 16.50
34 NEUTRAL IOC3
23 0.74 53 2.20 83 5.20 113 17.00
35 NEUTRAL IOC4
24 0.76 54 2.30 84 5.30 114 17.50
36 NEUTRAL IOC5
25 0.78 55 2.40 85 5.40 115 18.00
37 NEUTRAL IOC6
26 0.80 56 2.50 86 5.50 116 18.50
38 NEUTRAL IOC7
27 0.82 57 2.60 87 5.60 117 19.00
39 NEUTRAL IOC8
28 0.84 58 2.70 88 5.70 118 19.50
40 NEUTRAL IOC9
29 0.86 59 2.80 89 5.80 119 20.00
41 NEUTRAL IOC10
42 NEUTRAL IOC11
F122 43 NEUTRAL IOC12
ENUMERATION: ELEMENT INPUT SIGNAL TYPE
48 NEUTRAL TOC1
0 = Phasor, 1 = RMS 49 NEUTRAL TOC2
50 NEUTRAL TOC3
51 NEUTRAL TOC4
F123
ENUMERATION: CT SECONDARY 52 NEUTRAL TOC5
53 NEUTRAL TOC6
0 = 1 A, 1 = 5 A 56 NTRL DIR
57 NTRL DIR
60 NEG SEQ
61 NEG SEQ
64 GROUND IOC1
65 GROUND IOC2
66 GROUND IOC3

bitmask element bitmask element

67 GROUND IOC4 246 CT FAIL
68 GROUND IOC5 247 CT TROUBLE1
69 GROUND IOC6 248 CT TROUBLE2
70 GROUND IOC7 260 MOTOR
71 GROUND IOC8 265 STATOR DIFF
B 72
73
GROUND IOC9
GROUND IOC10
272
273
BREAKER 1
BREAKER 2
74 GROUND IOC11 280 BKR FAIL
75 GROUND IOC12 281 BKR FAIL
80 GROUND TOC1 288 BKR ARC
81 GROUND TOC2 289 BKR ARC
82 GROUND TOC3 296 ACCDNT ENRG
83 GROUND TOC4 300 LOSS EXCIT
84 GROUND TOC5 312 SYNC 1
85 GROUND TOC6 313 SYNC 2
96 NEG SEQ 320 COLD LOAD
97 NEG SEQ 321 COLD LOAD
112 NEG SEQ 324 AMP UNBALANCE
113 NEG SEQ 325 AMP UNBALANCE
120 NEG SEQ 330 3RD HARM
140 AUX UV1 336 SETTING GROUP
141 AUX UV2 337 RESET
142 AUX UV3 344 OVERFREQ 1
144 PHASE UV1 345 OVERFREQ 2
145 PHASE UV2 346 OVERFREQ 3
148 AUX OV1 347 OVERFREQ 4
149 AUX OV2 352 UNDERFREQ 1
150 AUX OV3 353 UNDERFREQ 2
152 PHASE OV1 354 UNDERFREQ 3
156 NEUTRAL OV1 355 UNDERFREQ 4
180 LOAD ENCHR 400 FLEX ELEMENT 1
184 DUTT 401 FLEX ELEMENT 2
185 PUTT 402 FLEX ELEMENT 3
186 POTT 403 FLEX ELEMENT 4
187 HYBRID POTT 404 FLEX ELEMENT 5
188 BLOCK SCHEME 405 FLEX ELEMENT 6
190 POWER SWING 406 FLEX ELEMENT 7
224 SRC1 VT 407 FLEX ELEMENT 8
242 OPEN POLE 413 FLEX ELEMENT 14
244 50DD 414 FLEX ELEMENT 15
245 CONT MONITOR 415 FLEX ELEMENT 16

bitmask element
F130
512 DIG ELEM 1 ENUMERATION: SIMULATION MODE
513 DIG ELEM 2
514 DIG ELEM 3 0 = Off. 1 = Pre-Fault, 2 = Fault, 3 = Post-Fault
515 DIG ELEM 4
516 DIG ELEM 5 F131
517
518
DIG ELEM 6
DIG ELEM 7
ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT OUTPUT STATE
B
0 = Disabled, 1 = Energized, 2 = De-energized, 3 = Freeze
519 DIG ELEM 8
520 DIG ELEM 9
521 DIG ELEM 10 F133
ENUMERATION: PROGRAM STATE
522 DIG ELEM 11
523 DIG ELEM 12 0 = Not Programmed, 1 = Programmed
524 DIG ELEM 13
525 DIG ELEM 14
F134
526 DIG ELEM 15 ENUMERATION: PASS/FAIL
527 DIG ELEM 16
0 = Fail, 1 = OK, 2 = n/a
544 COUNTER 1
545 COUNTER 2
546 COUNTER 3 F135
547 COUNTER 4 ENUMERATION: GAIN CALIBRATION
548 COUNTER 5
0 = 0x1, 1 = 1x16
549 COUNTER 6
550 COUNTER 7
F136
551 COUNTER 8
ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS
0 = 31 x 8 cycles, 1 = 15 x 16 cycles, 2 = 7 x 32 cycles

F125
3 = 3 x 64 cycles, 4 = 1 x 128 cycles
ENUMERATION: ACCESS LEVEL
0 = Restricted; 1 = Command, 2 = Setting, 3 = Factory Service

F138
ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY FILE TYPE
F126
0 = Data File, 1 = Configuration File, 2 = Header File
ENUMERATION: NO/YES CHOICE
0 = No, 1 = Yes
F140
ENUMERATION: CURRENT, SENS CURRENT, VOLTAGE,
DISABLED
F127
ENUMERATION: LATCHED OR SELF-RESETTING
0 = Disabled, 1 = Current 46A, 2 = Voltage 280V, 3 = Current 4.6A
4 = Current 2A, 5 = Notched 4.6A, 6 = Notched 2A
0 = Latched, 1 = Self-Reset
F141
F128
ENUMERATION: SELF TEST ERROR
ENUMERATION: CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLD
bitmask error
0 = 16 Vdc, 1 = 30 Vdc, 2 = 80 Vdc, 3 =140 Vdc
0 ANY SELF TESTS
1 IRIG-B FAILURE
F129
2 DSP ERROR
ENUMERATION: FLEXLOGIC TIMER TYPE
4 NO DSP INTERRUPTS
0 = millisecond, 1 = second, 2 = minute 5 UNIT NOT CALIBRATED
9 PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE

bitmask error
F146
10 FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN ENUMERATION: MISC. EVENT CAUSES
11 EQUIPMENT MISMATCH
13 UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED bitmask definition
14 SYSTEM EXCEPTION 0 EVENTS CLEARED
19 BATTERY FAIL 1 OSCILLOGRAPHY TRIGGERED
B 20
21
PRI ETHERNET FAIL
SEC ETHERNET FAIL
2
3
DATE/TIME CHANGED
DEF SETTINGS LOADED
22 EEPROM DATA ERROR 4 TEST MODE ON
23 SRAM DATA ERROR 5 TEST MODE OFF
24 PROGRAM MEMORY 6 POWER ON
25 WATCHDOG ERROR 7 POWER OFF
26 LOW ON MEMORY 8 RELAY IN SERVICE
27 REMOTE DEVICE OFF 9 RELAY OUT OF SERVICE
30 ANY MINOR ERROR 10 WATCHDOG RESET
31 ANY MAJOR ERROR 11 OSCILLOGRAPHY CLEAR
12 REBOOT COMMAND
F142
ENUMERATION: EVENT RECORDER ACCESS FILE TYPE F151
ENUMERATION: RTD SELECTION
0 = All Record Data, 1 = Headers Only, 2 = Numeric Event Cause
bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD#
0 NONE 17 RTD 17 33 RTD 33
F143
UR_UINT32: 32 BIT ERROR CODE (F141 specifies bit number) 1 RTD 1 18 RTD 18 34 RTD 34
2 RTD 2 19 RTD 19 35 RTD 35
A bit value of 0 = no error, 1 = error
3 RTD 3 20 RTD 20 36 RTD 36
4 RTD 4 21 RTD 21 37 RTD 37
F144 5 RTD 5 22 RTD 22 38 RTD 38
ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT INPUT STATE 6 RTD 6 23 RTD 23 39 RTD 39
0 = Disabled, 1 = Open, 2 = Closed 7 RTD 7 24 RTD 24 40 RTD 40

8 RTD 8 25 RTD 25 41 RTD 41
9 RTD 9 26 RTD 26 42 RTD 42
F145
10 RTD 10 27 RTD 27 43 RTD 43
ENUMERATION: ALPHABET LETTER
11 RTD 11 28 RTD 28 44 RTD 44
bitmask type bitmask type bitmask type bitmask type 12 RTD 12 29 RTD 29 45 RTD 45
0 null 7 G 14 N 21 U 13 RTD 13 30 RTD 30 46 RTD 46
1 A 8 H 15 O 22 V 14 RTD 14 31 RTD 31 47 RTD 47
2 B 9 I 16 P 23 W 15 RTD 15 32 RTD 32 48 RTD 48
3 C 10 J 17 Q 24 X 16 RTD 16
4 D 11 K 18 R 25 Y
5 E 12 L 19 S 26 Z
F152
6 F 13 M 20 T
ENUMERATION: SETTING GROUP
0 = Active Group, 1 = Group 1, 2 = Group 2, 3 = Group 3

4 = Group 4, 5 = Group 5, 6 = Group 6, 7 = Group 7, 8 = Group 8
F155
ENUMERATION: REMOTE DEVICE STATE
0 = Offline, 1 = Online

F156 F170
ENUMERATION: REMOTE INPUT BIT PAIRS ENUMERATION: LOW/HIGH OFFSET & GAIN
TRANSDUCER I/O SELECTION
bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD# bitmask RTD#
0 NONE 22 DNA-22 44 UserSt-12 0 = LOW, 1 = HIGH
1 DNA-1 23 DNA-23 45 UserSt-13
F171
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER CHANNEL INPUT TYPE B
0 = dcmA IN, 1 = OHMS IN, 2 = RTD IN, 3 = dcmA OUT
7 DNA-7 29 DNA-29 51 UserSt-19 F172
ENUMERATION: SLOT LETTERS
9 DNA-9 31 DNA-31 53 UserSt-21 bitmask slot bitmask slot bitmask slot bitmask slot
10 DNA-10 32 DNA-32 54 UserSt-22 0 F 4 K 8 P 12 U
11 DNA-11 33 UserSt-1 55 UserSt-23 1 G 5 L 9 R 13 V
12 DNA-12 34 UserSt-2 56 UserSt-24 2 H 6 M 10 S 14 W
13 DNA-13 35 UserSt-3 57 UserSt-25 3 J 7 N 11 T 15 X
14 DNA-14 36 UserSt-4 58 UserSt-26
F173
16 DNA-16 38 UserSt-6 60 UserSt-28 ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER DCMA I/O RANGE
bitmask dcmA I/O range
0 0 to –1 mA
1 0 to 1 mA
2 –1 to 1 mA
21 DNA-21 43 UserSt-11
3 0 to 5 mA
4 0 to 10 mA
F166
5 0 to 20 mA
ENUMERATION: AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION TYPE
6 4 to 20 mA
0 = Vn, 1 = Vag, 2 = Vbg, 3 = Vcg, 4 = Vab, 5 = Vbc, 6 = Vca
F174
F167 ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER RTD INPUT TYPE
ENUMERATION: SIGNAL SOURCE
0 = 100 Ohm Platinum, 1 = 120 Ohm Nickel,
0 = SRC 1, 1 = SRC 2, 2 = SRC 3, 3 = SRC 4, 2 = 100 Ohm Nickel, 3 = 10 Ohm Copper
4 = SRC 5, 5 = SRC 6
F175
F168 ENUMERATION: PHASE LETTERS
ENUMERATION: INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION
0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C
0 = Disabled, 1 = 2nd
F177
F169 ENUMERATION: COMMUNICATION PORT
ENUMERATION: OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT FUNCTION
0 = NONE, 1 = COM1-RS485, 2 = COM2-RS485,
0 = Disabled, 1 = 5th 3 = FRONT PANEL-RS232, 4 = NETWORK
F180
ENUMERATION: PHASE/GROUND
0 = PHASE, 1 = GROUND

F181 F194
ENUMERATION: ODD/EVEN/NONE ENUMERATION DNP SCALE
0 = ODD, 1 = EVEN, 2 = NONE A bitmask of 0 = 0.01, 1 = 0.1, 2 = 1, 3 = 10, 4 = 100, 5 = 1000
F183 F197
B ENUMERATION AC INPUT WAVEFORMS ENUMERATION DNP BINARY INPUT POINT BLOCK
bitmask definition bitmask Input Point Block

0 Off 0 Not Used
1 8 samples/cycle 1 Virtual Inputs 1 to 16
2 16 samples/cycle 2 Virtual Inputs 17 to 32
3 32 samples/cycle 3 Virtual Outputs 1 to 16
4 64 samples/cycle 4 Virtual Outputs 17 to 32
5 Virtual Outputs 33 to 48
6 Virtual Outputs 49 to 64
F185
7 Contact Inputs 1 to 16
ENUMERATION PHASE A,B,C, GROUND SELECTOR
0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C, 3 = G 9 Contact Inputs 33 to 48
F186 11 Contact Inputs 65 to 80
ENUMERATION MEASUREMENT MODE 12 Contact Inputs 81 to 96
13 Contact Outputs 1 to 16
0 = Phase to Ground, 1 = Phase to Phase
F190 16 Contact Outputs 49 to 64
ENUMERATION Simulated Keypress
17 Remote Inputs 1 to 16
bitmask keypress bitmask keypress 18 Remote Inputs 17 to 32
0 --- 13 Value Up 19 Remote Devs 1 to 16
use between real
keys 14 Value Down 20 Elements 1 to 16
15 Message Up 21 Elements 17 to 32
1 1 16 Message Down 22 Elements 33 to 48
2 2 17 Message Left 23 Elements 49 to 64
3 3 18 Message Right 24 Elements 65 to 80
4 4 19 Menu 25 Elements 81 to 96
5 5 20 Help 26 Elements 97 to 112
6 6 21 Escape 27 Elements 113 to 128
7 7 22 Enter 28 Elements 129 to 144
8 8 23 Reset 29 Elements 145 to 160
9 9 24 User 1 30 Elements 161 to 176
10 0 25 User 2 31 Elements 177 to 192
11 Decimal Pt 26 User 3 32 Elements 193 to 208
12 Plus/Minus 33 Elements 209 to 224
34 Elements 225 to 240
F192
ENUMERATION ETHERNET OPERATION MODE 36 Elements 257 to 272
0 = Half-Duplex, 1 = Full-Duplex 38 Elements 289 to 304

bitmask Input Point Block

F208
41 Elements 337 to 352 TEXT2 2 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
F222
ENUMERATION TEST ENUMERATION
46
47
Elements 417 to 432
Elements 433 to 448
0 = Test Enumeration 0, 1 = Test Enumeration 1
B
48 Elements 449 to 464 F300
49 Elements 465 to 480 UR_UINT16 FLEXLOGIC BASE TYPE (6 bit type)
The FlexLogic™ BASE type is 6 bits and is combined with a 9 bit
51 Elements 497 to 512 descriptor and 1 bit for protection element to form a 16 bit value.
52 Elements 513 to 528 The combined bits are of the form: PTTTTTTDDDDDDDDD,
53 Elements 529 to 544 where P bit if set, indicates that the FlexLogic™ type is associated
with a protection element state and T represents bits for the BASE
type, and D represents bits for the descriptor.
55 LED States 1 to 16
The values in square brackets indicate the base type with P prefix
56 LED States 17 to 32 [PTTTTTT] and the values in round brackets indicate the descrip-
57 Self Tests 1 to 16 tor range.
58 Self Tests 17 to 32 [0] Off(0) this is boolean FALSE value
[0] On (1)This is boolean TRUE value
[2] CONTACT INPUTS (1 - 96)
F200 [3] CONTACT INPUTS OFF (1-96)
TEXT40 40 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT [4] VIRTUAL INPUTS (1-64)
[6] VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (1-64)
20 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB [10] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE DETECTED (1-64)
[11] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE OFF DETECTED (1-64)
[12] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT DETECTED (1-64)
F201 [13] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT OFF DETECTED (1-64)
TEXT8 8 CHARACTER ASCII PASSCODE [14] REMOTE INPUTS (1-32)
[28] INSERT (Via Keypad only)
4 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB [32] END
[34] NOT (1 INPUT)
[36] 2 INPUT XOR (0)
F202 [38] LATCH SET/RESET (2 INPUTS)
TEXT20 20 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT [40] OR (2-16 INPUTS)
[42] AND (2-16 INPUTS)
10 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB [44] NOR (2-16 INPUTS)
[46] NAND (2-16 INPUTS)
[48] TIMER (1-32)
F203 [50] ASSIGN VIRTUAL OUTPUT (1 - 64)
TEXT16 16 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT [52] SELF-TEST ERROR (See F141 for range)
[56] ACTIVE SETTING GROUP (1-8)
[62] MISCELLANEOUS EVENTS (See F146 for range)
F204 [64-127] ELEMENT STATES
TEXT80 80 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT (Refer to Memory Map Element States Section)
F205 F400
TEXT12 12 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT UR_UINT16 CT/VT BANK SELECTION
bitmask bank selection

F206
0 Card 1 Contact 1 to 4
TEXT6 6 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
F207 3 Card 2 Contact 5 to 8
TEXT4 4 CHARACTER ASCII TEXT

F500 F509
UR_UINT16 PACKED BITFIELD BITFIELD SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE
First register indicates I/O state with bits 0(MSB)-15(LSB) corre- 0 = Operate
sponding to I/0 state 1-16. The second register indicates I/O state
with bits 0-15 corresponding to I/0 state 17-32 (if required) The
third register indicates I/O state with bits 0-15 corresponding to I/0 F511
B state 33-48 (if required). The fourth register indicates I/O state with
bits 0-15 corresponding to I/0 state 49-64 (if required).
BITFIELD 3 PHASE SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE
The number of registers required is determined by the specific 0 = Operate, 1 = Operate A, 2 = Operate B, 3 = Operate C
data item. A bit value of 0 = Off, 1 = On
F515
F501 ENUMERATION ELEMENT INPUT MODE
UR_UINT16 LED STATUS
0 = SIGNED, 1 = ABSOLUTE
Low byte of register indicates LED status with bit 0 representing
the top LED and bit 7 the bottom LED. A bit value of 1 indicates
F516
the LED is on, 0 indicates the LED is off.
ENUMERATION ELEMENT COMPARE MODE
F502 0 = LEVEL, 1 = DELTA

BITFIELD ELEMENT OPERATE STATES
F518
Each bit contains the operate state for an element. See the F124
ENUMERATION FlexElement Units
format code for a list of element IDs. The operate bit for element ID
X is bit [X mod 16] in register [X/16].
0 = Milliseconds, 1 = Seconds, 2 = Minutes
F504
F600
BITFIELD 3 PHASE ELEMENT STATE
UR_UINT16 FlexAnalog Parameter
bitmask element state
The 16-bit value corresponds to the modbus address of the value
0 Pickup to be used when this parameter is selected. Only certain values
1 Operate may be used as FlexAnalogs (basically all the metering quantities
2 Pickup Phase A used in protection)
3 Pickup Phase B
4 Pickup Phase C MMI_FLASH ENUMERATION
5 Operate Phase A Flash message definitions for Front-panel MMI
6 Operate Phase B
bitmask Flash Message
7 Operate Phase C
1 ADJUSTED VALUE HAS BEEN STORED
2 ENTERED PASSCODE IS INVALID
F505 3 COMMAND EXECUTED
BITFIELD CONTACT OUTPUT STATE 4 DEFAULT MESSAGE HAS BEEN ADDED
5 DEFAULT MESSAGE HAS BEEN REMOVED
0 = Contact State, 1 = Voltage Detected, 2 = Current Detected
6 INPUT FUNCTION IS ALREADY ASSIGNED
7 PRESS [ENTER] TO ADD AS DEFAULT
F506|
8 PRESS [ENTER] TO REMOVE MESSAGE
BITFIELD 1 PHASE ELEMENT STATE
9 PRESS [ENTER] TO BEGIN TEXT EDIT
0 = Pickup, 1 = Operate 10 ENTRY MISMATCH - CODE NOT STORED
11 PRESSED KEY IS INVALID HERE
F507 12 INVALID KEY: MUST BE IN LOCAL MODE

BITFIELD COUNTER ELEMENT STATE 13 NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED
14 PLEASE ENTER A NON-ZERO PASSCODE
0 = Count Greater Than, 1 = Count Equal To, 2 = Count Less Than
15 NO ACTIVE TARGETS (TESTING LEDS)
16 OUT OF RANGE - VALUE NOT STORED

bitmask Flash Message

MMI_PASSWORD_TYPE ENUMERATION
17 RESETTING LATCHED CONDITIONS Password types for display in password prompts
18 SETPOINT ACCESS IS NOW ALLOWED
19 SETPOINT ACCESS DENIED (PASSCODE) bitmask password type
20 SETPOINT ACCESS IS NOW RESTRICTED 0 No
21 NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED 1 MASTER
22
23
SETPOINT ACCESS DENIED (SWITCH)
DATA NOT ACCEPTED
2
3
SETTING
COMMAND
B
24 NOT ALL CONDITIONS HAVE BEEN RESET 4 FACTORY
25 DATE NOT ACCEPTED IRIGB IS ENABLED
26 NOT EXECUTED MMI_SETTING_TYPE ENUMERATION
27 DISPLAY ADDED TO USER DISPLAY LIST Setting types for display in web pages
28 DISPLAY NOT ADDED TO USER DISPLAY LIST
bitmask Setting Type
29 DISPLAY REMOVED FROM USER DISPLAY LIST
0 Unrestricted Setting
1 Master-accessed Setting
2 Setting
3 Command
4 Factory Setting


APPENDIX C C.1 UCA/MMS OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C UCA/MMSC.1 UCA/MMS OVERVIEW C.1.1 UCA
The Utility Communications Architecture (UCA) version 2 represents an attempt by utilities and vendors of electronic
equipment to produce standardized communications systems. There is a set of reference documents available from the
Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) and vendors of UCA/MMS software libraries that describe the complete capabili-
ties of the UCA. Following, is a description of the subset of UCA/MMS features that are supported by the UR relay. The ref-
erence document set includes:
• Introduction to UCA version 2
• Generic Object Models for Substation & Feeder Equipment (GOMSFE)
• Common Application Service Models (CASM) and Mapping to MMS
• UCA Version 2 Profiles
These documents can be obtained from ftp://www.sisconet.com/epri/subdemo/uca2.0. It is strongly recommended that all
those involved with any UCA implementation obtain this document set.
C
COMMUNICATION PROFILES:
The UCA specifies a number of possibilities for communicating with electronic devices based on the OSI Reference Model.
The UR relay uses the seven layer OSI stack (TP4/CLNP and TCP/IP profiles). Refer to the "UCA Version 2 Profiles" refer-
ence document for details.
The TP4/CLNP profile requires the UR relay to have a network address or Network Service Access Point (NSAP) in order
to establish a communication link. The TCP/IP profile requires the UR relay to have an IP address in order to establish a
communication link. These addresses are set in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
menu. Note that the UR relay supports UCA operation over the TP4/CLNP or the TCP/IP stacks and also supports opera-
tion over both stacks simultaneously. It is possible to have up to two simultaneous connections. This is in addition to DNP
and Modbus/TCP (non-UCA) connections.
C.1.2 MMS
The UCA specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper (Application) layer for trans-
fer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number of years and provides a set of services suitable for
the transfer of data within a substation LAN environment. Data can be grouped to form objects and be mapped to MMS ser-
vices. Refer to the “GOMSFE” and “CASM” reference documents for details.
SUPPORTED OBJECTS:
The "GOMSFE" document describes a number of communication objects. Within these objects are items, some of which
are mandatory and some of which are optional, depending on the implementation. The UR relay supports the following
GOMSFE objects:
• DI (device identity) • PHIZ (high impedance ground detector)
• GCTL (generic control) • PIOC (instantaneous overcurrent relay)
• GIND (generic indicator) • POVR (overvoltage relay)
• GLOBE (global data) • PTOC (time overcurrent relay)
• MMXU (polyphase measurement unit) • PUVR (under voltage relay)
• PBRL (phase balance current relay) • PVPH (volts per hertz relay)
• PBRO (basic relay object) • ctRATO (CT ratio information)
• PDIF (differential relay) • vtRATO (VT ratio information)
• PDIS (distance) • RREC (reclosing relay)
• PDOC (directional overcurrent) • RSYN (synchronizing or synchronism-check relay)
• PFRQ (frequency relay) • XCBR (circuit breaker)
UCA data can be accessed through the "UCADevice" MMS domain.
GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay C-1

C.1 UCA/MMS OVERVIEW APPENDIX C
PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION:
Peer-to-peer communication of digital state information, using the UCA GOOSE data object, is supported via the use of the
UR Remote Inputs/Outputs feature. This feature allows digital points to be transferred between any UCA conforming
devices.
FILE SERVICES:
MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of Oscillography, Event Record, or other files from a UR relay.
COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES:
The exact structure and values of the implemented objects implemented can be seen by connecting to a UR relay with an
MMS browser, such as the “MMS Object Explorer and AXS4-MMS DDE/OPC” server from Sisco Inc.
NON-UCA DATA:
C The UR relay makes available a number of non-UCA data items. These data items can be accessed through the "UR" MMS
domain. UCA data can be accessed through the "UCADevice" MMS domain.
a) PROTOCOL IMPLEMENTATION AND CONFORMANCE STATEMENT (PICS)

The UR relay functions as a server only; a UR relay cannot be configured as a client. Thus, the following list of sup-
ported services is for server operation only:
NOTE
The MMS supported services are as follows:

CONNECTION MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
• Initiate
• Conclude
• Cancel
• Abort
• Reject
VMD SUPPORT SERVICES:
• Status
• GetNameList
• Identify
VARIABLE ACCESS SERVICES:
• Read
• Write
• InformationReport
• GetVariableAccessAttributes
• GetNamedVariableListAttributes
OPERATOR COMMUNICATION SERVICES:
(none)
SEMAPHORE MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
(none)
DOMAIN MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
• GetDomainAttributes
PROGRAM INVOCATION MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
(none)
EVENT MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
(none)
C-2 M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

JOURNAL MANAGEMENT SERVICES:

(none)
FILE MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
• ObtainFile
• FileOpen
• FileRead
• FileClose
• FileDirectory
The following MMS parameters are supported:
• STR1 (Arrays)
• STR2 (Structures) C
• NEST (Nesting Levels of STR1 and STR2) - 1
• VNAM (Named Variables)
• VADR (Unnamed Variables)
• VALT (Alternate Access Variables)
• VLIS (Named Variable Lists)
• REAL (ASN.1 REAL Type)
b) MODEL IMPLEMENTATION CONFORMANCE (MIC)

This section provides details of the UCA object models supported by the UR relay. Note that not all of the protective device
functions are applicable to all UR relays.
Table C–1: DEVICE IDENTITY – DI
NAME M/O RWEC
Name m rw
Class o rw
d o rw
Own o rw
Loc o rw
VndID m r
CommID o rw
Table C–2: GENERIC CONTROL – GCTL

FC NAME CLASS RWECS DESCRIPTION
ST BO<n> SI rw Generic Single Point Indication
CO BO<n> SI rw Generic Binary Output
CF BO<n> SBOCF rw SBO Configuration
DC LN d rw Description for brick
BO<n> d rw Description for each point
Actual instantiation of GCTL objects is as follows:
NOTE GCTL1 = Virtual Inputs (32 total points – SI1 to SI32); includes SBO functionality.

Table C–3: GENERIC INDICATOR – GIND

FC NAME CLASS RWECS DESCRIPTION
ST SIG<n> SIG r Generic Indication (block of 16)
RP BrcbST BasRCB rw Controls reporting of STATUS
Actual instantiation of GIND objects is as follows:
NOTE GIND1 = Contact Inputs (96 total points – SIG1 to SIG6)

GIND2 = Contact Outputs (64 total points – SIG1 to SIG4)
GIND3 = Virtual Inputs (32 total points – SIG1 to SIG2)
GIND4 = Virtual Outputs (64 total points – SIG1 to SIG4)
C GIND5 = Remote Inputs (32 total points – SIG1 to SIG2)

GIND6 = Flexstates (16 total points – SIG1 representing Flexstates 1 to 16)
Table C–4: PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS

FC OBJECT NAME CLASS RWECS DESCRIPTION
ST Out BOOL r 1 = Element operated, 2 = Element not operated
Tar PhsTar r Targets since last reset
FctDS SIT r Function is enabled/disabled
PuGrp INT8U r Settings group selected for use
CO EnaDisFct DCO w 1 = Element function enabled, 0 = disabled
RsTar BO w Reset ALL Elements/Targets
RsLat BO w Reset ALL Elements/Targets
ElementSt d r Element state string
The following GOMSFE objects are defined by the object model described via the above table:
• PBRO (basic relay object)
• PDIF (differential relay)
• PDIS (distance)
• PDOC (directional overcurrent)
• PFRQ (frequency relay)
• PHIZ (high impedance ground detector)
• PIOC (instantaneous overcurrent relay)
• POVR (over voltage relay)
• PTOC (time overcurrent relay)
• PUVR (under voltage relay)
• RSYN (synchronizing or synchronism-check relay)
• POVR (overvoltage)
• PVPH (volts per hertz relay)
• PBRL (phase balance current relay)
Actual instantiation of these objects is determined by the number of the corresponding elements present in the UR
as per the ‘product order code’.
NOTE

Table C–5: GLOBAL DATA – GLOBE

ST ModeDS SIT r Device is: in test, off-line, available, or unhealthy
LocRemDS SIT r The mode of control, local or remote (DevST)
ActSG INT8U r Active Settings Group
EditSG INT8u r Settings Group selected for read/write operation
CO CopySG INT8U w Selects Settings Group for read/writer operation
IndRs BOOL w Resets ALL targets
CF ClockTOD BTIME rw Date and time
RP GOOSE PACT rw Reports IED Inputs and Ouputs
Table C–6: MEASUREMENT UNIT (POLYPHASE) – MMXU

C
OBJECT NAME CLASS RWECS DESCRIPTION
V WYE rw Voltage on phase A, B, C to G
PPV DELTA rw Voltage on AB, BC, CA
A WYE rw Current in phase A, B, C, and N
W WYE rw Watts in phase A, B, C
TotW AI rw Total watts in all three phases
Var WYE rw Vars in phase A, B, C
TotVar AI rw Total vars in all three phases
VA WYE rw VA in phase A, B, C
TotVA AI rw Total VA in all 3 phases
PF WYE rw Power Factor for phase A, B, C
AvgPF AI rw Average Power Factor for all three phases
Hz AI rw Power system frequency
All MMXU.MX ACF rw Configuration of ALL included MMXU.MX
LN d rw Description for brick
All MMXU.MX d rw Description of ALL included MMXU.MX
BrcbMX BasRCB rw Controls reporting of measurements
Actual instantiation of MMXU objects is as follows:
NOTE 1 MMXU per Source (as determined from the ‘product order code’)
Table C–7: CT RATIO INFORMATION – ctRATO

PhsARat RATIO rw Primary/secondary winding ratio
NeutARat RATIO rw Primary/secondary winding ratio
Actual instantiation of ctRATO objects is as follows:
NOTE 1 ctRATO per Source (as determined from the ‘product order code’).

Table C–8: VT RATIO INFORMATION – vtRATO

PhsVRat RATIO rw Primary/secondary winding ratio
Actual instantiation of vtRATO objects is as follows:
NOTE 1 vtRATO per Source (as determined from the ‘product order code’).
Table C–9: RECLOSING RELAY – RREC

ST Out BOOL r 1 = Element operated, 2 = Element not operated
C FctDS SIT r Function is enabled/disabled
PuGrp INT8U r Settings group selected for use
SG ReclSeq SHOTS rw Reclosing Sequence
CO EnaDisFct DCO w 1 = Element function enabled, 0 = disabled
RsTar BO w Reset ALL Elements/Targets
RsLat BO w Reset ALL Elements/Targets
CF ReclSeq ACF rw Configuration for RREC.SG
ElementSt d r Element state string
Actual instantiation of RREC objects is determined by the number of autoreclose elements present in the UR as per
the ‘product order code’.
NOTE
Also note that the SHOTS class data (i.e. Tmr1, Tmr2, Tmr3, Tmr4, RsTmr) is specified to be of type INT16S (16 bit
signed integer); this data type is not large enough to properly display the full range of these settings from the UR.
Numbers larger than 32768 will be displayed incorrectly.
C.1.3 UCA REPORTING
A built-in TCP/IP connection timeout of two minutes is employed by the UR to detect "dead" connections. If there is no data
traffic on a TCP connection for greater than two minutes, the connection will be aborted by the UR. This frees up the con-
nection to be used by other clients. Therefore, when using UCA reporting, clients should configure BasRCB objects such
that an integrity report will be issued at least every 2 minutes (120000 ms). This ensures that the UR will not abort the con-
nection. If other MMS data is being polled on the same connection at least once every 2 minutes, this timeout will not apply.

APPENDIX D D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
APPENDIX D IEC 60870-5-104D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL D.1.1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT
This document is adapted from the IEC 60870-5-104 standard. For ths section the boxes indicate the following: !
" – used
in standard direction; ! – not used; – cannot be selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard.
1. SYSTEM OR DEVICE:
! System Definition
! Controlling Station Definition (Master)
" Controlled Station Definition (Slave)
!
2. NETWORK CONFIGURATION:
Point-to-Point Multipoint
Multiple Point-to-Point Multipoint Star
3. PHYSICAL LAYER
Transmission Speed (control direction):
Unbalanced Interchange Unbalanced Interchange Balanced Interchange Circuit
Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard: Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended X.24/X.27:
if >1200 bits/s: D
100 bits/sec. 2400 bits/sec. 2400 bits/sec.
600 bits/sec. 19200 bits/sec.
56000 bits/sec.
64000 bits/sec.
Transmission Speed (monitor direction):

Unbalanced Interchange Unbalanced Interchange Balanced Interchange Circuit
Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard: Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended X.24/X.27:
if >1200 bits/s:
56000 bits/sec.
64000 bits/sec.
4. LINK LAYER
Link Transmission Procedure: Address Field of the Link:
Balanced Transmision Not Present (Balanced Transmission Only)
Unbalanced Transmission One Octet
Two Octets
Structured
Unstructured
Frame Length (maximum length, number of octets): Not selectable in companion IEC 60870-5-104 standard
GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay D-1

D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL APPENDIX D
When using an unbalanced link layer, the following ADSU types are returned in class 2 messages (low priority) with the
indicated causes of transmission:
The standard assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:
A special assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:
5. APPLICATION LAYER
Transmission Mode for Application Data:
Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in Clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion
stanadard.
Common Address of ADSU:
One Octet
" Two Octets
!
Information Object Address:
One Octet " Structured
!
D Two Octets " Unstructured
!
" Three Octets
!
Cause of Transmission:
One Octet
" Two Octets (with originator address). Originator address is set to zero if not used.
!
Maximum Length of APDU: 253 (the maximum length may be reduced by the system.
Selection of standard ASDUs:
For the following lists, the boxes indicate the following: !
" – used in standard direction; ! – not used; – cannot be
selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard.
Process information in monitor direction
!
" <1> := Single-point information M_SP_NA_1
<2> := Single-point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1
! <3> := Double-point information M_DP_NA_1
<4> := Double-point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1
! <5> := Step position information M_ST_NA_1
<6> := Step position information with time tag M_ST_TA_1
! <7> := Bitstring of 32 bits M_BO_NA_1
<8> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag M_BO_TA_1
! <9> := Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1
<10> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag M_NE_TA_1
! <11> := Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1
<12> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag M_NE_TB_1
!
" <13> := Measured value, short floating point value M_ME_NC_1
<14> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag M_NE_TC_1
!
" <15> := Integrated totals M_IT_NA_1
<16> := Integrated totals with time tag M_IT_TA_1
<17> := Event of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TA_1
<18> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TB_1
<19> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TC_1
! <20> := Packed single-point information with status change detection M_SP_NA_1
D-2 M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

! <21> := Measured value, normalized value without quantity descriptor M_ME_ND_1
!
" <30> := Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a M_SP_TB_1
! <31> := Double-point information wiht time tag CP56Time2a M_DP_TB_1
! <32> := Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a M_ST_TB_1
! <33> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a M_BO_TB_1
! <34> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TD_1
! <35> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TE_1
! <36> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TF_1
!
" <37> := Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a M_IT_TB_1
! <38> := Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TD_1
! <39> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TE_1
! <40> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TF_1
Either the ASDUs of the set <2>, <4>, <6>, <8>, <10>, <12>, <14>, <16>, <17>, <18>, and <19> or of the set
<30> to <40> are used.
Process information in control direction
!
" <45> := Single command C_SC_NA_1
D
! <46> := Double command C_DC_NA_1
! <47> := Regulating step command C_RC_NA_1
! <48> := Set point command, normalized value C_SE_NA_1
! <49> := Set point command, scaled value C_SE_NB_1
! <50> := Set point command, short floating point value C_SE_NC_1
! <51> := Bitstring of 32 bits C_BO_NA_1
!
" <58> := Single command with time tag CP56Time2a C_SC_TA_1
! <59> := Double command with time tag CP56Time2a C_DC_TA_1
! <60> := Regulating step command with time tag CP56Time2a C_RC_TA_1
! <61> := Set point command, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TA_1
! <62> := Set point command, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TB_1
! <63> := Set point command, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a C_SE_TC_1
! <64> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a C_BO_TA_1
Either the ASDUs of the set <45> to <51> or of the set <58> to <64> are used.
System information in monitor direction
!
" <70> := End of initialization M_EI_NA_1
System information in control direction

!
" <100> := Interrogation command C_IC_NA_1
!
" <101> := Counter interrogation command C_CI_NA_1
!
" <102> := Read command C_RD_NA_1
!
" <103> := Clock synchronization command (see Clause 7.6 in standard) C_CS_NA_1
<104> := Test command C_TS_NA_1
!
" <105> := Reset process command C_RP_NA_1
<106> := Delay acquisition command C_CD_NA_1
!
" <107> := Test command with time tag CP56Time2a C_TS_TA_1

Parameter in control direction

! <110> := Parameter of measured value, normalized value PE_ME_NA_1
! <111> := Parameter of measured value, scaled value PE_ME_NB_1
!
" <112> := Parameter of measured value, short floating point value PE_ME_NC_1
! <113> := Parameter activation PE_AC_NA_1
File transfer
! <120> := File Ready F_FR_NA_1
! <121> := Section Ready F_SR_NA_1
! <122> := Call directory, select file, call file, call section F_SC_NA_1
! <123> := Last section, last segment F_LS_NA_1
! <124> := Ack file, ack section F_AF_NA_1
! <125> := Segment F_SG_NA_1
! <126> := Directory (blank or X, available only in monitor [standard] direction) C_CD_NA_1
Type identifier and cause of transmission assignments

D (station-specific parameters)
In the following table:
• Shaded boxes are not required.
• Black boxes are not permitted in this companion standard.
• Blank boxes indicate functions or ASDU not used.
• ‘X’ if only used in the standard direction
TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION
REQUEST BY GROUP <N> COUNTER REQ
UNKNOWN COMMON ADDRESS OF ADSU
UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR

INTERROGATED BY GROUP <NUMBER>
RETURN INFO CAUSED BY LOCAL CMD
UNKNOWN CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION

UNKNOWN TYPE IDENTIFICATION
DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
ACTIVATION TERMINATION
REQUEST OR REQUESTED
BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
20 37
NO. MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 to to 44 45 46 47
36 41
<1> M_SP_NA_1 X X X X X
<2> M_SP_TA_1
<3> M_DP_NA_1
<4> M_DP_TA_1
<5> M_ST_NA_1
<6> M_ST_TA_1
<7> M_BO_NA_1
<8> M_BO_TA_1




BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
20 37
NO. MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 to to 44 45 46 47
36 41
<9> M_ME_NA_1 D
<10> M_ME_TA_1
<11> M_ME_NB_1
<12> M_ME_TB_1
<13> M_ME_NC_1 X X X X
<14> M_ME_TC_1
<15> M_IT_NA_1 X X
<16> M_IT_TA_1
<17> M_EP_TA_1
<18> M_EP_TB_1
<19> M_EP_TC_1
<20> M_PS_NA_1
<21> M_ME_ND_1
<30> M_SP_TB_1 X X X
<31> M_DP_TB_1
<32> M_ST_TB_1
<33> M_BO_TB_1
<34> M_ME_TD_1
<35> M_ME_TE_1
<36> M_ME_TF_1
<37> M_IT_TB_1 X X
<38> M_EP_TD_1
<39> M_EP_TE_1
<40> M_EP_TF_1
<45> C_SC_NA_1 X X X X X
<46> C_DC_NA_1
<47> C_RC_NA_1
<48> C_SE_NA_1
<49> C_SE_NB_1




BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
20 37
NO. MNEMONIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 to to 44 45 46 47
36 41
D <50> C_SE_NC_1
<51> C_BO_NA_1
<58> C_SC_TA_1 X X X X X
<59> C_DC_TA_1
<60> C_RC_TA_1
<61> C_SE_TA_1
<62> C_SE_TB_1
<63> C_SE_TC_1
<64> C_BO_TA_1
<70> M_EI_NA_1*) X
<100> C_IC_NA_1 X X X X X
<101> C_CI_NA_1 X X X
<102> C_RD_NA_1 X
<103> C_CS_NA_1 X X X
<104> C_TS_NA_1
<105> C_RP_NA_1 X X
<106> C_CD_NA_1
<107> C_TS_TA_1
<110> P_ME_NA_1
<111> P_ME_NB_1
<112> P_ME_NC_1 X X X
<113> P_AC_NA_1
<120> F_FR_NA_1
<121> F_SR_NA_1
<122> F_SC_NA_1
<123> F_LS_NA_1
<124> F_AF_NA_1
<125> F_SG_NA_1
<126> F_DR_TA_1*)

6. BASIC APPLICATION FUNCTIONS

Station Initialization:
" Remote initialization
!
Cyclic Data Transmission:
" Cyclic data transmission
!
Read Procedure:
" Read procedure
!
Spontaneous Transmission:
" Spontaneous transmission
!
Double transmission of information objects with cause of transmission spontaneous:
The following type identifications may be transmitted in succession caused by a single status change of an information
object. The particular information object addresses for which double transmission is enabled are defined in a project-
specific list.
! Single point information: M_SP_NA_1, M_SP_TA_1, M_SP_TB_1, and M_PS_NA_1
! Double point information: M_DP_NA_1, M_DP_TA_1, and M_DP_TB_1 D
! Step position information: M_ST_NA_1, M_ST_TA_1, and M_ST_TB_1
! Bitstring of 32 bits: M_BO_NA_1, M_BO_TA_1, and M_BO_TB_1 (if defined for a specific project)
! Measured value, normalized value: M_ME_NA_1, M_ME_TA_1, M_ME_ND_1, and M_ME_TD_1
! Measured value, scaled value: M_ME_NB_1, M_ME_TB_1, and M_ME_TE_1
! Measured value, short floating point number: M_ME_NC_1, M_ME_TC_1, and M_ME_TF_1
Station interrogation:
" Global
!
" Group 1
! " Group 5
! " Group 9
! " Group 13
!
" Group 2
! " Group 6
! " Group 10
! " Group 14
!
" Group 3
! " Group 7
! " Group 11
! " Group 15
!
" Group 4
! " Group 8
! " Group 12
! " Group 16
!
Clock synchronization:
" Clock synchronization (optional, see Clause 7.6)
!
Command transmission:
" Direct command transmission
!
! Direct setpoint command transmission
" Select and execute command
!
! Select and execute setpoint command
" C_SE ACTTERM used
!
" No additional definition
!
" Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
!
" Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
!
" Persistent output
!
" Supervision of maximum delay in command direction of commands and setpoint commands
!
Maximum allowable delay of commands and setpoint commands: 10 s

Transmission of integrated totals:

" Mode A: Local freeze with spontaneous transmission
!
" Mode B: Local freeze with counter interrogation
!
" Mode C: Freeze and transmit by counter-interrogation commands
!
" Mode D: Freeze by counter-interrogation command, frozen values reported simultaneously
!
" Counter read

!
" Counter freeze without reset
!
" Counter freeze with reset
!
" Counter reset
!
" General request counter

!
" Request counter group 1
!
!
D " Request counter group 3

!
!
Parameter loading:
" Threshold value
!
! Smoothing factor
! Low limit for transmission of measured values
! High limit for transmission of measured values
Parameter activation:
! Activation/deactivation of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
Test procedure:
! Test procedure
File transfer:
File transfer in monitor direction:
! Transparent file
! Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment
! Transmission of sequences of events
! Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values
File transfer in control direction:
! Transparent file
Background scan:
! Background scan
Acquisition of transmission delay:
Acquisition of transmission delay

Definition of time outs:

PARAMETER DEFAULT REMARKS SELECTED
VALUE VALUE
t0 30 s Timeout of connection establishment 120 s
t1 15 s Timeout of send or test APDUs 15 s
t2 10 s Timeout for acknowlegements in case of no data messages t2 < t1 10 s
t3 20 s Timeout for sending test frames in case of a long idle state 20 s
Maximum range of values for all time outs: 1 to 255 s, accuracy 1 s

Maximum number of outstanding I-format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs (w):
PARAMETER DEFAULT REMARKS SELECTED
VALUE VALUE
k 12 APDUs Maximum difference receive sequence number to send state variable 12 APDUs
w 8 APDUs Latest acknowledge after receiving w I-format APDUs 8 APDUs
Maximum range of values k: 1 to 32767 (215 – 1) APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU

Maximum range of values w: 1 to 32767 APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU D
Recommendation: w should not exceed two-thirds of k.
Portnumber:
PARAMETER VALUE REMARKS
Portnumber 2404 In all cases
RFC 2200 suite:

RFC 2200 is an official Internet Standard which describes the state of standardization of protocols used in the Internet
as determined by the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the Inter-
net. The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be chosen
by the user of this standard.
" Ethernet 802.3
!
! Serial X.21 interface
! Other selection(s) from RFC 2200 (list below if selected)

D.1.2 POINT LIST
Table D–1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (Sheet 1 of 4) Table D–1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (Sheet 2 of 4)
POINT DESCRIPTION UNITS POINT DESCRIPTION UNITS
M_ME_NC_1 Points 2043 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle degrees
2000 SRC 1 Phase A Current RMS A 2044 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude V
2001 SRC 1 Phase B Current RMS A 2045 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle degrees
2002 SRC 1 Phase C Current RMS A 2046 SRC 1 Pos Sequence Voltage Magnitude V
2003 SRC 1 Neutral Current RMS A 2047 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle degrees
2004 SRC 1 Phase A Current Magnitude A 2048 SRC 1 Neg Sequence Voltage Magnitude V
2005 SRC 1 Phase A Current Angle degrees 2049 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle degrees
2006 SRC 1 Phase B Current Magnitude A 2050 SRC 1 Three Phase Real Power W
2007 SRC 1 Phase B Current Angle degrees 2051 SRC 1 Phase A Real Power W
2008 SRC 1 Phase C Current Magnitude A 2052 SRC 1 Phase B Real Power W
2009 SRC 1 Phase C Current Angle degrees 2053 SRC 1 Phase C Real Power W
D 2010
2011
SRC 1 Neutral Current Magnitude
SRC 1 Neutral Current Angle
A
degrees
2054
2055
SRC 1 Three Phase Reactive Power
SRC 1 Phase A Reactive Power
var
var
2012 SRC 1 Ground Current RMS A 2056 SRC 1 Phase B Reactive Power var
2013 SRC 1 Ground Current Magnitude A 2057 SRC 1 Phase C Reactive Power var
2014 SRC 1 Ground Current Angle degrees 2058 SRC 1 Three Phase Apparent Power VA
2015 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude A 2059 SRC 1 Phase A Apparent Power VA
2016 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle degrees 2060 SRC 1 Phase B Apparent Power VA
2017 SRC 1 Pos Sequence Current Magnitude A 2061 SRC 1 Phase C Apparent Power VA
2018 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle degrees 2062 SRC 1 Three Phase Power Factor none
2019 SRC 1 Neg Sequence Current Magnitude A 2063 SRC 1 Phase A Power Factor none
2020 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle degrees 2064 SRC 1 Phase B Power Factor none
2021 SRC 1 Differential Gnd Current Magnitude A 2065 SRC 1 Phase C Power Factor none
2022 SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Angle degrees 2066 SRC 1 Positive Watthour Wh
2023 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS V 2067 SRC 1 Negative Watthour Wh
2024 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS V 2068 SRC 1 Positive Varhour varh
2025 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS V 2069 SRC 1 Negative Varhour varh
2026 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude V 2070 SRC 1 Frequency Hz
2027 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle degrees 2071 Stator Differential Iad A
2028 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude V 2072 Stator Restraint Iar A
2029 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle degrees 2073 Stator Differential Ibd A
2030 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude V 2074 Stator Restraint Ibr A
2031 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle degrees 2075 Stator Differential Icd A
2032 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage RMS V 2076 Stator Restraint Icr A
2033 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage RMS V 2077 Sens Dir Power 1 Actual W
2034 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage RMS V 2078 Sens Dir Power 2 Actual W
2035 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude V 2079 Thermal Model Capacity Used %
2036 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Angle degrees 2080 Thermal Model Trip Time On Overload none
2037 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude V 2081 Thermal Model Lockout Time in.
2038 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Angle degrees 2082 Thermal Model Load xFLA
2039 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude V 2083 Thermal Model Motor Unbalance %
2040 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Angle degrees 2084 Thermal Model Biased Motor Load xFLA
2041 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS V 2085 Tracking Frequency Hz
2042 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude V 2086 FlexElement 1 Actual none

Table D–1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (Sheet 3 of 4) Table D–1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (Sheet 4 of 4)
POINT DESCRIPTION UNITS POINT DESCRIPTION UNITS
2087 FlexElement 2 Actual none C_SC_NA_1 Points
2088 FlexElement 3 Actual none 1100 - Virtual Input States[0] - No Select Required -
1115
2089 FlexElement 4 Actual none
1116 - Virtual Input States[1] - Select Required -
2090 FlexElement 5 Actual none 1131
2091 FlexElement 6 Actual none M_IT_NA_1 Points
2092 FlexElement 7 Actual none 4000 Digital Counter 1 Value -
2102 Current Setting Group none
D
2103 Amp Unbalance %
P_ME_NC_1 Points
5000 - Threshold values for M_ME_NC_1 points -
5103
M_SP_NA_1 Points
100-115 Virtual Input States[0] -
116-131 Virtual Input States[1] -
132-147 Virtual Output States[0] -
196-211 Contact Input States[0] -
292-307 Contact Output States[0] -
356-371 Remote Input x States[0] -
372-387 Remote Input x States[1] -
388-403 Remote Device x States -
404-419 LED Column x State[0] -
420-435 LED Column x State[1] -


APPENDIX E E.1 DNP DEVICE PROFILE
APPENDIX E DNPE.1 DNP DEVICE PROFILE E.1.1 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE
The following table provides a “Device Profile Document” in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions
Document.
Table E–1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 1 of 3)
(Also see the IMPLEMENTATION TABLE in the following section)
Vendor Name: General Electric Power Management
Device Name: UR Series Relay
Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function:

For Requests: Level 2 ! Master
For Responses: Level 2 " Slave
!
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete
list is described in the attached table):
Binary Inputs (Object 1)
Binary Input Changes (Object 2)
Binary Outputs (Object 10)
Binary Counters (Object 20)
Frozen Counters (Object 21)
E
Counter Change Event (Object 22)
Frozen Counter Event (Object 23)
Analog Inputs (Object 30)
Analog Input Changes (Object 32)
Analog Deadbands (Object 34)
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted: 292 Transmitted: 240
Received: 292 Received: 2048
Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:

! None " None
!
" Fixed at 2
! ! Configurable
! Configurable
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
!
" Never
! Always
! Sometimes
! Configurable
GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay E-1

E.1 DNP DEVICE PROFILE APPENDIX E
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:

! Never
! Always
!
" When reporting Event Data
!
" When sending multi-fragment responses
! Sometimes
! Configurable
Timeouts while waiting for:

Data Link Confirm: ! None !
" Fixed at 3 s ! Variable ! Configurable
Complete Appl. Fragment: !
" None ! Fixed at ____ ! Variable ! Configurable
Application Confirm: ! None !
" Fixed at 4 s ! Variable ! Configurable
Complete Appl. Response: !
" None ! Fixed at ____ ! Variable ! Configurable
Others:
Transmission Delay: No intentional delay
Inter-character Timeout: 50 ms
Need Time Delay: Configurable (default = 24 hrs.)
Select/Operate Arm Timeout: 10 s
Binary input change scanning period: 8 times per power system cycle
E Packed binary change process period:

Analog input change scanning period:
1s
500 ms
Counter change scanning period: 500 ms
Frozen counter event scanning period: 500 ms
Unsolicited response notification delay: 500 ms
Unsolicited response retry delay configurable 0 to 60 sec.
Sends/Executes Control Operations:

WRITE Binary Outputs !
" Never ! Always ! Sometimes ! Configurable
SELECT/OPERATE ! Never !
" Always ! Sometimes ! Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE ! Never !
DIRECT OPERATE – NO ACK ! Never !
Count > 1 !
" Never ! Always ! Sometimes ! Configurable
Pulse On ! Never ! Always !
" Sometimes ! Configurable
Pulse Off ! Never ! Always !
Latch On ! Never ! Always !
Latch Off ! Never ! Always !
Queue " Never

! ! Always ! Sometimes ! Configurable
Clear Queue " Never
! ! Always ! Sometimes ! Configurable
Explanation of ‘Sometimes’: Object 12 points are mapped to UR Virtual Inputs. The persistence of Virtual Inputs is
determined by the VIRTUAL INPUT X TYPE settings. Both “Pulse On” and “Latch On” operations perform the same func-
tion in the UR; that is, the appropriate Virtual Input is put into the “On” state. If the Virtual Input is set to "Self-Reset",
it will reset after one pass of FlexLogic™. The On/Off times and Count value are ignored. "Pulse Off" and "Latch Off"
operations put the appropriate Virtual Input into the "Off" state. "Trip" and "Close" operations both put the appropriate
Virtual Input into the "On" state.
E-2 M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

APPENDIX E E.1 DNP DEVICE PROFILE
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no
specific variation requested: specific variation requested:
! Never ! Never
!
" Only time-tagged !
" Binary Input Change With Time
! Only non-time-tagged ! Binary Input Change With Relative Time
! Configurable ! Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses: Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:

! Never " Never
!
!
" Configurable ! When Device Restarts
! Only certain objects ! When Status Flags Change
! Sometimes (attach explanation)
ENABLE/DISABLE unsolicited Function No other options are permitted.
!
"
codes supported
Default Counter Object/Variation: Counters Roll Over at:

! No Counters Reported ! No Counters Reported
! Configurable (attach explanation) ! Configurable (attach explanation)
" Default Object:
! 20 !
" 16 Bits (Counter 8)
Default Variation: 1 !
" 32 Bits (Counters 0 to 7, 9)
!
" Point-by-point list attached ! Other Value: _____
!
" Point-by-point list attached E
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:
" Yes
!
! No

E.2 DNP IMPLEMENTATION TABLE APPENDIX E
E.2 DNP IMPLEMENTATION TABLE E.2.1 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the UR in both request messages
and in response messages. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be
responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or
28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
Table E–2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 1 of 4)
OBJECT REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION FUNCTION QUALIFIER FUNCTION QUALIFIER
NO. NO. CODES (DEC) CODES (HEX) CODES (DEC) CODES (HEX)
1 0 Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to request 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
default variation) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
1 Binary Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited qty) (see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
2 Binary Input with Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – see Note 1) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
2 0 Binary Input Change (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
request default variation) 07, 08 (limited qty)
1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.)
2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 (read) 06 ( no range, or all) 129 (response 17, 28 (index)
E 10 0
(default – see Note 1)
Binary Output Status (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read)
00, 01(start-stop)
130 (unsol. resp.)
request default variation) 06 (no range, or all)

17, 28 (index)
2 Binary Output Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – see Note 1) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 3 (select) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) echo of request
4 (operate) 07, 08 (limited qty)
5 (direct op) 17, 28 (index)
6 (dir. op, noack)
20 0 Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01(start-stop)
(Variation 0 is used to request default 7 (freeze) 06(no range, or all)
variation) 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08(limited qty)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28(index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – see Note 1) 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited qty) (see Note 2)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
Note 1: A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Type 30 (Analog
Input) data is limited to data that is actually possible to be used in the UR, based on the product order code. For example, Signal
Source data from source numbers that cannot be used is not included. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size.
Note 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respec-
tively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for change-
event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.)
Note 3: Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts – the UR is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.

APPENDIX E E.2 DNP IMPLEMENTATION TABLE

20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
con’t 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
5 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
6 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
21 0 Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(Variation 0 is used to request default 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
variation) 07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index) E
2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
22 0 Counter Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
to request default variation) 07, 08 (limited qty)
1 32-Bit Counter Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
(default – see Note 1) 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.)
5 32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
23 0 Frozen Counter Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
to request default variation) 07, 08 (limited qty)
1 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
(default – see Note 1) 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.)
5 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)

E.2 DNP IMPLEMENTATION TABLE APPENDIX E

30 0 Analog Input (Variation 0 is used to request 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
default variation) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
3 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
4 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
5 short floating point 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class) 06(no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
07, 08(limited qty) (see Note 2)
17, 28(index)
E 32 0 Analog Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read)

to request default variation)
06 (no range, or all)
1 32-Bit Analog Change Event without 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
Time (default – see Note 1) 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.)
2 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
3 32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
5 short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
without Time 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.)
7 short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
with Time 07, 08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.)
34 0 Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(Variation 0 is used to request default 06 (no range, or all)
variation) 07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
1 16-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – see Note 1) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
2 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)

APPENDIX E E.2 DNP IMPLEMENTATION TABLE

34 2 32-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
con’t (default – see Note 1) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
2 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
3 Short floating point Analog Input Reporting 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Deadband 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
50 0 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
17, 28 (index)
1 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – see Note 1) 2 (write) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index)
07 (limited qty=1) (see Note 2)
08 (limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 (response) 07 (limited qty)
(qty = 1)
60 0 Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
20 (enable unsol)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class) E
1 Class 0 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
22 (assign class)
20 (enable unsol) 07, 08 (limited qty)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
80 1 Internal Indications 2 (write) 00 (start-stop)
(index must =7)
--- No Object (function code only) 13 (cold restart)
see Note 3
--- No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart)
--- No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.)

E.3 DNP POINT LISTS APPENDIX E
E.3 DNP POINT LISTS E.3.1 BINARY INPUT POINTS
The tables in the following sections identify all the individual data points provided by this implementation of the DNP 3.0
protocol.
BINARY INPUT POINTS

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: 8 times per power system cycle
Change Event Buffer Size: 1000
Table E–3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 1 of 9) Table E–3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 2 of 9)
POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION CHANGE EVENT POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION CHANGE EVENT
INDEX CLASS (1/2/3/NONE) INDEX CLASS (1/2/3/NONE)
0 Virtual Input 1 2 32 Virtual Output 1 2
E 2
3
Virtual Input 3
Virtual Input 4
2
2
34
35
Virtual Output 3
Virtual Output 4
2
2

APPENDIX E E.3 DNP POINT LISTS
64 Virtual Output 33 2 115 Contact Input 20 1
85 Virtual Output 54 2 136 Contact Input 41 1 E
96 Contact Input 1 1 147 Contact Input 52 1

166 Contact Input 71 1 217 Contact Output 26 1
E 187 Contact Input 92 1 238 Contact Output 47 1
192 Contact Output 1 1 243 Contact Output 52 1
205 Contact Output 14 1 256 Remote Input 1 1

268 Remote Input 13 1 518 DIR POWER1 Element OP 1
269 Remote Input 14 1 519 DIR POWER2 Element OP 1
270 Remote Input 15 1 564 MOTOR Element OP 1
271 Remote Input 16 1 569 STATOR DIFF Element OP 1
272 Remote Input 17 1 628 AMP UNBALANCE 1 Elem. OP 1
273 Remote Input 18 1 629 AMP UNBALANCE 2 Elem. OP 1
274 Remote Input 19 1 640 SETTING GROUP Element OP 1
275 Remote Input 20 1 641 RESET Element OP 1
276 Remote Input 21 1 704 FLEXELEMENT 1 Element OP 1
288 Remote Device 1 1 716 FLEXELEMENT 13 Element OP 1
289 Remote Device 2 1 717 FLEXELEMENT 14 Element OP 1 E
292 Remote Device 5 1 816 DIG ELEM 1 Element OP 1
304 PHASE IOC1 Element OP 1 828 DIG ELEM 13 Element OP 1
305 PHASE IOC2 Element OP 1 829 DIG ELEM 14 Element OP 1
336 NEUTRAL IOC1 Element OP 1 830 DIG ELEM 15 Element OP 1
337 NEUTRAL IOC2 Element OP 1 831 DIG ELEM 16 Element OP 1
368 GROUND IOC1 Element OP 1 848 COUNTER 1 Element OP 1
369 GROUND IOC2 Element OP 1 849 COUNTER 2 Element OP 1
384 GROUND TOC1 Element OP 1 850 COUNTER 3 Element OP 1
385 GROUND TOC2 Element OP 1 851 COUNTER 4 Element OP 1
424 NEG SEQ OV Element OP 1 852 COUNTER 5 Element OP 1
444 AUX UV1 Element OP 1 853 COUNTER 6 Element OP 1
448 PHASE UV1 Element OP 1 854 COUNTER 7 Element OP 1
449 PHASE UV2 Element OP 1 855 COUNTER 8 Element OP 1
452 AUX OV1 Element OP 1 864 LED State 1 (IN SERVICE) 1
456 PHASE OV1 Element OP 1 865 LED State 2 (TROUBLE) 1
460 NEUTRAL OV1 Element OP 1 866 LED State 3 (TEST MODE) 1

Table E–3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 9 of 9)

POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION CHANGE EVENT
INDEX CLASS (1/2/3/NONE)
867 LED State 4 (TRIP) 1
868 LED State 5 (ALARM) 1
869 LED State 6(PICKUP) 1
880 LED State 9 (VOLTAGE) 1
881 LED State 10 (CURRENT) 1
882 LED State 11 (FREQUENCY) 1
883 LED State 12 (OTHER) 1
884 LED State 13 (PHASE A) 1
885 LED State 14 (PHASE B) 1
886 LED State 15 (PHASE C) 1
887 LED State 16 (NTL/GROUND) 1
899 BATTERY FAIL 1
900 PRI ETHERNET FAIL 1
901 SEC ETHERNET FAIL 1
902 EPROM DATA ERROR 1
903 SRAM DATA ERROR 1
904 PROGRAM MEMORY 1
905 WATCHDOG ERROR 1
906 LOW ON MEMORY 1
907 REMOTE DEVICE OFF 1
910 Any Major Error 1
E 911 Any Minor Error 1
912 Any Self-Tests 1
913 IRIG-B FAILURE 1
914 DSP ERROR 1
915 Not Used
916 NO DSP INTERUPTS 1
917 UNIT NOT CALIBRATED 1
921 PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE 1
922 FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN 1
923 EQUIPMENT MISMATCH 1
925 UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED 1
926 SYSTEM EXCEPTION 1

E.3.2 BINARY OUTPUT AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT
Supported Control Relay Output Block fields: Pulse On, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off, Paired Trip, Paired Close.
BINARY OUTPUT STATUS POINTS

Object Number: 10
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCKS
Object Number: 12
Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate),6 (direct operate, noack)
Table E–4: BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUT POINT LIST

POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION
INDEX
0 Virtual Input 1
1 Virtual Input 2
2 Virtual Input 3
3 Virtual Input 4
4 Virtual Input 5
5 Virtual Input 6 E
6 Virtual Input 7
7 Virtual Input 8
8 Virtual Input 9
9 Virtual Input 10
10 Virtual Input 11
11 Virtual Input 12
12 Virtual Input 13
13 Virtual Input 14
14 Virtual Input 15
15 Virtual Input 16
16 Virtual Input 17
17 Virtual Input 18
18 Virtual Input 19
19 Virtual Input 20
20 Virtual Input 21
21 Virtual Input 22
22 Virtual Input 23
23 Virtual Input 24
24 Virtual Input 25
25 Virtual Input 26
26 Virtual Input 27
27 Virtual Input 28
28 Virtual Input 29
29 Virtual Input 30
30 Virtual Input 31
31 Virtual Input 32

E.3.3 COUNTERS
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is per-
formed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
BINARY COUNTERS
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack), 9 (freeze and clear),
10 (freeze and clear, noack), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Binary Counter with Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Counter Change Event without time)
Default Class for all points: 2
FROZEN COUNTERS
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag)
E Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without time)
Default Class for all points: 2
Table E–5: BINARY and FROZEN COUNTERS Table E–5: BINARY and FROZEN COUNTERS
POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION
INDEX INDEX
0 Digital Counter 1 7 Digital Counter 8
1 Digital Counter 2 8 Oscillography Trigger Count
2 Digital Counter 3 9 Events Since Last Clear
3 Digital Counter 4
Note that a counter freeze command has no meaning for
4 Digital Counter 5
counters 8 and 9.
5 Digital Counter 6
6 Digital Counter 7

E.3.4 ANALOG INPUTS
The following table lists Analog Inputs (Object 30). It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of Analog Inputs
are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers. Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the
maximum positive representation is 32767. This is a DNP requirement.
The deadbands for all Analog Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity. For example, an Analog Input
quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts. This is in conformance with DNP Technical Bul-
letin 9809-001 Analog Input Reporting Deadband. Relay settings are available to set default deadband values according to
data type. Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set using DNP Object 34.
When using the UR in DNP systems with limited memory, the ANALOG INPUT POINTS LIST below may be replaced with
a user-definable list. This user-definable list uses the same settings as the Modbus User Map and can be configured with
the MODBUS USER MAP settings. When used with DNP, each entry in the Modbus User Map represents the starting Mod-
bus address of a data item available as a DNP Analog Input point. To enable use of the Modbus User Map for DNP Analog
Input points, set the USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting to Enabled (this setting is in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICA-
TIONS DNP PROTOCOL menu). The new DNP Analog points list can be checked via the "DNP Analog Input Points List"
webpage, accessible from the "Device Information menu" webpage.
After changing the USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting, the relay must be powered off and then back on for the set-
ting to take effect.
NOTE
Only Source 1 data points are shown in the following table. If the NUMBER OF SOURCES IN ANALOG LIST setting is increased,
data points for subsequent sources will be added to the list immediately following the Source 1 data points.
Units for Analog Input points are as follows:
• Current: A • Energy Wh, varh
• Voltage: V • Frequency: Hz
E
• Real Power: W • Angle: degrees
• Reactive Power: var • Ohm Input: Ohms
• Apparent Power: VA • RTD Input: degrees C
Table E–6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 1 of 4) Table E–6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 2 of 4)
POINT DESCRIPTION POINT DESCRIPTION
0 SRC 1 Phase A Current RMS 18 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle
1 SRC 1 Phase B Current RMS 19 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude
2 SRC 1 Phase C Current RMS 20 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle
3 SRC 1 Neutral Current RMS 21 SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude
4 SRC 1 Phase A Current Magnitude 22 SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Angle
5 SRC 1 Phase A Current Angle 23 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS
6 SRC 1 Phase B Current Magnitude 24 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS
7 SRC 1 Phase B Current Angle 25 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS
8 SRC 1 Phase C Current Magnitude 26 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude
9 SRC 1 Phase C Current Angle 27 SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle
10 SRC 1 Neutral Current Magnitude 28 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude
11 SRC 1 Neutral Current Angle 29 SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle
12 SRC 1 Ground Current RMS 30 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude
13 SRC 1 Ground Current Magnitude 31 SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle
14 SRC 1 Ground Current Angle 32 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage RMS
15 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude 33 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage RMS
16 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle 34 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage RMS
17 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude 35 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude

Table E–6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 3 of 4) Table E–6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 4 of 4)
POINT DESCRIPTION POINT DESCRIPTION
36 SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Angle 85 Tracking Frequency
37 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude 86 FlexElement 1 Actual
38 SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Angle 87 FlexElement 2 Actual
39 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude 88 FlexElement 3 Actual
40 SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Angle 89 FlexElement 4 Actual
41 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS 90 FlexElement 5 Actual
42 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude 91 FlexElement 6 Actual
43 SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle 92 FlexElement 7 Actual
44 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude 93 FlexElement 8 Actual
45 SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle 94 FlexElement 9 Actual
46 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude 95 FlexElement 10 Actual
47 SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle 96 FlexElement 11 Actual
48 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude 97 FlexElement 12 Actual
49 SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle 98 FlexElement 13 Actual
50 SRC 1 Three Phase Real Power 99 FlexElement 14 Actual
51 SRC 1 Phase A Real Power 100 FlexElement 15 Actual
52 SRC 1 Phase B Real Power 101 FlexElement 16 Actual
53 SRC 1 Phase C Real Power 102 Current Setting Group
54 SRC 1 Three Phase Reactive Power 103 Amp Unbalance
55 SRC 1 Phase A Reactive Power
E 56
57
SRC 1 Phase B Reactive Power
SRC 1 Phase C Reactive Power
58 SRC 1 Three Phase Apparent Power
59 SRC 1 Phase A Apparent Power
60 SRC 1 Phase B Apparent Power
61 SRC 1 Phase C Apparent Power
62 SRC 1 Three Phase Power Factor
63 SRC 1 Phase A Power Factor
64 SRC 1 Phase B Power Factor
65 SRC 1 Phase C Power Factor
66 SRC 1 Positive Watthour
67 SRC 1 Negative Watthour
68 SRC 1 Positive Varhour
69 SRC 1 Negative Varhour
70 SRC 1 Frequency
71 Stator Differential Iad
72 Stator Restraint Iar
73 Stator Differential Ibd
74 Stator Restraint Ibr
75 Stator Differential Icd
76 Stator Restraint Icr
77 Sens Dir Power 1 Actual
78 Sens Dir Power 2 Actual
79 Thermal Model Capacity Used
80 Thermal Model Trip Time On Overload
81 Thermal Model Lockout Time
82 Thermal Model Load
83 Thermal Model Motor Unbalance
84 Thermal Model Biased Motor Load

APPENDIX F F.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX F REVISIONSF.1 CHANGE NOTES F.1.1 REVISION HISTORY
Table F–1: REVISION HISTORY

MANUAL P/N M60 REVISION RELEASE DATE ECO
1601-0108-B1 2.6X 09 March 2001 URM-001
1601-0108-B2 2.8X 12 October 2001 URM-002
1601-0108-B3 2.9X 03 December 2001 URM-003
F.1.2 CHANGES TO M60 MANUAL
Table F–2: MAJOR UPDATES FOR M60 MANUAL B3

PAGE CHANGE DESCRIPTION
(B4)
Title Update Manual part number from B4 to B5
5-21 Update Updated FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS table
B-11 Update Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP to reflect changes to 2.8X firmware
Table F–3: MAJOR UPDATES FOR M60 MANUAL-B2

PAGE CHANGE DESCRIPTION
(B1)
Title Update Manual part number from B1 to B2
2-1 Updated Updated SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM to drawing number 833708A4

2-2 Update Updated DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS table
2-4 Update Updated ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES table
2-6 Add Added specifications for SENSTIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER, NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE,
AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE, and AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE elements
F
4-7 Update Updated LED INDICATORS section
5-10 Update Updated COMMUNICATIONS section

5-33 Update Updated FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS table
5-46 Add Added FLEXELEMENTS™ settings section
5-47 Update Updated SETTING GROUP 1(8) menu
5-48 Update Updated THERMAL MODEL section
5-63 Add Added SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER settings section
5-71 Remove Removed PHASE TOC sub-section
5-83 Add Added NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE sub-section
5-84 Add Added AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE sub-section
5-84 Add Added AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE sub-section
6-16 Add Added FLEXELEMENTS™ actual values section
8-1 Update Updated PRODUCT SETUP commissioning table

8-13 Update Updated FLEXLOGIC™ commissioning table
8-22 Update Updated GROUPED ELEMENTS commissioning table
B-1 Update Several small corrections/changes to the MODBUS appendix

B-11 Update Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP to reflect change to 2.8X firmware
E-1 Update Several small corrections/changes to the DNP appendix
GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay F-1

F.2 FIGURES AND TABLES APPENDIX F
F.2 FIGURES AND TABLES F.2.1 LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1–1: REAR NAME-PLATE (EXAMPLE)................................................................................................................................... 1-1

Figure 1–2: UR CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM .................................................................................................................................. 1-3
Figure 1–3: UR SCAN OPERATION................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Figure 1–4: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS ......................................................................................................................... 1-8
Figure 2–1: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM ................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
Figure 3–1: UR HORIZONTAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS....................................................................................................... 3-1
Figure 3–2: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION ..................................................................................................................... 3-2
Figure 3–3: REAR TERMINAL VIEW.................................................................................................................................................. 3-3
Figure 3–4: EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F & H SLOTS.................................................................................................................... 3-3
Figure 3–5: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM .......................................................................................................................................... 3-4
Figure 3–6: CONTROL POWER CONNECTION................................................................................................................................ 3-6
Figure 3–7: ZERO-SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE CT INSTALLATION ............................................................................................ 3-7
Figure 3–8: CT/VT MODULE WIRING ................................................................................................................................................ 3-7
Figure 3–9: CT MODULE WIRING ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-7
Figure 3–10: FORM-A CONTACT FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................................ 3-9
Figure 3–11: DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING (SHEET 1 OF 2) ....................................................................................................... 3-12
Figure 3–12: DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING (SHEET 2 OF 2) ....................................................................................................... 3-13
Figure 3–13: DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS .................................................................................................. 3-14
Figure 3–14: TRANSDUCER I/O MODULE WIRING ....................................................................................................................... 3-15
Figure 3–15: RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION ................................................................................................................ 3-16
Figure 3–16: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING ............................................................................................................ 3-16
Figure 3–17: RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION ................................................................................................................................... 3-17
Figure 3–18: IRIG-B CONNECTION ................................................................................................................................................. 3-18
Figure 4–1: URPC SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW............................................................................................................................... 4-3
Figure 4–2: UR HORIZONTAL FACEPLATE PANELS ...................................................................................................................... 4-4
Figure 4–3: LED PANEL 1 .................................................................................................................................................................. 4-4
Figure 4–4: LED PANELS 2 AND 3 (INDEX TEMPLATES) ............................................................................................................... 4-5
Figure 4–5: LED PANEL CUSTOMIZATION TEMPLATES (EXAMPLE)............................................................................................ 4-7
Figure 4–6: KEYPAD .......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-7
Figure 5–1: BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME................................................................................................................................. 5-5
Figure 5–2: EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES ..................................................................................................................................... 5-25
Figure 5–3: UR ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................ 5-29
Figure 5–4: EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME ......................................................................................................................................... 5-35
F Figure 5–5: LOGIC EXAMPLE WITH VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ............................................................................................................. 5-36
Figure 5–6: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 ................................................................................................................................ 5-36
Figure 5–7: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 ................................................................................................................................ 5-36
Figure 5–8: FLEXLOGIC™ WORKSHEET ....................................................................................................................................... 5-37
Figure 5–9: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION & LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 ................................................................................ 5-38
Figure 5–10: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION & LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 .............................................................................. 5-39
Figure 5–11: FLEXELEMENT™ SCHEME LOGIC........................................................................................................................... 5-42
Figure 5–12: FLEXELEMENT™ DIRECTION, PICKUP, AND HYSTERESIS .................................................................................. 5-43
Figure 5–13: FLEXELEMENT™ INPUT MODE SETTING ............................................................................................................... 5-43
Figure 5–14: STANDARD MOTOR CURVES ................................................................................................................................... 5-49
Figure 5–15: FLEXCURVE EXAMPLE ............................................................................................................................................. 5-50
Figure 5–16: MEDIUM MOTOR DERATING FACTOR DUE TO UNBALANCED VOLTAGE .......................................................... 5-51
Figure 5–17: THERMAL MODEL COOLING .................................................................................................................................... 5-52
Figure 5–18: RTD BIAS CURVE ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-54
Figure 5–19: THERMAL MODEL LOGIC DIAGRAM ........................................................................................................................ 5-55
Figure 5–20: AMP UNBALANCE LOGIC .......................................................................................................................................... 5-57
Figure 5–21: STATOR DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC ........................................................................................................... 5-58
Figure 5–22: STATOR DIFFERENTIAL LOGIC................................................................................................................................ 5-59
Figure 5–23: SATURATION DETECTOR STATE MACHINE ........................................................................................................... 5-60
Figure 5–24: STATOR DIFFERENTIAL FINAL OUTPUT LOGIC..................................................................................................... 5-61
Figure 5–25: DIRECTIONAL POWER CHARACTERISTIC.............................................................................................................. 5-62
Figure 5–26: DIRECTIONAL POWER ELEMENT SAMPLE APPLICATIONS ................................................................................. 5-63
Figure 5–27: DIRECTIONAL POWER SCHEME LOGIC.................................................................................................................. 5-64
Figure 5–28: PHASE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC................................................................................................................................... 5-71
Figure 5–29: NEUTRAL IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC .............................................................................................................................. 5-72
Figure 5–30: GROUND TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC .............................................................................................................................. 5-73
Figure 5–31: GROUND IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC ............................................................................................................................... 5-74
Figure 5–32: INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES ............................................................................................................. 5-75
Figure 5–33: PHASE UV1 SCHEME LOGIC .................................................................................................................................... 5-76
F-2 M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

APPENDIX F F.2 FIGURES AND TABLES
Figure 5–34: PHASE OV1 SCHEME LOGIC .................................................................................................................................... 5-77

Figure 5–35: NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC ........................................................................................................... 5-78
Figure 5–36: NEG SEQ OV SCHEME LOGIC.................................................................................................................................. 5-79
Figure 5–37: AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC....................................................................................................... 5-80
Figure 5–38: AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC ......................................................................................................... 5-81
Figure 5–39: EXAMPLE FLEXLOGIC™ CONTROL OF A SETTINGS GROUP .............................................................................. 5-82
Figure 5–40: DIGITAL ELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC ........................................................................................................................ 5-83
Figure 5–41: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 1 ........................................................................................................................................ 5-84
Figure 5–42: TRIP CIRCUIT - EXAMPLE 2 ...................................................................................................................................... 5-85
Figure 5–43: DIGITAL COUNTER SCHEME LOGIC........................................................................................................................ 5-87
Figure 5–44: INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME-STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING .................................... 5-89
Figure 5–45: VIRTUAL INPUTS SCHEME LOGIC ........................................................................................................................... 5-90
Figure 6–1: FLOW DIRECTION OF SIGNED VALUES FOR WATTS AND VARS ............................................................................ 6-7
Figure 6–2: UR PHASE ANGLE MEASURING CONVENTION.......................................................................................................... 6-8
Figure 6–3: ILLUSTRATION OF UR CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS............................................................ 6-9
F.2.2 LIST OF TABLES
Table: 2–1 DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................................................... 2-2

Table: 2–2 OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS ......................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Table: 2–3 ORDER CODES .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-3
Table: 2–4 ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES ...................................................................................................... 2-4
Table: 3–1 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH OF UR MODULE HARDWARE ............................................................................................. 3-5
Table: 3–2 CONTROL POWER VOLTAGE RANGE .......................................................................................................................... 3-5
Table: 3–3 DIGITAL I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENTS......................................................................................................................... 3-10
Table: 3–4 CPU COMMUNICATION PORT OPTIONS .................................................................................................................... 3-16
Table: 5–1 OSCILLOGRAPHY CYCLES/RECORD EXAMPLE ....................................................................................................... 5-17
Table: 5–6 RECOMMENDED SETTINGS FOR LED PANEL 2 LABELS ........................................................................................ 5-18
Table: 5–9 FLEXCURVE™ TABLE................................................................................................................................................... 5-28
Table: 5–10 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERAND TYPES ............................................................................................................................. 5-30
Table: 5–11 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS ......................................................................................................................................... 5-31
Table: 5–12 FLEXLOGIC™ GATE CHARACTERISTICS................................................................................................................. 5-33
Table: 5–13 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERATORS ..................................................................................................................................... 5-34
Table: 5–14 FLEXELEMENT™ BASE UNITS .................................................................................................................................. 5-44
Table: 5–15 M60 STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVE MULTIPLIERS ............................................................................................... 5-48
Table: 5–16 OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES ................................................................................................................................ 5-66 F
Table: 5–17 IEEE INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS............................................................................................................... 5-67
Table: 5–18 IEEE CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS) ................................................................................................................. 5-67
Table: 5–19 IEC (BS) INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS......................................................................................................... 5-68
Table: 5–20 IEC CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS).................................................................................................................... 5-68
Table: 5–21 GE TYPE IAC INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS ................................................................................................ 5-69
Table: 5–22 IAC CURVE TRIP TIMES ............................................................................................................................................. 5-69
Table: 5–23 I2t CURVE TRIP TIMES................................................................................................................................................ 5-70
Table: 5–24 VALUES OF RESISTOR ‘R’ ......................................................................................................................................... 5-85
Table: 5–25 UCA DNA2 ASSIGNMENTS......................................................................................................................................... 5-94
Table: 6–1 CALCULATING VOLTAGE SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS EXAMPLE ....................................................................... 6-9
Table: 6–2 FLEXELEMENT™ BASE UNITS .................................................................................................................................... 6-14
Table: 7–1 TARGET MESSAGE PRIORITY STATUS........................................................................................................................ 7-3
Table: 7–2 MAJOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES ...................................................................................................................... 7-4
Table: 7–3 MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES....................................................................................................................... 7-4
Table: 8–1 PRODUCT SETUP ......................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
Table: 8–2 SYSTEM SETUP .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-8
Table: 8–5 FLEXLOGIC™ ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-12
Table: 8–6 GROUPED ELEMENTS.................................................................................................................................................. 8-21
Table: 8–7 CONTROL ELEMENTS .................................................................................................................................................. 8-24
Table: 8–8 CONTACT INPUTS......................................................................................................................................................... 8-27
Table: 8–9 VIRTUAL INPUTS........................................................................................................................................................... 8-28
Table: 8–10 UCA SBO TIMER.......................................................................................................................................................... 8-28
Table: 8–11 CONTACT OUTPUTS................................................................................................................................................... 8-29
Table: 8–12 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS..................................................................................................................................................... 8-30
Table: 8–13 REMOTE DEVICES ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-31
Table: 8–14 REMOTE INPUTS......................................................................................................................................................... 8-32

F.2 FIGURES AND TABLES APPENDIX F
Table: 8–15 REMOTE OUTPUTS..................................................................................................................................................... 8-33

Table: 8–16 DCMA INPUTS ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-34
Table: 8–17 RTD INPUTS................................................................................................................................................................. 8-35
Table: 8–18 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS ......................................................................................................................................... 8-36
Table: 8–19 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ..................................................................................................................................... 8-36
Table: A–1 FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS ........................................................................................................................................A-1
Table: B–1 MODBUS PACKET FORMAT ..........................................................................................................................................B-1
Table: B–2 CRC-16 ALGORITHM ......................................................................................................................................................B-3
Table: B–3 MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE .........................................................................B-4
Table: B–5 SUMMARY OF OPERATION CODES (FUNCTION CODE 05H) ....................................................................................B-5
Table: B–9 MODBUS MEMORY MAP ................................................................................................................................................B-9
Table: C–1 DEVICE IDENTITY – DI ...................................................................................................................................................C-3
Table: C–2 GENERIC CONTROL – GCTL .........................................................................................................................................C-3
Table: C–3 GENERIC INDICATOR – GIND .......................................................................................................................................C-4
Table: C–4 PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS ..............................................................................................................................................C-4
Table: C–5 GLOBAL DATA – GLOBE ................................................................................................................................................C-5
Table: C–6 MEASUREMENT UNIT (POLYPHASE) – MMXU ............................................................................................................C-5
Table: C–7 CT RATIO INFORMATION – ctRATO ..............................................................................................................................C-5
Table: C–8 VT RATIO INFORMATION – vtRATO ..............................................................................................................................C-6
Table: C–9 RECLOSING RELAY – RREC .........................................................................................................................................C-6
Table: D–1 IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS................................................................................................................................................D-1
Table: E–1 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE .........................................................................................................................................E-1
Table: E–2 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE .............................................................................................................................................E-4
Table: E–3 BINARY INPUTS ..............................................................................................................................................................E-8
Table: E–4 BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUT POINT LIST ...................................................................................................................E-13
Table: E–5 BINARY and FROZEN COUNTERS ..............................................................................................................................E-14
Table: E–6 ANALOG INPUT POINTS...............................................................................................................................................E-15
Table: F–1 REVISION HISTORY ........................................................................................................................................................ F-1
Table: F–2 MAJOR UPDATES FOR M60 MANUAL-B2 ..................................................................................................................... F-1

APPENDIX F F.3 ABBREVIATIONS
F.3 ABBREVIATIONS F.3.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS
A..................... ampere GOOSE...........general object oriented substation event

AC .................. alternating current
A/D ................. analog to digital HARM .............harmonic / harmonics
AE .................. accidental energization HGF ................high-impedance ground fault (CT)
AE .................. application entity HIZ ..................high-impedance & arcing ground
AMP ............... ampere HMI .................human-machine interface
ANSI............... American National Standards Institute HYB ................hybrid
AR .................. automatic reclosure
AUTO ............. automatic I.......................instantaneous
AUX................ auxiliary I_0...................zero sequence current
AVG................ average I_1...................positive sequence current
I_2...................negative sequence current
BER................ bit error rate IA ....................phase A current
BF................... breaker fail IAB ..................phase A minus B current
BFI.................. breaker failure initiate IB ....................phase B current
BKR................ breaker IBC..................phase B minus C current
BLK ................ block IC ....................phase C current
BLKG.............. blocking ICA..................phase C minus A current
BPNT.............. breakpoint of a characteristic ID ....................identification
IEEE................Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers
IG ....................ground (not residual) current
CAP................ capacitor Igd...................differential ground current
CC .................. coupling capacitor IN ....................CT residual current (3Io) or input
CCVT ............. coupling capacitor voltage transformer INC SEQ .........incomplete sequence
CFG................ configure / configurable INIT .................initiate
.CFG............... file name extension for oscillography files INST................instantaneous
CHK................ check INV..................inverse
CHNL ............. channel I/O ...................input/output
CLS ................ close IOC .................instantaneous overcurrent
CLSD.............. closed IOV..................instantaneous overvoltage
CMND ............ command IRIG ................inter-range instrumentation group
CMPRSN........ comparison IUV..................instantaneous undervoltage
CO.................. contact output
COM............... communication K0 ...................zero sequence current compensation
COMM............ communications kA....................kiloAmpere
COMP ............ compensated kV....................kiloVolt
CONN............. connection
CO-ORD......... coordination LED.................light emitting diode
CPU................ central processing unit LEO.................line end open
CRT, CRNT .... current LOOP..............loopback
CT .................. current transformer LPU.................line pickup
CVT ................ capacitive voltage transformer LRA.................locked-rotor current
LTC .................load tap-changer
F
D/A ................. digital to analog
DC (dc)........... direct current M.....................machine
DD .................. disturbance detector mA ..................milliAmpere
DFLT .............. default MAN................manual / manually
DGNST........... diagnostics MMI.................man machine interface
DI.................... digital input MMS ...............Manufacturing Message Specification
DIFF ............... differential MSG................message
DIR ................. directional MTA ................maximum torque angle
DISCREP ....... discrepancy MTR ................motor
DIST ............... distance MVA ................MegaVolt-Ampere (total 3-phase)
DMD ............... demand MVA_A ............MegaVolt-Ampere (phase A)
DPO ............... dropout MVA_B ............MegaVolt-Ampere (phase B)
DSP................ digital signal processor MVA_C............MegaVolt-Ampere (phase C)
DTT ................ direct transfer trip MVAR..............MegaVar (total 3-phase)
DUTT.............. direct under-reaching transfer trip MVAR_A .........MegaVar (phase A)
MVAR_B .........MegaVar (phase B)
EPRI............... Electric Power Research Institute MVAR_C .........MegaVar (phase C)
.EVT ............... file name extension for event recorder files MVARH ...........MegaVar-Hour
EXT ................ extension MW .................MegaWatt (total 3-phase)
MW_A .............MegaWatt (phase A)
F ..................... field MW_B .............MegaWatt (phase B)
FAIL................ failure MW_C.............MegaWatt (phase C)
FD .................. fault detector MWH...............MegaWatt-Hour
FDH................ fault detector high-set
FDL ................ fault detector low-set N .....................neutral
FLA................. full load current N/A, n/a...........not applicable
FO .................. fiber optic NEG ................negative
FREQ ............. frequency NMPLT ............nameplate
FSK ................ frequency-shift keying NOM ...............nominal
FWD ............... forward NTR ................neutral
G .................... generator O .....................over

GE .................. General Electric OC, O/C ..........overcurrent
GND ............... ground O/P, Op ...........output
GNTR ............. generator OP...................operate

F.3 ABBREVIATIONS APPENDIX F
OPER ............. operate SUPV ............. supervise / supervision

OPERATG ...... operating SV .................. supervision
O/S ................. operating system SYNCHCHK... synchrocheck
OSB................ out-of-step blocking
OUT................ output T..................... time, transformer
OV .................. overvoltage TC .................. thermal capacity
OVERFREQ ... overfrequency TD MULT........ time dial multiplier
OVLD ............. overload TEMP............. temperature
THD ............... total harmonic distortion
P..................... phase TOC ............... time overcurrent
PC .................. phase comparison, personal computer TOV................ time overvoltage
PCNT ............. percent TRANS........... transient
PF................... power factor (total 3-phase) TRANSF ........ transfer
PF_A .............. power factor (phase A) TSEL .............. transport selector
PF_B .............. power factor (phase B) TUC ............... time undercurrent
PF_C .............. power factor (phase C) TUV................ time undervoltage
PHS ................ phase TX (Tx)........... transmit, transmitter
PKP ................ pickup
PLC ................ power line carrier U .................... under
POS................ positive UC.................. undercurrent
POTT.............. permissive over-reaching transfer trip UCA ............... Utility Communications Architecture
PRESS ........... pressure UNBAL........... unbalance
PROT ............. protection UR.................. universal relay
PSEL .............. presentation selector .URS .............. file name extension for settings files
pu ................... per unit UV .................. undervoltage
PUIB............... pickup current block
PUIT ............... pickup current trip V/Hz ............... Volts per Hertz
PUTT .............. permissive under-reaching transfer trip V_0 ................ zero sequence voltage
PWM .............. pulse width modulated V_1 ................ positive sequence voltage
PWR............... power V_2 ................ negative sequence voltage
VA .................. phase A voltage
R..................... rate, reverse VAB ................ phase A to B voltage
REM ............... remote VAG................ phase A to ground voltage
REV ................ reverse VARH ............. var-hour voltage
RI.................... reclose initiate VB .................. phase B voltage
RIP ................. reclose in progress VBA................ phase B to A voltage
ROD ............... remote open detector VBG ............... phase B to ground voltage
RST ................ reset VC .................. phase C voltage
RSTR ............. restrained VCA ............... phase C to A voltage
RTD ................ resistance temperature detector VCG ............... phase C to ground voltage
RTU ................ remote terminal unit VF .................. variable frequency
RX (Rx) .......... receive, receiver VIBR .............. vibration
VT .................. voltage transformer
F s ..................... second
S..................... sensitive
SAT ................ CT saturation
VTFF .............. voltage transformer fuse failure
VTLOS ........... voltage transformer loss of signal
SBO................ select before operate WDG .............. winding

SEL ................ select / selector / selection WH................. Watt-hour
SENS ............. sensitive w/ opt ............. with option
SEQ................ sequence WRT............... with respect to
SIR ................. source impedance ratio
SRC................ source X .................... reactance
SSB ................ single side band XDUCER........ transducer
SSEL .............. session selector XFMR............. transformer
STATS ............ statistics
SUPN ............. supervision Z..................... impedance

APPENDIX F F.4 WARRANTY
F.4 WARRANTY F.4.1 GE POWER MANAGEMENT WARRANTY
GE POWER MANAGEMENT RELAY WARRANTY

General Electric Power Management Inc. (GE Power Management) warrants each relay it manufac-
tures to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a
period of 24 months from date of shipment from factory.
In the event of a failure covered by warranty, GE Power Management will undertake to repair or
replace the relay providing the warrantor determined that it is defective and it is returned with all
transportation charges prepaid to an authorized service centre or the factory. Repairs or replace-
ment under warranty will be made without charge.
Warranty shall not apply to any relay which has been subject to misuse, negligence, accident,
incorrect installation or use not in accordance with instructions nor any unit that has been altered
outside a GE Power Management authorized factory outlet.
GE Power Management is not liable for special, indirect or consequential damages or for loss of
F
profit or for expenses sustained as a result of a relay malfunction, incorrect application or adjust-
ment.
For complete text of Warranty (including limitations and disclaimers), refer to GE Power Manage-
ment Standard Conditions of Sale.

F.4 WARRANTY APPENDIX F

INDEX
INDEX
Numerics C
10BASE-F CE APPROVALS ................................................................ 2-9
communications options ................................................. 3-15 CHANGES TO L60 MANUAL ...............................................F-1
description .................................................................... 3-17 CHANNELS
redundant option ........................................................... 3-15 banks ................................................................... 5-22, 5-23
settings ........................................................................... 5-9 CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS ........................... 5-84
specifications .................................................................. 2-9 CLEANING ......................................................................... 2-9
CLEAR RECORDS ............................................................. 7-1
CLOCK
commissioning .................................................................8-1
A Modbus registers .......................................................... B-16
ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................... F-5 setting date and time ........................................................ 7-2
AC CURRENT INPUTS .......................................2-7, 3-6, 5-22 settings ......................................................................... 5-15
AC VOLTAGE INPUTS ................................................ 2-7, 3-7 COMMANDS MENU ............................................................ 7-1
ACTIVATING THE RELAY ........................................1-10, 4-12 COMMISSIONING ............................................................ 1-10
ACTIVE SETTING GROUP ............................................... 5-46 COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................... 1-8
ACTUAL VALUES 10BASE-F ..................................................... 3-15, 3-17, 5-9
metering .......................................................................... 6-7 commissioning .................................................................8-1
product information ........................................................ 6-17 connecting to the UR ................................................. 1-6, 1-7
status .............................................................................. 6-3 CRC-16 error checking .................................................... B-3
ALARM LEDs ................................................................... 5-18 DNP .............................................................................. 5-10
ALTITUDE ......................................................................... 2-9 dnp .........................................................................5-15, E-1
AMP UNBALANCE half duplex ...................................................................... B-1
commissioning .............................................................. 8-21 HTTP ............................................................................. 5-13
logic .............................................................................. 5-57 IEC 60870-5-104 protocol ............................................... 5-14
settings ......................................................................... 5-56 Modbus .................................................. 5-10, 5-15, B-1, B-4
APPARENT POWER ................................................. 2-7, 6-13 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-15
APPLICATION EXAMPLES network ........................................................................... 5-9
breaker trip circuit integrity ............................................ 5-85 overview .......................................................................... 1-8
contact inputs ................................................................ 5-89 RS232 ........................................................................... 3-15
sensitive directional power ............................................. 5-63 RS485 ........................................................... 3-15, 3-16, 5-8
APPROVALS ..................................................................... 2-9 settings ................................. 5-8, 5-9, 5-10, 5-12, 5-14, 5-15
ARCHITECTURE ............................................................. 5-29 specifications ...................................................................2-9
AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE TFTP ............................................................................. 5-13
commissioning .............................................................. 8-22 UCA/MMS ............................5-12, 5-91, 5-92, 5-93, 5-94, C-1
logic .............................................................................. 5-81 web server ..................................................................... 5-13
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-36 COMTRADE ...................................................................... B-7
settings ......................................................................... 5-81 CONDUCTED RFI .............................................................. 2-9
specifications .................................................................. 2-6 CONTACT INFORMATION .................................................. 1-1
AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE CONTACT INPUTS
commissioning .............................................................. 8-23 actual values ...................................................................6-3
logic .............................................................................. 5-80 commissioning ............................................................... 8-27
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-36 dry connections ............................................................. 3-13
settings ......................................................................... 5-80 force contact inputs ........................................................ 8-36
specifications .................................................................. 2-6 Modbus registers ............................... B-10, B-13, B-27, B-28
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE CHANNEL ....................................... 3-7 module assignments ........................................................ 3-9
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING ................................... 6-12 settings ......................................................................... 5-88
specifications ...................................................................2-7
thresholds ..................................................................... 5-88
wet connections ............................................................. 3-13
B wiring ............................................................................ 3-11
CONTACT OUTPUTS
BANKS ............................................................. 5-5, 5-22, 5-23 actual values ...................................................................6-4
BATTERY FAIL .................................................................. 7-4 commissioning ............................................................... 8-29
BATTERY TAB ................................................................. 1-10 force contact outputs ...................................................... 8-36
BINARY INPUT POINTS ..................................................... E-8 Modbus registers ........................................ B-10, B-13, B-30
BINARY OUTPUT POINTS ............................................... E-13 module assignments ........................................................ 3-9
BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................. 1-3 settings ......................................................................... 5-91
BLOCK SETTING ............................................................... 5-3 wiring ............................................................................ 3-11
BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME ..................................... 5-5 CONTROL ELEMENTS ..................................................... 5-82
BRIGHTNESS .................................................................... 5-8 CONTROL POWER
connection diagram .......................................................... 3-5
description .......................................................................3-6
specifications ...................................................................2-8
GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay i

INDEX
COOL TIME CONSTANT ......................................... 5-47, 5-52 DIMENSIONS .................................................................... 3-1

COOLING ........................................................................ 5-52 DIRECTIONAL POWER
COUNTERS see entry for SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
actual values ................................................................... 6-6 DISPLAY ..............................................................1-8, 4-8, 5-8
commissioning ............................................................... 8-25 DISPLAY PROPERTIES
settings ......................................................................... 5-86 commissioning ................................................................ 8-1
CRC-16 ALGORITHM ........................................................ B-3 DNA-1 BIT PAIR ...............................................................5-94
CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY ................................................ 2-8 DNP COMMUNICATIONS
CSA APPROVAL ................................................................ 2-9 binary counters ............................................................. E-14
CT BANKS ......................................................................... 8-8 binary input points ........................................................... E-8
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-18 binary output points ....................................................... E-13
settings ......................................................................... 5-22 commissioning ................................................................ 8-1
CT INPUTS ........................................................ 3-7, 5-5, 5-22 control relay output blocks ............................................. E-13
CT WIRING ........................................................................ 3-7 device profile document ................................................... E-1
CURRENT BANK ............................................................. 5-22 frozen counters ............................................................. E-14
CURRENT METERING implementation table ....................................................... E-4
actual values ................................................................. 6-11 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-16
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-11 settings ..........................................................................5-10
specifications ................................................................... 2-7 user map .......................................................................5-12
CURRENT UNBALANCE .................................................. 6-10 DUPLEX, HALF ................................................................. B-1
logic .............................................................................. 5-57
Modbus registers ..................................................B-21, B-26
settings ......................................................................... 5-56
CURVES E
definite time .......................................................... 5-70, 5-75 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ......................................... 2-9
FlexCurves™ ........................................................ 5-28, 5-70 ELEMENTS ....................................................................... 5-3
I2T ................................................................................ 5-70 ENERGY METERING
IAC ............................................................................... 5-69 actual values ..................................................................6-13
IEC ............................................................................... 5-68 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-13
IEEE ............................................................................. 5-67 specifications .................................................................. 2-7
inverse time undervoltage .............................................. 5-75 ENERGY METERING, CLEARING ...................................... 7-1
types ............................................................................. 5-66 EQUATIONS
definite time curve ................................................. 5-70, 5-75
FlexCurve™ ...................................................................5-70
D I²t curves .......................................................................5-70
IAC curves .....................................................................5-69
DATA FORMATS, MODBUS ............................................. B-37 IEC curves .....................................................................5-68
DATA LOGGER IEEE curves ...................................................................5-67
Modbus .......................................................................... B-7 ETHERNET
DATE ................................................................................. 7-2 actual values ................................................................... 6-6
DCMA INPUTS ................................................................. 6-15 configuration ................................................................... 1-6
commissioning ............................................................... 8-34 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-11
Modbus registers ..................................................B-14, B-23 settings ........................................................................... 5-9
settings ......................................................................... 5-96 specifications .................................................................. 2-9
specifications ................................................................... 2-8 EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS ............................................ 4-5
DEFINITE TIME CURVE .......................................... 5-70, 5-75 EVENT RECORDER
DESIGN ............................................................................. 1-3 actual values ..................................................................6-16
DEVICE ID ....................................................................... 5-93 clearing ........................................................................... 7-1
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT ......................................... E-1 Modbus ........................................................................... B-8
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ............................................ 2-9, 3-5 Modbus registers .................................................. B-13, B-14
DIFFERENTIAL specifications .................................................................. 2-7
stator ............................................................ 2-5, 5-58, 8-21 with URPC ...................................................................... 4-2
DIGITAL COUNTERS EVENTS SETTING ............................................................ 5-4
actual values ................................................................... 6-6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES ................................................. B-6
commissioning ............................................................... 8-25
logic .............................................................................. 5-87
Modbus registers ..................................................B-10, B-26
settings ......................................................................... 5-86 F
DIGITAL ELEMENTS F485 ................................................................................. 1-8
application example ....................................................... 5-84 FACEPLATE ...................................................................... 3-1
commissioning ............................................................... 8-24 FACEPLATE PANELS ................................................. 4-4, 4-7
logic .............................................................................. 5-83 FAST FORM-C RELAY ....................................................... 2-8
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-26 FAST TRANSIENT TESTING .............................................. 2-9
settings ......................................................................... 5-83 FAX NUMBERS ................................................................. 1-1
DIGITAL INPUTS FEATURES ....................................................................... 2-1
see entry for CONTACT INPUTS FIRMWARE REVISION .....................................................6-17
DIGITAL OUTPUTS FIRMWARE UPGRADES .................................................... 4-2
see entry for CONTACT OUTPUTS
ii M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

INDEX
FLA ................................................................................. 5-26

FLASH MESSAGES ........................................................... 5-8 G
FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
actual values ................................................................... 6-6 GE TYPE IAC CURVES .................................................... 5-69
commissioning ................................................................ 8-3 GOMSFE .......................................................................... C-1
Modbus registers ......................................... B-10, B-13, B-24 GOOSE .................................. 5-13, 5-92, 5-93, 5-94, 5-95, 6-5
settings ......................................................................... 5-19 GROUND CURRENT METERING ...................................... 6-11
specifications .................................................................. 2-6 GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
FLEXANALOG PARAMETER LIST ...................................... A-1 see entry for GROUND IOC
FLEXCURVES™ GROUND IOC
commissioning ......................................................8-10, 8-11 commissioning ............................................................... 8-22
equation ........................................................................ 5-70 logic .............................................................................. 5-74
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-18 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-20
settings ......................................................................... 5-28 settings ......................................................................... 5-74
specifications .................................................................. 2-6 specifications ...................................................................2-5
table ............................................................................. 5-28 GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT
FLEXELEMENTS™ see entry for GROUND TOC
actual values ................................................................. 6-14 GROUND TOC
commissioning .............................................................. 8-18 commissioning ............................................................... 8-22
direction ........................................................................ 5-44 logic .............................................................................. 5-73
hysteresis ..................................................................... 5-44 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-20
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-25 settings ......................................................................... 5-73
pickup ........................................................................... 5-44 specifications ...................................................................2-5
scheme logic ................................................................. 5-43 GROUPED ELEMENTS .................................................... 5-46
settings ........................................................ 5-42, 5-43, 5-45
specifications .................................................................. 2-6
FLEXLOGIC™ ................................................................. 1-10
commissioning .............................................................. 8-12 H
editing with URPC ........................................................... 4-1 HALF-DUPLEX .................................................................. B-1
equation editor ......................................................5-41, 8-12 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE ............................................1-3
evaluation ..................................................................... 5-36 HARMONIC CONTENT ..................................................... 6-11
example ................................................................5-29, 5-36 HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO ....................................... 5-53
example equation .......................................................... 5-82 HTTP PROTOCOL ..................................................... 5-13, 8-1
gate characteristics ....................................................... 5-34 HUMIDITY .......................................................................... 2-9
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-19
operands ...............................................................5-30, 5-31
operators ...................................................................... 5-35
rules ............................................................................. 5-35 I
specifications .................................................................. 2-6
I2T CURVES .................................................................... 5-70
timers ...................................................................5-41, 8-17
IAC CURVES ................................................................... 5-69
worksheet ..................................................................... 5-37
IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR .................................. 5-41
commissioning .................................................................8-1
FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS .................................................... 5-41
interoperability document ................................................ D-1
FORCE CONTACT INPUTS ......................................5-98, 8-36
Modbus registers .......................................................... B-16
FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ..................................5-98, 8-36
point list ....................................................................... D-10
FORCE TRIGGER ............................................................ 6-16
settings ......................................................................... 5-14
FORM-A RELAY
IEC CURVES ................................................................... 5-68
high impedance circuits ................................................... 3-9
IED .................................................................................... 1-2
outputs .............................................................3-8, 3-9, 3-13
IEEE CURVES ................................................................. 5-67
specifications .................................................................. 2-8
IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ................................................... 1-4
FORM-C RELAY
IN SERVICE INDICATOR ........................................... 1-10, 7-3
outputs ................................................................... 3-8, 3-13
INPUTS
specifications .................................................................. 2-8
AC current .............................................................. 2-7, 5-22
FREQUENCY
AC voltage .............................................................. 2-7, 5-23
actual values ................................................................. 6-13
contact inputs ........................................2-7, 3-11, 5-88, 5-98
settings ......................................................................... 5-24
DCMA inputs ...................................................................2-8
FREQUENCY METERING
dcmA inputs .......................................................... 3-14, 5-96
Modbus registers .................................................. B-13, B-24
IRIG-B .................................................................... 2-7, 3-17
specifications .................................................................. 2-7
remote inputs ........................................................ 5-92, 5-93
values ........................................................................... 6-13
RTD inputs .................................................... 2-8, 3-14, 5-97
FREQUENCY TRACKING ................................................. 5-24
virtual ............................................................................ 5-90
FREQUENCY, NOMINAL .................................................. 5-23
INSPECTION CHECKLIST .................................................. 1-1
FULL LOAD AMPS ........................................................... 5-26
INSTALLATION
FUNCTION SETTING ......................................................... 5-3
commissioning .................................................................8-7
FUSE ................................................................................ 2-8
communications ............................................................. 3-15
contact inputs/outputs .................................... 3-9, 3-11, 3-12
CT inputs ......................................................................... 3-7
GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay iii

INDEX
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-18 obtaining files ................................................................. B-7

RS485 ........................................................................... 3-16 oscillography ................................................................... B-7
settings ......................................................................... 5-21 passwords ...................................................................... B-8
software .......................................................................... 1-5 read/write settings/actual values ...................................... B-4
VT inputs ......................................................................... 3-6 settings ................................................................. 5-10, 5-15
INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT store multiple settings ..................................................... B-6
see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries store single setting .......................................................... B-5
INSULATION RESISTANCE ................................................ 2-9 supported function codes ................................................. B-4
INTELLIGENT ELECTRONIC DEVICE ................................. 1-2 user map .......................................................................5-15
INTRODUCTION ................................................................ 1-2 MODEL INFORMATION ....................................................6-17
INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE .................................... 5-75 MODIFICATION FILE NUMBER .........................................6-17
IOC ................................................................................... 2-5 MODULES
see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries communications .............................................................3-15
IP ADDRESS ..................................................................... 5-9 contact inputs/outputs .................................... 3-9, 3-11, 3-12
IRIG-B CT .................................................................................. 3-7
connection ..................................................................... 3-17 CT/VT ...................................................................... 3-6, 5-5
settings ......................................................................... 5-15 insertion .......................................................................... 3-2
specifications ................................................................... 2-7 order codes ..................................................................... 2-4
ISO-9000 REGISTRATION ................................................. 2-9 ordering .......................................................................... 2-4
power supply ................................................................... 3-5
transducer I/O ................................................................3-14
VT .................................................................................. 3-7
K withdrawal ...................................................................... 3-2
KEYPAD ..................................................................... 1-9, 4-8 MOTOR
actual values ........................................................... 6-3, 6-10
commissioning ................................................................ 8-9
metering ........................................................................6-10
L settings ................................................................. 5-26, 5-46
MOTOR COOLING ............................................................5-52
LAMPTEST ........................................................................ 7-2 MOTOR CURVES ........................................... 5-48, 5-49, 5-50
LED INDICATORS ....................................... 4-5, 4-6, 4-7, 5-18 MOTOR ELEMENTS
LOGIC GATES ................................................................. 5-35 commissioning ...............................................................8-21
LOST PASSWORD ............................................................. 5-7 MOTOR SETUP
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-21
MOUNTING ....................................................................... 3-1
M MOUNTING AND WIRING .................................................. 1-8
MAINTENANCE COMMANDS ............................................. 7-2

MANUFACTURING DATE ................................................. 6-17
MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS ......................................B-37 N
MENU NAMEPLATE ..................................................................... 1-1
hierarchy ......................................................................... 1-9 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE
navigation ........................................................................ 1-9 commissioning ...............................................................8-22
MENU HEIRARCHY .................................................... 1-9, 4-9 logic ..............................................................................5-79
MENU NAVIGATION .......................................... 1-9, 4-9, 4-10 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-21
METERING settings ..........................................................................5-79
conventions .............................................................. 6-7, 6-8 specifications .................................................................. 2-6
current ............................................................................ 2-7 NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
frequency ........................................................................ 2-7 see entry for NEUTRAL IOC
power .............................................................................. 2-7 NEUTRAL IOC ................................................................. B-20
voltage ............................................................................ 2-7 commissioning ...............................................................8-21
METERING CONVENTIONS ............................................... 6-8 logic ..............................................................................5-72
MIC .................................................................................. C-3 settings ..........................................................................5-72
MMS specifications .................................................................. 2-5
see entry for UCA/MMS NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE
MODBUS commissioning ...............................................................8-22
data logger ..................................................................... B-7 logic ..............................................................................5-78
event recorder ................................................................ B-8 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-36
exception responses ....................................................... B-6 settings ..........................................................................5-78
execute operation ........................................................... B-5 specifications .................................................................. 2-6
flex state parameters ..................................................... 5-19 NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT
function code 03/04h ....................................................... B-4 see entry for NEUTRAL TOC
function code 05h ........................................................... B-5 NEUTRAL TOC
function code 06h ........................................................... B-5 specifications .................................................................. 2-5
function code 10h ........................................................... B-6 NOT PROGRAMMED ........................................................1-10
introduction .................................................................... B-1
memory map data formats .............................................. B-37
iv M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

INDEX
specifications ...................................................................2-5
O PHASE OVERVOLTAGE
commissioning ............................................................... 8-22
ONE SHOTS .................................................................... 5-35 logic .............................................................................. 5-77
OPERATING TEMPERATURE ............................................ 2-9 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-23
OPERATING TIMES ........................................................... 2-5 settings ......................................................................... 5-77
ORDER CODES ........................................................ 6-17, 7-2 specifications ...................................................................2-5
ORDER CODES, UPDATING .............................................. 7-2 PHASE ROTATION .......................................................... 5-24
ORDERING ................................................................ 2-3, 2-4 PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT
OSCILLATORY TRANSIENT TESTING ............................... 2-9 see entry for PHASE TOC
OSCILLOGRAPHY PHASE TOC
actual values ................................................................. 6-16 specifications ...................................................................2-5
clearing ........................................................................... 7-1 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
commissioning ................................................................ 8-1 commissioning ............................................................... 8-22
Modbus ........................................................................... B-7 logic .............................................................................. 5-76
Modbus registers .................................................. B-13, B-17 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-22
specifications .................................................................. 2-7 specifications ...................................................................2-5
with URPC ...................................................................... 4-2 PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOC ........................................2-5
OUTPUTS PHONE NUMBERS ............................................................. 1-1
contact outputs ............................................... 3-9, 3-11, 5-91 PICS ................................................................................. C-2
control power .................................................................. 2-8 POWER METERING
critical failure relay .......................................................... 2-8 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-12
Fast Form-C relay ........................................................... 2-8 specifications ...................................................................2-7
Form-A relay ............................................. 2-8, 3-8, 3-9, 3-13 values ........................................................................... 6-12
Form-C relay ....................................................2-8, 3-8, 3-13 POWER SUPPLY
remote outputs ......................................................5-94, 5-95 description .......................................................................3-5
virtual outputs ............................................................... 5-92 low range ........................................................................ 2-8
OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES ...................................... 5-66 specifications ...................................................................2-8
OVERCURRENT CURVES POWER SYSTEM
definite time .................................................................. 5-70 commissioning .................................................................8-8
FlexCurves™ ................................................................ 5-70 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-18
I2T ................................................................................ 5-70 PRODUCT INFORMATION ............................................... 6-17
IAC ............................................................................... 5-69 PRODUCT SETUP ...................................................... 5-7, 8-1
IEC ............................................................................... 5-68 PRODUCTION TESTS ........................................................ 2-9
IEEE ............................................................................. 5-67 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ................................................. 5-3
OVERVOLTAGE phase/neutral/ground IOC ................................................ 2-5
auxiliary ................................................................. 2-6, 5-81 PU QUANTITY ...................................................................5-3
negative sequence ........................................................ 5-79
negative-sequence .......................................................... 2-6
neutral ................................................................... 2-6, 5-78
phase ..................................................................... 2-5, 5-77 R
REACTIVE POWER ................................................... 2-7, 6-12
REAL POWER ........................................................... 2-7, 6-12
P REAL TIME CLOCK .......................................................... 5-15
REAR NAME-PLATE .......................................................... 1-1
PANEL CUTOUT ................................................................ 3-1 REAR TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS ......................................3-3
PASSWORD SECURITY ............................................. 5-7, 8-1 REDUNDANT 10BASE-F .................................................. 3-15
PASSWORDS RELAY ACTIVATION ............................................... 1-10, 4-12
changing ....................................................................... 4-12 RELAY ARCHITECTURE .................................................. 5-29
lost password ......................................................... 4-13, 5-7 RELAY MAINTENANCE ...................................................... 7-2
Modbus ........................................................................... B-8 RELAY NAME .................................................................. 5-21
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-15 RELAY NOT PROGRAMMED ............................................ 1-10
overview ....................................................................... 1-10 RELAY SETTINGS NOT PROGRAMMED .......................... 1-10
security ........................................................................... 5-7 REMOTE DEVICES
settings ........................................................................... 5-7 actual values ...................................................................6-5
PC SOFTWARE commissioning ............................................................... 8-31
see entry for URPC device ID ....................................................................... 5-93
PERMISSIVE FUNCTIONS ............................................... 5-75 Modbus registers ........................................ B-10, B-13, B-32
PER-UNIT QUANTITY ........................................................ 5-3 settings ......................................................................... 5-92
PHASE ANGLE METERING ................................................ 6-8 statistics .......................................................................... 6-5
PHASE CURRENT METERING ......................................... 6-11 REMOTE INPUTS
PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT actual values ...................................................................6-4
see entry for PHASE IOC commissioning ............................................................... 8-32
PHASE IOC Modbus registers ........................................ B-10, B-13, B-32
commissioning .............................................................. 8-21 settings ......................................................................... 5-93
logic .............................................................................. 5-71 REMOTE OUTPUTS
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-19 commissioning ............................................................... 8-33
GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay v

INDEX
DNA-1 bit pair ................................................................ 5-94 metering ........................................................................6-11

Modbus registers ........................................................... B-33 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-11
UserSt-1 bit pair ............................................................ 5-95 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................. 2-5
REPLACEMENT MODULES ................................................ 2-4 ST TYPE CONNECTORS ..................................................3-17
RESET THERMAL MODEL ............................................... 5-98 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ........................................... F-5
RESETTING ............................................................ 5-95, 8-33 START INHIBIT ................................................................5-54
REVISION HISTORY .......................................................... F-1 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL
RFI SUSCEPTIBILITY ........................................................ 2-9 characteristic .................................................................5-58
RFI, CONDUCTED ............................................................. 2-9 commissioning ...............................................................8-21
RMS CURRENT ................................................................. 2-7 description .....................................................................5-58
RMS VOLTAGE .................................................................. 2-7 logic ..............................................................................5-59
RS232 Modbus registers .................................................. B-11, B-21
configuration ................................................................... 1-6 settings ..........................................................................5-58
specifications ................................................................... 2-9 specifications .................................................................. 2-5
wiring ............................................................................ 3-15 STATUS INDICATORS ....................................................... 4-5
RS485 SURGE IMMUNITY ............................................................ 2-9
communications ............................................................. 3-15 SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS METERING ...................... 6-8
description ..................................................................... 3-16 SYSTEM FREQUENCY .....................................................5-23
specifications ................................................................... 2-9 SYSTEM SETUP .......................................................5-22, 8-8
RTD BIAS ............................................................... 5-47, 5-53
RTD INPUTS
actual values ................................................................. 6-15
commissioning ............................................................... 8-35 T
Modbus registers ..................................................B-14, B-23 TARGET MESSAGES ........................................................ 7-3
settings ......................................................................... 5-97 TARGET SETTING ............................................................ 5-4
specifications ................................................................... 2-8 TARGETS MENU ............................................................... 7-3
TCP PORT NUMBER ........................................................5-13
TEMPERATURE, OPERATING ........................................... 2-9
S TERMINALS ...................................................................... 3-3
TEST MODE .....................................................................5-98
SALES OFFICE .................................................................. 1-1 TESTING
SCAN OPERATION ............................................................ 1-4 commissioning ...............................................................8-36
SELF-TESTS force contact inputs ........................................................5-98
description ....................................................................... 7-3 force contact outputs ......................................................5-98
error messages ................................................................ 7-4 lamp test ......................................................................... 7-2
SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER self-test error messages .................................................. 7-3
actual values ................................................................. 6-13 test mode .......................................................................5-98
logic .............................................................................. 5-64 TFTP PROTOCOL .....................................................5-13, 8-1
Modbus registers ..................................................B-11, B-22 THERMAL CAPACITY USED .............................................5-48
settings ................................................................ 5-62, 5-64 THERMAL MODEL
specifications ................................................................... 2-5 commissioning ...............................................................8-21
SENSTIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER cooling ...........................................................................5-52
characteristic ................................................................. 5-63 curves ................................................................... 5-48, 5-49
commissioning ............................................................... 8-23 logic ..............................................................................5-55
SERIAL NUMBER ............................................................ 6-17 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-22
SERIAL PORTS ........................................................ 5-8, B-15 resetting ........................................................................5-98
SETTING GROUPS .........................................5-46, 5-82, 8-24 settings ..........................................................................5-47
Modbus registers ..................................................B-25, B-26 specifications .................................................................. 2-5
SETTINGS TIME ................................................................................. 7-2
not programmed ............................................................ 1-10 TIME OVERCURRENT
SETTINGS, CHANGING ................................................... 4-10 see PHASE, NEUTRAL, and GROUND TOC entries
SIGNAL SOURCES TIMERS ...........................................................................5-41
commissioning ................................................................. 8-8 TOC
description ....................................................................... 5-4 ground ...........................................................................5-73
metering ........................................................................ 6-11 specifications .................................................................. 2-5
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-18 TRACKING FREQUENCY .................................................6-14
SIGNAL TYPES .................................................................. 1-3 TRANSDUCER I/O
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM ..................................................... 2-1 actual values ..................................................................6-15
SITE LIST, CREATING ....................................................... 4-1 commissioning ...................................................... 8-34, 8-35
SOFTWARE Modbus registers .................................................. B-14, B-23
see entry for URPC settings ................................................................. 5-96, 5-97
SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ............................................ 1-4 specifications .................................................................. 2-8
SOFTWARE, PC wiring .............................................................................3-14
see entry for URPC TRIP LEDs .......................................................................5-18
SOURCE TRANSFER SCHEMES ...................................... 5-75 TROUBLE INDICATOR .............................................. 1-10, 7-3
SOURCES TYPE TESTS ..................................................................... 2-9
description ....................................................................... 5-4 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM .............................................. 3-4
example use of .............................................................. 5-25
vi M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

INDEX
Modbus registers .......................................................... B-17

U settings ......................................................................... 5-18
specifications ...................................................................2-6
UCA SBO TIMER USERST-1 BIT PAIR ........................................................ 5-95
for virtual inputs ....................................................5-91, 8-28
UCA/MMS
commissioning ................................................................ 8-1
device ID ....................................................................... 5-93 V
DNA2 assignments ........................................................ 5-94 VAR-HOURS ............................................................. 2-7, 6-13
MIC .................................................................................C-3 VIBRATION TESTING ........................................................ 2-9
overview .........................................................................C-1 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PICS ...............................................................................C-2 actual values ...................................................................6-4
remote device settings ................................................... 5-92 commands .......................................................................7-1
remote inputs ................................................................ 5-93 commissioning ............................................................... 8-28
reporting .........................................................................C-6 logic .............................................................................. 5-90
SBO timeout .................................................................. 5-91 Modbus registers ................................................... B-9, B-28
UserSt-1 bit pair ............................................................ 5-95 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
UL APPROVAL .................................................................. 2-9 actual values ...................................................................6-5
UNBALANCE BIAS ..................................................5-47, 5-51 commissioning ............................................................... 8-30
UNDERVOLTAGE Modbus registers .......................................................... B-29
auxiliary .......................................................................... 2-6 settings ......................................................................... 5-92
phase ..................................................................... 2-5, 5-76 VOLTAGE BANKS ..................................................... 5-23, 8-8
UNDERVOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS ............................ 5-75 VOLTAGE DEVIATIONS ..................................................... 2-9
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED .............................................. 5-21 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ..................................................... 5-75
UNPACKING THE RELAY .................................................. 1-1 VOLTAGE METERING
UPDATING ORDER CODE ................................................. 7-2 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-11
URPC specifications ...................................................................2-7
creating a site list ............................................................ 4-1 values ........................................................................... 6-11
event recorder ................................................................. 4-2 VT BANKS
firmware upgrades ........................................................... 4-2 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-18
installation ...................................................................... 1-5 VT INPUTS ........................................................ 3-7, 5-5, 5-23
introduction ..................................................................... 4-1 VT WIRING ........................................................................ 3-7
oscillography ................................................................... 4-2
overview ......................................................................... 4-1
requirements ................................................................... 1-5
URPC® W
PC requirements ............................................................. 1-5
software installation ......................................................... 1-5 WARRANTY .......................................................................F-7
USER MAP ............................................................. B-10, B-18 WATT-HOURS .......................................................... 2-7, 6-13
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS WEB SERVER PROTOCOL ....................................... 5-13, 8-1
commissioning ................................................................ 8-6 WEBSITE ........................................................................... 1-1
example ........................................................................ 5-20 WIRING DIAGRAM ............................................................. 3-4
settings ......................................................................... 5-20
specifications .................................................................. 2-6
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs Z
commissioning ................................................................ 8-2
custom labeling ............................................................... 4-7 ZERO SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE .................................. 3-7
description ...................................................................... 4-6
GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay vii

INDEX
viii M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

WP Contentuploads201902m60man PDF

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

WP Contentuploads201902m60man PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

WP Contentuploads201902m60man PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

g

M60 Motor Relay

Manual P/N: 1601-0108-B3 (GEK-106279B)

1. GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 INTRODUCTION

3. HARDWARE 3.1 DESCRIPTION

GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay i

3.2.9 IRIG-B ...............................................................................................................3-17

4. HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1 URPC® SOFTWARE INTERFACE

5. SETTINGS 5.1 OVERVIEW

ii M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

5.5.13 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS .................................................................................... 5-75

6. ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW

GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay iii

7. COMMANDS AND 7.1 COMMANDS

8. COMMISSIONING 8.1 PRODUCT SETUP

A. FLEXANALOG A.1 FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS

B. MODBUS® RTU PROTOCOL B.1 OVERVIEW

iv M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

B.3 FILE TRANSFERS

C. UCA/MMS C.1 UCA/MMS OVERVIEW

D. IEC 60870-5-104 D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

E. DNP E.1 DNP DEVICE PROFILE

F. REVISIONS F.1 CHANGE NOTES

GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay v

vi M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

1 GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES 1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS

1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST

Figure 1–1: REAR NAME-PLATE (EXAMPLE)

GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay 1-1

1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR RELAY

1-2 M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

1.2.2 UR HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE

Figure 1–2: UR CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM

GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay 1-3

Pro t ectiv e Ele m e n ts

Figure 1–3: UR SCAN OPERATION

1.2.3 UR SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE

1.2.4 IMPORTANT UR CONCEPTS

1-4 M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

1.3 URPC SOFTWARE 1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS

1.3.2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

Refer to the following procedure to install the URPC software:

GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay 1-5

1.3.3 CONNECTING URPC® WITH THE M60

b) CONFIGURING AN RS232 CONNECTION

1-6 M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

c) CONNECTING TO THE RELAY

GE Power Management M60 Motor Relay 1-7

1.4 UR HARDWARE 1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING

Figure 1–4: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS

1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY

1-8 M60 Motor Relay GE Power Management

1.5 USING THE RELAY 1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD

1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION

ACTUAL VALUES SETTINGS COMMANDS TARGETS

ACTUAL VALUES SETTINGS COMMANDS No Active